CLSOperator's Manual

Order no. 6515 1577 13 Part no. 218 584 85 01 Edition C-2015

É2185848501eËÍ2185848501

CLSO

perat

or'sM

anual

Publication detailsInternet

Further information about Mercedes-Benzvehicles and about Daimler AG can be foundon the following websites:http://www.mbusa.com (USA only)http://www.mercedes-benz.ca (Canadaonly)

Editorial office

©Daimler AG: not to be reprinted, translatedor otherwise reproduced, in whole or in part,without written permission from Daimler AG.

Vehicle manufacturer

Daimler AGMercedesstraße 13770327 StuttgartGermany

SymbolsRegistered trademarks:RBluetooth® is a registered trademark ofBluetooth SIG Inc.RDTS is a registered trademark of DTS, Inc.RDolby and MLP are registered trademarksof DOLBY Laboratories.RBabySmart™, ESP® and PRE-SAFE® areregistered trademarks of Daimler AG.RHomeLink® is a registered trademark ofJohnson Controls.RiPod® and iTunes® are registered trade-marks of Apple Inc.RLogic7® is a registered trademark of Har-man International Industries.RMicrosoft® and Windows media® are reg-istered trademarks of Microsoft Corpora-tion.RSIRIUS is a registered trademark of SiriusXM Radio Inc.RHD Radio is a registered trademark of iBiq-uity Digital Corporation.RGracenote® is a registered trademark ofGracenote, Inc.RZAGATSurvey® and related brands are reg-istered trademarks of ZagatSurvey, LLC.

In this Operator's Manual you will find the fol-lowing symbols:

G WARNINGWarning notes make you aware of dangerswhich could pose a threat to your health orlife, or to the health and life of others.

H Environmental noteEnvironmental notes provide you with infor-mation on environmentally aware actions ordisposal.

! Notes on material damage alert you todangers that could lead to damage to yourvehicle.

i Practical tips or further information thatcould be helpful to you.

X This symbol indicates an instructionthat must be followed.

X Several of these symbols in succes-sion indicate an instruction with sev-eral steps.

(Ypage)

This symbol tells you where you canfind more information about a topic.

YY This symbol indicates a warning or aninstruction that is continued on thenext page.

Dis‐Dis‐playplay

This text indicates a message in themultifunction/COMAND/Audio dis-play.

As at 27.06.2014

Welcome to the world of Mercedes-BenzWe urge you to read this Operator's Manualcarefully and familiarize yourself with thevehicle before driving. For your own safetyand a longer vehicle life, follow the instruc-tions and warning notices in this manual.Ignoring them could result in damage to thevehicle or personal injury to you or others.Vehicle damage caused by failure to followinstructions is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.The equipment or product designation of yourvehicle may vary depending on:RmodelRorderRcountry specificationRavailabilityMercedes-Benz therefore reserves the rightto introduce changes in the following areas:RdesignRequipmentRtechnical featuresThe equipment in your vehicle may thereforediffer from that shown in the descriptions andillustrations.The following are integral components of thevehicle:ROperator's ManualRMaintenance BookletREquipment-dependent supplementsKeep these documents in the vehicle at alltimes. If you sell the vehicle, always pass alldocuments on to the new owner.The technical documentation team atDaimler AG wishes you safe and pleasantmotoring.Mercedes-Benz USA, LLCMercedes-Benz Canada, Inc.A Daimler Company

2185848501 É2185848501eËÍ

Index ....................................................... 4

Introduction ......................................... 22

At a glance ........................................... 31

Safety ................................................... 43

Opening and closing ........................... 83

Seats, steering wheel and mirrors .. 105

Lights and windshield wipers .......... 121

Climate control ................................. 131

Driving and parking .......................... 147

On-board computer and displays .... 225

Stowage and features ...................... 285

Maintenance and care ...................... 311

Roadside Assistance ........................ 325

Wheels and tires ............................... 343

Technical data ................................... 383

Contents 3

1, 2, 3 ...4ETS (Electronic Traction System)

see ETS/4ETS (Electronic Trac-tion System)

4MATIC (permanent all-wheeldrive)

Function/notes ............................. 19712 V socket

see Sockets360° camera

Cleaning ......................................... 322Function/notes ............................. 209

AABS (Anti-lock Braking System)

Display message ............................ 246Function/notes ................................ 70Warning lamp ................................. 276

AccidentAutomaticmeasures after an acci-dent ................................................. 63

Activating/deactivating coolingwith air dehumidification ................. 138Active Blind Spot Assist

Activating/deactivating (on-board computer) ............................ 237Display message ............................ 263Function/information .................... 218

Active Driving Assistance package .. 218Active Lane Keeping Assist

Activating/deactivating (on-board computer) ............................ 237Display message ............................ 263Function/information .................... 221

Active multicontour seatAdjusting (on the seat) .................. 110

Active Parking AssistDetecting parking spaces .............. 201Display message ............................ 264Exiting a parking space .................. 203Function/notes ............................. 200Important safety notes .................. 200Parking .......................................... 202

ADAPTIVE BRAKE ................................. 79Adaptive Brake Assist

Function/notes ................................ 75

Adaptive Damping System (ADS) ..... 194Adaptive Highbeam Assist

Display message ............................ 258Function/notes ............................. 125Switching on/off ........................... 126

Additives (engine oil) ........................ 389Air bags

Deployment ..................................... 59Display message ............................ 254Front air bag (driver, frontpassenger) ....................................... 51Important safety notes .................... 50Introduction ..................................... 50Knee bag .......................................... 52Occupant Classification System(OCS) ............................................... 53PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indica-tor lamp ........................................... 45Pelvis air bag ................................... 52Side impact air bag .......................... 52Window curtain air bag .................... 53

AIR FLOW ........................................... 140Air vents

Glove box ....................................... 145Important safety notes .................. 145Rear ............................................... 146Setting ........................................... 145Setting the center air vents ........... 145Setting the side air vents ............... 145

Air-conditioning systemsee Climate control

AIRMATICDisplay message ............................ 261Function/notes ............................. 193

AlarmATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system) ......... 81Switching off (ATA) .......................... 81Switching the function on/off(ATA) ................................................ 81

Alarm systemsee ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system)

Ambient lightingSetting the brightness (on-boardcomputer) ...................................... 239Setting the color (on-board com-puter) ............................................. 239

AMG adaptive sport suspensionsystem ................................................ 195

4 Index

Animals in the vehicle ......................... 70Anti-lock braking system

see ABS (Anti-lock Braking System)Anti-Theft Alarm system

see ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system)Ashtray ............................................... 296Assistance display (on-board com-puter) .................................................. 235Assistance menu (on-board com-puter) .................................................. 235ASSYST PLUS

Displaying a service message ........ 316Hiding a service message .............. 316Notes ............................................. 316Resetting the service interval dis-play ................................................ 316Service message ............................ 316Special service requirements ......... 317

ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system)Activating/deactivating ................... 81Function ........................................... 81Switching off the alarm .................... 81

ATTENTION ASSISTActivating/deactivating ................. 236Display message ............................ 261Function/notes ............................. 213

Audio systemsee separate operating instructions

Authorized Mercedes-Benz Centersee Qualified specialist workshop

Authorized workshopsee Qualified specialist workshop

AUTO lightsDisplay message ............................ 257see Lights

Automatic car wash (care) ............... 317Automatic engine start (ECOstart/stop function) .................................... 154Automatic engine switch-off (ECOstart/stop function) .......................... 153Automatic headlamp mode .............. 122Automatic transmission

Accelerator pedal position ............. 161Automatic drive program ............... 164Changing gear ............................... 161DIRECT SELECT lever ..................... 158Display message ............................ 270

Drive program display .................... 158Driving tips .................................... 161Emergency running mode .............. 167Engaging drive position .................. 160Engaging neutral ............................ 159Engaging park position (AMGvehi-cles) ............................................... 158Engaging park position automati-cally ............................................... 159Engaging reverse gear ................... 159Engaging the park position ............ 159Kickdown ....................................... 162Manual drive program .................... 164Manual drive program (AMG vehi-cles) ............................................... 165Manual drive program (vehicleswith Sports package AMG) ............ 165Overview ........................................ 157Problem (malfunction) ................... 167Program selector button ................ 162Pulling away ................................... 152Selector lever ................................ 157Starting the engine ........................ 152Steering wheel paddle shifters ...... 163Transmission position display ........ 157Transmission position display(DIRECT SELECT lever) ................... 158Transmission positions .................. 161

Automatic transmission emer-gency mode ....................................... 167

BBAS (Brake Assist System) ................. 71BAS PLUS (Brake Assist SystemPLUS) with Cross-Traffic Assist

Function/notes ................................ 71Important safety notes .................... 72

Battery (SmartKey)Checking .......................................... 87Replacing ......................................... 87

Battery (vehicle)Charging ........................................ 333Display message ............................ 259Important safety notes .................. 331Jump starting ................................. 335

Beltsee Seat belts

Index 5

Blind Spot AssistActivating/deactivating (on-board computer) ............................ 237Display message ............................ 263Notes/function .............................. 214see Active Blind Spot Assist

Box (trunk) ......................................... 291Brake Assist

see BAS (Brake Assist System)Brake fluid

Display message ............................ 248Notes ............................................. 390

Brake force distributionsee EBD (electronic brake forcedistribution)

Brake lampsDisplay message ............................ 256

BrakesABS .................................................. 70Adaptive Brake Assist ...................... 75BAS .................................................. 71BAS PLUS with Cross-TrafficAssist ............................................... 71Brake fluid (notes) ......................... 390Display message ............................ 246High-performance brake system .... 176HOLD function ............................... 191Important safety notes .................. 175Maintenance .................................. 176Parking brake ................................ 172Riding tips ...................................... 175Warning lamp ................................. 275

Breakdownsee Flat tiresee Towing away

Brightness control (instrumentcluster lighting) ................................... 33

CCalifornia

Important notice for retail cus-tomers and lessees .......................... 24

Calling up a malfunctionsee Display messages

Carsee Vehicle

Car keysee SmartKey

Care360° camera ................................. 322Car wash ........................................ 317Carpets .......................................... 324Display ........................................... 322Exhaust pipe .................................. 322Exterior lights ................................ 321Gear or selector lever .................... 323Interior ........................................... 322Matte finish ................................... 320Notes ............................................. 317Paint .............................................. 319Plastic trim .................................... 322Power washer ................................ 319Rear view camera .......................... 321Roof lining ...................................... 324Seat belt ........................................ 324Seat cover ..................................... 323Sensors ......................................... 321Steering wheel ............................... 323Trim pieces .................................... 323Washing by hand ........................... 318Wheels ........................................... 320Windows ........................................ 320Wiper blades .................................. 321Wooden trim .................................. 323

Cargo tie down rings ......................... 290CD player (on-board computer) ........ 233Center console

Lower section .................................. 38Lower section (AMG vehicles) .......... 39Upper section .................................. 37

Central lockingAutomatic locking (on-board com-puter) ............................................. 240Locking/unlocking (SmartKey) ........ 84

ChildRestraint system .............................. 65

Child seatForward-facing restraint system ...... 68LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seatanchors ............................................ 66On the front-passenger seat ............ 68Rearward-facing restraint system .... 68Top Tether ....................................... 67

6 Index

Child-proof locksImportant safety notes .................... 68Rear doors ....................................... 69

ChildrenSpecial seat belt retractor ............... 64

Cigarette lighter ................................ 297Cleaning

Mirror turn signal ........................... 321Climate control

Automatic climate control (3-zone) .............................................. 136Controlling automatically ............... 140Cooling with air dehumidification .. 138Defrosting the windows ................. 143Defrosting the windshield .............. 142Dual-zone automatic climate con-trol ................................................. 133General notes ................................ 132Indicator lamp ................................ 140Information about using auto-matic climate control ..................... 138Information about using dual-zoneautomatic climate control .............. 134Maximum cooling .......................... 143Overview of systems ...................... 132Problem with the rear windowdefroster ........................................ 144Problems with cooling with airdehumidification ............................ 140Rear control panel ......................... 136Refrigerant ..................................... 392Refrigerant filling capacity ............. 392Setting the air distribution ............. 141Setting the air vents ...................... 145Setting the airflow ......................... 142Setting the climate mode (AIRFLOW) ............................................ 140Setting the temperature ................ 141Setting the temperature with 3-zone automatic climate control ..... 141Setting the temperaturewith dual-zone automatic climate control ..... 141Switching air-recirculation modeon/off ............................................ 144Switching on/off ........................... 138Switching residual heat on/off ...... 144Switching the rear windowdefroster on/off ............................ 143

Switching the ZONE function on/off .................................................. 142

CockpitOverview .......................................... 32see Instrument cluster

Collapsible spare wheelInflating ......................................... 381see Emergency spare wheel

COLLISION PREVENTION ASSISTPLUS

Activating/deactivating ................. 236Display message ............................ 249Operation/notes .............................. 73

COMAND displayCleaning ......................................... 322

Combination switch .......................... 124Consumption statistics (on-boardcomputer) .......................................... 230Convenience box ............................... 291Convenience closing feature .............. 98Convenience opening feature ............ 98Coolant (engine)

Checking the level ......................... 315Display message ............................ 258Filling capacity ............................... 391Important safety notes .................. 390Temperature (on-board computer,AMG vehicles) ................................ 242Temperature gauge ........................ 226Warning lamp ................................. 280

Coolingsee Climate control

Copyright ............................................. 29Cornering light function

Display message ............................ 255Function/notes ............................. 125

Crash-responsive emergency light-ing ....................................................... 128Cruise control

Activation conditions ..................... 179Cruise control lever ....................... 179Deactivating ................................... 180Display message ............................ 266Driving system ............................... 178Function/notes ............................. 178Important safety notes .................. 178Setting a speed .............................. 180

Index 7

Storing and maintaining currentspeed ............................................. 179

Cup holderCenter console .............................. 293Center console in the rear com-partment ........................................ 294Important safety notes .................. 293Rear compartment ......................... 294

Customer Assistance Center(CAC) ..................................................... 27Customer Relations Department ....... 27

DDashboard

see Instrument clusterData

see Technical dataDaytime running lamps

Display message ............................ 257Function/notes ............................. 122Switching on/off (on-board com-puter) ............................................. 238

Declarations of conformity ................. 26Delayed switch-off

Exterior lighting (on-board com-puter) ............................................. 239Interior lighting .............................. 240

Diagnostics connection ...................... 26Digital speedometer ......................... 230DIRECT SELECT lever

Automatic transmission ................. 158Display messages

ASSYST PLUS ................................ 316Calling up (on-board computer) ..... 245Driving systems ............................. 261Engine ............................................ 258General notes ................................ 245Hiding (on-board computer) ........... 245KEYLESS-GO .................................. 272Lights ............................................. 255Safety systems .............................. 246SmartKey ....................................... 272Tires ............................................... 267Vehicle ........................................... 270

Distance recorder ............................. 229Distance warning (warning lamp) .... 282

Distance warning functionFunction/notes ................................ 74

DISTRONIC PLUSActivating ....................................... 183Activation conditions ..................... 183Deactivating ................................... 187Display message ............................ 264Displays in the multifunction dis-play ................................................ 186Function/notes ............................. 181Important safety notes .................. 181Setting the specified minimumdistance ......................................... 185Stopping ........................................ 185

DoorsAutomatic locking (on-board com-puter) ............................................. 240Automatic locking (switch) ............... 91Central locking/unlocking(SmartKey) ....................................... 84Control panel ................................... 41Display message ............................ 271Emergency locking ........................... 92Emergency unlocking ....................... 92Important safety notes .................... 90Opening (from inside) ...................... 90

Drinking and driving ......................... 173Drive program

Automatic ...................................... 164Display ........................................... 157Display (DIRECT SELECT lever) ...... 158Manual ........................................... 164Manual (AMG vehicles) .................. 165Manual (vehicles with Sportspackage AMG) ............................... 165SETUP (on-board computer) .......... 242

Drive program selector ..................... 163Driver's door

see DoorsDriving abroad

Mercedes-Benz Service ................. 317Driving on flooded roads .................. 177Driving safety systems

ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) ....... 70ADAPTIVE BRAKE ............................. 79Adaptive Brake Assist ...................... 75BAS (Brake Assist System) .............. 71

8 Index

BAS PLUS with Cross-TrafficAssist ............................................... 71COLLISION PREVENTION ASSISTPLUS ................................................ 73Distance warning function ............... 74EBD (electronic brake force distri-bution) ............................................. 78ESP® (Electronic Stability Pro-gram) ............................................... 75ETS/4ETS (Electronic TractionSystem) ........................................... 76Important safety information ........... 70Overview .......................................... 70PRE-SAFE® Brake ............................. 79

Driving systems360°camera .................................. 209Active Blind Spot Assist ................. 218Active Driving Assistance pack-age ................................................. 218Active Lane Keeping Assist ............ 221Active Parking Assist ..................... 200AIRMATIC ...................................... 193AMG adaptive sport suspensionsystem ........................................... 195ATTENTION ASSIST ........................ 213Blind Spot Assist ............................ 214Cruise control ................................ 178Display message ............................ 261DISTRONIC PLUS ........................... 181DISTRONIC PLUS with SteeringAssist and Stop&Go Pilot ............... 189HOLD function ............................... 191Lane Keeping Assist ...................... 216Lane Tracking package .................. 214PARKTRONIC ................................. 197RACE START (AMG vehicles) .......... 192Rear view camera .......................... 205

Driving tipsAMG ceramic brakes ..................... 176Automatic transmission ................. 161Brakes ........................................... 175Break-in period .............................. 148Downhill gradient ........................... 175Drinking and driving ....................... 173Driving in winter ............................. 177Driving on flooded roads ................ 177Driving on wet roads ...................... 177Exhaust check ............................... 173

Fuel ................................................ 173General .......................................... 173Hydroplaning ................................. 177Icy road surfaces ........................... 177Limited braking efficiency on sal-ted roads ....................................... 175Snow chains .................................. 347Wet road surface ........................... 175

DVD videoOperating (on-board computer) ..... 233

EE10

see FuelEASY-ENTRY feature

Activating/deactivating ................. 240Function/notes ............................. 115

EASY-EXIT featureCrash-responsive ........................... 116Function/notes ............................. 115Switching on/off ........................... 240

EASY-PACK trunk box ....................... 291EBD (electronic brake force distri-bution)

Display message ............................ 248Function/notes ................................ 78

ECO displayFunction/notes ............................. 174On-board computer ....................... 230

ECO start/stop functionAutomatic engine start .................. 154Automatic engine switch-off .......... 153Deactivating/activating ................. 154General information ....................... 153Important safety notes .................. 153Introduction ................................... 153

Electronic Stability Programsee ESP® (Electronic Stability Program)

EmergencyAutomaticmeasures after an acci-dent ................................................. 63

Emergency releaseDriver's door .................................... 92Fuel filler flap ................................. 169Trunk ............................................... 96Vehicle ............................................. 92

Index 9

Emergency spare wheelGeneral notes ................................ 379Important safety notes .................. 379Removing ....................................... 380Storage location ............................ 380Stowing .......................................... 380Technical data ............................... 382

Emergency Tensioning DevicesActivation ......................................... 59

Emissions controlService and warranty information .... 23

EngineCheck Engine warning lamp ........... 280Display message ............................ 258ECO start/stop function ................ 153Engine number ............................... 386Irregular running ............................ 156Jump-starting ................................. 335Starting problems .......................... 156Starting the engine with theSmartKey ....................................... 152Starting with KEYLESS-GO ............. 152Switching off .................................. 171Tow-starting (vehicle) ..................... 340

Engine electronicsProblem (malfunction) ................... 156

Engine jump startingsee Jump starting (engine)

Engine oilAdding ........................................... 314Additives ........................................ 389Checking the oil level ..................... 313Checking the oil level using thedipstick .......................................... 313Display message ............................ 260Filling capacity ............................... 389Notes about oil grades ................... 389Notes on oil level/consumption .... 313Temperature (on-board computer,AMG vehicles) ................................ 242Viscosity ........................................ 390

ESP® (Electronic Stability Pro-gram)

Activating/deactivating (exceptAMG vehicles) .................................. 76Activating/deactivating (on-board computer, except AMGvehicles) ........................................ 235

AMG menu (on-board computer) ... 242Characteristics ................................. 76Deactivating/activating (buttonin AMG vehicles) .............................. 77Display message ............................ 246ETS/4ETS ........................................ 76Function/notes ................................ 75General notes .................................. 75Important safety information ........... 76Warning lamp ................................. 277

ETS/4ETS (Electronic Traction Sys-tem) ...................................................... 76Exhaust check ................................... 173Exhaust pipe (cleaning instruc-tions) .................................................. 322Exterior lighting

Setting options .............................. 122see Lights

Exterior mirrorsAdjusting ....................................... 116Dipping (automatic) ....................... 117Folding in when locking (on-boardcomputer) ...................................... 241Folding in/out (automatically) ....... 117Folding in/out (electrically) ........... 117Out of position (troubleshooting) ... 117Setting ........................................... 117Storing settings (memory func-tion) ............................................... 119Storing the parking position .......... 118

Eyeglasses compartment ................. 287

FFiller cap

see Fuel filler flapFlat tire

MOExtended tires .......................... 327Preparing the vehicle ..................... 327TIREFIT kit ...................................... 328see Emergency spare wheel

Floormats ........................................... 310Frequencies

Mobile phone ................................. 384Two-way radio ................................ 384

FuelAdditives ........................................ 389Consumption statistics .................. 230

10 Index

Displaying the current consump-tion ................................................ 230Displaying the range ...................... 230Driving tips .................................... 173Fuel gauge ....................................... 33Grade (gasoline) ............................ 388Important safety notes .................. 387Premium-grade unleaded gaso-line ................................................. 388Problem (malfunction) ................... 170Refueling ........................................ 167Tank content/reserve fuel ............. 388

Fuel filler flapEmergency release ........................ 169Opening ......................................... 168

Fuel levelCalling up the range (on-boardcomputer) ...................................... 230

Fuel tankCapacity ........................................ 388Problem (malfunction) ................... 170

Fuse allocation chart (vehicle toolkit) ...................................................... 326Fuses

Allocation chart ............................. 340Before changing ............................. 340Fuse box in the engine compart-ment .............................................. 341Fuse box in the trunk ..................... 341Important safety notes .................. 340

GGarage door opener

Clearing the memory ..................... 310General notes ................................ 307Important safety notes .................. 307Opening/closing the garage door .. 309Programming (button in the rear-view mirror) ................................... 307Synchronizing the rolling code ....... 308

Gear indicator (on-board com-puter, AMG vehicles) ......................... 242Genuine parts ...................................... 22Glove box ........................................... 287

HHandbrake

see Parking brakeHazard warning lamps ...................... 124Head bags

Display message ............................ 252Head restraints

Adjusting ....................................... 108Adjusting (electrically) ................... 109Adjusting (rear) .............................. 109Installing/removing (rear) .............. 109Luxury ............................................ 109see NECK-PRO head restraintssee NECK-PRO luxury head restraints

HeadlampsCleaning system (notes) ................ 391Fogging up ..................................... 127see Automatic headlamp mode

Heatingsee Climate control

High-beam headlampsAdaptive Highbeam Assist ............. 125Display message ............................ 256Switching on/off ........................... 124

Hill start assist .................................. 152HOLD function

Activating ....................................... 191Deactivating ................................... 192Display message ............................ 262Function/notes ............................. 191

HoodClosing ........................................... 313Display message ............................ 271Important safety notes .................. 312Opening ......................................... 312

Horn ...................................................... 32Hydroplaning ..................................... 177

IIgnition lock

see Key positionsImmobilizer .......................................... 81Indicator and warning lamps

COLLISION PREVENTION ASSISTPLUS .............................................. 282

Index 11

Indicator lampssee Warning and indicator lamps

Indicatorssee Turn signals

Instrument clusterOverview .......................................... 33Settings ......................................... 238Warning and indicator lamps ........... 34

Instrument cluster lighting .............. 238Interior lighting

Automatic control .......................... 127Delayed switch-off (on-boardcomputer) ...................................... 240Emergency lighting ........................ 128Manual control ............................... 128Overview ........................................ 127Reading lamp ................................. 127Setting the brightness of theambient lighting (on-board com-puter) ............................................. 239Setting the brightness of the dis-play/switch (on-board computer) .. 238Setting the color of the ambientlighting (on-board computer) ......... 239

JJack

Storage location ............................ 326Using ............................................. 368

Jump starting (engine) ...................... 335

KKey positions

KEYLESS-GO .................................. 150SmartKey ....................................... 149

KEYLESS-GOConvenience closing feature ............ 99Deactivation ..................................... 85Display message ............................ 272Locking ............................................ 85Removing the Start/Stop button ... 151Start/Stop button .......................... 150Starting the engine ........................ 152Unlocking ......................................... 85

KickdownDriving tips .................................... 162Manual drive program .................... 166

Knee bag .............................................. 52

LLamps

see Warning and indicator lampsLane Keeping Assist

Activating/deactivating ................. 237Display message ............................ 263Function/information .................... 216

Lane Tracking package ..................... 214Lap time (RACETIMER) ...................... 242LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seatanchors ................................................ 66License plate lamp (display mes-sage) ................................................... 256Light function, active

Display message ............................ 257Light sensor (display message) ....... 257Lights

Activating/deactivating the inte-rior lighting delayed switch-off ....... 240Adaptive Highbeam Assist ............. 125Automatic headlamp mode ............ 122Cornering light function ................. 125Hazard warning lamps ................... 124High beam flasher .......................... 124High-beam headlamps ................... 124Light switch ................................... 122Low-beam headlamps .................... 123Parking lamps ................................ 123Setting the brightness of theambient lighting (on-board com-puter) ............................................. 239Setting the brightness of the dis-play/switch (on-board computer) .. 238Setting the color of the ambientlighting (on-board computer) ......... 239Standing lamps .............................. 123Switching the daytime runninglamps on/off (on-board com-puter) ............................................. 238Switching the exterior lightingdelayed switch-off on/off (on-board computer) ............................ 239Switching the surround lightingon/off (on-board computer) .......... 239Turn signals ................................... 124

12 Index

see Interior lightingLoading guidelines ............................ 286Locking

see Central lockingLocking (doors)

Automatic ........................................ 91Emergency locking ........................... 92From inside (central locking but-ton) .................................................. 91

Locking centrallysee Central locking

Locking verification signal (on-board computer) ............................... 240Low-beam headlamps

Display message ............................ 255Switching on/off ........................... 123

Lumbar supportAdjusting the 4-way lumbar sup-port ................................................ 110

Luxury head restraints ..................... 109

MM+S tires ............................................ 346Malfunction message

see Display messagesMatte finish (cleaning instruc-tions) .................................................. 320mbrace

Call priority .................................... 302Display message ............................ 249Downloading destinations(COMAND) ..................................... 303Downloading routes ....................... 306Emergency call .............................. 300General notes ................................ 299Geo fencing ................................... 306Locating a stolen vehicle ............... 305MB info call button ........................ 302Remote fault diagnosis .................. 305Remote vehicle locking .................. 304Roadside Assistance button .......... 301Search & Send ............................... 303Self-test ......................................... 299Speed alert .................................... 306System .......................................... 299Triggering the vehicle alarm ........... 307Vehicle remote unlocking .............. 304

Mechanical keyFunction/notes ................................ 86Inserting .......................................... 87Locking vehicle ................................ 92Removing ......................................... 86Unlocking the driver's door .............. 92

Media InterfaceUSB port in the armrest of thecenter console ............................... 288see Separate operating instructions

Memory card (audio) ......................... 233Memory function ............................... 119Mercedes-Benz Intelligent Drive

360°camera .................................. 209Active Blind Spot Assist ................. 218Active Lane Keeping Assist ............ 221Active Parking Assist ..................... 200ATTENTION ASSIST ........................ 213Blind Spot Assist ............................ 214Cruise control ................................ 178DISTRONIC PLUS ........................... 181DISTRONIC PLUS with SteeringAssist and Stop&Go Pilot ............... 189General notes ................................ 178Lane Keeping Assist ...................... 216PARKTRONIC ................................. 197PRE-SAFE® (anticipatory occu-pant protection) ............................... 62PRE-SAFE® PLUS (anticipatoryoccupant protection PLUS) .............. 63Rear view camera .......................... 205

Message memory (on-board com-puter) .................................................. 245Messages

see Display messagesMirrors

see Exterior mirrorssee Vanity mirror (in the sun visor)

Mobile phoneFrequencies ................................... 384Installation ..................................... 384Menu (on-board computer) ............ 233Transmission output (maximum) .... 384

Modifying the programming(SmartKey) ........................................... 86MOExtended tires .............................. 327

Index 13

Mounting wheelsLowering the vehicle ...................... 371Mounting a new wheel ................... 371Preparing the vehicle ..................... 368Raising the vehicle ......................... 368Removing a wheel .......................... 370Securing the vehicle against roll-ing away ........................................ 368

MP3Operation ....................................... 233see separate operating instructions

Multicontour seatAdjusting (on the seat) .................. 110

Multifunction displayFunction/notes ............................. 229Permanent display ......................... 238

Multifunction steering wheelOperating the on-board computer .. 227Overview .......................................... 35

NNavigation

Menu (on-board computer) ............ 231NECK-PRO head restraints

Operation ......................................... 61Resetting triggered .......................... 61

NECK-PRO luxury head restraintsImportant safety notes .................... 61Operation ......................................... 61Resetting when triggered ................. 62

Notes on breaking-in a new vehi-cle ....................................................... 148

OOccupant Classification System(OCS)

Conditions ....................................... 53Faults ............................................... 58Operation ......................................... 54System self-test ............................... 56

Occupant safetyAutomaticmeasures after an acci-dent ................................................. 63Children in the vehicle ..................... 64Important safety notes .................... 45Introduction to the restraint sys-tem .................................................. 44

Occupant Classification System(OCS) ............................................... 53PASSENGER AIR BAG indicatorlamps ............................................... 45Pets in the vehicle ........................... 70PRE-SAFE® (anticipatory occu-pant protection) ............................... 62PRE-SAFE® PLUS (anticipatoryoccupant protection PLUS) .............. 63Restraint system warning lamp ........ 45

OCSConditions ....................................... 53Faults ............................................... 58Operation ......................................... 54System self-test ............................... 56

Odometer ........................................... 229Oil

see Engine oilOn-board computer

AMG menu ..................................... 242Assistance menu ........................... 235Audio menu ................................... 232Convenience submenu .................. 240Display messages .......................... 245Displaying a service message ........ 316DISTRONIC PLUS ........................... 186Factory settings submenu ............. 241Important safety notes .................. 226Instrument cluster submenu .......... 238Lighting submenu .......................... 238Menu overview .............................. 229Message memory .......................... 245Navigation menu ............................ 231Operation ....................................... 227RACETIMER ................................... 242Service menu ................................. 237Settings menu ............................... 237Standard display ............................ 229Telephone menu ............................ 233Trip menu ...................................... 229Vehicle submenu ........................... 240Video DVD operation ..................... 233

Operating safetyDeclaration of conformity ................ 26Important safety notes .................... 25

Operating systemsee On-board computer

14 Index

Operator's ManualVehicle equipment ........................... 23

Outside temperature display ........... 227Overhead control panel ...................... 40Override feature

Rear side windows ........................... 69

PPaint code number ............................ 386Paintwork (cleaning instructions) ... 319Panic alarm .......................................... 44Parking

Important safety notes .................. 170Parking brake ................................ 172Position of exterior mirror, front-passenger side ............................... 118Rear view camera .......................... 205see PARKTRONIC

Parking aidActive Parking Assist ..................... 200see Exterior mirrorssee PARKTRONIC

Parking assistancesee PARKTRONIC

Parking brakeDisplay message ............................ 248Notes/function .............................. 172Warning lamp ................................. 275

Parking lampsSwitching on/off ........................... 123

PARKTRONICDeactivating/activating ................. 199Driving system ............................... 197Function/notes ............................. 197Important safety notes .................. 197Problem (malfunction) ................... 200Range of the sensors ..................... 198Warning display ............................. 199

PASSENGER AIR BAGDisplay message ............................ 254Problems (malfunction) .................. 254

PASSENGER AIR BAG OFFIndicator lamp .................................. 45

Pets in the vehicle ............................... 70Plastic trim (cleaning instruc-tions) .................................................. 322Power washers .................................. 319

Power windowssee Side windows

PRE-SAFE® (anticipatory occupantprotection)

Display message ............................ 249Operation ......................................... 62

PRE-SAFE® BrakeActivating/deactivating ................. 236Display message ............................ 250Function/notes ................................ 79Important safety notes .................... 79Warning lamp ................................. 282

PRE-SAFE® PLUS (anticipatoryoccupant protection PLUS)

Display message ............................ 250Operation ......................................... 63

Program selector button .................. 162Protection against theft

ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system) ......... 81Immobilizer ...................................... 81

Protection of the environmentGeneral notes .................................. 22

Pulling awayGeneral notes ................................ 152

Pulling away (automatic transmis-sion) .................................................... 152

QQR code

Mercedes-Benz Guide App ................. 1Rescue card ..................................... 28

Qualified specialist workshop ........... 26

RRACE START (AMG vehicles) ............. 192RACETIMER (on-board computer) .... 242Radio

Selecting a station ......................... 232see separate operating instructions

Radio-wave reception/transmis-sion in the vehicle

Declaration of conformity ................ 26Reading lamp ..................................... 127Rear compartment

Setting the air vents ...................... 146Setting the airflow ......................... 142

Index 15

Setting the temperature ................ 141Rear fog lamp

Display message ............................ 256Rear seat (folding the backrest for-wards/back) ...................................... 290Rear seats

Display message ............................ 271Rear view camera

Cleaning instructions ..................... 321Displays in the Audio display ......... 206Displays in the COMAND display ... 206Function/notes ............................. 205Switching on/off ........................... 205

Rear window blind ............................ 296Rear window defroster

Problem (malfunction) ................... 144Switching on/off ........................... 143

Rear-view mirrorDipping (automatic) ....................... 117

Refrigerant (air-conditioning sys-tem)

Important safety notes .................. 392Refueling

Fuel gauge ....................................... 33Important safety notes .................. 167Refueling process .......................... 168see Fuel

Remote controlGarage door opener ....................... 307Programming (garage dooropener) .......................................... 307

Replacing bulbsGeneral notes ................................ 128

Reporting safety defects .................... 27Rescue card ......................................... 28Reserve (fuel tank)

see FuelReserve fuel

Display message ............................ 261Warning lamp ................................. 280see Fuel

Residual heat (climate control) ........ 144Restraint system

Display message ............................ 252Introduction ..................................... 44Warning lamp ................................. 279Warning lamp (function) ................... 45

Reverse gear (selector lever) ........... 157Reversing feature

Side windows ................................... 97Sliding sunroof ............................... 101Trunk lid ........................................... 93

Reversing lamps (display mes-sage) ................................................... 256Roadside Assistance (breakdown) .... 24Roller sunblind

Rear window .................................. 296Roof lining and carpets (cleaningguidelines) ......................................... 324Roof load (maximum) ........................ 392

SSafety

Children in the vehicle ..................... 64Safety system

see Driving safety systemsSeat belts

Adjusting the driver's and front-passenger seat belt ......................... 49Adjusting the height ......................... 48Cleaning ......................................... 324Correct usage .................................. 47Fastening ......................................... 48Important safety guidelines ............. 46Introduction ..................................... 46Releasing ......................................... 49Switching belt adjustment on/off(on-board computer) ...................... 241Warning lamp ................................. 274Warning lamp (function) ................... 49

SeatsAdjusting (electrically) ................... 108Adjusting the 4-way lumbar sup-port ................................................ 110Adjusting the active multicontourseat ............................................... 110Adjusting the head restraint .......... 108Adjusting the multicontour seat ..... 110Cleaning the cover ......................... 323Correct driver's seat position ........ 106Important safety notes .................. 107Overview ........................................ 107Seat heating problem .................... 112Seat ventilation problem ................ 113

16 Index

Storing settings (memory func-tion) ............................................... 119Switching seat heating on/off ....... 111Switching seat ventilation on/off .. 112

SectionTrunk ............................................... 92

Securing cargo .................................. 290Selector lever

Cleaning ......................................... 323Sensors (cleaning instructions) ....... 321Service menu (on-board com-puter) .................................................. 237Service products

Brake fluid ..................................... 390Coolant (engine) ............................ 390Engine oil ....................................... 389Fuel ................................................ 387Important safety notes .................. 387Refrigerant (air-conditioning sys-tem) ............................................... 392Washer fluid ................................... 391

Setting the air distribution ............... 141Setting the airflow ............................ 142Settings

Factory (on-board computer) ......... 241On-board computer ....................... 237

SETUP (on-board computer) ............. 242Side impact air bag ............................. 52Side marker lamp (display mes-sage) ................................................... 257Side windows

Cleaning ......................................... 320Convenience closing feature ............ 98Convenience opening feature .......... 98Important safety information ........... 97Opening/closing .............................. 97Problem (malfunction) ................... 100Resetting ......................................... 99

Sliding sunroofImportant safety notes .................. 100Opening/closing ............................ 101Problem (malfunction) ................... 103Resetting ....................................... 102

SmartKeyChanging the battery ....................... 87Changing the programming ............. 86Checking the battery ....................... 87

Convenience closing feature ............ 99Convenience opening feature .......... 98Display message ............................ 272Door central locking/unlocking ....... 84Important safety notes .................... 84Loss ................................................. 89Mechanical key ................................ 86Overview .......................................... 84Positions (ignition lock) ................. 149Problem (malfunction) ..................... 89Starting the engine ........................ 152

Snow chains ...................................... 347Sockets

Center console .............................. 298General notes ................................ 298Rear compartment ......................... 299

Spare wheelStowing .......................................... 380

Special seat belt retractor .................. 64Specialist workshop ............................ 26Speed, controlling

see Cruise controlSpeedometer

Digital ............................................ 230In the Instrument cluster ................. 33Segments ...................................... 227Selecting the unit of measure-ment .............................................. 238see Instrument cluster

SPORT handling modeActivating/deactivating (AMGvehicles) .......................................... 77Warning lamp ................................. 278

Standing lampsDisplay message ............................ 256Switching on/off ........................... 123

Start/stop functionsee ECO start/stop function

Starting (engine) ................................ 151Steering (display message) .............. 272Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot(DISTRONIC PLUS)

Activating/deactivating ................. 236Display message ............................ 266

Steering wheelAdjusting (electrically) ................... 113Button overview ............................... 35

Index 17

Buttons (on-board computer) ......... 227Cleaning ......................................... 323Important safety notes .................. 113Paddle shifters ............................... 163Steering wheel heating .................. 114Storing settings (memory func-tion) ............................................... 119

Steering wheel heatingProblem (malfunction) ................... 115Switching on/off ........................... 114

Steering wheel paddle shifters ........ 163Stopwatch (RACETIMER) ................... 242Stowage areas ................................... 286Stowage compartments

Armrest (under) ............................. 288Center console .............................. 288Center console (rear) ..................... 289Cup holders ................................... 293Eyeglasses compartment ............... 287Glove box ....................................... 287Important safety information ......... 286Rear ............................................... 289Stowage net ................................... 289Under driver's seat/front-passenger seat .............................. 288

Stowage net ....................................... 289Stowage well beneath the trunkfloor .................................................... 292Summer tires ..................................... 346Sun visor ............................................ 295Surround lighting (on-board com-puter) .................................................. 239Suspension tuning

AIRMATIC ...................................... 194AMG adaptive sport suspensionsystem ........................................... 195SETUP (on-board computer) .......... 242

Switching air-recirculation modeon/off ................................................. 144

TTachometer ........................................ 226Tail lamps

Display message ............................ 256Tank

see Fuel tank

Tank contentFuel gauge ....................................... 33

Technical dataCapacities ...................................... 387Emergency spare wheel ................. 382Information .................................... 384Tires/wheels ................................. 372Vehicle data ................................... 392

TelephoneAccepting a call ............................. 234Display message ............................ 272Menu (on-board computer) ............ 233Number from the phone book ........ 234Redialing ........................................ 234Rejecting/ending a call ................. 234

TemperatureCoolant .......................................... 226Coolant (on-board computer,AMG vehicles) ................................ 242Engine oil (on-board computer,AMG vehicles) ................................ 242Outside temperature ...................... 227Setting (climate control) ................ 141

Timing (RACETIMER) ......................... 242Tire pressure

Calling up (on-board computer) ..... 352Checking manually ........................ 351Display message ............................ 267Maximum ....................................... 350Not reached (TIREFIT) .................... 330Notes ............................................. 349Reached (TIREFIT) .......................... 330Recommended ............................... 348

Tire pressure loss warning systemGeneral notes ................................ 351Important safety notes .................. 351Restarting ...................................... 352

Tire pressure monitorChecking the tire pressure elec-tronically ........................................ 354Function/notes ............................. 352General notes ................................ 352Important safety notes .................. 352Radio type approval for the tirepressure monitor ........................... 355Restarting ...................................... 355Warning lamp ................................. 283Warning message .......................... 354

18 Index

Tire-change tool kit ........................... 326TIREFIT kit .......................................... 328Tires

Aspect ratio (definition) ................. 366Average weight of the vehicleoccupants (definition) .................... 365Bar (definition) ............................... 364Changing a wheel .......................... 367Characteristics .............................. 364Checking ........................................ 345Curb weight (definition) ................. 366Definition of terms ......................... 364Direction of rotation ...................... 367Display message ............................ 267Distribution of the vehicle occu-pants (definition) ............................ 367DOT (Department of Transporta-tion) (definition) ............................. 365DOT, Tire Identification Number(TIN) ............................................... 364GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating)(definition) ..................................... 365General notes ................................ 372GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) (def-inition) ........................................... 365GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rat-ing) (definition) .............................. 365Important safety notes .................. 344Increased vehicle weight due tooptional equipment (definition) ...... 365Information on driving .................... 344Kilopascal (kPa) (definition) ........... 365Labeling (overview) ........................ 361Load bearing index (definition) ...... 366Load index ..................................... 363Load index (definition) ................... 365Maximum load on a tire (defini-tion) ............................................... 366Maximum loaded vehicle weight(definition) ..................................... 365Maximum permissible tire pres-sure (definition) ............................. 366Maximum tire load ......................... 363Maximum tire load (definition) ....... 366MOExtended tires .......................... 346Optional equipment weight (defi-nition) ............................................ 366

PSI (pounds per square inch) (def-inition) ........................................... 366Replacing ....................................... 367Service life ..................................... 346Sidewall (definition) ....................... 366Speed rating (definition) ................ 365Storing ........................................... 367Structure and characteristics(definition) ..................................... 364Temperature .................................. 360TIN (Tire Identification Number)(definition) ..................................... 366Tire bead (definition) ...................... 366Tire pressure (definition) ................ 366Tire pressures (recommended) ...... 365Tire size (data) ............................... 372Tire size designation, load-bearingcapacity, speed rating .................... 361Tire tread ....................................... 345Tire tread (definition) ..................... 366Total load limit (definition) ............. 367Traction ......................................... 360Traction (definition) ....................... 366Tread wear ..................................... 360Uniform Tire Quality GradingStandards ...................................... 359Uniform Tire Quality GradingStandards (definition) .................... 365Wear indicator (definition) ............. 366Wheel and tire combination ........... 374Wheel rim (definition) .................... 365see Flat tire

Top Tether ............................................ 67Tow-starting

Emergency engine starting ............ 340Important safety notes .................. 337

Towing awayImportant safety guidelines ........... 337Installing the towing eye ................ 338Removing the towing eye ............... 339With both axles on the ground ....... 339With the rear axle raised ................ 339

Towing eye ......................................... 326Transmission

see Automatic transmissionTransmission position display ......... 158Transmission position display(DIRECT SELECT lever) ...................... 158

Index 19

Transporting the vehicle .................. 339Trim pieces (cleaning instruc-tions) .................................................. 323Trip computer (on-board com-puter) .................................................. 230Trip odometer

Calling up ....................................... 229Resetting (on-board computer) ...... 231

TrunkEmergency release .......................... 96Important safety notes .................... 92Locking separately ........................... 96Opening/closing (automaticallyfrom inside) ...................................... 95Opening/closing (automaticallyfrom outside) ................................... 94Opening/closing (manually fromoutside) ............................................ 93

Trunk lidDisplay message ............................ 271Opening dimensions ...................... 392

Trunk load (maximum) ...................... 392Turn signals

Display message ............................ 255Switching on/off ........................... 124

Two-way radioFrequencies ................................... 384Installation ..................................... 384Transmission output (maximum) .... 384

Type identification platesee Vehicle identification plate

UUnlocking

Emergency unlocking ....................... 92From inside the vehicle (centralunlocking button) ............................. 91

VVanity mirror (in the sun visor) ........ 295Vehicle

Correct use ...................................... 27Data acquisition ............................... 28Display message ............................ 270Equipment ....................................... 23Individual settings .......................... 237

Limited Warranty ............................. 27Loading .......................................... 355Locking (in an emergency) ............... 92Locking (SmartKey) .......................... 84Lowering ........................................ 371Maintenance .................................... 24Parking for a long period ................ 172Pulling away ................................... 152Raising ........................................... 368Reporting problems ......................... 27Securing from rolling away ............ 368Towing away .................................. 337Transporting .................................. 339Unlocking (in an emergency) ........... 92Unlocking (SmartKey) ...................... 84Vehicle data ................................... 392

Vehicle data ....................................... 392Vehicle dimensions ........................... 392Vehicle emergency locking ................ 92Vehicle identification number

see VINVehicle identification plate .............. 386Vehicle level

AIRMATIC ...................................... 193Vehicle level (display message) ....... 262Vehicle maintenance

see ASSYST PLUSVehicle tool kit .................................. 326Video

Operating the DVD ......................... 233VIN

Seat ............................................... 386Type plate ...................................... 386

WWarning and indicator lamps

ABS ................................................ 276Brakes ........................................... 275Check Engine ................................. 280Coolant .......................................... 280Distance warning ........................... 282ESP® .............................................. 277ESP® OFF ....................................... 278Fuel tank ........................................ 280General notes ................................ 274Overview .......................................... 34PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF ............... 45

20 Index

Reserve fuel ................................... 280Restraint system ............................ 279Seat belt ........................................ 274SPORT handling mode ................... 278Tire pressure monitor .................... 283

Warranty .............................................. 23Washer fluid

Display message ............................ 272Wheel and tire combination

see TiresWheel bolt tightening torque ........... 371Wheel chock ...................................... 368Wheels

Changing a wheel .......................... 367Checking ........................................ 345Cleaning ......................................... 320Emergency spare wheel ................. 379General notes ................................ 372Important safety notes .................. 344Information on driving .................... 344Interchanging/changing ................ 367Mounting a new wheel ................... 371Mounting a wheel .......................... 368Removing a wheel .......................... 370Storing ........................................... 367Tightening torque ........................... 371Wheel size/tire size ....................... 372

Window curtain air bagOperation ......................................... 53

Windowssee Side windows

WindshieldDefrosting ...................................... 142

Windshield washer fluidsee Windshield washer system

Windshield washer systemAdding washer fluid ....................... 315Important safety notes .................. 391

Windshield wipersProblem (malfunction) ................... 130Replacing the wiper blades ............ 129Switching on/off ........................... 128

Winter drivingImportant safety notes .................. 346Slippery road surfaces ................... 177Snow chains .................................. 347

Winter tiresM+S tires ....................................... 346

Wiper bladesCleaning ......................................... 321Important safety notes .................. 129Replacing ....................................... 129

Wooden trim (cleaning instruc-tions) .................................................. 323Workshop

see Qualified specialist workshop

ZZONE function

Switching on/off ........................... 142

Index 21

Protection of the environment

General notes

H Environmental noteDaimler's declared policy is one of compre-hensive environmental protection.The objectives are for the natural resourcesthat form the basis of our existence on thisplanet to be used sparingly and in a mannerthat takes the requirements of both natureand humanity into account.You too can help to protect the environmentby operating your vehicle in an environmen-tally responsible manner.Fuel consumption and the rate of engine,transmission, brake and tire wear are affectedby these factors:Roperating conditions of your vehicleRyour personal driving styleYou can influence both factors. You shouldbear the following in mind:Operating conditions:Ravoid short trips as these increase fuel con-sumption.Ralways make sure that the tire pressuresare correct.Rdo not carry any unnecessary weight.Rremove roof racks once you no longer needthem.Ra regularly serviced vehicle will contributeto environmental protection. You shouldtherefore adhere to the service intervals.Ralways have service work carried out at aqualified specialist workshop.

Personal driving style:Rdo not depress the accelerator pedal whenstarting the engine.Rdo notwarmup the enginewhen the vehicleis stationary.Rdrive carefully and maintain a safe distancefrom the vehicle in front.Ravoid frequent, sudden acceleration andbraking.

Rchange gear in good time and use each gearonly up toÔ of its maximum engine speed.Rswitch off the engine in stationary traffic.Rkeep an eye on the vehicle's fuel consump-tion.

Environmental concerns and recom-mendationsWherever the operating instructions requireyou to dispose of materials, first try to regen-erate or re-use them. Observe the relevantenvironmental rules and regulations whendisposing of materials. In this way you willhelp to protect the environment.

Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts

H Environmental noteDaimler AG also supplies reconditionedmajorassemblies and parts which are of the samequality as new parts. They are covered by thesame Limited Warranty entitlements as newparts.

! Air bags and Emergency Tensioning Devi-ces, as well as control units and sensors forthese restraint systems, may be installed inthe following areas of your vehicle:RdoorsRdoor pillarsRdoor sillsRseatsRcockpitRinstrument clusterRcenter consoleDo not install accessories such as audiosystems in these areas. Do not carry outrepairs or welding. You could impair theoperating efficiency of the restraint sys-tems.Have aftermarket accessories installed at aqualified specialist workshop.

22 Introduction

You could jeopardize the operating safety ofyour vehicle if you use parts, tires and wheelsas well as accessories relevant to safetywhich have not been approved by Mercedes.This could lead to malfunctions in safety-rel-evant systems, e.g. the brake system. Useonly genuine Mercedes-Benz parts or parts ofequal quality. Only use tires, wheels andaccessories that have been specificallyapproved for your vehicle.Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts are subject tostrict quality control. Every part has been spe-cifically developed, manufactured or selectedfor and adapted to Mercedes-Benz vehicles.Only genuine Mercedes-Benz parts shouldtherefore be used.More than 300,000 different genuineMercedes-Benz parts are available forMercedes-Benz models.All authorized Mercedes-Benz Centers main-tain a supply of genuineMercedes-Benz partsfor necessary service and repair work. In addi-tion, strategically located parts delivery cen-ters provide quick and reliable parts service.Always specify the vehicle identification num-ber (VIN) when ordering genuine Mercedes-Benz parts (Y page 386).

Operator's Manual

Vehicle equipmentThis Operator's Manual describes all modelsand all standard and optional equipment ofyour vehicle available at the time of going toprint. Country-specific differences are possi-ble. Bear in mind that your vehicle may notfeature all functions described here. This alsoapplies to safety-relevant systems and func-tions. The equipment in your vehicle maytherefore differ from that shown in thedescriptions and illustrations.The original purchase agreement lists all sys-tems installed in your vehicle.Should you have any questions concerningequipment and operation, please consult anauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

The Operator's Manual and MaintenanceBooklet are important documents and shouldbe kept in the vehicle.

Service and vehicle operation

WarrantyThe implied warranty for your vehicle appliesin accordance with the warranty terms andconditions in the Service and Warranty Infor-mation booklet.Your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center willreplace and repair all factory-installed parts inaccordancewith the followingwarranty termsand conditions:RNew Vehicle Limited WarrantyREmission System WarrantyREmission Performance WarrantyRCalifornia, Connecticut, Maine, Massachu-setts, New York, Pennsylvania, RhodeIsland and Vermont Emission Control Sys-tem WarrantyRState warranty enforcement laws (lemonlaws)

Replacement parts and accessories are cov-ered by the Mercedes-Benz Parts and Acces-sories warranties. These are available at anyauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

i Should you lose your Service and War-ranty Information booklet, have an author-ized Mercedes-Benz Center arrange for areplacement. The new Service and War-ranty Information booklet will be posted toyou.

Introduction 23

Z

Information for customers in Califor-niaUnder California law you may be entitled to areplacement of your vehicle or a refund of thepurchase price or lease price, if after a rea-sonable number of repair attemptsMercedes-Benz USA, LLC and/or its author-ized repair or service facilities fail to fix one ormore substantial defects or malfunctions inthe vehicle that are covered by its expresswarranty. During the period of 18 monthsfrom original delivery of the vehicle or theaccumulation of 18,000miles (approximately29,000 km) on the odometer of the vehicle,whichever occurs first, a reasonable numberof repair attempts is presumed for a retailbuyer or lessee if one or more of the followingoccurs:(1) the same substantial defect or malfunc-

tion results in a condition that is likely tocause death or serious bodily injury if thevehicle is driven, that defect or malfunc-tion has been subject to repair two ormore times, and you have directly noti-fied Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC in writingof the need for its repair,

(2) the same substantial defect or malfunc-tion of a less serious nature than cate-gory (1) has been subject to repair four ormore times and you have directly notifiedus in writing of the need for its repair, or

(3) the vehicle is out of service by reason ofrepair of the same or different substantialdefects or malfunctions for a cumulativetotal of more than 30 calendar days.

Please send your written notice to:Mercedes-Benz USA, LLCCustomer Assistance CenterOne Mercedes DriveMontvale, NJ 07645-0350

MaintenanceThe Service and Warranty Booklet describesall the necessary maintenance work whichshould be done at regular intervals.Always have the Service and Warranty Book-let with you when you bring the vehicle to anauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center. The ser-vice advisor will record every service for youin the Service and Warranty Booklet.

Roadside AssistanceThe Mercedes-Benz Roadside AssistanceProgramoffers technical help in the event of abreakdown. Calls to the toll-free RoadsideAssistance Hotline are answered by ouragents 24 hours a day, 365 days a year.1-800-FOR-MERCedes(1-800-367-6372)(USA)1-800-387-0100 (Canada)For additional information, refer to theMercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance Pro-gram brochure (USA) or the "Roadside Assis-tance" section in the Service and Warrantybooklet (Canada). You will find both in yourvehicle literature portfolio.

Change of address or change of own-ershipIn the event of a change of address, pleasesend us the "Notification of Address Change"in the Service and Guarantee booklet or sim-ply call the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assis-tance Center (USA) at the hotline number1-800-FOR-MERCedes(1-800-367-6372) orCustomer Service Center (Canada) at1-800-387-0100. This will assist us in con-tacting you in a timely manner should theneed arise.If you sell your Mercedes, please leave theentire literature in the vehicle so that it isavailable to the next owner.If you have purchased a used car, please sendus the "Notification of Used Car Purchase" in

24 Introduction

the Service and Guarantee booklet or simplycall the Mercedes-Benz Customer AssistanceCenter (USA) at the hotline number1-800-FOR-MERCedes(1-800-367-6372) orCustomer Service (Canada) at1-800-387-0100.

Vehicle operation outside the USAand CanadaIf you plan to operate your vehicle in foreigncountries, please be aware that:Rservice facilities or replacement parts maynot be readily available.Runleaded fuel for vehicles with a catalyticconvertermay not be available. Leaded fuelmay cause damage to the catalytic con-verter.Rthe fuel may have a considerably loweroctane rating. Unsuitable fuel can causeengine damage.

Some Mercedes-Benz models are availablefor delivery in Europe through our EuropeanDelivery Program. For details, consult anauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center or write toone of the following addresses.In the USAMercedes-Benz USA, LLCEuropean Delivery DepartmentOne Mercedes DriveMontvale, NJ 07645-0350In CanadaMercedes-Benz Canada, Inc.European Delivery Department98 Vanderhoof AvenueToronto, Ontario M4G 4C9

Operating safety

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf you do not have the prescribed service/maintenance work or any required repairs

carried out, this can result in malfunctions orsystem failures. There is a risk of an accident.Always have the prescribed service/mainte-nance work as well as any required repairscarried out at a qualified specialist workshop.

G WARNINGFlammable material such as leaves, grass ortwigsmay ignite if they come into contactwithhot parts of the exhaust system. There is a riskof fire.When driving off road or on unpaved roads,check the vehicle's underside regularly. Inparticular, remove parts of plants or otherflammable materials which have becometrapped. In the case of damage, contact aqualified specialist workshop.

G WARNINGModifications to electronic components, theirsoftware as well as wiring can impair theirfunction and/or the function of other net-worked components. In particular, systemsrelevant to safety could also be affected. As aresult, these may no longer function as inten-ded and/or jeopardize the operating safety ofthe vehicle. There is an increased risk of anaccident and injury.Never tamper with the wiring as well as elec-tronic components or their software. Youshould have all work to electrical and elec-tronic equipment carried out at a qualifiedspecialist workshop.

! There is a risk of damage to the vehicle if:Rthe vehicle becomes stuck, e.g. on a highcurb or an unpaved roadRyou drive too fast over an obstacle, e.g. acurb or a hole in the roadRa heavy object strikes the undercarriageor parts of the chassis

In situations like this, the body, the under-carriage, chassis parts, wheels or tirescould be damaged without the damagebeing visible. Components damaged in thisway can unexpectedly fail or, in the case of

Introduction 25

Z

an accident, no longer withstand the strainthey are designed to.If the underbody paneling is damaged,combustible materials such as leaves,grass or twigs can gather between theunderbody and the underbody paneling. Ifthese materials come in contact with hotparts of the exhaust system, they can catchfire.In such situations, have the vehiclechecked and repaired immediately at aqualified specialist workshop. If on con-tinuing your journey you notice that drivingsafety is impaired, pull over and stop thevehicle immediately, paying attention toroad and traffic conditions. In such cases,consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Declarations of conformity

Vehicle components which receiveand/or transmit radio wavesUSA: "The wireless devices of this vehiclecomply with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Oper-ation is subject to the following two condi-tions: 1) These devices may not cause harm-ful interference, and 2) These devices mustaccept any interference received, includinginterference that may cause undesired oper-ation. Changes ormodifications not expresslyapproved by the party responsible for com-pliance could void the user’s authority tooperate the equipment."Canada: "The wireless devices of this vehiclecomply with Industry Canada license-exemptRSS standard(s). Operation is subject to thefollowing two conditions: (1) These devicesmay not cause interference, and (2) Thesedevicesmust accept any interference, includ-ing interference that may cause undesiredoperation of the device."

Diagnostics connectionThe diagnostics connection is only intendedfor the connection of diagnostic equipment ata qualified specialist workshop.

G WARNINGIf you connect equipment to the diagnosticsconnection in the vehicle, it may affect theoperation of the vehicle systems. As a result,the operating safety of the vehicle could beaffected. There is a risk of an accident.Do not connect any equipment to a diagnos-tics connection in the vehicle.

G WARNINGObjects in the driver's footwell can restrict thepedal travel or obstruct a depressed pedal.The operating and road safety of the vehicle isjeopardized. There is a risk of an accident.Make sure that all objects in the vehicle arestowed correctly, and that they cannot enterthe driver's footwell. Install the floormatssecurely and as specified in order to ensuresufficient clearance for the pedals. Do not useloose floormats and do not place floormats ontop of one another.

! If the engine is switched off and equip-ment on the diagnostics connection isused, the starter battery may discharge.

Connecting equipment to the diagnosticsconnection can lead to emissions monitoringinformation being reset, for example. Thismay lead to the vehicle failing to meet therequirements of the next emissions test dur-ing the main inspection.

Qualified specialist workshopAn authorized Mercedes-Benz Center is aqualified specialist workshop. It has the nec-essary specialist knowledge, tools and quali-fications to correctly carry out the workrequired on your vehicle. This is especially thecase for work relevant to safety.

26 Introduction

Observe the notes in the Maintenance Book-let.Always have the following work carried out atan authorized Mercedes-Benz Center:Rwork relevant to safetyRservice and maintenance workRrepair workRalterations, installation work and modifica-tionsRwork on electronic components

Correct useIf you remove any warning stickers, you orothers could fail to recognize certain dangers.Leave warning stickers in position.Observe the following information when driv-ing your vehicle:Rthe safety notes in this manualRthe vehicle technical dataRtraffic rules and regulationsRlaws and safety standards pertaining tomotor vehicles

Problems with your vehicleIf you should experience a problem with yourvehicle, particularly one that you believe mayaffect its safe operation, we urge you to con-tact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Centerimmediately to have the problem diagnosedand rectified. If the problem is not resolved toyour satisfaction, please discuss the problemagain with a Mercedes-Benz Center or con-tact us at one of the following addresses.In the USACustomer Assistance CenterMercedes-Benz USA, LLCOne Mercedes DriveMontvale, NJ 07645-0350In CanadaCustomer Relations DepartmentMercedes-Benz Canada, Inc.

98 Vanderhoof AvenueToronto, Ontario M4G 4C9

Reporting safety defectsUSA only:The following text is published as required ofmanufacturers under Title 49, Code of U.S.Federal Regulations, Part 575 pursuant to the"National Traffic andMotor Vehicle Safety Actof 1966".If you believe that your vehicle has a defectwhich could cause a crash or could causeinjury or death, you should immediatelyinform the National Highway Traffic SafetyAdministration (NHTSA) in addition to notify-ing Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC.If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it mayopen an investigation, and if it finds that asafety defect exists in a group of vehicles, itmay order a recall and remedy campaign.However, NHTSA cannot become involved inindividual problems between you, yourdealer, or Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC.To contact NHTSA, you may call the VehicleSafety Hotline toll-free at1-888-327-4236(TTY: 1-800-424-9153); goto http://www.safercar.gov; or write to:Administrator, NHTSA, 400 Seventh Street,SW., Washington, DC 20590.You can also obtain other information aboutmotor vehicle safety fromhttp://www.safercar.gov

Limited Warranty! Follow the instructions in this manualabout the proper operation of your vehicleas well as about possible vehicle damage.Damage to your vehicle that arises fromculpable contraventions against theseinstructions is not covered either by theMercedes-Benz Limited Warranty or by theNew or Used-Vehicle Warranty.

Introduction 27

Z

QR codes for the rescue card

The QR codes are secured in the fuel filler flapand on the opposite side on the B-pillar. In theevent of an accident, rescue services can usethe QR code to quickly find the appropriaterescue card for your vehicle. The current res-cue card contains the most important infor-mation about your vehicle in a compact form,e.g. the routing of the electric cables.You can findmore information under https://portal.aftersales.i.daimler.com/public/content/asportal/en/communication/informationen_fuer/QRCode.html.

Data stored in the vehicle

Data recordingThis vehicle is capable of recording diagnosticinformation relating to vehicle operation,mal-functions, and user settings. This may includeinformation about the performance or statusof various systems, including but not limitedto, engine, throttle, steering or brake sys-tems, that is stored and can be read out withsuitable devices, particularly when the vehi-cle is serviced. The data obtained is used toproperly diagnose and service your vehicle orto further optimize and develop vehicle func-tions.

COMAND/mbraceIf the vehicle is equipped with COMAND ormbrace, additional data about the vehicle’soperation, the use of the vehicle in certainsituations, and the location of the vehiclemaybe compiled through COMAND or thembracesystem.For additional information please refer to theCOMAND User Manual and/or the mbraceTerms and Conditions.

Event data recordersThis vehicle is equipped with an event datarecorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDRis to record data that will assist in under-standing how a vehicle’s systems performedin certain crash or near crash-like situations,such as during air bag deployment or whenhitting a road obstacle. The EDR is designedto record data related to vehicle dynamicsand safety systems for a short period of time,typically 30 seconds or less.The EDR in this vehicle is designed to recordsuch data as:Rhow various systems in your vehicle areoperatingRwhether or not the driver and passengerseat belts are fastenedRhow far (if at all) the driver is depressing theaccelerator and/or brake pedal andRhow fast the vehicle is travelingThis data can help provide a better under-standing of the circumstances in whichcrashes and injuries occur. NOTE: EDR data isrecorded by your vehicle only if a non-trivialcrash situation occurs; no data is recorded bythe EDR under normal driving conditions andno personal data (e.g., name, gender, age,and crash location) are recorded. However,other parties, such as law enforcement, cancombine the EDR data with the type of per-sonal identification data routinely acquiredduring a crash investigation.To read data recorded by an EDR, specialequipment is required, and access to the vehi-cle or the EDR is needed. In addition to thevehicle manufacturer, other parties that havethe special equipment, such as law enforce-ment, can read the information by accessingthe vehicle or the EDR.EDR data may be used in civil and criminalmatters as a tool in accident reconstruction,accident claims, and vehicle safety. Since theCrash Data Retrieval CDR tool that is used toextract data from the EDR is commerciallyavailable, Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC

28 Introduction

("MBUSA") expressly disclaims any and all lia-bility arising from the extraction of this infor-mation by unauthorized Mercedes-Benz per-sonnel.MBUSA will not share EDR data with otherswithout the consent of the vehicle owners or,if the vehicle is leased, without the consent ofthe lessee. Exceptions to this representationinclude responses to subpoenas by lawenforcement; by federal, state or local gov-ernment; in connection with or arising out oflitigation involving MBUSA or its subsidiariesand affiliates; or, as required by law.Warning: The EDR is a component of theRestraint System Module. Tampering with,altering, modifying or removing the EDR com-ponent may result in a malfunction of theRestraint System Module and other systems.State laws or regulations regarding EDRs thatconflict with federal regulation are pre-emp-ted. This means that in the event of such con-flict, the federal regulation governs. As ofFebruary 2013, 13 states have enacted lawsrelating to EDRs.

Information on copyright

General informationInformation on license for free and open-source software used in your vehicle and itselectronic components is available on the fol-lowing website:http://www.mercedes-benz.com/opensource

Introduction 29

Z

30

Cockpit ................................................. 32Instrument cluster .............................. 33Multifunction steering wheel ............. 35Center console .................................... 37Overhead control panel ...................... 40Door control panel .............................. 41

31

Ataglance

Cockpit

Function Page

: Steering wheel paddleshifters 163

; Combination switch 124

= Instrument cluster 33

? Horn

A DIRECT SELECT lever 158

B PARKTRONIC warning dis-play 197

C Overhead control panel 40

D Climate control systems 132

E Ignition lock 149Start/Stop button 150

Function Page

F Adjusts the steering wheelmanually 113

G Adjusts the steering wheelelectrically 113Steering wheel heating 114

H Cruise control lever 179

I Parking brake 172

J Diagnostics connection 26

K Opens the hood 312

L Releases the parking brake 172

M Light switch 122

32 CockpitAt

aglance

Instrument cluster

Displays

Function Page

: Speedometer with seg-ments 227

; Multifunction display 229

= Tachometer 226

? Coolant temperature 226

Function Page

A Fuel gageFuel filler flap location indi-cator8: the fuel fillercap is on the right-handside.

Information on displaying the outside tem-perature in the multifunction display can befound under "Outside temperature display"(Y page 227).

i Adjusting the instrument cluster lightingusing the on-board computer(Y page 238).

Instrument cluster 33

Ataglance

Warning and indicator lamps

Function Page

: ÷ ESP® 277M SPORT handlingmode in AMG vehicles 278

; · Distance warning 282

= å ESP® OFF 277

? #! Turn signals 124

A $ Brakes (USA only) 275

B J Brakes (Canada only) 275

C ! ABS 276

D 6 Restraint system 44

E ; Check Engine 280

F h Tire pressure monitor 283

Function Page

G ü Seat belt 274

H ÷ ESP® in AMG vehicles 278

I ? Coolant 280

J K High-beam head-lamps 124

K L Low-beam head-lamps 123

L T Parking lamps 123

M R This lamphas no func-tion

N 8 Reserve fuel 280

34 Instrument clusterAt

aglance

Multifunction steering wheel

Function Page

: Multifunction display 229

; Audio 20 or COMAND dis-play (see the separate oper-ating instructions)

Function Page

= ?

Vehicles with Audio 20:switches on voice-operatedcontrol for navigation (seemanufacturer's operatinginstructions)Vehicles with COMAND:switches on the Voice Con-trol System (see the sepa-rate operating instructions)8

MuteWX

Adjusts the volume~

Rejects or ends a call 233Exits the telephone book/redial memory6

Makes or accepts a callSwitches to the redialmem-ory

Multifunction steering wheel 35

Ataglance

Function Page

? =;

Selects a menu 2279:

Selects a submenu orscrolls through lists 227a

Confirms a selection 227Hides display messages 245%

Back 227Vehicles with Audio 20:switches off voice-operatedcontrol of the navigation(see manufacturer's oper-ating instructions)Vehicles with COMAND:switches off the Voice Con-trol System (see the sepa-rate operating instructions)

36 Multifunction steering wheelAt

aglance

Center console

Center console, upper section

Function Page

: Audio system or COMAND(see the separate operatinginstructions)

; c Seat heating 111

= s Seat ventilation 112

? c PARKTRONIC 197

A ¤ ECO start/stop func-tion (AMG vehicles) 153

Function Page

B 4 5 Indicator lamp 54

C £ Hazard warninglamps 124

D u Roller sunblind in therear window 296

Center console 37

Ataglance

Center console, lower section

Function Page

E Stowage compartment 286Ashtray 296Cigarette lighter 297Socket 298Cup holder 293

F Cup holder 293

G e Sets the suspensiontuning 194

Function Page

H É Sets the vehicle level 193

I Stowage compartmentwithMedia Interface 288

J Ú Selects the drive pro-gram 162

K Audio or COMAND control-ler (see the separate oper-ating instructions)

38 Center consoleAt

aglance

Center console, lower section (AMG vehicles)

Function Page

F Cup holder 293

G Engages park position P 171

H Selector lever 157

I Ashtray 296Cigarette lighter 297Socket 298

J Audio or COMAND control-ler (see the separate oper-ating instructions)

Function Page

K Stowage compartmentwithMedia Interface 288

L ß Calls up or saves thesuspension setting 195

M à Sets the suspensiontuning 195

N å ESP® 77

O Drive program selector 163

Center console 39

Ataglance

Overhead control panel

Function Page

: u Switches the rearinterior lighting on/off 128

; | Switches the auto-matic interior lighting con-trol on/off 128

= p Switches the right-hand reading lamp on/off 127

? ï MB Info call button(mbrace system) 302

A 3 Opens/closes thesliding sunroof 101

B G SOS button (mbracesystem) 300

C Rear-view mirror 117

Function Page

D Buttons for the garage dooropener 307

E Microphone for mbrace(emergency call system),telephone and Voice Con-trol System (see the sepa-rate operating instructions)

F F Roadside Assistancecall button (mbrace sys-tem) 301

G p Switches the left-hand reading lamp on/off 127

H c Switches the frontinterior lighting on/off 128

40 Overhead control panelAt

aglance

Door control panel

Function Page

: r45=Stores settings for the seat,exterior mirrors and steer-ing wheel 119

; Adjusts the seats electri-cally 108

= %& Unlocks/locksthe vehicle 91

? Opens the door 90

A 7Zö\Adjusts and folds the exte-rior mirrors in/out electri-cally 116

Function Page

B W Opens/closes theside windows 97

C n Activates/deacti-vates the override featurefor the side windows in therear compartment 69

D p Opens/closes thetrunk lid 95

Door control panel 41

Ataglance

42

Useful information .............................. 44Panic alarm .......................................... 44Occupant safety .................................. 44Children in the vehicle ........................ 64Pets in the vehicle ............................... 70Driving safety systems ....................... 70Protection against theft ..................... 81

43

Safety

Useful information

i This Operator's Manual describes allmodels and all standard and optional equip-ment of your vehicle available at the time ofpublication of the Operator's Manual.Country-specific differences are possible.Please note that your vehicle may not beequipped with all features described. Thisalso applies to safety-related systems andfunctions.

i Read the information on qualified special-ist workshops (Y page 26).

Panic alarm

X To activate: press the! button: forapproximately one second.A visual and audible alarm is triggered if thealarm system is armed.

X To deactivate: press the! button:again.

orX Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock.or, on vehicles with KEYLESS‑GO:X Press the Start/Stop button.The SmartKey must be in the vehicle.

Occupant safety

Restraint system: introductionThe restraint system can reduce the risk ofvehicle occupants coming into contact withparts of the vehicle's interior in the event ofan accident. The restraint system can alsoreduce the forces to which vehicle occupantsare subjected during an accident.The restraint system comprises:RSeat belt systemRAir bagsRChild restraint systemRChild seat securing systemsThe components of the restraint systemworkin conjunction with each other. They can onlydeploy their protective function if, at all times,all vehicle occupants:Rhave fastened their seat belts correctly(Y page 47)Rhave adjusted their seat and head restraintproperly (Y page 107).

As the driver, you also have to make sure thatthe steering wheel is adjusted correctly.Observe the information relating to the cor-rect driver's seat position (Y page 106).You also have tomake sure that an air bag caninflate properly if deployed (Y page 50).An air bag supplements a correctly worn seatbelt. As an additional safety device, the airbag increases the level of protection for vehi-cle occupants in the event of an accident. Forexample, if, in the event of an accident, theprotection offered by the seat belt is suffi-cient, the air bags are not deployed. When anaccident occurs, only the air bags thatincrease protection in that particular accidentsituation are deployed. However, seat beltsand air bags generally do not protect againstobjects penetrating the vehicle from the out-side.Information on restraint system operationcan be found under "Triggering of the Emer-gency Tensioning Devices and air bags"(Y page 59).

44 Occupant safetySafety

For more information about children travelingwith you in the vehicle and on child restraintsystems, see "Children in the vehicle"(Y page 64).

Important safety notes

G WARNINGModifications to the restraint system maycause it to no longer work as intended. Therestraint system may then not perform itsintended protective function andmay fail in anaccident or trigger unexpectedly, for example.This poses an increased risk of injury or evenfatal injury.Never modify parts of the restraint system.Never tamper with the wiring, the electroniccomponents or their software.If it is necessary tomodify an air bag system toaccommodate a person with disabilities, con-tact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center fordetails. USA only: for further information con-tact our Customer Assistance Center at1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1‑800‑367‑6372).

Restraint system warning lampThe functions of the restraint system arechecked after the ignition is switched on andat regular intervals while the engine is run-ning. Therefore, malfunctions can be detec-ted in good time.The 6 restraint system warning lamp inthe instrument cluster lights upwhen the igni-tion is switched on. It goes out no later than afew seconds after the vehicle is started. Thecomponents of the restraint system are inoperational readiness.A malfunction has occurred if the 6restraint system warning lamp:Rdoes not light up after the ignition isswitched onRdoes not go out after a few seconds withthe engine runningRlights up again while the engine is running

G WARNINGIf restraint system is malfunctioning, restraintsystem components may be triggered unin-tentionally or might not be triggered at all inthe event of an accident with a high rate ofvehicle deceleration. This can affect the Emer-gency Tensioning Device or air bag, for exam-ple. This poses an increased risk of injury oreven fatal injury.Have the restraint system checked andrepaired in a qualified specialist workshop assoon as possible.

PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicatorlamp

PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp:is part of the Occupant Classification System(OCS).The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lampinforms you about the status of the front-passenger front air bag.If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicatorlamp:Ris lit: the front-passenger front air bag isdeactivated. It will then not be deployed inthe event of an accident.Rdoes not light up: the front-passengerfront air bag is enabled. If, in the event of anaccident, all deployment criteria are met,the front-passenger front air bag isdeployed.

Occupant safety 45

Safety

Z

Depending on the person in the front-passenger seat, the front-passenger front airbag must either be deactivated or enabled;see the following points. You must make sureof this both before and during a journey.RChildren in a child restraint system:whether the front-passenger front air bag isenabled or deactivated depends on theinstalled child restraint system, and the ageand size of the child. Therefore, be sure toobserve the notes on the "Occupant Clas-sification System (OCS)" (Y page 53) andon "Children in the vehicle" (Y page 64).There youwill also find instructions on rear-ward and forward-facing child restraint sys-tems on the front-passenger seat.RAll other persons: depending on the clas-sification of the person in the front-passenger seat, the front-passenger frontair bag is enabled or deactivated(Y page 53). Be sure to observe the noteson "Seat belts“ (Y page 46) and "Air bags"(Y page 50). There you can also find infor-mation on the correct seat position.

Seat belts

IntroductionSeat belts are the most effective means ofrestricting the movement of vehicle occu-pants in the event of an accident or the vehi-cle rolling over. This reduces the risk of vehi-cle occupants coming into contact with partsof the vehicle interior or being ejected fromthe vehicle. Furthermore, the seat belt helpsto keep the vehicle occupant in the best posi-tion in relation to the air bag.The seat belt system comprises:RSeat beltsREmergency Tensioning Devices for thefront seat belts and the outer seat belts inthe rearRSeat belt force limiters for the front seatbelts and the outer seat belts in the rear

If the seat belt is pulled out of the belt outletquickly or with a jerky movement, the beltretractor locks. The belt strap cannot beextracted any further.The Emergency Tensioning Device tightensthe seat belt in an accident, pulling the beltclose against the body. However it does notpull the vehicle occupant back in the directionof the backrest.The Emergency Tensioning Device does notcorrect an incorrect seat position or the rout-ing of an incorrectly fastened seat belt.When triggered, a seat belt force limiter helpsto reduce the force exerted by the seat belt onthe vehicle occupant.The seat belt force limiters for the front seatsare synchronized with the front air bags,which absorb part of the deceleration force.This can reduce the force exerted on the vehi-cle occupants during an accident.

! If the front-passenger seat is unoccupied,do not insert the belt tongue into the buckleof the front-passenger seat. This may oth-erwise lead to the triggering of the Emer-gency Tensioning Device in the event of anaccident, which will then need to bereplaced.

Important safety notesThe use of seat belts and child restraint sys-tems is required by law in:Rall 50 statesRthe U.S. territoriesRthe District of ColumbiaRall Canadian provincesEven where this is not required by law, allvehicle occupants should correctly fastentheir seat belts before starting the journey.

G WARNINGIf the seat belt is incorrectly fastened, it can-not protect as intended. Furthermore, anincorrectly fastened seat belt can cause addi-tional injury, for example, in an accident, dur-ing braking or when abruptly changing direc-

46 Occupant safetySafety

tion. This poses an increased risk of injury oreven fatal injury.Make sure that all vehicle occupants areseated properly with a correctly fastened seatbelt.

G WARNINGThe seat belt does not offer the intended levelof protection if you have not moved the back-rest to an almost vertical position. When brak-ing or in the event of an accident, you couldslide underneath the seat belt and sustainabdomen or neck injuries, for example. Thisposes an increased risk of injury or even fatalinjury.Adjust the seat properly before beginningyour journey. Always ensure that the backrestis in an almost vertical position and that theshoulder section of your seat belt is routedacross the center of your shoulder.

G WARNINGPersons under 5 ft (1.50 m) in height cannotfasten the seat belt correctly without an addi-tional suitable restraint system. If the seatbelt is incorrectly fastened, it cannot protectas intended. Furthermore, an incorrectly fas-tened seat belt can cause additional injury, forexample, in an accident, during braking or anabrupt change of direction. This poses anincreased risk of injury or even fatal injury.For this reason, always secure persons under5 ft (1.50 m) in height in suitable restraintsystems.

If a child younger than twelve years old andunder 5 ft (1.50 m) in height is traveling in thevehicle:Ralways secure the child in a child restraintsystem suitable for this Mercedes-Benzvehicle. The child restraint system must beappropriate to the age, weight and size ofthe childRalways observe the instructions and safetynotes in the "Children in the vehicle" sec-tion of this Operator's Manual

(Y page 64) in addition to the childrestraint system manufacturer's installa-tion instructionsRbe sure to observe the instructions andsafety notes on the "Occupant classifica-tion system (OCS)" (Y page 53)

G WARNINGThe seat belts may not perform their intendedprotective function if:Rthey are damaged, modified, extremelydirty, bleach or dyedRthe seat belt buckle is damaged orextremely dirtyRthe Emergency Tensioning Devices, beltanchorages or inertia reels have beenmodi-fied

Seat belts may sustain non-visible damage inan accident, e.g. due to glass splinters. Modi-fied or damaged seat belts may tear or fail,e.g. in an accident. Modified Emergency Ten-sioning Devices could accidentally trigger orfail to deploy when necessary. This poses anincreased risk of injury or even fatal injury.Never modify the seat belts, Emergency Ten-sioning Devices, belt anchorages or inertiareels. Make sure that the seat belts areundamaged, not worn out and clean. Follow-ing an accident, have the seat belts checkedimmediately at a qualified specialist work-shop.

Only use seat belts that have been approvedfor your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz. Any suchmodifications could invalidate the vehicle'sgeneral operating permit.

Proper use of the seat beltsObserve the safety notes on the seat belt(Y page 46).All vehicle occupants must be wearing theseat belt correctly before beginning the jour-ney. Also make sure that all vehicle occu-pants are always wearing the seat belt cor-rectly while the vehicle is in motion.

Occupant safety 47

Safety

Z

When fastening the seat belt, always makesure that:Rthe seat belt tongue is only inserted to thebelt buckle belonging to that seat.Rthe seat belt is tight across your body.Avoid wearing bulky clothing, e.g. a wintercoat.Rthe seat belt is not twisted.Only then can the forces which occur bedistributed over the area of the belt.Rthe shoulder section of the belt is alwaysrouted across the center of your shoulder.The shoulder section of the belt must notcome into contact with your neck or berouted under your arm. Where possible,adjust the seat belt to the appropriateheight.Rthe lap belt passes tightly and as low downas possible across your lap.The lap belt must always be routed acrossyour hip joints and not across your abdo-men. This applies particularly to pregnantwomen. If necessary, push the lap beltdown to your hip joint and pull it tight usingthe shoulder section of the belt.Rthe seat belt is not routed across sharp,pointed or fragile objects.If you have such items located on or in yourclothing, e.g. pens, keys or eyeglasses,store these in a suitable place.Ronly one person is using a seat belt at atime.Infants and children must never travel sit-ting on the lap of a vehicle occupant. In theevent of an accident, they could be crushedbetween the vehicle occupant and seatbelt.Robjects are never secured with a seat belt ifthe seat belt is also being used by one of thevehicle's occupants.

Seat belts are only intended to secure andrestrain vehicle occupants. Always observethe "Loading guidelines" for securing objects,luggage or loads (Y page 286).

Fastening and adjusting the seat beltsObserve the safety notes on the seat belt(Y page 46) and the notes on correct use ofseat belts (Y page 47).

X Adjust the seat (Y page 106).The seat backrest must be in an almostvertical position.

X Pull the seat belt smoothly from belt outlet= and engage belt tongue; into beltbuckle:.The seat belt on the driver’s seat and thefront-passenger seat may be tightenedautomatically, see "Belt adjustment"(Y page 49).

X If necessary, pull upwards on the shouldersection of the seat belt to tighten the beltacross your body.

48 Occupant safetySafety

The shoulder section of the seat belt mustalways be routed across the center of theshoulder. Adjust the belt outlet if necessary.X To raise: slide the belt outlet upwards.The belt outlet will engage in various posi-tions.

X To lower: hold belt outlet release? andslide belt outlet downwards.

X Let go of belt outlet release? in thedesired position and make sure that thebelt outlet engages.

All seat belts except the driver's seat belt areequipped with a special seat belt retractor tosecurely fasten child restraint systems in thevehicle. Further information can be foundunder "Special seat belt retractor"(Y page 64).

Releasing seat belts

! Make sure that the seat belt is fully rolledup. Otherwise, the seat belt or belt tonguewill be trapped in the door or in the seatmechanism. This could damage the door,the door trim panel and the seat belt. Dam-aged seat belts can no longer fulfill theirprotective function and must be replaced.Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

X Press release button:, hold belttongue; firmly and guide it back towardsbelt outlet=.

Seat belt adjustmentThe seat-belt adjustment is an integral part ofthe PRE-SAFE® convenience function. Thisfunction adjusts the driver's and front-passenger seat belt to the upper body of theoccupants.The belt strap is tightened slightly when:Rthe belt tongue is engaged in the buckleandRthe ignition is switched onThe seat-belt adjustment will apply a certainretraction force if any slack is detectedbetween the vehicle occupant and the seatbelt. Do not hold on to the seat belt tightlywhile it is adjusting.You can switch the seat-belt adjustment onand off in the on-board computer(Y page 241).

Belt warning for the driver and frontpassengerThe7 seat belt warning lamp in the instru-ment cluster is a reminder that all vehicleoccupants must wear their seat belts. It maylight up continuously or flash. In addition,there may be a warning tone.Regardless of whether the driver's seat belthas already been fastened, the7 seat beltwarning lamp lights up for six seconds eachtime the engine is started. If, aftersix seconds, the driver or front-passengerseat belt has not been fastened and the doorsare closed, the 7 seat belt warning lamplights up. As soon as the driver's and front-passenger seat belts are fastened or a frontdoor is opened again, the 7 seat beltwarning lamp goes out.If the driver's seat belt is not fastened afterthe engine is started, an additional warningtone will sound. This warning tone stops after

Occupant safety 49

Safety

Z

six seconds or when the driver's seat belt isfastened.If the vehicle's speed exceeds 15 mph(25 km/h) once and the driver's and front-passenger seat belts are not fastened, awarning tone sounds. A warning tone alsosounds with increasing intensity for60 seconds or until the driver or frontpassenger have fastened their seat belts.If the driver or front passenger unfasten theirseat belts during the journey, the seat beltwarning is activated again.

i For more information on the 7 seatbelt warning lamp, see "Warning and indi-cator lamps in the instrument cluster, seatbelts" (Y page 274).

Air bags

IntroductionThe installation point of an air bag can be rec-ognized by the AIR BAG symbol.An air bag complements the correctly fas-tened seat belt. It is no substitute for the seatbelt. The air bag provides additional protec-tion in applicable accident situations.Not all air bags are deployed in an accident.The different air bag systems function inde-pendently from one another (Y page 59).However, no system available today can com-pletely eliminate injuries and fatalities.It is also not possible to rule out a risk of injurycaused by an air bag due to the high speed atwhich the air bag must be deployed.

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf you do not sit in the correct seat position,the air bag cannot protect as intended andcould even cause additional injury whendeployed. This poses an increased risk ofinjury or even fatal injury.

To avoid hazardous situations, always makesure that all of the vehicle's occupants:Rhave fastened their seat belts correctly,including pregnant womenRare sitting correctly andmaintain the great-est possible distance to the air bagsRfollow the following instructionsAlways make sure that there are no objectsbetween the air bag and the vehicle's occu-pants.

RAdjust the seats properly before beginningyour journey. Always make sure that theseat is in an almost upright position. Thecenter of the head restraint must supportthe head at about eye level.RMove the driver's and front-passengerseats as far back as possible. The driver'sseat position must allow the vehicle to bedriven safely.ROnly hold the steering wheel on the out-side. This allows the air bag to be fullydeployed.RAlways lean against the backrest while driv-ing. Do not lean forwards or lean againstthe door or side window. You may other-wise be in the deployment area of the airbags.RAlways keep your feet in the footwell infront of the seat. Do not put your feet on thedashboard, for example. Your feet may oth-erwise be in the deployment area of the airbag.RFor this reason, always secure persons lessthan 5 ft (1.50 m) tall in suitable restraintsystems. Up to this height, the seat beltcannot be worn correctly.

If a child is traveling in your vehicle, alsoobserve the following notes:RAlways secure children under twelve yearsof age and less than 5 ft (1.50 m) tall insuitable child restraint systems.RChild restraint systems should be installedon the rear seats.

50 Occupant safetySafety

ROnly secure a child in a rearward-facingchild restraint system on the front-passenger seat when the front-passengerfront air bag is deactivated. If thePASSENGER AIR BAGOFF indicator lamp ispermanently lit, the front-passenger frontair bag is deactivated (Y page 45).RAlways observe the instructions and safetynotes on the "Occupant Classification Sys-tem (OCS)" (Y page 53) and on "Childrenin the vehicle" (Y page 64) in addition tothe child restraint system manufacturer'sinstallation instructions.

Objects in the vehicle interior may pre-vent an air bag from functioning correctly.Before starting your journey and to avoid risksresulting from the speed of the air bag as itdeploys, make sure that:Rthere are no people, animals or objectsbetween the vehicle occupants and an airbag.Rthere are no objects between the seat, doorand B-pillar.Rno hard objects, e.g. coat hangers, hang onthe grab handles or coat hooks.Rno accessories, such as cup holders, areattached to the vehicle within the deploy-ment area of an air bag, e.g. to doors, sidewindows, rear side trim or side walls.Rno heavy, sharp-edged or fragile objectsare in the pockets of your clothing. Storesuch objects in a suitable place.

G WARNINGIf you modify the air bag cover or affix objectssuch as stickers to it, the air bag can no longerfunction correctly. There is an increased riskof injury.Never modify an air bag cover or affix objectsto it.

G WARNINGSensors to control the air bags are located inthe doors. Modifications or work not per-formed correctly to the doors or door panel-ing, as well as damaged doors, can lead to the

function of the sensors being impaired. The airbags might therefore not function properlyany more. Consequently, the air bags cannotprotect vehicle occupants as they aredesigned to do. There is an increased risk ofinjury.Never modify the doors or parts of the doors.Always have work on the doors or door pan-eling carried out at a qualified specialist work-shop.

Front air bags

Driver's air bag: deploys in front of thesteering wheel. Front-passenger front airbag; deploys in front of and above the glovebox.When deployed, the front air bags offer addi-tional head and thorax protection for theoccupants in the front seats.The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lampinforms you about the status of the front-passenger front air bag (Y page 45).The front-passenger front air bag will onlydeploy if:Rthe system, based on the OCS weight sen-sor readings, detects that the front-passenger seat is occupied (Y page 53)Rthe PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicatorlamp is not lit (Y page 54)Rthe restraint system control unit predicts ahigh accident severity

Occupant safety 51

Safety

Z

Knee bags

Driver's knee bag: deploys under the steer-ing column and front-passenger knee bag;under the glove box. The driver's and front-passenger knee bags are triggered togetherwith the front air bags.The driver's and front-passenger knee bagsoffer additional thigh, knee and lower leg pro-tection for the occupants in the front seats.

Side impact air bags

G WARNINGUnsuitable seat covers could restrict or evenprevent the deployment of the air bags inte-grated into the seats. Consequently, the airbags cannot protect vehicle occupants asthey are designed to do. In addition, the func-tion of the Occupant Classification System(OCS) could be restricted. This poses anincreased risk of injury or even fatal injury.You should only use seat covers that havebeen approved for the respective seat byMercedes-Benz.

Front side impact air bags: and rear sideimpact air bags; deploy next to the outerbolster of the seat backrest.When deployed, the side impact air bag offersadditional thorax protection. However, it doesnot protect the:RheadRneckRarmsIn the event of a side impact, the side impactair bag is deployed on the side on which theimpact occurs.The side impact air bag on the front-passenger side (front) deploys under the fol-lowing conditions:Rthe OCS system detects that the front-passenger seat is occupied orRthe belt tongue is engaged in the beltbuckle of the front-passenger seat

If the belt tongue is engaged in the beltbuckle, the side impact air bag on the front-passenger side deploys if an appropriate acci-dent situation occurs. In this case, deploy-ment is independent of whether the front-passenger seat is occupied or not.

Pelvis air bags

G WARNINGUnsuitable seat covers could restrict or evenprevent the deployment of the air bags inte-grated into the seats. Consequently, the airbags cannot protect vehicle occupants asthey are designed to do. In addition, the func-tion of the Occupant Classification System(OCS) could be restricted. This poses anincreased risk of injury or even fatal injury.You should only use seat covers that havebeen approved for the respective seat byMercedes-Benz.

52 Occupant safetySafety

Pelvis air bags: deploy below next to theouter seat cushions.When activated, the pelvis air bag enhancesthe level of protection of the vehicle occu-pants on the side of the vehicle on which theimpact occurs.The pelvis air bag is deployed on the side ofthe impact.The pelvis air bag on the front-passenger sidedoes not deploy under the following condi-tions:ROCS has detected that the front-passengerseat is unoccupied.Rthe front-passenger seat belt is not fas-tened.

If the belt tongue is engaged in the beltbuckle, the pelvis air bag on the front-passenger side deploys if an appropriate acci-dent situation occurs. In this case, deploy-ment is independent of whether the front-passenger seat is occupied or not.

Window curtain air bags

Window curtain air bags: are integratedinto the side of the roof frame and deployed inthe area from the A-pillar to the C-pillar.When deployed, the window curtain air bagenhances the level of protection for the head.However, it does not protect the chest orarms.In the event of a side impact, the window cur-tain air bag is deployed on the side on whichthe impact occurs.If the system determines that they can offeradditional protection to that provided by theseat belt, a window curtain air bag may bedeployed in other accident situations(Y page 59).

Occupant Classification System(OCS)

IntroductionThe Occupant Classification System (OCS)categorizes the person in the front-passengerseat. Depending on that result, the front-passenger front air bag and front-passengerknee bag are either enabled or deactivated.The system does not deactivate:Rthe side impact air bagRthe pelvis air bagRthe window curtain air bagRthe Emergency Tensioning Devices

PrerequisitesTo be classified correctly, the front passengermust sit:Rwith the seat belt fastened correctlyRin an almost upright position with theirback against the seat backrestRwith their feet resting on the floor, if possi-ble

Occupant safety 53

Safety

Z

If the front passenger does not observe theseconditions, OCS may produce a false classi-fication, e.g. because the front passenger:Rtransfers their weight by supporting them-selves on a vehicle armrestRsits in such a way that their weight is raisedfrom the seat cushion

If it is absolutely necessary to install a childrestraint system on the front-passenger seat,be sure to observe the correct positioning ofthe child restraint system. Never placeobjects under or behind the child restraintsystem, e.g. cushions. The entire base of thechild restraint systemmust always rest on theseat cushion of the front-passenger seat. Thebackrest of the forward-facing child restraintsystemmust lie as flat as possible against thebackrest of the front-passenger seat.The child restraint systemmust not touch theroof or be subjected to a load by the headrestraint. Adjust the angle of the seat back-rest and the head restraint position accord-ingly.Only then can OCS be guaranteed to functioncorrectly. Always observe the child restraintsystem manufacturer's installation instruc-tions.

Occupant Classification System opera-tion (OCS)

PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp:shows you whether the front-passenger frontair bag is deactivated.X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in theignition lock or on vehicles with KEYLESS-

GO, press the Start/Stop button once ortwice.The system carries out self-diagnostics.

The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lampmust light up for approximately six seconds.The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lampthen displays the status of the front-passenger front air bag. If the status of thefront-passenger front air bag changes whilethe vehicle is in motion, an air bag displaymessage may appear in the instrument clus-ter (Y page 254). When the front-passengerseat is occupied, always pay attention to thePASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp. Beaware of the status of the front-passengerfront air bag both before and during the jour-ney.If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicatorlamp:Ris lit: the front-passenger front air bag isdeactivated. It will then not be deployed inthe event of an accident.Rdoes not light up: the front-passengerfront air bag is enabled. If, in the event of anaccident, all deployment criteria are met,the front-passenger front air bag isdeployed.

G WARNINGIf the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicatorlamp is lit, the front-passenger front air bag isdisabled. It will not be deployed in the event ofan accident and cannot perform its intendedprotective function. A person in the front-passenger seat could then, for example, comeinto contact with the vehicle's interior, espe-cially if the person is sitting too close to thedashboard. This poses an increased risk ofinjury or even fatal injury.When the front-passenger seat is occupied,always ensure that:Rthe classification of the person in the front-passenger seat is correct and the front-passenger front air bag is enabled or disa-

54 Occupant safetySafety

bled in accordance with the person in thefront-passenger seatRthe front-passenger seat has been movedback as far back as possible.Rthe person is seated correctly.Make sure, both before and during the jour-ney, that the status of the front-passengerfront air bag is correct.

G WARNINGIf you secure a child in a child restraint systemon the front-passenger seat and thePASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp isoff, the front-passenger front air bag candeploy in the event of an accident. The childcould be struck by the air bag. This poses anincreased risk of injury or even fatal injury.Make sure that the front-passenger front airbag has been disabled. The PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp must be lit.

G WARNINGIf you secure a child in a forward-facing childrestraint system on the front-passenger seatand you position the front-passenger seat tooclose to the dashboard, the child could, in theevent of an accident:Rcome into contact with the vehicle's inte-rior if the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indi-cator lamp is lit, for exampleRbe struck by the air bag if the PASSENGERAIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is off

This poses an increased risk of injury or evenfatal injury.Move the front-passenger seat as far back aspossible. Always make sure that the shoulderbelt strap is correctly routed from the vehiclebelt sash guide to the shoulder belt guide onthe child restraint system. The shoulder beltstrap must be routed forwards and down-wards from the vehicle belt sash guide. If nec-essary, adjust the vehicle belt sash guide andthe front-passenger seat accordingly. Alwaysobserve the child restraint system manufac-turer's installation instructions.

If OCS determines that:Rthe front-passenger seat is unoccupied, thePASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamplights up after the system self-test andremains lit. This indicates that the front-passenger front air bag is deactivated.Rthe front-passenger seat is occupied by achild of up to twelve months old, in a stand-ard child restraint system, the PASSENGERAIR BAG OFF indicator lamp lights up afterthe system self-test and remains lit. Thisindicates that the front-passenger front airbag is deactivated.But even in the case of a twelve-month-oldchild, in a standard child restraint system,the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicatorlamp can go out after the system self-test.This indicates that the front-passengerfront air bag is activated. The result of theclassification is dependent on, amongother factors, the child restraint systemand the child's stature. It is recommendedthat you install the child restraint systemona suitable rear seat.Rthe front-passenger seat is occupied by aperson of smaller stature (e.g. a teenageror small adult), the PASSENGER AIR BAGOFF indicator lamp lights up and remains litafter the system self-test depending on theresult of the classification or, alternatively,goes out.- If the PASSENGERAIR BAGOFF indicatorlamp is off, move the front-passengerseat as far back as possible. Alterna-tively, a person of smaller stature can siton a rear seat.

- If the PASSENGERAIR BAGOFF indicatorlamp is lit, a person of smaller statureshould not use the front-passenger seat.

Rthe front-passenger seat is occupied by anadult or a person of a stature correspond-ing to that of an adult, the PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp goes out after thesystem self-test. This indicates that thefront-passenger front air bag is activated.

Occupant safety 55

Safety

Z

If children are traveling in the vehicle, be sureto observe the notes on "Children in the vehi-cle" (Y page 64).When OCS is malfunctioning, the red 6restraint system warning lamp in the instru-ment cluster and the PASSENGER AIR BAGOFF indicator lamp light up simultaneously.The front-passenger front air bag is deactiva-ted in this case and does not deploy during anaccident. Have the system checked by quali-fied technicians as soon as possible. Consultan authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. Thefront-passenger seat should only be repairedat an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.If the front-passenger seat, the seat cover orthe seat cushion is damaged, have the nec-essary repair work carried out at an author-ized Mercedes-Benz Center.For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recom-mends that you only use seat accessoriesthat have been approved by Mercedes-Benz.If the driver's air bag deploys, this does notmean that the front-passenger front air bagwill also deploy. The Occupant ClassificationSystem (OCS) categorizes the occupant in thefront-passenger seat. Depending on thatresult, the front-passenger front air bag iseither enabled or deactivated.

System self-test

G DANGERIf the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicatorlamp does not light up during the system self-test, then the system is malfunctioning. Thefront-passenger front air bag might be trig-gered unintentionally or might not be trig-gered at all in the event of an accident withhigh deceleration. This poses an increasedrisk of injury or even fatal injury.In this case the front-passenger seat may notbe used. Do not install a child restraint systemon the front-passenger seat. Have the Occu-pant Classification System (OCS) checkedand repaired immediately at a qualified spe-cialist workshop.

G DANGERIf the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicatorlamp remains lit after the system self-test, thefront-passenger front air bag is disabled. It willnot be deployed in the event of an accident. Inthis case, the front-passenger front air bagcannot perform its intended protective func-tion, e.g. when a person is seated in the front-passenger seat.That person could, for example, come intocontact with the vehicle's interior, especiallyif the person is sitting too close to the dash-board. This poses an increased risk of injury oreven fatal injury.When the front-passenger seat is occupied,always ensure that:Rthe classification of the person in the front-passenger seat is correct and the front-passenger front air bag is enabled or disa-bled in accordance with the person in thefront-passenger seatRthe person is seated properly with a cor-rectly fastened seatbeltRthe front-passenger seat has been movedback as far back as possible

If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicatorlamp remains lit when it should not, the front-passenger seat may not be used. Do notinstall a child restraint system on the front-passenger seat. Have the Occupant Classifi-cation System (OCS) checked and repairedimmediately at a qualified specialist work-shop.

G WARNINGObjects between the seat surface and thechild restraint system could affect OCS oper-ation. This could result in the front-passengerair bag not functioning as intended during anaccident. This poses an increased risk ofinjury or even fatal injury.Do not place any objects between the seatsurface and the child restraint system. Theentire base of the child restraint system mustalways rest on the seat cushion of the front-passenger seat. The backrest of the forward-

56 Occupant safetySafety

facing child restraint system must, as far aspossible, be resting on the backrest of thefront-passenger seat. Always comply with thechild restraint system manufacturer's instal-lation instructions.

After the system self-test, the PASSENGERAIR BAG OFF indicator lamp displays the sta-tus of the front-passenger front air bag(Y page 54).For more information about the OCS, see"Problems with the Occupant ClassificationSystem" (Y page 58).

Occupant safety 57

Safety

Z

Problems with the Occupant Classification System (OCS)Be sure to observe the notes on "System self-test" (Y page 56).

Problem Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

The PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicatorlamp lights up andremains lit, eventhough the front-passenger seat is occu-pied by an adult or aperson of a stature cor-responding to that of anadult.

The classification of the person on the front-passenger seat isincorrect.X Make sure the conditions for a correct classification of the per-son on the front-passenger seat are met (Y page 53).

X If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp remains lit, thefront-passenger seat may not be used.

X Have OCS checked as soon as possible at an authorizedMercedes-Benz Center.

The PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicatorlamp does not light upand/or does not stayon.The front-passengerseat is:RunoccupiedRoccupied by theweight of a child upto 12 months old in achild restraint sys-tem

OCS is malfunctioning.X Make sure there is nothing between the seat cushion and thechild seat.

X Make sure that the entire base of the child restraint system restson the seat cushion of the front-passenger seat. The backrest ofthe forward-facing child restraint systemmust lie as flat as pos-sible against the backrest of the front-passenger seat. If nec-essary, adjust the position of the front-passenger seat.

X When installing the child restraint system, make sure that theseat belt is tight. Do not pull the seat belt tight using the front-passenger seat adjustment. This could result in the seat belt andthe child restraint system being pulled too tightly.

X Check for correct installation of the child restraint system.Make sure that the head restraint does not apply a load to thechild restraint system. If necessary, adjust the head restraintaccordingly.

X Make sure that no objects are applying additional weight ontothe seat.

X If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp remains off, donot install a child restraint system on the front-passenger seat.It is recommended that you install the child restraint system ona suitable rear seat.

X Have OCS checked as soon as possible at an authorizedMercedes-Benz Center.

58 Occupant safetySafety

Deployment of Emergency TensioningDevices and air bags

Important safety notes

G WARNINGThe air bag parts are hot after an air bag hasbeen deployed. There is a risk of injury.Do not touch the air bag parts. Have adeployed air bag replaced at a qualified spe-cialist workshop as soon as possible.

G WARNINGA deployed air bag no longer offers any pro-tection and cannot provide the intended pro-tection in an accident. There is an increasedrisk of injury.Have the vehicle towed to a qualified special-ist workshop in order to have a deployed airbag replaced.

It is important for your safety and that of yourpassenger to have deployed air bags replacedand to have any malfunctioning air bagsrepaired. This will help to make sure the airbags continue to perform their protectivefunction for the vehicle occupants in theevent of a crash.

G WARNINGPyrotechnic Emergency Tensioning Devicesthat have been deployed are no longer opera-tional and are unable to perform their inten-ded protective function. This poses anincreased risk of injury or even fatal injury.Therefore, have pyrotechnic Emergency Ten-sioning Devices which have been triggeredimmediately replaced at a qualified specialistworkshop.

An electric motor is used by PRE-SAFE® totrigger the tightening of the seat belt in haz-ardous situations. This procedure is reversi-ble.If Emergency Tensioning Devices are trig-gered or air bags are deployed, you will hear abang, and a small amount of powder may also

be released. The 6 restraint system warn-ing lamp lights up.Only in rare cases will the bang affect yourhearing. The powder that is released gener-ally does not constitute a health hazard, but itmay cause short-term breathing difficulties inpeople with asthma or other respiratory prob-lems. To avoid this, youmay wish to get out ofthe vehicle or open the windows as soon as itis safe to do so.Air bags and pyrotechnic Emergency Tension-ing Devices (ETDs) contain perchlorate mate-rial, which may require special handling andregard for the environment. National guide-lines must be observed during disposal. InCalifornia, see www.dtsc.ca.gov/HazardousWaste/Perchlorate/index.cfm.

Method of operationDuring the first stage of a collision, therestraint system control unit evaluates impor-tant physical data relating to vehicle deceler-ation or acceleration, such as:RdurationRdirectionRintensityBased on the evaluation of this data, therestraint system control unit triggers theEmergency Tensioning Devices during a fron-tal or rear collision.An Emergency Tensioning Device can only betriggered, if:Rthe ignition is switched onRthe components of the restraint system areoperational; see "Restraint system warninglamp" (Y page 45)Rthe belt tongue is engaged in the buckle onthe respective front-passenger seat

The Emergency Tensioning Devices in therear compartment are triggered independ-ently of the lock status of the seat belts.If the restraint system control unit detects amore severe accident, further components of

Occupant safety 59

Safety

Z

the restraint system are activated independ-ently of each other in certain frontal collisionsituations:RFront air bags and driver's knee bagRWindow curtain air bag, if the system deter-mines that deployment can offer additionalprotection to that provided by the seat belt

The front-passenger front air bag is activatedor deactivated depending on the person onthe front-passenger seat. The front-passenger front air bag can only deploy in anaccident if the PASSENGER AIR BAGOFF indi-cator lamp is off. Observe the information onthe PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp(Y page 45).Your vehicle has two-stage front air bags.During the first deployment stage, the frontair bag is filled with propellant gas to reducethe risk of injuries. The front air bag is fullydeployed with the maximum amount of pro-pellant gas if a second deployment thresholdis reached within a few milliseconds.The activation threshold of the EmergencyTensioning Devices and the air bag are deter-mined by evaluating the rate of vehicle decel-eration or acceleration which occurs at vari-ous points in the vehicle. This process is pre-emptive in nature. Deployment should takeplace in good time at the start of the collision.The rate of vehicle deceleration or accelera-tion and the direction of the force are essen-tially determined by:Rthe distribution of forces during the colli-sionRthe collision angleRthe deformation characteristics of the vehi-cleRthe characteristics of the object with whichthe vehicle has collided

Factorswhich can only be seen andmeasuredafter a collision has occurred do not play adecisive role in the deployment of an air bag.Nor do they provide an indication of air bagdeployment.

The vehicle can be deformed considerably,without an air bag being deployed. This is thecase if only parts which are relatively easilydeformed are affected and the rate of decel-eration is not high. Conversely, air bags maybe deployed even though the vehicle suffersonly minor deformation. This is the case if, forexample, very rigid vehicle parts such as lon-gitudinal bodymembers are hit, and sufficientdeceleration occurs as a result.If the restraint system control unit detects aside impact or if the vehicle rolls over, theapplicable components of the restraint sys-tem are activated independently of eachother depending on the apparent type of acci-dent.RSide impact air bags and pelvis air bag onthe side of impact, independently of theEmergency Tensioning Device and the useof the seat belt on the driver's seat andouter seats in the second row- the OCS system detects that the front-passenger seat is occupied or

- the belt tongue is engaged in the beltbuckle of the front-passenger seat

RWindow curtain air bag on the side ofimpact, independently of the use of theseat belt and independently of whether thefront-passenger seat is occupiedREmergency Tensioning Device, if the sys-tem determines that deployment can offeradditional protection in this situationRWindow curtain air bags on the driver's andfront-passenger side in certain situationswhen the vehicle rolls over, if the systemdetermines that deployment can offer addi-tional protection to that provided by theseat belt

i Not all air bags are deployed in an acci-dent. The different air bag systems workindependently of each other.

60 Occupant safetySafety

How the air bag system works is deter-mined by the severity of the accident detec-ted, especially the vehicle deceleration oracceleration and the apparent type of acci-dent:Rfrontal collisionRside impactRrollover

NECK-PRO head restraints/NECK-PRO luxury head restraints

Important safety notes

G WARNINGThe function of the head restraint may beimpaired if you:Rattach objects such as coat hangers to thehead restraints, for exampleRuse head restraint coversIf you do so, the head restraints cannot fulfilltheir intended protective function in the eventof an accident. In addition, objects attachedto the head restraints could endanger othervehicle occupants. There is an increased riskof injury.Do not attach any objects to the headrestraints and do not use head restraint cov-ers.

Method of operationNECK-PROhead restraints/NECK-PRO luxuryhead restraints offer additional protectionagainst head and neck injuries. In the event ofa rear collision of a certain severity, theNECK-PRO head restraints/NECK-PRO luxury headrestraints on the driver's and front-passengerseats are moved forwards and upwards. Thisprovides better head support.If the NECK-PRO head restraints/NECK-PROluxury head restraints have been triggered inan accident, reset the NECK-PRO headrestraints/NECK-PRO luxury head restraintson the driver's seat and the front-passengerseat (Y page 61). Otherwise, the additional

protection will not be available in the event ofanother rear-end collision. You can see that aNECK-PRO head restraint/NECK-PRO luxuryhead restraint has been triggered if it is tiltedforward and can no longer be adjusted.Mercedes-Benz recommends that you havethe functionality of the NECK-PRO headrestraints/NECK-PRO luxury head restraintschecked at a qualified specialist workshopafter a rear-end collision.

Resetting a triggered NECK-PRO headrestraint/NECK-PRO luxury headrestraint

NECK-PRO head restraints

Do not insert your finger between the cushionof the head restraint and the cover. Pay par-ticular attention while resetting the NECK-PRO head restraints.X Tilt the top of the NECK-PRO head restraintcushion forwards in the direction ofarrow:.

X Push the NECK-PRO head restraint cushiondown as far as it will go in the direction ofarrow;.

X With your hand flat, firmly push the NECK-PRO head restraint cushion backwards inthe direction of arrow= until it engages.

X Repeat this procedure for the secondNECK-PRO head restraint.

i Resetting the NECK-PRO head restraintsrequires a lot of strength. If you have diffi-culty resetting the NECK-PRO head

Occupant safety 61

Safety

Z

restraints, have this work carried out at aqualified specialist workshop.

NECK-PRO luxury head restraints

Do not insert your finger between the cushionof the head restraint and the cover. Pay par-ticular attention while resetting the NECK-PRO luxury head restraints.X Remove resetting tool: from the vehicledocument wallet.

X Slide resetting tool: into guide;between the NECK-PRO luxury headrestraint and the rear cover of the headrestraint.

X Push resetting tool: downwards until youhear the head restraint deployment mech-anism engage.

X Pull out resetting tool:.X With your hand flat, firmly push the NECK-PRO luxury head restraint cushion back-wards in the direction of arrow= until itengages.

X Repeat this procedure for the secondNECK-PRO luxury head restraint.

X Put resetting tool: back into the vehicledocument wallet.

i If you have difficulty resetting the NECK-PRO luxury head restraints, have this workcarried out at a qualified specialist work-shop.

PRE-SAFE® (anticipatory occupantprotection system)

Introduction

In certain hazardous situations, PRE-SAFE®takes pre-emptive measures to protect thevehicle occupants.

Important safety notes

! Make sure that there are no objects in thefootwell or behind the seats. There is a dan-ger that the seats and/or objects could bedamaged when PRE-SAFE® is activated.

Although your vehicle is equipped with PRE-SAFE®, the possibility of injury in the event ofan accident cannot be ruled out. Alwaysadapt your driving style to suit the prevailingroad and weather conditions and maintain asafe distance from the vehicle in front. Drivecarefully.

Function

PRE-SAFE® intervenes:Rin emergency braking situations, e.g. whenBAS is activatedRin critical driving situations, e.g. when phys-ical limits are exceeded and the vehicleundersteers or oversteers severelyRon vehicles with the Driving Assistancepackage: if BAS PLUS intervenes power-fully or the radar sensor system detects animminent danger of collision in certain sit-uations

PRE-SAFE® takes the following measuresdepending on the hazardous situation detec-ted:Rthe front seat belts are pre-tensioned.Rthe front-passenger seat is adjusted if it isin an unfavorable position.

62 Occupant safetySafety

Rif the vehicle skids, the sliding sunroof andthe side windows are closed so that only asmall gap remains.Rvehicles with a multicontour seat or activemulticontour seat: the air pressure in theside bolsters of the backrest is increased.

If the hazardous situation passes withoutresulting in an accident, PRE-SAFE® slackensthe belt pre-tensioning. On vehicles with mul-ticontour seats/active multicontour seats,the air pressure in the side bolsters is reducedagain. All settings made by PRE-SAFE® canthen be reversed.If the seat belt pre-tensioning is not reduced:X Move the seat backrest or seat backslightly when the vehicle is stationary.The seat belt pre-tensioning is reduced andthe locking mechanism is released.

The seat-belt adjustment is an integral part ofthe PRE-SAFE® convenience function. Youwill find information on the convenience func-tion under "Belt adjustment" (Y page 49).

PRE-SAFE® PLUS (anticipatory occu-pant protection system PLUS)

Introduction

PRE-SAFE® PLUS is only available in vehicleswith the Driving Assistance package.Using the radar sensor system, PRE-SAFE®PLUS is able to detect that a head-on or rear-end collision is imminent. In certain hazard-ous situations, PRE-SAFE® PLUS takes pre-emptive measures to protect the vehicleoccupants.

Important safety notes

The intervention of PRE-SAFE® PLUS cannotprevent an imminent collision.The driver is not warned about the interven-tion of PRE-SAFE® PLUS.PRE-SAFE® PLUS does not intervene if thevehicle is backing up.

PRE-SAFE® PLUS does not perform brakingactions while the vehicle is in motion or whenParking Guidance is active.

Function

PRE-SAFE® PLUS intervenes in certain situa-tions if the radar sensor system detects animminent head-on or rear-end collision.PRE-SAFE® PLUS takes the following meas-ures depending on the hazardous situationdetected:Rif the radar sensor system detects that ahead-on collision is imminent, the seatbelts are pre-tensioned.Rif the radar sensor system detects that arear-end collision is imminent:- the brake pressure is increased if thedriver applies the brakes when the vehi-cle is stationary.

- the seat belts are pre-tensioned.The PRE-SAFE® PLUS braking application iscanceled:Rif the accelerator pedal is depressed whena gear is engagedRif the risk of a collision passes or is no lon-ger detectedRif DISTRONIC PLUS indicates an intentionto pull away

If the hazardous situation passes withoutresulting in an accident, the original settingsare restored.

Automatic measures after an acci-dentImmediately after an accident, the followingmeasures are implemented, depending onthe type and severity of the impact:Rthe hazard warning lamps are activatedRthe emergency lighting is activatedRthe vehicle doors are unlockedRthe front side windows are lowered

Occupant safety 63

Safety

Z

Rvehicles with a memory function: the elec-trically adjustable steering wheel is raisedRthe engine is switched off and the fuel sup-ply is cut offRvehicles with mbrace: automatic emer-gency call

Children in the vehicle

Important safety notesAccident statistics show that childrensecured in the rear seats are safer than chil-dren secured in the front-passenger seat. Forthis reason, Mercedes-Benz strongly advisesthat you install a child restraint system on arear seat. Children are generally better pro-tected there.If a child under 12 years of age and under 5 ft(1.50 m) in height is traveling in the vehicle:Ralways secure the child in a child restraintsystem suitable for Mercedes-Benz vehi-cles. The child restraint system must beappropriate to the age, weight and size ofthe childRbe sure to observe the instructions andsafety notes in this section in addition tothe child restraint system manufacturer'sinstallation instructionsRbe sure to observe the instructions andsafety notes on the "Occupant classifica-tion system (OCS)" (Y page 53)

G WARNINGIf you leave children unsupervised in the vehi-cle, they could set it inmotion by, for example:Rrelease the parking brake.Rshift the automatic transmission out of theparking position P.Rstart the engine.In addition, they may operate vehicle equip-ment and become trapped. There is a risk ofan accident and injury.

When leaving the vehicle, always take theSmartKeywith you and lock the vehicle. Neverleave children unsupervised in the vehicle.

G WARNINGIf persons, particularly children are subjectedto prolonged exposure to extreme heat orcold, there is a risk of injury, possibly evenfatal. Never leave children unattended in thevehicle.

G WARNINGIf the child restraint system is subjected todirect sunlight, parts may get very hot. Chil-dren may burn themselves on these parts,particularly on the metal parts of the childrestraint system. There is a risk of injury.If you leave the vehicle, taking the child withyou, always ensure that the child restraintsystem is not exposed to direct sunlight. Pro-tect it with a blanket, for example. If the childrestraint system has been exposed to directsunlight, let it cool down before securing thechild in it. Never leave children unattended inthe vehicle.

Always ensure that all vehicle occupants havetheir seat belts fastened correctly and are sit-ting properly. Particular attention must bepaid to children.Observe the safety notes on the seat belt(Y page 46) and the notes on correct use ofseat belts (Y page 47).A booster seat may be necessary to achieveproper seat belt positioning for children over41 lbs (18 kg) until they reach a height wherea three-point seat belt fits properly without abooster seat.

Special seat belt retractor

G WARNINGIf the seat belt is released while driving, thechild restraint system will no longer besecured properly. The special seat belt retrac-tor is disabled and the inertia real draws in a

64 Children in the vehicleSafety

portion of the seat belt. The seat belt cannotbe immediately refastened. There is anincreased risk of injury, possibly even fatal.Stop the vehicle immediately, paying atten-tion to road and traffic conditions. Reactivatethe special seat belt retractor and secure thechild restraint system properly.

All seat belts except the driver's seat belt areequipped with a special seat belt retractor.When activated, the special seat belt retrac-tor ensures that the seat belt will not slackenonce the child restraint system has beensecured.Installing a child restraint system:X Always comply with the child restraint sys-tem manufacturer's installation instruc-tions.

X Pull the seat belt smoothly from the beltoutlet.

X Engage the seat belt tongue in the beltbuckle.

Activating the special seat belt retractor:X Pull the seat belt out fully and let the inertiareel retract it again.While the seat belt is retracting, you shouldhear a ratcheting sound. The special seatbelt retractor is activated.

X Push the child seat restraint system downso that the seat belt is tight and does notloosen.

Removing a child restraint system and deac-tivating the special seat belt retractor:X Always comply with the child restraint sys-tem manufacturer's installation instruc-tions.

X Press the release button of the belt buckle,hold the belt tongue firmly and guide it backtowards the belt outlet.The special seat belt retractor is deactiva-ted.

Child restraint systemThe use of seat belts and child restraint sys-tems is required by law in:Rall 50 statesRthe U.S. territoriesRthe District of ColumbiaRall Canadian provincesYou can obtain further information about thecorrect child restraint system from anyauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

G WARNINGIf the child restraint system is installed incor-rectly on a suitable seat, it cannot protect asintended. The child cannot then be restrainedin the event of an accident, heavy braking orsudden changes of direction. There is anincreased risk of injury, possibly even fatal.Make sure that you observe the child restraintsystem manufacturer's installation instruc-tions and the notes on use. Please ensure,that the base of the child restraint system isalways resting completely on the seat cush-ion. Never place objects, e.g. cushions, underor behind the child restraint system. Only usechild restraint systems with the original coverdesigned for them. Only replace damagedcovers with genuine covers.

G WARNINGIf the child restraint system is installed incor-rectly or is not secured, it can come loose inthe event of an accident, heavy braking or asudden change in direction. The childrestraint system could be thrown about, strik-ing vehicle occupants. There is an increasedrisk of injury, possibly even fatal.Always install child restraint systems prop-erly, even if they are not being used. Makesure that you observe the child restraint sys-tem manufacturer's installation instructions.

You will find further information on stowingobjects, luggage or loads under "Loadingguidelines" (Y page 286).

Children in the vehicle 65

Safety

Z

G WARNINGChild restraint systems or their securing sys-tems which have been damaged or subjectedto a load in an accident can no longer protectas intended. The child cannot then berestrained in the event of an accident, heavybraking or sudden changes of direction. Thereis an increased risk of injury, possibly evenfatal.Replace child restraint systems which havebeen damaged or subjected to a load in anaccident as soon as possible. Have the secur-ing systems on the child restraint systemchecked at a qualified specialist workshop,before you install a child restraint systemagain.

The securing systems of child restraint sys-tems are:Rthe seat belt systemRthe LATCH-type (ISOFIX) securing ringsRthe Top Tether anchoragesIf it is absolutely necessary to carry a child onthe front-passenger seat, be sure to observethe information on the "Occupant Classifica-tion System (OCS)" (Y page 53). There youwill also find information on deactivating thefront-passenger front air bag.All child restraint systems must meet the fol-lowing standards:RU.S. Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Stand-ards 213 and 225RCanadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards213 and 210.2

Confirmation that the child restraint systemcorresponds to the standards can be foundon an instruction label on the child restraintsystem. This confirmation can also be foundin the installation instructions that are inclu-ded with the child restraint system.Observe thewarning labels in the vehicle inte-rior and on the child restraint system.

LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seat secur-ing system

G WARNINGLATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint systemsdo not offer sufficient protective effect forchildren whose weight is greater than 48 lbs(22 kg) who are secured using the safety beltintegrated in the child restraint system. In theevent of an accident, a child might not berestrained correctly. This poses an increasedrisk of injury or even fatal injury.If the child weighs more than 48 lbs (22 kg),only use LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraintsystems with which the child is also securedwith the vehicle seat belt. Also secure thechild restraint system with the Top Tetherbelt, if available.

Always comply with the manufacturer'sinstallation and operating instructions for thechild restraint system used.Before every trip, make sure that the LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint system isengaged correctly in both LATCH-type (ISO-FIX) securing rings

When installing the LATCH-type (ISOFIX) childrestraint system, fold protective caps; ofsecuring rings: inwards.X Install the LATCH-type (ISOFIX) childrestraint system on both LATCH-type (ISO-FIX) securing rings:.

ISOFIX is a standardized securing system forspecially designed child restraint systems onthe rear seats. LATCH-type (ISOFIX) securingrings: for two LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child

66 Children in the vehicleSafety

restraint systems are installed on the left andright rear seats.Non-LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seats mayalso be used and can be installed using thevehicle's seat belt system. Install the childseat according to the manufacturer's instruc-tions.

Top Tether

IntroductionTop Tether provides an additional connectionbetween the child restraint system securedwith a LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seat mountand the vehicle. This helps reduce the risk ofinjury even further. If the child restraint sys-tem is equipped with a Top Tether belt, thisshould always be used.

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf the rear seat backrests are not locked, theycould fold forwards in the event of an acci-dent, heavy braking or sudden changes ofdirection. As a result, child restraint systemscannot perform their intended protectivefunction. Rear seat backrests that are notlocked can also cause additional injuries, e.g.in the event of an accident. This poses anincreased risk of injury or even fatal injury.Always lock rear seat backrests after instal-ling a Top Tether belt. Observe the lock veri-fication indicator. Adjust the rear seat backr-ests so that they are in an upright position.

If the rear seat backrest is not engaged andlocked, this will be shown in themultifunctiondisplay in the instrument cluster. A warningtone also sounds.

Top Tether anchoragesThe Top Tether anchorage points are locatedin the rear compartment behind the headrestraints.

X Move head restraint: upwards.X Fold up cover; of Top Tether anchorage=.

X Install the LATCH-type (ISOFIX) childrestraint system with Top Tether. Alwayscomply with the child restraint systemmanufacturer's installation instructionswhen doing so.

X Route Top Tether beltA under headrestraint:between the twohead restraintbars.

X Hook Top Tether hook? into Top Tetheranchorage=.

X Make sure that Top Tether beltA is nottwisted.

X Tension Top Tether beltA. Always complywith the child restraint systemmanufactur-er's installation instructionswhen doing so.

X Fold down cover; of Top Tether anchor-age=.

X Move head restraint: back down againslightly if necessary (Y page 109).Make sure that you do not interferewith thecorrect routing of Top Tether beltA.

Children in the vehicle 67

Safety

Z

Child restraint system on the front-passenger seat

General notesAccident statistics show that childrensecured in the rear seats are safer than chil-dren secured in the front-passenger seat. Forthis reason, Mercedes-Benz strongly advisesthat you install the child restraint system on arear seat.If it is absolutely necessary to install a childrestraint system on the front-passenger seat,be sure to observe the instructions and safetynotes on the "Occupant Classification System(OCS)" (Y page 53).You can thus avoid the risks that could ariseas a result of:Ran incorrectly categorized person in thefront-passenger seatRthe unintentional deactivation of the front-passenger front air bagRthe unsuitable positioning of the childrestraint system, e.g. too close to the dash-board

Rearward-facing child restraint systemIf it is absolutely necessary to install a rear-ward-facing child restraint system on thefront-passenger seat, always make sure thatthe front-passenger front air bag is deactiva-ted. Only if the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFFindicator lamp is permanently lit (Y page 45)is the front-passenger front air bag deactiva-ted.Always observe the child restraint systemmanufacturer's installation and operatinginstructions.

Forward-facing child restraint systemIf it is absolutely necessary to install aforward-facing child restraint system on thefront-passenger seat, always move the front-passenger seat as far back as possible. Theentire base of the child restraint systemmustalways rest on the seat cushion of the front-

passenger seat. The backrest of the childrestraint system must lie as flat as possibleagainst the backrest of the front-passengerseat. The child restraint system must nottouch the roof or be subjected to a load by thehead restraint. Adjust the angle of the seatbackrest and the head restraint positionaccordingly. Alwaysmake sure that the shoul-der belt strap is correctly routed from thevehicle belt outlet to the shoulder belt guideon the child restraint system. The shoulderbelt strapmust be routed forwards and down-wards from the vehicle belt outlet. If neces-sary, adjust the vehicle belt outlet and thefront-passenger seat accordingly.Always observe the child restraint systemmanufacturer's installation and operatinginstructions.

Child-proof locks

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf children are traveling in the vehicle, theycould:Ropen doors, thus endangering other peopleor road usersRexit the vehicle and be caught by oncomingtrafficRoperate vehicle equipment and becometrapped

There is a risk of an accident and injury.Always activate the child-proof locks andoverride feature if children are traveling in thevehicle. When leaving the vehicle, always takethe key with you and lock the vehicle. Neverleave children unattended in the vehicle.

Override feature for:Rthe rear doors (Y page 69)Rthe rear side windows (Y page 69)

68 Children in the vehicleSafety

G WARNINGIf you leave children unsupervised in the vehi-cle, they could set it inmotion by, for example:Rrelease the parking brake.Rshift the automatic transmission out of theparking position P.Rstart the engine.In addition, they may operate vehicle equip-ment and become trapped. There is a risk ofan accident and injury.When leaving the vehicle, always take theSmartKeywith you and lock the vehicle. Neverleave children unsupervised in the vehicle.

G WARNINGIf persons, particularly children are subjectedto prolonged exposure to extreme heat orcold, there is a risk of injury, possibly evenfatal. Never leave children unattended in thevehicle.

G WARNINGIf the child restraint system is subjected todirect sunlight, parts may get very hot. Chil-dren may burn themselves on these parts,particularly on the metal parts of the childrestraint system. There is a risk of injury.If you leave the vehicle, taking the child withyou, always ensure that the child restraintsystem is not exposed to direct sunlight. Pro-tect it with a blanket, for example. If the childrestraint system has been exposed to directsunlight, let it cool down before securing thechild in it. Never leave children unattended inthe vehicle.

Child-proof locks for the rear doors

You secure each door individually with thechild-proof locks on the rear doors. A doorsecured with a child-proof lock cannot beopened from inside the vehicle. When thevehicle is unlocked, the door can be openedfrom the outside.X To activate: press the child-proof locklever up in the direction of arrow:.

X Make sure that the child-proof locks areworking properly.

X To deactivate: press the child-proof locklever down in the direction of arrow;.

Override feature for the rear side win-dows

X To activate/deactivate: press button;.If indicator lamp: is lit, operation of therear side windows is disabled. Operation isonly possible using the switches in the driv-er's door. If indicator lamp: is off, oper-ation is possible using the switches in therear compartment.

Children in the vehicle 69

Safety

Z

Pets in the vehicle

G WARNINGIf you leave animals unattended or unsecuredin the vehicle, they could press buttons orswitches, for example.As a result, they could:Ractivate vehicle equipment and becometrapped, for exampleRactivate or deactivate systems, therebyendangering other road users

Unsecured animals could also be flung aroundthe vehicle in the event of an accident or sud-den steering or braking, thereby injuring vehi-cle occupants. There is a risk of an accidentand injury.Never leave animals unattended in the vehi-cle. Always secure animals properly duringthe journey, e.g. use a suitable animal trans-port box.

Driving safety systems

Overview of driving safety systemsIn this section, you will find information aboutthe following driving safety systems:RABS (Anti-lock Braking System)(Y page 70)RBAS (Brake Assist System) (Y page 71)RBASPLUS (BrakeAssistSystemPLUS)withCross-Traffic Assist (Y page 71)RCOLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS(distance warning function and AdaptiveBrake Assist) (Y page 73)RESP® (Electronic Stability Program)(Y page 75)REBD (Electronic Brake force Distribution)(Y page 78)RADAPTIVE BRAKE (Y page 79)RPRE-SAFE® Brake (Y page 79)

Important safety notesIf you fail to adapt your driving style or if youare inattentive, the driving safety systems canneither reduce the risk of an accident noroverride the laws of physics. Driving safetysystems are merely aids designed to assistdriving. You are responsible for maintainingthe distance to the vehicle in front, for vehiclespeed, for braking in good time, and for stay-ing in lane. Always adapt your driving style tosuit the prevailing road and weather condi-tions and maintain a safe distance from thevehicle in front. Drive carefully.The driving safety systems described onlywork as effectively as possible when there isadequate contact between the tires and theroad surface. Please pay special attention tothe notes on tires, recommended minimumtire tread depths, etc. (Y page 344).Inwintry driving conditions, always usewintertires (M+S tires) and if necessary, snowchains. Only in this way will the driving safetysystems described in this section work aseffectively as possible.

ABS (Anti-lock Braking System)

General informationABS regulates brake pressure in such a waythat the wheels do not lock when you brake.This allows you to continue steering the vehi-cle when braking.The yellow ! ABS warning lamp in theinstrument cluster lights up when the ignitionis switched on. It goes out when the engine isrunning.

Important safety notes

i Observe the "Important safety notes" sec-tion (Y page 70).

G WARNINGIf ABS is faulty, the wheels could lock whenbraking. The steerability and braking charac-teristics may be severely impaired. Addition-

70 Driving safety systemsSafety

ally, further driving safety systems are deac-tivated. There is an increased danger of skid-ding and accidents.Drive on carefully. Have ABS checked imme-diately at a qualified specialist workshop.

When ABS is malfunctioning, other systems,including driving safety systems, will alsobecome inoperative. Observe the informationon the ABS warning lamp (Y page 276) anddisplay messages which may be shown in theinstrument cluster (Y page 246).ABS works from a speed of about 5 mph(8 km/h), regardless of road-surface condi-tions. ABS works on slippery surfaces, even ifyou only brake gently.

BrakingX If ABS intervenes: continue to depress thebrake pedal vigorously until the braking sit-uation is over.

X To make a full brake application:depress the brake pedal with full force.

If ABS intervenes when braking, you will feel apulsing in the brake pedal.The pulsating brake pedal can be an indica-tion of hazardous road conditions, and func-tions as a reminder to take extra care whiledriving.

BAS (Brake Assist System)

General informationBAS operates in emergency braking situa-tions. If you depress the brake pedal quickly,BAS automatically boosts the braking force,thus shortening the stopping distance.

Important safety notes

i Observe the "Important safety notes" sec-tion (Y page 70).

G WARNINGIf BAS is malfunctioning, the braking distancein an emergency braking situation isincreased. There is a risk of an accident.In an emergency braking situation, depressthe brake pedal with full force. ABS preventsthe wheels from locking.

BrakingX Keep the brake pedal firmly depressed untilthe emergency braking situation is over.ABS prevents the wheels from locking.

The brakes will function as usual once yourelease the brake pedal. BAS is deactivated.

BAS PLUS (Brake Assist PLUS) withCross-Traffic Assist

General information

i Observe the "Important safety notes" sec-tion (Y page 70).

BAS PLUS is only available on vehicles withthe Driving Assistance package.For BAS PLUS to assist you when driving, theradar sensor system and the camera systemmust be operational.With the help of a sensor system and a cam-era system, BAS PLUS can detect obstacles:Rthat are in the path of your vehicle for anextended period of timeRthat cross the path of your vehicleIn addition, pedestrians in the path of yourvehicle can be detected.BAS PLUS detects pedestrians by using typi-cal characteristics such as the body contoursand posture of a person standing upright.If the radar sensor system or the camera sys-tem is malfunctioning, BAS PLUS functionsare restricted or no longer available. Thebrake system is still available with completebrake boosting effect and BAS.

Driving safety systems 71

Safety

Z

i Observe the restrictions described in the"Important safety notes" sec-tion“ (Y page 72).

BAS PLUS can help you tominimize the risk ofa collision with a vehicle or a pedestrian andreduce the effects of such a collision. If BASPLUS detects a danger of collision, you areassisted when braking.

Important safety notes

G WARNINGBAS PLUS cannot always clearly identifyobjects and complex traffic situations.In such cases, BAS PLUS may:Rintervene unnecessarilyRnot interveneThere is a risk of an accident.Always pay careful attention to the traffic sit-uation and be ready to brake. Terminate theintervention in a non-critical driving situation.

G WARNINGBAS PLUS does not react:Rto small people, e.g. childrenRto animalsRto oncoming vehiclesRwhen corneringAs a result, BAS PLUSmay not intervene in allcritical situations. There is a risk of an acci-dent.Always pay careful attention to the traffic sit-uation and be ready to brake.

In the event of snowfall or heavy rain, the rec-ognition can be impaired.Recognition by the radar sensor system isalso impaired in the event of:Rthere is dirt on the sensors or anything elsecovering the sensorsRthere is interference by other radar sourcesRthere are strong radar reflections, forexample in parking garages

Ra narrow vehicle traveling in front, e.g. amotorbikeRa vehicle traveling in front on a different lineRvehicles quickly moving into the radar sen-sor system detection range

Recognition by the camera system is alsoimpaired in the event of:Rdirt on the camera or if the camera is cov-eredRthere is glare on the camera system, e.g.from the sun being low in the skyRdarknessRif:

- pedestrians move quickly, e.g. into thepath of the vehicle

- the camera system no longer recognizesa pedestrian as a person due to specialclothing or other objects

- a pedestrian is concealed by otherobjects

- the typical outline of a person is not dis-tinguishable from the background

Following damage to the front end of the vehi-cle, have the configuration and operation ofthe radar sensors checked at a qualified spe-cialist workshop. This also applies to colli-sions at low speeds where there is no visibledamage to the front of the vehicle.Following damage to the windshield, have theconfiguration and operation of the camerasystemchecked at a qualified specialist work-shop.

FunctionTo avoid a collision, BAS PLUS calculates thebrake force necessary if:Ryou approach an obstacle, andRBAS PLUS has detected a risk of collisionWhen driving at a speed under 20 mph(30 km/h): if you depress the brake pedal,BAS PLUS is activated. The increase in brakepressure will be carried out at the last possi-ble moment.

72 Driving safety systemsSafety

When driving at a speed above 20 mph(30 km/h): if you depress the brake pedalsharply, BAS PLUS automatically raises thebrake pressure to a value adapted to the traf-fic situation.BAS PLUS provides braking assistance in haz-ardous situations with vehicles in front withina speed range between 4 mph (7 km/h) and155 mph (250 km/h).Up to a speed of approximately 44 mph(70 km/h), BAS PLUS may react to:Rstationary objects in the path of your vehi-cle, e.g. stopped or parked vehiclesRpedestrians in the path of your vehicleRobjects crossing your path and that arerecognized in the detection range of thesensors

i If BAS PLUS demands particularly highbraking force, preventative passenger pro-tection measures (PRE-SAFE®) are activa-ted simultaneously.

X Keep the brake pedal depressed until theemergency braking situation is over.ABS prevents the wheels from locking.

BAS PLUS is deactivated and the brakes func-tion as usual, if:Ryou release the brake pedal.Rthere is no longer a risk of collision.Rno obstacle is detected in front of yourvehicle.Ryou depress the accelerator pedal.Ryou activate kickdown.

COLLISION PREVENTION ASSISTPLUS

General informationCOLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS con-sists of a distance warning function with anautonomous braking function and adaptiveBrake Assist.COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS canhelp you to minimize the risk of a front-end

collision with a vehicle ahead or reduce theeffects of such a collision.If COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUSdetects that there is a risk of a collision, youwill be warned visually and acoustically. If youdo not react to the visual and audible collisionwarning, autonomous braking can be initiatedin critical situations. If you apply the brakeyourself in a critical situation, the COLLISIONPREVENTION ASSIST PLUS adaptive BrakeAssist assists you.

Activating or deactivatingCOLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS isactivated after every ignition cycle. You canactivate or deactivate COLLISION PREVEN-TION ASSIST PLUS in the on-board computer(Y page 236). When deactivated, the dis-tance warning function and the autonomousbraking function are also deactivated.If COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS isdeactivated, theæ symbol appears in theassistance graphics display.

Important safety notesIn particular, the detection of obstacles canbe impaired if:Rthere is dirt on the sensors or anything elsecovering the sensorsRthere is snow or heavy rainRthere is interference by other radar sourcesRthere are strong radar reflections, forexample in parking garagesRa narrow vehicle traveling in front, e.g. amotorbikeRa vehicle traveling in front on a different lineRnew vehicles or after a service on the COL-LISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS systemObserve the notes in the section on break-ing-in (Y page 148).

Following damage to the front end of the vehi-cle, have the configuration and operation ofthe radar sensor checked at a qualified spe-cialist workshop. This also applies to colli-

Driving safety systems 73

Safety

Z

sions at low speeds where there is no visibledamage to the front of the vehicle.

Distance warning function

General informationThe distancewarning function can help you tominimize the risk of a front-end collision witha vehicle ahead or reduce the effects of sucha collision. If the distance warning functiondetects that there is a risk of a collision, youwill be warned visually and acoustically.

Important safety notesi Observe the "Important safety notes" sec-tion for driving safety systems (Y page 70).

G WARNINGThe distance warning function does not react:Rto people or animalsRto oncoming vehiclesRto crossing trafficRwhen corneringThus, the distance warning function cannotprovide a warning in all critical situations.There is a risk of an accident.Always pay careful attention to the traffic sit-uation and be ready to brake.

G WARNINGThe distance warning function cannot alwaysclearly identify objects and complex trafficsituations.In such cases, the distance warning functionmay:Rgive an unnecessary warningRnot give a warningThere is a risk of an accident.Always pay careful attention to the traffic sit-uation and do not rely solely on the distancewarning function.

FunctionStarting at a speed of around 4mph (7 km/h),the distance warning function warns you if

you rapidly approach a vehicle in front. Anintermittent warning tone will then sound,and the· distance warning lamp will lightup in the instrument cluster.X Brake immediately in order to increase thedistance from the vehicle in front.

orX Take evasive action, provided it is safe to doso.

Due to the nature of the system, particularlycomplicated but non-critical driving condi-tions may also cause the system to display awarning.With the help of the radar sensor system, thedistance warning function can detect obsta-cles that are in the path of your vehicle for anextended period of time.Up to a speed of around 44 mph (70 km/h),the distance warning function can also reactto stationary obstacles, such as stopped orparked vehicles.

Autonomous braking functionIf the driver does not react to the distancewarning signal in a critical situation, COLLI-SION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS can assistwith the autonomous braking function.The autonomous braking function:Rgives the driver more time to react to criti-cal driving situationsRcan help the driver to avoid an accident orRreduces the effects of an accidentThe autonomous braking function is availablein the following speed ranges:Rfrom 4 mph (7 km/h) to approx. 65 mph(105 km/h) for moving objectsRfrom 4 mph (7 km/h) to approx. 31 mph(50 km/h) for stationary objects

If the autonomous braking function requires aparticularly high braking force, preventativepassenger protection measures (PRE-SAFE®)are activated simultaneously.

74 Driving safety systemsSafety

Adaptive Brake Assist

i Observe the "Important safety notes" sec-tion (Y page 70).

Adaptive Brake Assist provides braking assis-tance in hazardous situations at speedsabove 4 mph (7 km/h). It uses radar sensortechnology to assess the traffic situation.

G WARNINGAdaptive Brake Assist cannot always clearlyidentify objects and complex traffic situa-tions.In such cases, Adaptive Brake Assist can:Rintervene unnecessarilyRnot interveneThere is a risk of an accident.Always pay careful attention to the traffic sit-uation and be ready to brake. Terminate theintervention in a non-critical driving situation.

G WARNINGAdaptive Brake Assist does not react:Rto people or animalsRto oncoming vehiclesRto crossing trafficRwhen corneringAs a result, the Adaptive Brake Assist may notintervene in all critical conditions. There is arisk of an accident.Always pay careful attention to the traffic sit-uation and be ready to brake.

Due to the nature of the system, particularlycomplicated but non-critical driving condi-tions may also cause Brake Assist to inter-vene.If adaptive Brake Assist is not available due toa malfunction in the radar sensor system, thebrake system remains available with fullbrake boosting effect and BAS.With the help of adaptive Brake Assist, thedistance warning signal can detect obstaclesthat are in the path of your vehicle for anextended period of time.

If adaptive Brake Assist detects a risk of col-lision with the vehicle in front, it calculatesthe braking force necessary to avoid a colli-sion. If you apply the brakes forcefully, adap-tive Brake Assist will automatically increasethe braking force to a level suitable for thetraffic conditions.X Keep the brake pedal depressed until theemergency braking situation is over.ABS prevents the wheels from locking.

The brakes will work normally again if:Ryou release the brake pedal.Rthere is no longer any danger of a collision.Rno obstacle is detected in front of yourvehicle.

Adaptive Brake Assist is then deactivated.If adaptive Brake Assist demands particularlyhigh braking force, preventative passengerprotection measures (PRE-SAFE®) are activa-ted simultaneously.Up to a speed of approximately 155 mph(250 km/h), adaptive Brake Assist is capableof reacting to moving objects that havealready been detected as such at least onceover the period of observation.Up to a speed of approximately 44 mph(70 km/h), adaptive Brake Assist reacts tostationary obstacles.

ESP® (Electronic Stability Program)

General notes

i Observe the "Important safety notes" sec-tion (Y page 70).

ESP® monitors driving stability and traction,i.e. power transmission between the tires andthe road surface.If ESP® detects that the vehicle is deviatingfrom the direction desired by the driver, oneor more wheels are braked to stabilize thevehicle. The engine output is also modified tokeep the vehicle on the desired course withinphysical limits. ESP® assists the driver when

Driving safety systems 75

Safety

Z

pulling away on wet or slippery roads. ESP®can also stabilize the vehicle during braking.

ETS/4ETS (Electronic Traction System)

ETS traction control is part of ESP®. On vehi-cles with 4MATIC, 4ETS is part of ESP®.Traction control brakes the drive wheels indi-vidually if they spin. This enables you to pullaway and accelerate on slippery surfaces, forexample if the road surface is slippery on oneside. In addition, more drive torque is trans-ferred to the wheel or wheels with traction.Traction control remains active, even if youdeactivate ESP®.

Important safety notes

i Observe the "Important safety notes" sec-tion (Y page 70).

G WARNINGIf ESP® is malfunctioning, ESP® is unable tostabilize the vehicle. Additionally, further driv-ing safety systems are deactivated. Thisincreases the risk of skidding and an accident.Drive on carefully. Have ESP® checked at aqualified specialist workshop.

! Vehicles with 4MATIC: function or per-formance tests may only be carried out ona 2-axle dynamometer. Before you operatethe vehicle on such a dynamometer, pleaseconsult a qualified workshop. You couldotherwise damage the drive train or thebrake system.

Vehicles without 4MATIC: observe the noteson ESP® (Y page 339) when towing the vehi-cle with a raised rear axle.ESP® is only deactivated if the å warninglamp is lit continuously.If the ÷ warning lamp and the å warn-ing lamp are lit continuously, ESP® not avail-able due to a malfunction.Observe the information on warning lamps(Y page 277) and display messages which

may be shown in the instrument cluster(Y page 246).

i Only use wheels with the recommendedtire sizes. Only then will ESP® functionproperly.

Characteristics of ESP®

General informationIf the ÷ ESP warning lamp goes out beforebeginning the journey, ESP® is automaticallyactive.If ESP® intervenes, the ÷ ESP® warninglamp flashes in the instrument cluster.If ESP® intervenes:X Do not deactivate ESP® under any circum-stances.

X Only depress the accelerator pedal as far asnecessary when pulling away.

X Adapt your driving style to suit the prevail-ing road and weather conditions.

ECO start/stop functionThe ECO start/stop function switches theengine off automatically when the vehiclestops moving. The engine starts automati-callywhen the driverwants to pull away again.ESP® remains in its previously selected sta-tus.Example: if ESP®was deactivated beforethe engine was switched off, ESP® remainsdeactivated when the engine is switched onagain.

Deactivating/activating ESP® (exceptAMG vehicles)

Important safety notesYou can select between the following statesof ESP®:RESP® is activated.RESP® is deactivated.

76 Driving safety systemsSafety

G WARNINGIf you deactivate ESP®, ESP® no longer sta-bilizes the vehicle. There is an increased riskof skidding and an accident.Only deactivate ESP® in the situations descri-bed in the following.

! Avoid spinning the driven wheels for anextended period with ESP® deactivated.You could otherwise damage the drivetrain.

It may be best to deactivate ESP® in the fol-lowing situations:Rwhen using snow chainsRin deep snowRon sand or gravel

i Activate ESP® as soon as the situationsdescribed above no longer apply. ESP® willotherwise not be able to stabilize the vehi-cle if the vehicle starts to skid or a wheelstarts to spin.

Deactivating/activating ESP®

You can deactivate or activate ESP® via theon-board computer (Y page 235).ESP® deactivated:The å ESP® OFF warning lamp in theinstrument cluster lights up.ESP® activated:The å ESP® OFF warning lamp in theinstrument cluster goes out.

Characteristics when ESP® is deactivatedIf ESP® is deactivated and one ormorewheelsstart to spin, the ÷ ESP® warning lamp inthe instrument cluster flashes. In such situa-tions, ESP® will not stabilize the vehicle.If you deactivate ESP®:RESP® no longer improves driving stability.Rengine torque is no longer limited and thedrive wheels are able to spin.The spinning of the wheels results in a cut-ting action for better traction on loose sur-faces.

Rtraction control is still activated.RESP® still provides support when youbrake.

Deactivating/activating ESP® (AMGvehicles)

Important safety notesYou can select between the following statesof ESP®:RESP® is activated.RSPORT handling mode is activated.RESP® is deactivated.

G WARNINGWhen SPORT handling mode is activated,there is a greater risk of skidding and acci-dents.Only activate SPORT handling mode in the sit-uations described in the following.

G WARNINGIf you deactivate ESP®, ESP® no longer sta-bilizes the vehicle. There is an increased riskof skidding and an accident.Only deactivate ESP® in the situations descri-bed in the following.

! Avoid spinning the driven wheels for anextended period with ESP® deactivated.You could otherwise damage the drivetrain.

In the following situations, it may be better toactivate SPORT handling mode or deactivateESP®:Rwhen using snow chainsRin deep snowRon sand or gravelRon specially designated roads when thevehicle's own oversteering and understeer-ing characteristics are desired

Driving in SPORT handling mode or withoutESP® requires an extremely qualified andexperienced driver.

Driving safety systems 77

Safety

Z

i Activate ESP® as soon as the situationsdescribed above no longer apply. ESP® willotherwise not be able to stabilize the vehi-cle if the vehicle starts to skid or a wheelstarts to spin.

Deactivating/activating ESP®

X To activate SPORT handling mode:briefly press button:.TheM SPORT handling mode warninglamp in the instrument cluster lights up.The SPORT handling modeSPORT handling mode messageappears in the multifunction display.

X To deactivate SPORT handling mode:briefly press button:.TheM SPORT handling mode warninglamp in the instrument cluster goes out.

X To deactivate ESP®: press button: untilthe å ESP® OFF warning lamp lights upin the instrument cluster.The ÷ OFFOFFmessage appears in the mul-tifunction display.

X To activate ESP®: briefly press button:.The å ESP® OFF warning lamp in theinstrument cluster goes out. The ÷ ONONmessage appears in the multifunction dis-play.

Characteristics of activated SPORT han-dling modeIf SPORT handling mode is activated and oneor more wheels start to spin, the ÷ ESP®warning lamp in the instrument clusterflashes. ESP® only stabilizes the vehicle to alimited degree.

When SPORT handling mode is activated:RESP® only improves driving stability to alimited degree.Rtraction control is still activated.Rengine torque is restricted to a limiteddegree and the drive wheels are able tospin.The spinning of the wheels results in a cut-ting action for better traction on loose sur-faces.RESP® still provides support when you brakefirmly.

Characteristics when ESP® is deactivatedIf ESP® is deactivated and one ormorewheelsstart to spin, the ÷ ESP® warning lamp inthe instrument cluster does not flash. In suchsituations, ESP® will not stabilize the vehicle.If you deactivate ESP®:RESP® no longer improves driving stability.Rengine torque is restricted to a limiteddegree and the drive wheels are able tospin.The spinning of the wheels results in a cut-ting action for better traction on loose sur-faces.Rtraction control is still activated.RPRE-SAFE® is no longer available, nor is itactivated if you brake firmly and ESP®intervenes.RPRE-SAFE® Brake is no longer available, itis also not activated if you brake firmly andESP® intervenes.RESP® still provides support when you brakefirmly.

EBD (electronic brake force distribu-tion)

General informationEBD monitors and controls the brake pres-sure on the rear wheels to improve drivingstability while braking.

78 Driving safety systemsSafety

Important safety notes

i Observe the "Important safety notes" sec-tion for driving safety systems (Y page 70).

G WARNINGIf EBD is malfunctioning, the rear wheels canlock, e.g. under full braking. This increases therisk of skidding and an accident.You should therefore adapt your driving styleto the different handling characteristics. Havethe brake system checked at a qualified spe-cialist workshop.

Observe information regarding indicator andwarning lamps (Y page 276) as well as dis-play messages (Y page 248).

ADAPTIVE BRAKEi Observe the "Important safety notes" sec-tion (Y page 70).

ADAPTIVE BRAKE enhances braking safetyand offers increased braking comfort. In addi-tion to the braking function, ADAPTIVEBRAKEalso has the HOLD function (Y page 191) andhill start assist (Y page 152).

PRE-SAFE® Brake

General information

i Observe the "Important safety notes" sec-tion (Y page 70).

PRE‑SAFE® Brake is only available for vehi-cles with the Driving Assistance package.For PRE-SAFE® Brake to assist you when driv-ing, the radar sensor system and the camerasystem must be switched on and be opera-tional.With the help of the radar sensor system andthe camera system, PRE-SAFE® Brake candetect obstacles that are in front of your vehi-cle for an extended period of time.In addition, pedestrians in the path of yourvehicle can be detected.

PRE-SAFE® Brake detects pedestrians usingtypical characteristics such as the body con-tours and posture of a person standingupright.Observe the restrictions described in the"Important safety notes" sec-tion“ (Y page 79).PRE-SAFE® Brake can help you to minimizethe risk of a collision with a vehicle ahead or apedestrian, and reduce the effects of such acollision. If PRE-SAFE® Brake has detected arisk of collision, you will be warned visuallyand acoustically as well as by automatic brak-ing.

Important safety notes

G WARNINGPRE-SAFE® Brake will initially brake your vehi-cle by a partial application of the brakes if adanger of collision is detected. There may bea collision unless you brake yourself. Evenafter subsequent full application of the brakesa collision cannot always be avoided, partic-ularly when approaching at too high a speed.There is a risk of an accident.Always apply the brakes yourself and try totake evasive action, provided it is safe to doso.

G WARNINGPRE-SAFE® Brake cannot always clearly iden-tify objects and complex traffic conditions.In these cases, PRE-SAFE® Brake may:Rgive an unnecessary warning and thenbrake the vehicleRnot give a warning or interveneThere is a risk of an accident.Always pay particular attention to the trafficsituation and be ready to brake, especially ifPRE-SAFE® Brake warns you. Terminate theintervention in a non-critical driving situation.

Driving safety systems 79

Safety

Z

In order to maintain the appropriate distanceto the vehicle in front and thus prevent a col-lision, you must apply the brakes yourself.PRE-SAFE® Brake can also brake the vehicleautomatically under the following conditions:Rthe driver and front-passenger have theirseat belts fastenedandRthe vehicle speed is between approx-imately 4 mph (7 km/h) and 124 mph(200 km/h)

At a speed of up to approximately 44 mph(70 km/h), PRE-SAFE®Brake can also detect:Rstationary objects in the path of your vehi-cle, e.g. stopped or parked vehiclesRpedestrians in the path of your vehicle

G WARNINGPRE-SAFE® Brake does not react:Rto small people, e.g. childrenRto animalsRto oncoming vehiclesRto crossing trafficRwhen corneringAs a result, PRE-SAFE® Brake may neithergive warnings nor intervene in all critical sit-uations. There is a risk of an accident.Always pay careful attention to the traffic sit-uation and be ready to brake.

In the event of snowfall or heavy rain, the rec-ognition can be impaired.Recognition by the radar sensor system isalso impaired in the event of:Rthere is dirt on the sensors or anything elsecovering the sensorsRthere is interference by other radar sourcesRthere are strong radar reflections, forexample in parking garagesRa narrow vehicle traveling in front, e.g. amotorbikeRa vehicle traveling in front on a different linerelative to the center of your vehicle

Recognition by the camera system is alsoimpaired in the event of:Rdirt on the camera or if the camera is cov-eredRthere is glare on the camera system, e.g.from the sun being low in the skyRdarknessRif:

- pedestrians move quickly, e.g. into thepath of the vehicle

- the camera system no longer recognizesa pedestrian as a person due to specialclothing or other objects

- a pedestrian is concealed by otherobjects

- the typical outline of a person is not dis-tinguishable from the background

Following damage to the front end of the vehi-cle, have the configuration and operation ofthe radar sensors checked at a qualified spe-cialist workshop. This also applies to colli-sions at low speeds where there is no visibledamage to the front of the vehicle.Following damage to the windshield, have theconfiguration and operation of the camerasystemchecked at a qualified specialist work-shop.

FunctionX To activate/deactivate: activate or deac-tivate PRE-SAFE® Brake in the on-boardcomputer (Y page 236).If the PRE-SAFE®Brake is not activated, theæ symbol appears in the multifunctiondisplay.

Starting at a speed of around 4mph (7 km/h),this function warns you if you rapidlyapproach a vehicle in front. An intermittentwarning tone will then sound and the·distance warning lamp will light up in theinstrument cluster.

80 Driving safety systemsSafety

X Brake immediately to defuse the situation.orX Take evasive action provided it is safe to doso.

If there is an increased risk of collision, pre-ventive passenger protectionmeasures (PRE-SAFE®) are activated.If the risk of collision with the vehicle in frontremains and you do not brake, take evasiveaction or accelerate significantly, the vehiclemay perform automatic emergency braking,up to the point of full brake application. Auto-matic emergency braking is not performeduntil immediately prior to an imminent acci-dent.You can prevent the intervention of the PRE-SAFE® Brake at any time by:Rdepressing the accelerator pedal further.Ractivating kickdown.Rreleasing the brake pedal.The braking action of PRE-SAFE® Brake isended automatically if:Ryou maneuver to avoid the obstacle.Rthere is no longer a risk of collision.Rthere is no longer an obstacle detected infront of your vehicle.

Protection against theft

ImmobilizerThe immobilizer prevents your vehicle frombeing started without the correct SmartKey.X To activate with the SmartKey: removethe SmartKey from the ignition lock.

X To activatewith KEYLESS-GO: switch theignition off and open the driver's door.

X To deactivate: switch on the ignition.When leaving the vehicle, always take theSmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Any-one can start the engine if a valid SmartKeyhas been left inside the vehicle.

i The immobilizer is always deactivatedwhen you start the engine.In the event that the engine cannot be star-ted (yet the vehicle's battery is charged),the system is not operational. Contact anauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center or call1-800-FOR-MERCedes (in the USA) or1-800-387-0100 (in Canada).

ATA (anti-theft alarm system)

X To arm: lock the vehicle with the SmartKeyor KEYLESS-GO.Indicator lamp: flashes. The alarm sys-tem is armed after approximately15 seconds.

X To disarm: unlock the vehicle with theSmartKey or KEYLESS-GO.

orX Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock.

A visual and audible alarm is triggered if thealarm system is armed and you open:Ra doorRthe vehicle with the mechanical keyRthe trunk lidRthe hoodX To switch the alarm off with the Smart-Key: press the% or& button on theSmartKey.The alarm is switched off.

or

Protection against theft 81

Safety

Z

X Remove the Start/Stop button from theignition lock.

X Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock.The alarm is switched off.

X To stop the alarm using KEYLESS-GO:grasp the outside door handle. The Smart-Key must be outside the vehicle.The alarm is switched off.

orX Press the Start/Stop button on the dash-board. The SmartKey must be inside thevehicle.The alarm is switched off.

The alarm is not switched off, even if youclose the open door that triggered it, forexample.

i If the alarm continues for more than30 seconds, the mbrace emergency callsystem automatically notifies the Cus-tomer Assistance Center. This is doneeither by text message or data connection.The emergency call system sends the mes-sage or data provided that:Ryou have subscribed to the mbrace ser-vice.Rthe mbrace service has been activatedproperly.Rthe necessary mobile phone network isavailable.

82 Protection against theftSafety

Useful information .............................. 84SmartKey ............................................. 84Doors .................................................... 90Trunk .................................................... 92Side windows ...................................... 97Sliding sunroof .................................. 100

83

Openingandclosing

Useful information

i This Operator's Manual describes allmodels and all standard and optional equip-ment of your vehicle available at the time ofpublication of the Operator's Manual.Country-specific differences are possible.Please note that your vehicle may not beequipped with all features described. Thisalso applies to safety-related systems andfunctions.

i Read the information on qualified special-ist workshops (Y page 26).

SmartKey

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf children are left unsupervised in the vehicle,they could:Ropen the doors, thus endangering otherpeople or road users.Rget out and disrupt traffic.Roperate the vehicle's equipment.Additionally, children could set the vehicle inmotion if, for example, they:Rrelease the parking brake.Rshifting the automatic transmission out ofpark position PRStart the engine.There is a risk of an accident and injury.When leaving the vehicle, always take theSmartKeywith you and lock the vehicle. Neverleave children or animals unattended in thevehicle. Always keep the SmartKey out ofreach of children.

G WARNINGIf you attach heavy or large objects to theSmartKey, the SmartKey could be uninten-tionally turned in the ignition lock. This couldcause the engine to be switched off. There is arisk of an accident.

Do not attach any heavy or large objects to theSmartKey. Remove any bulky key rings beforeinserting the SmartKey into the ignition lock.

! Keep the SmartKey away from strongmagnetic fields. Otherwise, the remotecontrol function could be affected.Strong magnetic fields can occur in thevicinity of powerful electrical installations.

Do not keep the SmartKey:Rwith electronic devices, e.g. a mobilephone or another SmartKey.Rwith metallic objects, e.g. coins or metalfoil.Rinside metallic objects, e.g. a metal case.This can affect the functionality of theSmartKey.

SmartKey functions

: & To lock the vehicle; F To unlock the trunk lid= % To unlock the vehicle

X To lock centrally: press the& button.The SmartKey centrally locks/unlocks:Rthe doorsRthe trunk lidRthe fuel filler flapThe turn signals flash once when unlockingand three times when locking.You can also set an audible signal to confirmthat the vehicle has been locked. The audible

84 SmartKeyOp

eningandclosing

signal can be activated and deactivated usingthe on-board computer (Y page 240).When it is dark, the surround lighting alsocomes on if it is activated in the on-boardcomputer (Y page 239).

KEYLESS-GO

General notesBear inmind that the engine can be started byany of the vehicle occupants if there is a KEY-LESS-GO key in the vehicle.

Locking/unlocking centrallyYou can start, lock or unlock the vehicle usingKEYLESS-GO. To do this, you only need carrythe SmartKey with you. You can combine thefunctions of KEYLESS-GOwith those of a con-ventional SmartKey. Unlock the vehicle byusing KEYLESS-GO, for instance, and lock itusing the& button on the SmartKey.When locking or unlocking with KEYLESS-GO,the distance between the SmartKey and thecorresponding door handle must not begreater than 3 ft (1 m).A checkwhich periodically establishes a radioconnection between the vehicle and theSmartKey determines whether a valid Smart-Key is in the vehicle. This occurs, for example:Rwhen the external door handles aretouchedRwhen starting the engineRwhile the vehicle is in motion

X To unlock the vehicle: touch the innersurface of the door handle.

X To lock the vehicle: touch sensor sur-face:.

X Convenience closing feature: touchrecessed sensor surface; for an exten-ded period.Further information on the convenienceclosing feature (Y page 98).

X To unlock the trunk lid: pull the handle onthe trunk lid.The vehicle only unlocks the trunk lid.

Deactivating and activatingIf you do not intend to use a key for an exten-ded period of time, you can deactivate theKEYLESS-GO function of the SmartKey. TheSmartKey will then use very little power,thereby conserving battery power. For thepurposes of activation/deactivation, thevehicle must not be nearby.X To deactivate: press the& button onthe SmartKey twice in rapid succession.The battery check lamp of the SmartKey(Y page 87) flashes twice briefly andlights up once, then KEYLESS-GO is deac-tivated.

X To activate: press any button on theSmartKey or insert the SmartKey into theignition lock.KEYLESS-GO and all of its associated fea-tures are available again.

SmartKey 85

Openingandclosing

Z

Changing the settings of the lockingsystemYou can change the settings of the lockingsystem. Thismeans that only the driver's doorand the fuel filler flap are unlocked when thevehicle is unlocked. This is useful if you fre-quently travel on your own.X To change the setting: press and holddown the% and& buttons on theSmartKey simultaneously for approx-imately six seconds until the battery checklamp flashes twice (Y page 87).i If the setting of the locking system ischanged within the signal range of the vehi-cle, pressing the& or% button:Rlocks orRunlocks the vehicle

The SmartKey now functions as follows:X To unlock the driver's door: press the% button once.

X To unlock centrally: press the% but-ton twice.

X To lock centrally: press the& button.

The KEYLESS-GO function is changed as fol-lows:X To unlock the driver's door: touch theinner surface of the door handle on thedriver's door.

X To unlock centrally: touch the inner sur-face of the door handle on the front-passenger door or the rear door.

X To lock centrally: touch the outer sensorsurface on one of the door handles.

X To restore the factory settings: pressand hold down the% and& buttonssimultaneously for approximately six sec-onds until the battery check lamp flashestwice (Y page 87).

Mechanical key

General notesIf the vehicle can no longer be locked orunlocked with the SmartKey, use themechanical key.If you use the mechanical key to unlock andopen the driver's door or the trunk lid, theanti-theft alarm system will be triggered(Y page 81).There are several ways to turn off the alarm:X To deactivate the alarmwith the Smart-Key: press the% or& button on theSmartKey.

orX Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock.orX To deactivate the alarm with KEYLESS-GO: press the Start/Stop button in the igni-tion lock. The SmartKey must be in thevehicle.

orX Lock or unlock the vehicle using KEYLESS-GO. The SmartKey must be outside thevehicle.

If you unlock the vehicle using themechanicalkey, the fuel filler flap will not be unlockedautomatically.X To unlock the fuel filler flap: insert theSmartKey into the ignition lock.

Removing the mechanical key

86 SmartKeyOp

eningandclosing

X Push release catch: in the direction ofthe arrow and at the same time removemechanical key; from the SmartKey.

For further information about:Runlocking the driver's door (Y page 92)Runlocking the trunk (Y page 96)Rlocking the vehicle (Y page 92)

Inserting the mechanical keyX Push mechanical key; completely intothe SmartKey until it engages and releasecatch: is back in its basic position.

SmartKey battery

Checking the battery

X Press the& or% button.The battery is working properly if batterycheck lamp: lights up briefly.The battery is discharged if battery checklamp: does not light up briefly.

X Change the battery (Y page 87).i If the SmartKey battery is checked withinthe signal reception range of the vehicle,pressing the& or% button:Rlocks orRunlocks the vehicle

i You can get a battery at any qualified spe-cialist workshop.

Replacing the batteryYou require a CR 2025 3 V cell battery.X Take the mechanical key out of the Smart-Key (Y page 86).

X Press mechanical key; into the openingin the SmartKey in the direction of thearrow until battery compartment cover:opens. Do not hold battery compartmentcover: closed while doing so.

X Remove battery compartment cover:.

X Repeatedly tap the SmartKey against yourpalm until battery= falls out.

X Insert the new battery with the positive ter-minal facing upwards. Use a lint-free clothto do so.

X Make sure that the surface of the battery isfree of lint, grease and other contaminants.

X Insert the front tabs of battery compart-ment cover: into the housing and thenpress to close it.

SmartKey 87

Openingandclosing

Z

X Insert mechanical key; into the Smart-Key.

X Check the function of all SmartKey buttonson the vehicle.

88 SmartKeyOp

eningandclosing

Problems with the SmartKey

Problem Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

You can no longer lockor unlock the vehicleusing the SmartKey.

The SmartKey battery is discharged or nearly discharged.X Check the SmartKey battery (Y page 87) and replace it if nec-essary (Y page 87).

If this does not work:X Unlock (Y page 92) or lock (Y page 92) the vehicle using themechanical key.

The SmartKey is faulty.X Unlock (Y page 92) or lock (Y page 92) the vehicle using themechanical key.

X Have the SmartKey checked at a qualified specialist workshop.

You can no longer lockor unlock the vehicleusing KEYLESS-GO.

The SmartKey battery is discharged or nearly discharged.X Check the SmartKey battery (Y page 87) and replace it if nec-essary (Y page 87).

If this does not work:X Unlock (Y page 92) or lock (Y page 92) the vehicle using themechanical key.

There is interference from a powerful source of radio waves.X Unlock (Y page 92) or lock (Y page 92) the vehicle using themechanical key.

KEYLESS-GO is malfunctioning.X Lock/unlock the vehicle using the remote control function ofthe SmartKey.

X Have the vehicle and SmartKey checked at a qualified specialistworkshop.

If the vehicle can also not be locked/unlocked using the remotecontrol function:X Unlock (Y page 92) or lock (Y page 92) the vehicle using themechanical key.

X Have the vehicle and SmartKey checked at a qualified specialistworkshop.

You have lost a Smart-Key.

X Have the SmartKey deactivated at a qualified specialist work-shop.

X Report the loss immediately to the vehicle insurers.X If necessary, have the locks changed as well.

SmartKey 89

Openingandclosing

Z

Problem Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

You have lost themechanical key.

X Report the loss immediately to the vehicle insurers.X If necessary, have the locks changed as well.

The engine cannot bestarted using theSmartKey.

the on-board voltage is too low.X Switch off non-essential consumers, e.g. seat heating or interiorlighting, and try to start the engine again.

If this does not work:X Check the starter battery and charge it if necessary(Y page 333).

orX Jump-start the vehicle (Y page 335).orX Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

The engine cannot bestarted using KEYLESS-GO. The SmartKey is inthe vehicle.

The vehicle is locked.X Unlock the vehicle and try to start the vehicle again.

There is interference from a powerful source of radio waves.X Start your vehicle with the SmartKey in the ignition lock.

Doors

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf children are left unsupervised in the vehicle,they could:Ropen the doors, thus endangering otherpeople or road users.Rget out and disrupt traffic.Roperate the vehicle's equipment.Additionally, children could set the vehicle inmotion if, for example, they:Rrelease the parking brake.Rshifting the automatic transmission out ofpark position PRStart the engine.There is a risk of an accident and injury.When leaving the vehicle, always take theSmartKeywith you and lock the vehicle. Neverleave children or animals unattended in the

vehicle. Always keep the SmartKey out ofreach of children.

You should preferably place luggage or loadsin the trunk. Observe the loading guidelines(Y page 286).

Unlocking and opening doors fromthe insideYou can open a door from inside the vehicleeven if it has been locked.If the vehicle has previously been locked fromthe outside, opening a door from the insidewill trigger the anti-theft alarm system.Switch off the alarm (Y page 81).You can only open the rear doors from insidethe vehicle if they are not secured by thechild-proof locks (Y page 69).

90 DoorsOp

eningandclosing

X To unlock a front door: pull door han-dle;.Locking knob: pops up.The door is unlocked and can be opened.

X To open a front door: pull door handle;.

X To unlock a rear door: pull up lockingknob:.The door is unlocked and can be opened.

X To open a rear door: pull door handle;.

Centrally locking and unlocking thevehicle from the insideYou can centrally lock or unlock the vehiclefrom the inside.

X To unlock: press button:.X To lock: press button;.If all the doors are closed, the vehicle locks.

Meanwhile, the fuel filler flap will not belocked or unlocked.

If the vehicle has been locked from the out-side, it cannot be centrally unlocked from theinside.You can open a door from inside the vehicleeven if it has been locked.You can only open the rear doors from insidethe vehicle if they are not secured by thechild-proof locks (Y page 69).If a locked door is opened from the inside, theprevious unlock status of the vehicle will betaken into consideration if:Rthe vehicle was locked using the lockingbutton for the central locking, orRif the vehicle was locked automaticallyThe vehicle will be fully unlocked if it had pre-viously been fully unlocked. If only the driver'sdoor had been previously unlocked, only thedoor which has been opened from the insideis unlocked.

Automatic locking feature

X To deactivate: press and hold button:for about five seconds until a tone sounds.

X To activate: press and hold button; forabout five seconds until a tone sounds.

i If you press one of the two buttons and donot hear a tone, the relevant setting hasalready been selected.

The vehicle is locked automatically when theignition is switched on and the wheels areturning.

Doors 91

Openingandclosing

Z

You could therefore lock yourself out if:Rthe vehicle is being pushed.Rthe vehicle is being towed.Rthe vehicle is on a roller dynamometer.You can also switch the automatic lockingfunction on and off using the on-board com-puter (Y page 240).

Unlocking the driver's door (mechan-ical key)If the vehicle can no longer be unlocked withthe SmartKey, use the mechanical key.X Take the mechanical key out of the Smart-Key (Y page 86).

X Insert the mechanical key into the lock ofthe driver's door as far as it will go.

X Turn themechanical key counter-clockwiseto position1.The door is unlocked.

X Turn the mechanical key back and removeit.

X Insert the mechanical key into the Smart-Key.

If you use the mechanical key to unlock andopen the driver's door, the anti-theft alarmsystem will be triggered (Y page 81).

Locking the vehicle (mechanical key)If the vehicle can no longer be locked with theSmartKey, use the mechanical key.

X Open the driver's door.X Close the front-passenger door, the reardoors and the trunk lid.

X Press the locking button (Y page 91).X Check whether the locking knobs on thefront-passenger door and the rear doorsare still visible. Press down the lockingknobs by hand, if necessary.

X Close the driver's door.X Take the mechanical key out of the Smart-Key (Y page 86).

X Insert the mechanical key into the lock ofthe driver's door as far as it will go.

X Turn the mechanical key clockwise to posi-tion1.The door is unlocked.

X Turn the mechanical key back and removeit.

X Make sure that the doors and the trunk lidare locked.

X Insert the mechanical key into the Smart-Key.

Trunk

Important safety notes

G WARNINGCombustion engines emit poisonous exhaustgases such as carbon monoxide. Exhaustgases can enter the vehicle interior if thetrunk lid is open when the engine is running,

92 TrunkOp

eningandclosing

especially if the vehicle is in motion. There is arisk of poisoning.Always switch off the engine before openingthe trunk lid. Never drive with the trunk lidopen.

! The trunk lid swings upwards whenopened. Therefore, make sure that there issufficient clearance above the trunk lid.

i Opening dimensions of the trunk lid(Y page 392).

You should preferably place luggage or loadsin the trunk. Observe the loading guidelines(Y page 286).Do not leave the SmartKey in the trunk. Youcould otherwise lock yourself out.Vehicles without the trunk lid remoteclosing feature: the trunk lid can be:Ropened and closed manually from outsideRopened automatically from outsideRopened automatically from insideRlocked separatelyRunlocked with the mechanical keyRopened with the emergency release buttonVehicleswith the trunk lid remote closingfeature: the trunk lid can be:Ropened and closed manually from outsideRopened and closed automatically from out-sideRopened and closed automatically frominsideRlocked separatelyRunlocked with the mechanical keyRopened with the emergency release button

Trunk lid reversing featureThe trunk lid is equipped with an automaticreversing feature. It reacts if a solid objectobstructs or restricts the trunk lid during theclosing procedure. The trunk lid opens againautomatically. The automatic reversing fea-ture is only an aid and is not a substitute for

your attentiveness to the trunk lid while it isclosing.

G WARNINGThe reversing feature does not react:Rto soft, light and thin objects, e.g. small fin-gersRover the last 1/3 in (8 mm) of the closingmovement

This means that the reversing feature cannotprevent someone being trapped in these sit-uations. There is a risk of injury.Make sure that no body parts are in closeproximity during the closing procedure.If somebody becomes trapped:Rpress theF button on the SmartKey, orRpull or press the remote operating switchon the driver's door orRpress the closing or locking button on thetrunk lid, orRpull on the trunk lid handle

Opening/closing from outside

Opening

X Press the% button on the SmartKey.X Pull handle:.X Raise the trunk lid.

Trunk 93

Openingandclosing

Z

Closing

X Pull the trunk lid down using recess:.X If necessary, lock the vehicle with the&button on the SmartKey (Y page 84) or withKEYLESS-GO (Y page 85).

i If a KEYLESS-GO key is detected in thetrunk, the trunk lid cannot be locked andwill open again.

Opening/closing automatically fromoutside

Important safety notes

G WARNINGParts of the body could become trapped dur-ing automatic closing of the trunk lid. More-over, people, e.g. children, may be standing inthe closing area or may enter the closing areaduring the closing process. There is a risk ofinjury.Make sure that nobody is in the vicinity of theclosing area during the closing process.Use one of the following options to stop theclosing process:Rpress theF button on the SmartKey.Rpull or press the remote operating switchon the driver's door.Rpress the closing or locking button on thetrunk lid.Rpull the trunk lid handle

G WARNINGCombustion engines emit poisonous exhaustgases such as carbon monoxide. Exhaustgases can enter the vehicle interior if thetrunk lid is open when the engine is running,especially if the vehicle is in motion. There is arisk of poisoning.Always switch off the engine before openingthe trunk lid. Never drive with the trunk lidopen.

! The trunk lid swings upwards whenopened. Therefore, make sure that there issufficient clearance above the trunk lid.

i Opening dimensions of the trunk lid(Y page 392).

OpeningYou can open the trunk lid automaticallyusing the SmartKey or the handle in the trunklid.X Press and hold theF button on theSmartKey until the trunk lid opens.

orX If the trunk is unlocked, pull the trunk lidhandle and release it again immediately(Y page 93).

Closing

Example: closing and locking button (vehicle withthe trunk lid remote closing feature and KEYLESS-GO)X To close: press closing button: in thetrunk lid.

94 TrunkOp

eningandclosing

Vehicles with trunk lid remote closingfeature and KEYLESS-GO: you can simulta-neously close the trunk lid and lock the vehi-cle. The KEYLESS-GO key must be in the reardetection range of the vehicle.X Press locking button; in the trunk lid.If all the doors are closed, the vehicle locks.

i If KEYLESS-GO detects a SmartKey in thetrunk, the trunk lid opens again after it isclosed.If KEYLESS-GO detects a second SmartKeyoutside the vehicle, the trunk lid remainsclosed.

Opening/closing automatically frominside

Important safety notes

G WARNINGParts of the body could become trapped dur-ing automatic closing of the trunk lid. More-over, people, e.g. children, may be standing inthe closing area or may enter the closing areaduring the closing process. There is a risk ofinjury.Make sure that nobody is in the vicinity of theclosing area during the closing process.Use one of the following options to stop theclosing process:Rpress theF button on the SmartKey.Rpull or press the remote operating switchon the driver's door.Rpress the closing or locking button on thetrunk lid.Rpull the trunk lid handle

G WARNINGThe trunk lid can be automatically opened orclosed even if the SmartKey is not in the vehi-cle. If children are left unsupervised in thevehicle, they could activate the functions.There is a risk of injury.

When leaving the vehicle, always take theSmartKeywith you and lock the vehicle. Neverleave children unsupervised in the vehicle.

G WARNINGCombustion engines emit poisonous exhaustgases such as carbon monoxide. Exhaustgases can enter the vehicle interior if thetrunk lid is open when the engine is running,especially if the vehicle is in motion. There is arisk of poisoning.Always switch off the engine before openingthe trunk lid. Never drive with the trunk lidopen.

! The trunk lid swings upwards whenopened. Therefore, make sure that there issufficient clearance above the trunk lid.

i Opening dimensions of the trunk lid(Y page 392).

Opening and closing

X To open: pull remote operating switch fortrunk lid: until the trunk lid opens.

X To close: press remote operating switchfor trunk lid: until the trunk lid is com-pletely closed.

You can open the trunk lid from the driver'sseat when the vehicle is stationary andunlocked.

Trunk 95

Openingandclosing

Z

Locking the trunk separatelyYou can lock the trunk separately. If you thenunlock the vehicle centrally, the trunkremains locked and cannot be opened.X Close the trunk lid.X Take the mechanical key out of the Smart-Key (Y page 86).

X Insert the mechanical key into the trunk lidlock as far as it will go.

X Turn the mechanical key clockwise fromposition1 to position2.

X Remove the mechanical key.X Insert the mechanical key into the Smart-Key.

Unlocking the trunk (mechanical key)! The trunk lid swings upwards whenopened. Therefore, make sure that there issufficient clearance above the trunk lid.

If the trunk cannot be unlocked with theSmartKey or KEYLESS-GO, use the mechani-cal key.If you use the mechanical key to unlock andopen the trunk lid, the anti-theft alarm systemwill be triggered (Y page 81).X Take the mechanical key out of the Smart-Key (Y page 86).

X Insert the mechanical key into the trunk lidlock as far as it will go.

X Turn the mechanical key from position1counter-clockwise as far as it will go toposition2.The trunk is unlocked.

X Turn the mechanical key back to position1 and remove it.

X Insert the mechanical key into the Smart-Key.

Trunk emergency releaseYou can open the trunk lid from inside thevehicle with the emergency release button.

X Press emergency release button: briefly.The trunk lid unlocks and opens.

The trunk lid can be unlocked and openedwith the trunk lid emergency release whenthe vehicle is stationary or while driving.The trunk lid emergency release does notopen the trunk lid if the battery is disconnec-ted or discharged.

96 TrunkOp

eningandclosing

Trunk lid emergency release light:Remergency release button: flashes for30 minutes after the trunk lid is opened.Remergency release button: flashes for60 minutes after the trunk lid is closed.

Side windows

Important safety notes

G WARNINGWhile opening the side windows, body partscould become trapped between the side win-dow and the door frame as the side windowmoves. There is a risk of injury.Make sure that nobody touches the side win-dow during the opening procedure. If some-body becomes trapped, release the switch orpull the switch to close the sidewindow again.

G WARNINGWhile closing the side windows, body parts inthe closing area could become trapped. Thereis a risk of injury.When closing make sure that no parts of thebody are in the closing area. If somebodybecomes trapped, release the switch or pressthe switch to open the side window again.

G WARNINGIf children operate the side windows theycould become trapped, particularly if they areleft unsupervised. There is a risk of injury.Activate the override feature for the rear sidewindows. When leaving the vehicle, alwaystake the SmartKey with you and lock the vehi-cle. Never leave children unsupervised in thevehicle.

Side window reversing featureThe side windows are equipped with an auto-matic reversing feature. If a solid objectblocks or restricts a side window during theclosing process, the side window opens again

automatically. However, the automaticreversing feature is only an aid and does notrelieve you of the responsibility of payingattention when closing a side window.

G WARNINGThe reversing feature does not react:Rto soft, light and thin objects, e.g. small fin-gersRover the last 1/6 in(4 mm) of the closingmovementRduring resettingRwhen closing the side window again man-ually immediately after automatic reversing

This means that the reversing feature cannotprevent someone being trapped in these sit-uations. There is a risk of injury.Make sure that no body parts are in closeproximity during the closing procedure. Ifsomeone becomes trapped, press the switchto open the side window again.

Opening and closing the side win-dowsThe switches for all side windows are locatedon the driver's door. There is also a switch oneach door for the corresponding sidewindow.The switches on the driver's door take prec-edence.

: Front left; Front right= Rear right? Rear left

Side windows 97

Openingandclosing

Z

X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in theignition lock.

X To openmanually: press and hold the cor-responding switch.

X To open fully: press the switch beyond thepoint of resistance and release it.Automatic operation is started.

X To close manually: pull and hold the cor-responding switch.

X To close fully: pull the correspondingswitch beyond the pressure point.Automatic operation is started.

X To interrupt automatic operation:press/pull the corresponding switch again.i If you press/pull the switch beyond thepoint of resistance, automatic operation isstarted in the corresponding direction. Youcan stop automatic operation by pressing/pulling the switch again.

i You can continue to operate the side win-dows after you switch off the engine orremove the SmartKey. This function isavailable for up to five minutes or until thedriver's or front-passenger door is opened.

i When the override feature for the sidewindows is activated (Y page 69), the sidewindows cannot be operated from the rear.

Convenience opening

General notesYou can ventilate the vehicle before you startdriving. To do this, the SmartKey is used tocarry out the following functions simultane-ously:Runlock the vehicleRopen the side windowsRopen the sliding sunroofRswitch on the seat ventilation for the driv-er's seat

i The convenience opening feature canonly be operated using the SmartKey. The

SmartKey must be in close proximity to thevehicle.

i The "convenience opening" feature is alsoavailable on unlocked vehicles.

Convenience openingX Press and hold the% button until theside windows and the sliding sunroof are inthe desired position.

X To interrupt convenience opening:release the% button.

Convenience closing feature

Important safety notesInformation on the side window reversing fea-ture (Y page 97).

G WARNINGWhen the convenience closing feature is oper-ating, parts of the body could become trappedin the closing area of the side window and thesliding sunroof. There is a risk of injury.Observe the complete closing procedurewhen the convenience closing feature is oper-ating. Make sure that no body parts are inclose proximity during the closing procedure.

Proceed as follows if someone is trapped:With the SmartKey:X Release the& button.X Press and hold the% button until theside windows and the sliding sunroof or thepanorama roof with power tilt/slidingpanel open again.

Using KEYLESS-GO:X Release the sensor surface on the doorhandle.

X Pull the door handle immediately and holdit.The sidewindows and the sliding sunroof orthe panorama roof with power tilt/slidingpanel open.

98 Side windowsOp

eningandclosing

General notesWhen you lock the vehicle, you can simulta-neously:Rclose the side windowsRclose the sliding sunroof

Using the SmartKeyX Vehicles without KEYLESS-GO: point thetip of the SmartKey at the door handle onthe driver's door.

X Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: the Smart-Key must be in close proximity to the vehi-cle.

X Press and hold the& button until theside windows and the sliding sunroof arefully closed.

X Press and hold the& button until theside windows are fully closed.

X Make sure that all the sidewindows and thesliding sunroof are closed.

X Make sure that all the side windows areclosed.

X To interrupt convenience closing:release the& button.

Using KEYLESS-GOThe driver's door and the door at which thehandle is used, must both be closed. TheSmartKey must be outside the vehicle. Thegap between the SmartKey and the corre-sponding door handle should not be greaterthan 3 ft (1 m).

X Touch recessed sensor surface: on thedoor handle until the side windows and thesliding sunroof are fully closed.

X Touch recessed sensor surface: on thedoor handle until the side windows are fullyclosed.i Make sure you only touch recessed sen-sor surface:.

X Make sure that all the sidewindows and thesliding sunroof are closed.

X Make sure that all the side windows areclosed.

X To interrupt convenience closing:release recessed sensor surface: on thedoor handle.

Resetting the side windowsIf a side window can no longer be closed fully,you must reset it.X Close all the doors.X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in theignition lock.

X Pull the corresponding switch on the doorcontrol panel until the side window is com-pletely closed (Y page 97).

X Hold the switch for an additional second.

If the side window opens again slightly:X Immediately pull the corresponding switchon the door control panel until the side win-dow is completely closed (Y page 97).

X Hold the switch for an additional second.X If the corresponding side window remainsclosed after the button has been released,the side window has been reset correctly. Ifthis is not the case, repeat the steps aboveagain.

Side windows 99

Openingandclosing

Z

Problems with the side windows

G WARNINGIf you close a side window again immediately after it has been blocked or reset, the side windowcloses with increased or maximum force. The reversing feature is then not active. Parts of thebody could be trapped in the closing area in the process. This poses an increased risk of injury oreven fatal injury.Make sure that no parts of the body are in the closing area. To stop the closing process, releasethe switch or push the switch again to reopen the side window.

Problem Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

A side window cannotbe closed because it isblocked by objects, e.g.leaves in the windowguide.

X Remove the objects.X Close the side window.

A side window cannotbe closed and you can-not see the cause.

If a side window is obstructed during closing and reopens againslightly:X Immediately after the window blocks, pull the correspondingswitch again until the side window has closed.The side window is closed with increased force.

If a side window is obstructed again during closing and reopensagain slightly:X Immediately after the window blocks, pull the correspondingswitch again until the side window has closed.The side window is closed without the anti-entrapment feature.

Sliding sunroof

Important safety notes

G WARNINGWhile opening and closing the sliding sunroof,body parts in close proximity could becometrapped. There is a risk of injury.Make sure that no body parts are in closeproximity during the opening and closing pro-cedures.If somebody becomes trapped:Rrelease the switch immediately, orRduring automatic operation, push theswitch briefly in any direction

The opening or closing procedure will be stop-ped.

G WARNINGIf children operate the sliding sunroof theycould become trapped, particularly if they areleft unsupervised. There is a risk of injury.When leaving the vehicle, always take theSmartKeywith you and lock the vehicle. Neverleave children unsupervised in the vehicle.

! Only open the sliding sunroof if it is free ofsnow and ice. Otherwise,malfunctionsmayoccur.

100 Sliding sunroofOp

eningandclosing

Do not allow anything to protrude from thesliding sunroof. Otherwise, the seals couldbe damaged.

! The weather can change abruptly. It couldstart to rain or snow. Make sure that thesliding sunroof is closedwhen you leave thevehicle. The vehicle electronics can bedamaged if water enters the vehicle inte-rior.

i Resonance noises can occur in addition tothe usual airflow noises when the slidingsunroof is open. They are caused by minorpressure fluctuations in the vehicle interior.Change the position of the sliding sunroofor open a side window slightly to reduce oreliminate these noises.

Sliding sunroof reversing featureThe sliding sunroof is equipped with an auto-matic reversing feature. If a solid objectblocks or restricts the sliding sunroof duringthe closing process, the sliding sunroof opensagain automatically. However, the automaticreversing feature is only an aid and does notrelieve you of the responsibility of payingattention when closing the sliding sunroof.

G WARNINGThe reversing feature does not react:Rto soft, light and thin objects, e.g. small fin-gersRover the last 1/6 in (4 mm) of the closingmovementRduring resettingRwhen closing the sliding sunroof againman-ually immediately after automatic reversing

This means that the reversing feature cannotprevent someone being trapped in these sit-uations. There is a risk of injury.Make sure that no body parts are in closeproximity during the closing procedure.

If somebody becomes trapped:Rrelease the switch immediately, orRpress the switch in any direction during theautomatic closing process

The closing process is stopped.

Operating the sliding sunroof

Opening and closing

Overhead control panel: To raise; To open= To close/lowerX Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in theignition lock.

X Press or pull the3 switch in the corre-sponding direction.i If you press the3 switch beyond thepoint of resistance, an automatic opening/closing process is started in the corre-sponding direction. You can stop automaticoperation by pressing/pulling the switchagain.

i The automatic opening and raising fea-ture is available only when the sliding sun-roof is closed.

The sun protection cover automatically opensalong with the sliding sunroof. You can openor close the sun protection cover manuallywhen the sliding sunroof is raised or closed.

i You can continue to operate the slidingsunroof after switching off the engine or

Sliding sunroof 101

Openingandclosing

Z

removing the SmartKey from the ignitionlock. This function remains active for fiveminutes or until you open a front door.

Resetting

! If the sliding sunroof still cannot beopened or closed fully after resetting, con-tact a qualified specialist workshop.

Reset the sliding sunroof if it does not movesmoothly.X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-tion lock.

X Raise the sliding sunroof fully at the rear(Y page 101).

X Keep the3 switch pressed for anothersecond.

X Make sure that the sliding sunroof can befully opened and closed again(Y page 101).

X If this is not the case, repeat the stepsabove again.

102 Sliding sunroofOp

eningandclosing

Problems with the sliding sunroof

G WARNINGIf you close the sliding sunroof again immediately after it has been blocked or reset, the slidingsunroof closes with increased or maximum force. The reversing feature is then not active. Partsof the body could be trapped in the closing area in the process. This poses an increased risk ofinjury or even fatal injury.Make sure that no parts of the body are in the closing area.If somebody becomes trapped:Rrelease the switch immediately, orRpress the switch in any direction during the automatic closing processThe closing process is stopped.

! If the sliding sunroof still cannot be opened or closed as a result of a malfunction, contacta qualified specialist workshop.

Problem Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

The sliding sunroof can-not be closed and youcannot see the cause.

If the sliding sunroof is obstructed during closing and reopensagain slightly:X Immediately after the sliding sunroof blocks, pull the3switch in the overhead control panel down to the point of resist-ance and hold it until the sliding sunroof is closed.The sliding sunroof is closed with increased force.

If the sliding sunroof is obstructed again during closing and thenreopens slightly:X Immediately after the sliding sunroof blocks, pull the3switch in the overhead control panel down to the point of resist-ance and hold it until the sliding sunroof is closed.The sliding sunroof is closed without the anti-entrapment fea-ture.

Sliding sunroof 103

Openingandclosing

Z

104

Useful information ............................ 106Correct driver's seat position .......... 106Seats .................................................. 107Steering wheel .................................. 113Mirrors ............................................... 116Memory function ............................... 119

105

Seats,steerin

gwheelandmirrors

Useful information

i This Operator's Manual describes allmodels and all standard and optional equip-ment of your vehicle available at the time ofpublication of the Operator's Manual.Country-specific differences are possible.Please note that your vehicle may not beequipped with all features described. Thisalso applies to safety-related systems andfunctions.

i Read the information on qualified special-ist workshops (Y page 26).

Correct driver's seat position

G WARNINGYou could lose control of your vehicle if you dothe following while driving:Radjust the driver's seat, head restraint,steering wheel or mirrorsRfasten the seat beltThere is a risk of an accident.Adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steer-ing wheel andmirror and fasten your seat beltbefore starting the engine.

X Observe the safety guidelines on seatadjustment (Y page 107).

X Make sure that seat= is adjusted prop-erly.Electrical seat adjustment (Y page 108)

When adjusting the seat, make sure that:Ryou are as far away from the driver's air bagas possibleRyou are sitting in a normal upright positionRyou can fasten the seat belt properlyRyou have moved the backrest to an almostvertical positionRyou have set the seat cushion angle so thatyour thighs are gently supportedRyou can depress the pedals properlyX Check whether the head restraint is adjus-ted properly.When doing so, make sure that you haveadjusted the head restraint so that the backof your head is supported at eye level by thecenter of the head restraint.

X Observe the safety guidelines on steeringwheel adjustment (Y page 113).

X Make sure that steering wheel: is adjus-ted properly.Adjusting the steering wheel electrically(Y page 113)

When adjusting the steering wheel, makesure that:Ryou can hold the steering wheel with yourarms slightly bentRyou can move your legs freelyRyou can see all the displays in the instru-ment cluster clearly

X Observe the safety guidelines for seat belts(Y page 46).

X Check whether you have fastened seatbelt; properly (Y page 48).

106 Correct driver's seat positionSeats,steerin

gwheelandmirrors

The seat belt should:Rfit snugly across your bodyRbe routed across the middle of your shoul-derRbe routed in your pelvic area across the hipjoints

X Before starting off, adjust the rear-viewmir-ror and the exterior mirrors in such a waythat you have a good view of road and traf-fic conditions (Y page 116).

X Vehicles with a memory function: savethe seat, steering wheel and exterior mirrorsettings with the memory function(Y page 119).

Seats

Important safety notes

G WARNINGChildren could become trapped if they adjustthe seats, particularly when unattended.There is a risk of injury.When leaving the vehicle, always take theSmartKeywith you and lock the vehicle. Neverleave children unsupervised in the vehicle.

The seats can still be adjusted when there isno SmartKey in the ignition lock.

G WARNINGIf the head restraints are not installed or notadjusted correctly, they cannot provide pro-tection as intended. There is an increased riskof injury in the head and neck area, e.g. in theevent of an accident or when braking.Always drive with the head restraints instal-led. Before driving off, make sure for everyvehicle occupant that the center of the headrestraint supports the back of the head atabout eye level.

Observe the safety notes on "Air bags"(Y page 50) and "Children in the Vehicle"(Y page 64).

G WARNINGYou could lose control of your vehicle if you dothe following while driving:Radjust the driver's seat, head restraint,steering wheel or mirrorsRfasten the seat beltThere is a risk of an accident.Adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steer-ing wheel andmirror and fasten your seat beltbefore starting the engine.

G WARNINGIf you adjust the seat height carelessly, you orother vehicle occupants could be trapped andthereby injured. Children in particular couldaccidentally press the electrical seat adjust-ment buttons and become trapped. There is arisk of injury.While moving the seats, make sure that yourhands or other body parts do not get under thelever assembly of the seat adjustment sys-tem.

G WARNINGWhen you adjust a seat, you or other vehicleoccupants could become trapped, e.g. on theseat guide rail. There is a risk of injury.Make sure when adjusting a seat that no onehas any body parts in the sweep of the seat.

! To avoid damage to the seats and the seatheating, observe the following information:Rkeep liquids from spilling on the seats. Ifliquid is spilled on the seats, dry them assoon as possible.Rif the seat covers are damp or wet, do notswitch on the seat heating. The seatheating should also not be used to drythe seats.Rclean the seat covers as recommended;see "Interior care".Rdo not transport heavy loads on theseats. Do not place sharp objects on theseat cushions, e.g. knives, nails or tools.

Seats 107

Seats,steerin

gwheelandmirrors

Z

The seats should only be occupied bypassengers, if possible.Rwhen the seat heating is in operation, donot cover the seats with insulating mate-rials, e.g. blankets, coats, bags, seat cov-ers, child seats or booster seats.

! Make sure that there are no objects in thefootwell under or behind the seats whenmoving the seats back. There is a risk thatthe seats and/or the objects could be dam-aged.

i The head restraints in the front seats areinstalled with the NECK-PRO system(Y page 61). For this reason, it is not pos-sible to remove the head restraints fromthe front seats.For more information, contact a qualifiedspecialist workshop.

Adjusting the seats

: Head restraint height; Seat cushion angle= Seat height? Seat fore-and-aft adjustmentA Backrest angle

i If PRE-SAFE® is activated and the front-passenger seat is in an unfavorable posi-tion, it is moved to a better position.

i You can store the seat settings using thememory function (Y page 119).

i Vehicles with the through-loading fea-ture: if you fold down a rear seat backrest,

the respective front seat is moved forwardsslightly if necessary. This prevents theseats from colliding.

Adjusting the head restraints

Important safety notes

G WARNINGYou could lose control of your vehicle if you dothe following while driving:Radjust the driver's seat, head restraint,steering wheel or mirrorsRfasten the seat beltThere is a risk of an accident.Adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steer-ing wheel andmirror and fasten your seat beltbefore starting the engine.

G WARNINGIf the head restraints are not installed or notadjusted correctly, they cannot provide pro-tection as intended. There is an increased riskof injury in the head and neck area, e.g. in theevent of an accident or when braking.Always drive with the head restraints instal-led. Before driving off, make sure for everyvehicle occupant that the center of the headrestraint supports the back of the head atabout eye level.

Do not rotate the head restraints of the frontand rear seats. Otherwise, you cannot adjustthe height and angle of the head restraints tothe correct position.Using the fore-and-aft adjustment, adjust thehead restraint so that it is as close as possibleto your head.Observe the important safety notes regardingthe seats (Y page 107).

108 SeatsSeats,steerin

gwheelandmirrors

Adjusting the head restraint heightelectrically

X Slide switch for head restraint heightadjustment: up or down in the directionof the arrow.

Adjusting the luxury head restraints

X To adjust the side bolsters of the headrestraint: push or pull right and/or left-hand side bolster: into the desired posi-tion.

X To adjust the angle of the headrestraint: push or pull the head restraint inthe direction of arrow;.i Adjust the head restraint so that the backof your head is as close to the headrestraint as possible.

Rear seat head restraints

Important safety notesG WARNINGFor your protection, drive only with properlypositioned head restraints.Adjust the head restraints so that they are asclose as possible to your head. This willreduce the potential for injury to the head andneck in the event of an accident or similar sit-uation.Whenever the rear seats are occupied, onlydrive the vehicle with the head restraintsinstalled and engaged. Head restraints areintended to help reduce injuries during anaccident.

Adjusting the rear seat head restraintangle

X Pull or push the top of the head restraintuntil it is in the desired position.

Removing and installing the rear seathead restraintsG WARNINGIf the head restraints are not installed or notadjusted correctly, they cannot provide pro-tection as intended. There is an increased riskof injury in the head and neck area, e.g. in theevent of an accident or when braking.Always drive with the head restraints instal-led. Before driving off, make sure for everyvehicle occupant that the center of the headrestraint supports the back of the head atabout eye level.

Seats 109

Seats,steerin

gwheelandmirrors

Z

! Make sure that the rear window rollersunblind has been retracted before the rearhead restraints are removed. You couldotherwise damage the roller sunblind.

The head restraints can only be removed if therear seat folds forward.X To remove: press release catch: and pullthe head restraint out of the guides.

X To re-install: insert the head restraint sothat the notches on the bar are on the leftwhen viewed in the direction of travel.

X Push the head restraint down until you hearit engage in position.

Adjusting the multicontour seatThe multicontour seat function is only availa-ble for vehicles in Canada.

: To adjust the thigh cushion; To adjust the backrest contour in the lum-

bar region

= To adjust the backrest contour in theupper back region

? To adjust the side bolsters of the seatbackrest

You can adjust the contour of the front seatindividually so as to provide optimum supportfor your back and sides.X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-tion lock (Y page 149).

Adjusting the active multicontourseatThe active multicontour seat is only availablefor the driver's side.You can adjust the active multicontour seatusing COMAND or Audio 20. You can find fur-ther information in the separate COMAND orAudio 20 operating instructions.

Adjusting the 4-way lumbar support

: To raise the backrest contour; To soften the backrest contour= To lower the backrest contour? To harden the backrest contourYou can adjust the contour of the front seatbackrests individually to provide optimumsupport for your back.

110 SeatsSeats,steerin

gwheelandmirrors

Switching the seat heating on/off

Switching on/off

G WARNINGRepeatedly switching on the seat heating cancause the seat cushion and backrest pads tobecome very hot. The health of persons withlimited temperature sensitivity or a limitedability to react to excessively high tempera-tures may be affected or they may even sufferburn-like injuries. There is a risk of injury.Therefore, do not switch the seat heating onrepeatedly.

Driver's and front-passenger seat

The three red indicator lamps in the buttonindicate the heating level you have selected.The system automatically switches downfrom level 3 to level 2 after approximatelyeight minutes.The system automatically switches downfrom level 2 to level 1 after approximately tenminutes.The system automatically switches offapproximately 20 minutes after it is set tolevel 1.X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in theignition lock (Y page 149).

X To switch on: press button: repeatedlyuntil the desired heating level is set.

X To switch off: press button: repeatedlyuntil all the indicator lamps go out.

i If the battery voltage is too low, the seatheating may switch off.

Seats 111

Seats,steerin

gwheelandmirrors

Z

Problems with the seat heating

Problem Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

The seat heating hasswitched off prema-turely or cannot beswitched on.

The on-board voltage is too low because too many electrical con-sumers are switched on.X Switch off electrical consumers that you do not need, such asthe rear window defroster or interior lighting.Once the battery is sufficiently charged, the seat heating willswitch back on automatically.

Switching the seat ventilation on/off

Switching on/off

Driver's and front-passenger seat

The three blue indicator lamps in the buttonsindicate the ventilation level you have selec-ted.X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in theignition lock (Y page 149).

X To switch on: press button: repeatedlyuntil the desired ventilation level is set.

X To switch off: press button: repeatedlyuntil all the indicator lamps go out.

i If the battery voltage is too low, the seatventilation may switch off.

i You can open the side windows and thesliding sunroof using the "Convenienceopening" feature (Y page 98). The seat ven-tilation of the driver's seat automaticallyswitches to the highest level.

112 SeatsSeats,steerin

gwheelandmirrors

Problems with the seat ventilation

Problem Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

The seat ventilation hasswitched off prema-turely or cannot beswitched on.

The on-board voltage is too low because too many electrical con-sumers are switched on.X Switch off electrical consumers that you do not need, such asthe rear window defroster or interior lighting.Once the battery is sufficiently charged, the seat ventilation willswitch back on automatically.

Steering wheel

Important safety notes

G WARNINGYou could lose control of your vehicle if you dothe following while driving:Radjust the driver's seat, head restraint,steering wheel or mirrorsRfasten the seat beltThere is a risk of an accident.Adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steer-ing wheel andmirror and fasten your seat beltbefore starting the engine.

G WARNINGChildren could injure themselves if theyadjust the steering wheel. There is a risk ofinjury.When leaving the vehicle, always take theSmartKeywith you and lock the vehicle. Neverleave children unsupervised in the vehicle.

The electrically adjustable steering wheel canstill be adjusted when there is no SmartKey inthe ignition lock.

Adjusting the steering wheel electri-cally

: To adjust the steering wheel height; To adjust the steering wheel position

(fore-and-aft adjustment)

i Further related subjects:REASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature(Y page 115)RStoring settings (Y page 119)

Steering wheel 113

Seats,steerin

gwheelandmirrors

Z

Steering wheel heating

Switching on/off

X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-tion lock (Y page 149).

X To switch on/off: turn the lever in thedirection of arrow: or;.Indicator lamp= lights up or goes out.

Vehicles without KEYLESS-GO: when youremove the SmartKey from the ignition lock,the steering wheel heating is deactivated.Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: when you switchoff the ignition and open the driver's door, thesteering wheel heating is deactivated.

i The steering wheel heatingmay switch offtemporarily if:Rthe temperature in the vehicle interior isabove 86 ‡ (30 †)Rthe temperature of the steering wheel isabove 95 ‡ (35 †).

Indicator lamp= remains on.

114 Steering wheelSeats,steerin

gwheelandmirrors

Problems with the steering wheel heating

Problem Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

The steering wheelheating has switchedoff prematurely or can-not be switched on.

The on-board voltage is too low because too many electrical con-sumers are switched on.X Switch off electrical consumers that you do not need, such asthe rear window defroster or interior lighting.Once the battery is sufficiently charged, the steering wheelheating will switch back on automatically.

EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature

Important safety notes

G WARNINGWhen the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature adjuststhe steering wheel, you and other vehicleoccupants – particularly children – couldbecome trapped. There is a risk of injury.While the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature is mak-ing adjustments, make sure that no one hasany body parts in the sweep of the steeringwheel.Move the steering wheel adjustment lever ifthere is a risk of entrapment by the steeringwheel. The adjustment process is stopped.

Vehicles with a memory function: if there is arisk of becoming trapped by the steeringwheel, you can also one of the memory func-tion position buttons. The adjustment proc-ess is stopped.

G WARNINGIf children activate the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT fea-ture, they can become trapped, particularlywhen unattended. There is a risk of injury.When leaving the vehicle, always take theSmartKeywith you and lock the vehicle. Neverleave children unsupervised in the vehicle.

G WARNINGIf you drive off while the EASY-ENTRY/EXITfeature is making adjustments, you could losecontrol of the vehicle. There is a risk of anaccident.

Always wait until the adjustment process iscomplete before driving off.

The EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature makes gettingin and out of your vehicle easier.You can activate and deactivate the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature in the on-board com-puter (Y page 240).

Position of the steering wheel when theEASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature is activeThe steering wheel swings upwards whenyou:Rremove the SmartKey from the ignition lockRwith KEYLESS-GO: open the driver's door;KEYLESS-GO must be in position 1Rwith the SmartKey: open the driver'sdoor; the SmartKey is in position 0 or 1must be in the ignition lock (Y page 149).

i The steering wheel only moves upwards ifit has not already reached the upper stop.

Position of the steering wheel for driv-ingThe steering wheel is moved to the last selec-ted position when:Rthe driver's door is closedRwith KEYLESS-GO: you press the Start/Stop button onceorRwith the SmartKey: you insert the Smart-Key into the ignition lock

Steering wheel 115

Seats,steerin

gwheelandmirrors

Z

When you close the driver's door with theignition switched on, the steering wheel isalso automatically moved to the previouslyset position.The last position of the steering wheel isstored when you switch off the ignition orwhen you store the setting with the memoryfunction (Y page 119).

Crash-responsive EASY-EXIT featureIf the crash-responsive EASY-EXIT feature istriggered in an accident, the steering columnwill move upwards when the driver's door isopened. This occurs irrespective of the posi-tion of the SmartKey in the ignition lock. Thismakes it easier to exit the vehicle and rescuethe occupants.The crash-responsive EASY-EXIT feature isonly operational if the EASY-EXIT/ENTRY fea-ture is activated in the on-board computer(Y page 240).

Mirrors

Exterior mirrors

Adjusting the exterior mirrors

G WARNINGYou could lose control of your vehicle if you dothe following while driving:Radjust the driver's seat, head restraint,steering wheel or mirrorsRfasten the seat beltThere is a risk of an accident.Adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steer-ing wheel andmirror and fasten your seat beltbefore starting the engine.

G WARNINGThe exterior mirror on the front-passengerside reduces the size of the image. Visibleobjects are actually closer than they appear.This means that you could misjudge the dis-tance from road users traveling behind, e.g.

when changing lane. There is a risk of an acci-dent.For this reason, always make sure of theactual distance from the road users travelingbehind by glancing over your shoulder.

X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in theignition lock (Y page 149).

X Press button: for the left-hand exteriormirror or button; for the right-hand exte-rior mirror.The indicator lamp in the correspondingbutton lights up in red.The indicator lamp goes out again aftersome time. You can adjust the selectedmirror using adjustment button= as longas the indicator lamp is lit.

X Press adjustment button= up, down, or tothe left or right until you have adjusted theexterior mirror to the correct position. Youshould have a good overview of traffic con-ditions.

The convex exterior mirrors provide a largerfield of vision.After the engine has been started, the exte-rior mirrors are automatically heated if therear window defroster is switched on and theoutside temperature is low. Heating takes amaximum of ten minutes.

i You can also heat up the exterior mirrorsmanually by switching on the rear windowdefroster.

116 MirrorsSeats,steerin

gwheelandmirrors

Folding the exterior mirrors in or outelectrically

This function is only available in Canada.X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in theignition lock (Y page 149).

X Briefly press button:.Both exterior mirrors fold in or out.i Make sure that the exterior mirrors arealways folded out fully while driving. Theycould otherwise vibrate.

i If you are driving faster than 30 mph(47 km/h), you can no longer fold in theexterior mirrors.

Setting the exterior mirrorsIf the battery has been disconnected or com-pletely discharged, the exterior mirrors mustbe reset. The exterior mirrors will otherwisenot fold in when you select the "Fold in mir-rors when locking" function in the on-boardcomputer (Y page 241).X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 in the igni-tion lock (Y page 149).

X Briefly press button:.

Folding the exterior mirrors in or outautomaticallyThis function is only available in Canada.If the "Fold in mirrors when locking" functionis activated in the on-board computer(Y page 241):

Rthe exterior mirrors fold in automatically assoon as you lock the vehicle from the out-side.Rthe exterior mirrors fold out again automat-ically as soon as you unlock the vehicle andthen open the driver's or front-passengerdoor.

i If the exterior mirrors have been folded inmanually, they do not fold out.

Exterior mirror pushed out of positionIf an exterior mirror has been pushed out ofposition, proceed as follows:X Vehicles without electrically foldingexterior mirrors:move the exterior mirrorinto the correct position manually.

X Vehicles with electrically folding exte-rior mirrors: press and hold mirror-foldingbutton until you hear a click and then themirrors engage in position (Y page 117).The mirror housing is engaged again andyou can adjust the exterior mirrors as usual(Y page 116).

Automatic anti-glare mirrors

G WARNINGElectrolyte may escape if the glass in an auto-matic anti-glaremirror breaks. The electrolyteis harmful and causes irritation. It must notcome into contact with your skin, eyes, res-piratory organs or clothing or be swallowed.There is a risk of injury.If you come into contact with the electrolyte,observe the following:RRinse off the electrolyte from your skinimmediately with water.RImmediately rinse the electrolyte out ofyour eyes thoroughly with clean water.RIf the electrolyte is swallowed, immediatelyrinse your mouth out thoroughly. Do notinduce vomiting.

Mirrors 117

Seats,steerin

gwheelandmirrors

Z

RIf electrolyte comes into contact with yourskin or hair or is swallowed, seek medicalattention immediately.RImmediately change out of clothing whichhas come into contact with electrolyte.RIf an allergic reaction occurs, seek medicalattention immediately.

The rear-view mirror and the exterior mirroron the driver's side automatically go into anti-glaremode if the following conditions aremetsimultaneously:Rthe ignition is switched on andRincident light from headlamps strikes thesensor in the rear-view mirror

The mirrors do not go into anti-glare mode ifreverse gear is engaged or if the interior light-ing is switched on.

Parking position for the exterior mir-ror on the front-passenger side

Setting and storing the parking position

Using reverse gear

: Button for the driver's side exterior mirror; Button for the front-passenger side exte-

rior mirror= Adjustment button? Memory button MYou can position the front-passenger sideexterior mirror in such a way that you can seethe rear wheel on that side as soon as you

engage reverse gear. You can store this posi-tion.X Stop the vehicle and turn the SmartKey toposition 2 in the ignition lock(Y page 149).

X Press button; for the exterior mirror onthe front-passenger side.

X Engage reverse gear.The exterior mirror on the front-passengerside moves to the preset parking position.

X Use adjustment button= to adjust theexterior mirror to a position that allows youto see the rear wheel and the curb.The parking position is stored.i If you shift the transmission to anotherposition, the exterior mirror on the front-passenger side returns to the driving posi-tion.

Using the memory buttonYou can position the front-passenger sideexterior mirror in such a way that you can seethe rear wheel on that side as soon as youengage reverse gear. This setting can bestored using memory button M?.X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-tion lock (Y page 149).

X With the exterior mirror on the front-passenger side activated, use adjustmentbutton= to adjust the exterior mirror. Inthe exterior mirror, the rear wheel and thecurb should be visible.

X Press memory buttonM? and one of thearrows on adjustment button= withinthree seconds.The parking position is stored if the exteriormirror does not move.

X If the mirror moves out of position, repeatthese steps.

118 MirrorsSeats,steerin

gwheelandmirrors

Calling up a stored parking position set-tingX Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-tion lock (Y page 149).

X Adjust the exterior mirror on the front-passenger side using button;.

X Engage reverse gear.The exterior mirror on the front-passengerside moves to the stored parking position.

The exterior mirror on the front-passengerside moves back to its original position:Ras soon as you exceed a speed of 9 mph(15 km/h)Rif you press button: for the exterior mir-ror on the driver's side

Memory function

Storing settings

G WARNINGIf you use thememory function on the driver'sside while driving, you could lose control ofthe vehicle as a result of the adjustmentsbeing made. There is a risk of an accident.Only use the memory function on the driver'sside when the vehicle is stationary.

G WARNINGChildren could become trapped if they acti-vate the memory function, particularly whenunattended. There is a risk of injury.When leaving the vehicle, always take theSmartKeywith you and lock the vehicle. Neverleave children unsupervised in the vehicle.

G WARNINGWhen thememory function adjusts the seat orsteering wheel, you and other vehicle occu-pants – particularly children – could becometrapped. There is a risk of injury.While the memory function is making adjust-ments, make sure that no one has any bodyparts in the sweep of the seat or steering

wheel. If somebody becomes trapped, imme-diately release the memory function positionbutton. The adjustment process is stopped.

Thememory function can be used at any time,e.g. even when the SmartKey isn't in the igni-tion lock.With the memory function, you can store upto three different settings, e.g. for three dif-ferent people.The following settings are stored as a singlememory preset:Rposition of the seat, backrest and headrestraintRactive multicontour seat: seat contour,dynamic function levelRdriver's side: position of the exterior mir-rors on the driver's and front-passengersides

X Adjust the seat (Y page 108).X On the driver's side, adjust the steeringwheel (Y page 113) and the exteriormirrors(Y page 116).

X Press memory button M and one of thestorage position buttons 1, 2 or 3 withinthree seconds.The settings are stored in the selected pre-set position. A tone sounds when the set-tings have been completed.

Memory function 119

Seats,steerin

gwheelandmirrors

Z

Calling up a stored settingX Press and hold the relevant storage posi-tion button 1, 2 or 3, until the seat, steeringwheel and exterior mirrors are in the storedposition.i The setting procedure is interrupted assoon as you release the storage positionbutton.

120 Memory functionSeats,steerin

gwheelandmirrors

Useful information ............................ 122Exterior lighting ................................ 122Interior lighting ................................. 127Replacing bulbs ................................. 128Windshield wipers ............................ 128

121

Lightsandwindshieldwipers

Useful information

i This Operator's Manual describes allmodels and all standard and optional equip-ment of your vehicle available at the time ofpublication of the Operator's Manual.Country-specific differences are possible.Please note that your vehicle may not beequipped with all features described. Thisalso applies to safety-related systems andfunctions.

i Read the information on qualified special-ist workshops (Y page 26).

Exterior lighting

General notesFor reasons of safety, Mercedes-Benz recom-mends that you drive with the lights switchedon even during the daytime. Therefore, yourvehicle is equipped with special daytime run-ning lamps. In some countries, operation ofthe headlamps varies due to legal require-ments and self-imposed obligations.If youwish to drive during the daytimewithoutlights, switch off the daytime running lampsfunction in the on-board computer(Y page 238).

Setting the exterior lighting

Setting optionsExterior lighting can be set using:Rthe light switchRthe combination switch (Y page 124)Rthe on-board computer (Y page 238)

Light switch

Operation

1 W Left-hand standing lamps2 X Right-hand standing lamps3 T Parking lamps, license plate and

instrument cluster lighting4Ã Automatic headlamp mode, control-

led by the light sensor5 L Low-beam/high-beam headlampsIf you hear a warning tone when you leave thevehicle, the lights may still be switched on.X Turn the light switch toÃ.The exterior lighting (except the parking/standing lamps) switches off automatically ifyou:Rremove the SmartKey from the ignition lockRopen the driver's door with the SmartKey inposition 0

Automatic headlamp modeG WARNINGWhen the light switch is set toÃ, the low-beam headlamps may not be switched onautomatically if there is fog, snow or othercauses of poor visibility due to the weatherconditions such as spray. There is a risk of anaccident.In such situations, turn the light switch toL.

The automatic headlamp feature is only anaid. The driver is responsible for the vehicle'slighting at all times.

122 Exterior lightingLightsandwindshieldwipers

à is the favored light switch setting. Thelight setting is automatically selected accord-ing to the brightness of the ambient light(exception: poor visibility due to weather con-ditions such as fog, snow or spray):RSmartKey in position 1 in the ignition lock:the parking lamps are switched on or offautomatically depending on the brightnessof the ambient light.RWith the engine running: if you have acti-vated the daytime running lamps functionvia the on-board computer, the daytimerunning lamps or the parking lamps and thelow-beamheadlamps are switched on or offautomatically depending on the brightnessof the ambient light.

X To switch on automatic headlampmode: turn the light switch toÃ.

Canada only:The daytime running lamps improve the visi-bility of your vehicle during the day. The day-time running lamps function is required by lawinCanada. It cannot therefore be deactivated.When the engine is running and the vehicle isstationary: if youmove the selector lever froma drive position to P, the daytime runninglamps/low-beam headlamps go out afterthree minutes.When the engine is running, the vehicle isstationary and in bright ambient light: if youturn the light switch to T, the daytimerunning lamps and parking lamps switch on.If the engine is running and you turn the lightswitch to L, the manual settings takeprecedence over the daytime running lamps.USA only:The daytime running lamps improve the visi-bility of your vehicle during the day. To do this,the daytime running lamps function must beswitched on using the on-board computer(Y page 238).If the engine is running and you turn the lightswitch to T or L, the manual settingstake precedence over the daytime runninglamps.

Low-beam headlampsG WARNINGWhen the light switch is set toÃ, the low-beam headlamps may not be switched onautomatically if there is fog, snow or othercauses of poor visibility due to the weatherconditions such as spray. There is a risk of anaccident.In such situations, turn the light switch toL.

Even if the light sensor does not detect that itis dark, the parking lamps and low-beamheadlamps switch on when the ignition isswitched on and the light switch is set to theL position. This is a particularly usefulfunction in the event of rain and fog.X To switch on the low-beam headlamps:turn the SmartKey in the ignition lock toposition 2 or start the engine.

X Turn the light switch to L.The greenL indicator lamp in the instru-ment cluster lights up.

Parking lamps! If the battery has been excessively dis-charged, the parking lamps or standinglamps are automatically switched off toenable the next engine start. Always parkyour vehicle safely and sufficiently litaccording to legal standards. Avoid thecontinuous use of the T parking lampsfor several hours. If possible, switch on theX right or the W left standing lamp.

X To switch on: turn the light switch toT.The greenT indicator lamp in the instru-ment cluster lights up.

Standing lampsSwitching on the standing lamps ensures thecorresponding side of the vehicle is illumina-ted.

Exterior lighting 123

Lightsandwindshieldwipers

Z

X To switch on the standing lamps: theSmartKey is not in the ignition lock or it is inposition 0.

X Turn the light switch toW (left-hand sideof the vehicle) or X (right-hand side ofthe vehicle).

Combination switch

Turn signal

: High-beam headlamps; Turn signal, right= High-beam flasher? Turn signal, leftX To indicate briefly: press the combinationswitch briefly to the pressure point in thedirection of arrow; or?.The corresponding turn signal flashes threetimes.

X To indicate: press the combination switchbeyond the pressure point in the directionof arrow; or?.

High-beam headlampsX To switch on manually: turn the Smart-Key to position 2 in the ignition lock or startthe engine.

X Vehicles without Adaptive HighbeamAssist: turn the light switch to L orÃ.

X Vehicles with Adaptive Highbeam Assist:turn the light switch to L.

X Press the combination switch beyond thepressure point in the direction of arrow:.In theà position, the high-beam head-lamps are only switched on when it is darkand the engine is running.The blue K indicator lamp in the instru-ment cluster lights up when the high-beamheadlamps are switched on.

X To deactivate: move the combinationswitch back to its normal position.The blue K indicator lamp in the instru-ment cluster goes out.

Vehicles with Adaptive Highbeam Assist:when Adaptive Highbeam Assist is active, itautomatically controls activation of the high-beam headlamps (Y page 125).

High-beam flasherX To switch on: turn the SmartKey in theignition lock to position 1 or 2, or start theengine.

X Pull the combination switch in the directionof arrow=.

Hazard warning lamps

X To switch on the hazardwarning lamps:press button:.All turn signals flash. If you now switch on aturn signal using the combination switch,only the turn signal lamp on the corre-sponding side of the vehicle will flash.

X To switch off the hazardwarning lamps:press button:.

124 Exterior lightingLightsandwindshieldwipers

The hazard warning lamps automaticallyswitch on if:Ran air bag is deployed orRthe vehicle decelerates rapidly from aspeed of above 45 mph (70 km/h) andcomes to a standstill

The hazard warning lamps switch off auto-matically if the vehicle reaches a speed ofabove 6 mph (10 km/h) again after a fullbrake application.

i The hazard warning lamps still operate ifthe ignition is switched off.

Cornering light function

The cornering light function improves the illu-mination of the road over a wide angle in thedirection you are turning, enabling better vis-ibility in tight bends, for example. It can onlybe activated when the low-beam headlampsare switched on.Active:Rif you are driving at speeds below 25 mph(40 km/h) and switch on the turn signal orturn the steering wheelRif you are driving at speeds between25 mph (40 km/h) and 45 mph (70 km/h)and turn the steering wheel

The cornering lamp may remain lit for a shorttime, but is automatically switched off afterno more than three minutes.Cornering light functionwith traffic circlefunction:

The cornering light function is activated onboth sides before entering a traffic circlethrough an evaluation of the current GPSposition of the vehicle. It remains active untilafter the vehicle has left the traffic circle. Inthis way, pedestrians crossing the road, forexample, are illuminated by your vehicle ingood time.

Adaptive Highbeam Assist

General notes

You can use this function to set the head-lamps to change between low beam and highbeam automatically. The system recognizesvehicles with their lights on, either approach-ing from the opposite direction or traveling infront of your vehicle, and consequentlyswitches the headlamps from high beam tolow beam.The system automatically adapts the low-beam headlamp range depending on the dis-tance to the other vehicle. Once the systemno longer detects any other vehicles, it reac-tivates the high-beam headlamps.The system's optical sensor is located behindthe windshield near the overhead controlpanel.

Exterior lighting 125

Lightsandwindshieldwipers

Z

Important safety notes

G WARNINGAdaptive HighbeamAssist does not recognizeroad users:Rwho have no lights, e.g. pedestriansRwho have poor lighting, e.g. cyclistsRwhose lighting is blocked, e.g. by a barrierIn very rare cases, Adaptive Highbeam Assistmay fail to recognize other road users thathave lights, or may recognize them too late. Inthis or similar situations, the automatic high-beam headlamps will not be deactivated oractivated regardless. There is a risk of an acci-dent.Always carefully observe the traffic conditionsand switch off the high-beam headlamps ingood time.

Adaptive Highbeam Assist cannot take intoaccount road, weather or traffic conditions.Adaptive Highbeam Assist is only an aid. Youare responsible for adjusting the vehicle'slighting to the prevailing light, visibility andtraffic conditions.In particular, the detection of obstacles canbe restricted if there is:Rpoor visibility, e.g. due to fog, heavy rain orsnowRdirt on the sensors or the sensors areobscured

Switching Adaptive Highbeam Assiston/off

: High-beam headlamps; Turn signal, right= High-beam flasher? Turn signal, leftX To switch on: turn the light switch toÃ.X Press the combination switch beyond thepressure point in the direction of arrow:.The _ indicator lamp in the multifunc-tion display lights up when it is dark and thelight sensor activates the low-beam head-lamps.If you are driving at speeds above approx-imately 16 mph (25 km/h):The headlamp range is set automaticallydepending on the distance between thevehicle and other road users.If you are driving at speeds above approx-imately 19 mph (30 km/h) and no otherroad users have been detected:The high-beam headlamps are switched onautomatically. The K indicator lamp inthe instrument cluster also lights up.If you are driving at speeds below approx-imately 16 mph (25 km/h) or other roadusers have been detected or the roads areadequately lit:The high-beam headlamps are switched offautomatically. The K indicator lamp inthe instrument cluster goes out. The _

126 Exterior lightingLightsandwindshieldwipers

indicator lamp in the multifunction displayremains lit.

X To switch off: move the combinationswitch back to its normal position or movethe light switch to another position.The _ indicator lamp in the instrumentcluster goes out.

Headlamps fogged up on the insideCertain climatic and physical conditions maycause moisture to form in the headlamp. Thismoisture does not affect the functionality ofthe headlamp.

Interior lighting

Overview of interior lighting

Front overhead control panel: u To switch the rear interior lighting

on/off; | To switch the automatic interior

lighting control on/off= p To switch the right-hand front read-

ing lamp on/off? c To switch the front interior lighting

on/offA p To switch the left-hand front reading

lamp on/off

Rear-compartment overhead control panel: p To switch the right-hand reading

lamp on/off; p To switch the left-hand reading lamp

on/off

Interior lighting control

General notesIn order to prevent the vehicle's battery fromdischarging, the interior lighting functions areautomatically deactivated after some timeunless the SmartKey is in position 2 in theignition lock.The color and brightness of the ambient light-ing may be set using the on-board computer(Y page 239).

Automatic interior lighting controlX To activate/deactivate: press the |button.When the automatic interior lighting con-trol is activated, the button is flush with theoverhead control panel.

The interior lighting automatically switcheson if you:Runlock the vehicleRopen a doorRremove the SmartKey from the ignition lockThe interior light is activated for a short whilewhen the SmartKey is removed from the igni-tion lock. You can activate this delayed

Interior lighting 127

Lightsandwindshieldwipers

Z

switch-off using the on-board computer(Y page 240).

Manual interior lighting controlX To switch the front interior lighting on/off: press the c button.

X To switch the rear interior lighting on/off: press the u button.

X To switch the reading lamps on/off:press the p button.

Crash-responsive emergency lightingThe interior lighting is activated automaticallyif the vehicle is involved in an accident.X To switch off the crash-responsiveemergency lighting: press the hazardwarning lamp button.

orX Lock and then unlock the vehicle using theSmartKey.

Replacing bulbs

The front and rear light clusters of your vehi-cle are equipped with LED light bulbs. Do notreplace the bulbs yourself. Contact a qualifiedspecialist workshop which has the necessaryspecialist knowledge and tools to carry outthe work required.Lamps are an important aspect of vehiclesafety. You must therefore make sure thatthese function correctly at all times. Have theheadlamp setting checked regularly.

Windshield wipers

Switching the windshield wiperson/off! Do not operate the windshield wiperswhen the windshield is dry, as this coulddamage the wiper blades. Moreover, dustthat has collected on the windshield can

scratch the glass if wiping takes placewhenthe windshield is dry.If it is necessary to switch on thewindshieldwipers in dry weather conditions, alwaysuse washer fluid when operating the wind-shield wipers.

! If the windshield wipers leave smears onthe windshield after the vehicle has beenwashed in an automatic car wash, wax orother residues may be the reason for this.Clean the windshield using washer fluidafter washing the vehicle in an automaticcar wash.

! Intermittent wiping with rain sensor: dueto optical influences and the windshieldbecoming dirty in dry weather conditions,the windshield wipers may be activatedinadvertently. This could then damage thewindshield wiper blades or scratch thewindshield.For this reason, you should always switchoff the windshield wipers in dry weather.

1 $ Windshield wiper off2 Ä Intermittent wipe, low (rain sensor

set to low sensitivity)3 Å Intermittent wipe, high (rain sensor

set to high sensitivity)4 ° Continuous wipe, slow5 ¯ Continuous wipe, fastB í Single wipe

î To wipe with washer fluidX Switch on the ignition.X Turn the combination switch to the corre-sponding position.

128 Windshield wipersLightsandwindshieldwipers

In the Ä or Å position, the appropriatewiping frequency is set automatically accord-ing to the intensity of the rain. In the Åposition, the rain sensor is more sensitivethan in the Ä position, causing the wind-shield wiper to wipe more frequently.If the wiper blades are worn, the windshieldwill no longer be wiped properly. This couldprevent you from observing the traffic condi-tions.

Replacing the wiper blades

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf the windshield wipers begin to move whileyou are changing the wiper blades, you couldbe trapped by the wiper arm. There is a risk ofinjury.Always switch off the windshield wipers andignition before changing the wiper blades.

! To avoid damaging the wiper blades,make sure that you touch only the wiperarm of the wiper.

! Never open the hood if a windshield wiperarm has been folded away from the wind-shield.Never fold awindshieldwiper armwithout awiper blade back onto the windshield.Hold the windshield wiper arm firmly whenyou change the wiper blade. If you releasethe windshield wiper arm without a wiperblade and it falls onto the windshield, thewindshield may be damaged by the force ofthe impact.Mercedes-Benz recommends that you havethe wiper blades changed at a qualifiedspecialist workshop.

Replacing the wiper blades

Removing the wiper bladesX Remove the SmartKey from the ignitionlock or turn it to position 0 (KEYLESS-GO).

X Fold the wiper arm away from the wind-shield.

X Firmly press release knob: and pull thewiper blade upwards from the wiper arm inthe direction of the arrow.

Installing the wiper bladesX Position the newwiper blade in the retaineron the wiper arm and slide it into place inthe opposite direction from the arrow.The wiper blade audibly engages.

X Make sure that the wiper blade is seatedcorrectly.

X Fold the wiper arm back onto the wind-shield.

Windshield wipers 129

Lightsandwindshieldwipers

Z

Problems with the windshield wipers

Problem Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

The windshield wipersare jammed.

Leaves or snow, for example, may be obstructing the windshieldwiper movement. The wiper motor has been deactivated.X For safety reasons, you should remove the SmartKey from theignition lock.

orX Switch off the engine using the Start/Stop button and open thedriver's door.

X Remove the cause of the obstruction.X Switch the windshield wipers back on.

The windshield wipersfail completely.

The windshield wiper drive is malfunctioning.X Select another wiper speed on the combination switch.X Have the windshield wipers checked at a qualified specialistworkshop.

130 Windshield wipersLightsandwindshieldwipers

Useful information ............................ 132Overview of climate control sys-tems ................................................... 132Operating the climate control sys-tems ................................................... 138Setting the air vents ......................... 145

131

Climatecontrol

Useful information

i This Operator's Manual describes allmodels and all standard and optional equip-ment of your vehicle available at the time ofpublication of the Operator's Manual.Country-specific differences are possible.Please note that your vehicle may not beequipped with all features described. Thisalso applies to safety-related systems andfunctions.

i Read the information on qualified special-ist workshops (Y page 26).

Overview of climate control systems

General notesObserve the settings recommended on thefollowing pages. The windows could other-wise fog up.To prevent the windows from fogging up:Rswitch off climate control only brieflyRswitch on air-recirculation mode onlybrieflyRswitch on the cooling with air dehumidifi-cation functionRswitch on the defrost windshield functionbriefly, if required

Climate control regulates the temperatureand the humidity in the vehicle interior andfilters undesirable substances out of the air.Climate control can only be operated whenthe engine is running. Optimum operation isonly achieved with the side windows and roofclosed.The residual heat function can only be acti-vated or deactivated with the ignitionswitched off (Y page 144).

i Ventilate the vehicle for a brief periodduring warm weather, e.g. using the con-venience opening feature (Y page 98). Thiswill speed up the cooling process and thedesired interior temperature will bereached more quickly.

i The integrated filter filters out most par-ticles of dust and soot and completely fil-ters out pollen. It also reduces gaseous pol-lutants and odors. A clogged filter reducesthe amount of air supplied to the vehicleinterior. For this reason, you should alwaysobserve the interval for replacing the filter,which is specified in the MaintenanceBooklet. As it depends on environmentalconditions, e.g. heavy air pollution, theinterval may be shorter than stated in theMaintenance Booklet.

132 Overview of climate control systemsClimatecontrol

Control panel for dual-zone automatic climate control

Canada only: Sets the temperature, left (Y page 141); Defrosts the windshield (Y page 142)= Switches the ZONE function on/off (Y page 142)? Switches cooling with air dehumidification on/off (Y page 138)A Switches the rear window defroster on/off (Y page 143)B Sets the temperature, right (Y page 141)C Switches air-recirculation mode on/off (Y page 144)D Sets the air distribution (Y page 141)E Increases the airflow (Y page 142)F Reduces the airflow (Y page 142)G Activates/deactivates the air conditioning (Y page 138)H Sets climate control to automatic (Y page 140)

Overview of climate control systems 133

Climatecontrol

USA only: Sets the temperature, left (Y page 141); Defrosts the windshield (Y page 142)= Switches the maximum cooling MAX COOL on or off (Y page 143)? Switches cooling with air dehumidification on/off (Y page 138)A Switches the rear window defroster on/off (Y page 143)B Sets the temperature, right (Y page 141)C Switches air-recirculation mode on/off (Y page 144)D Sets the air distribution (Y page 141)E Increases the airflow (Y page 142)F Reduces the airflow (Y page 142)G Activates/deactivates the air conditioning (Y page 138)H Sets climate control to automatic (Y page 140)

Optimum use of dual-zone climatecontrol

Climate control systemThe following contains notes and recommen-dations on optimum use of dual-zone auto-matic climate control.RActivate climate control using theà and¿ buttons. The indicator lamps abovetheà and¿ buttons light up.RSet the temperature to 72 ‡ (22 †).ROnly use the "Windshield defrosting" func-tion briefly until the windshield is clearagain.

ROnly use air-recirculation mode briefly, e.g.if there are unpleasant outside odors orwhen in a tunnel. The windows could oth-erwise fog up, since no fresh air is drawninto the vehicle in air-recirculation mode.RUse the ZONE function to adopt the tem-perature settings on the driver's side forthe front-passenger side as well. The indi-cator lamp above theá button goesout.RIf you change the settings of the climatecontrol system, the climate status displayappears for approximately three secondsat the bottom of the screen in the Audio orCOMAND display (see separate operating

134 Overview of climate control systemsClimatecontrol

instructions). You will see the current set-tings of the various climate control func-tions.

ECO start/stop functionDuring automatic engine switch-off, the cli-mate control system only operates at areduced capacity. If you require the full cli-mate control output, you can switch off theECO start/stop function by pressing the ECObutton (Y page 154).

Overview of climate control systems 135

Climatecontrol

Control panel for 3-zone automatic climate control

Canada onlyFront control panel

: Sets the temperature, left (Y page 141); Defrosts the windshield (Y page 142)= Switches the residual heat on or off (Y page 144)? Switches cooling with air dehumidification on/off (Y page 138)A Switches the rear window defroster on/off (Y page 143)B Sets the temperature, right (Y page 141)C Switches the ZONE function on/off (Y page 142)D Activates/deactivates the air conditioning (Y page 138)E Sets the air distribution (Y page 141)F Increases the airflow (Y page 142)G Reduces the airflow (Y page 142)H Adjusts the climate mode settings (Y page 140)I Switches air-recirculation mode on/off (Y page 144)J Sets climate control to automatic (Y page 140)

Rear control panelK Increases the airflow (Y page 142)L Reduces the airflow (Y page 142)M DisplayN Reduces the temperature (Y page 141)O Increases the temperature (Y page 141)

136 Overview of climate control systemsClimatecontrol

USA onlyFront control panel

: Sets the temperature, left (Y page 141); Defrosts the windshield (Y page 142)= Switches the maximum cooling MAX COOL on or off (Y page 143)? Switches cooling with air dehumidification on/off (Y page 138)A Switches the rear window defroster on/off (Y page 143)B Sets the temperature, right (Y page 141)C Switches the ZONE function on/off (Y page 142)D Activates/deactivates the air conditioning (Y page 138)E Sets the air distribution (Y page 141)F Increases the airflow (Y page 142)G Reduces the airflow (Y page 142)H Adjusts the climate mode settings (Y page 140)I Switches air-recirculation mode on/off (Y page 144)J Sets climate control to automatic (Y page 140)

Rear control panelK Increases the airflow (Y page 142)L Reduces the airflow (Y page 142)M DisplayN Reduces the temperature (Y page 141)O Increases the temperature (Y page 141)

Overview of climate control systems 137

Climatecontrol

Optimum use of 3-zone automatic cli-mate control

Climate control systemThe following contains instructions and rec-ommendations to enable you to get the mostout of your 3-zone automatic climate control.RActivate climate control using theà and¿ buttons. The indicator lamps abovetheà and¿ buttons light up.RIn automatic mode, you can also use theñ button to set the climate mode(FOCUS, MEDIUM or DIFFUSE). TheMEDIUM level is recommended.RSet the temperature to 72 ‡ (22 †).ROnly use the "Windshield defrosting" func-tion briefly until the windshield is clearagain.ROnly use air-recirculation mode briefly, e.g.if there are unpleasant outside odors orwhen in a tunnel. The windows could oth-erwise fog up, since no fresh air is drawninto the vehicle in air-recirculation mode.RUse the ZONE function to adopt the tem-perature settings on the driver's side forthe front-passenger side and the rear com-partment as well. The indicator lamp abovetheá button goes out.RUse the residual heat function if youwant toheat or ventilate the vehicle interior whenthe ignition is switched off. The residualheat function can only be activated or deac-tivated with the ignition switched off.RIf you change the settings of the climatecontrol system, the climate status displayappears for approximately three secondsat the bottom of the screen in the Audio orCOMAND display (see separate operatinginstructions). You will see the current set-tings of the various climate control func-tions.

ECO start/stop functionDuring automatic engine switch-off, the cli-mate control system only operates at a

reduced capacity. If you require the full cli-mate control output, you can switch off theECO start/stop function by pressing the ECObutton (Y page 154).

Operating the climate control sys-tems

Activating/deactivating the air condi-tioning

General notesWhen the climate control is switched off, theair supply and air circulation are alsoswitched off. The windows could fog up.Therefore, switch off climate control onlybriefly

i Activate climate control primarily usingtheà button (Y page 140).

Activating/deactivatingX Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-tion lock (Y page 149).

X To switch on: press theà button.The indicator lamp in theà button lightsup. Airflow and air distribution are set toautomatic mode.

orX Press the^ button.The indicator lamp in the^ button goesout. The previously selected settings arerestored.

X To deactivate: press the^ button.The indicator lamp in the^ button lightsup.

Switching cooling with air dehumidi-fication on/off

General notesIf you deactivate the "Cooling with air-dehu-midification" function, the air inside the vehi-cle will not be cooled. The air inside the vehi-cle will also not be dehumidified. The win-

138 Operating the climate control systemsClimatecontrol

dows can fog up more quickly. Therefore,deactivate the cooling with air-dehumidifica-tion function only briefly.The "Cooling with air dehumidification" func-tion is only available when the engine is run-ning. The air inside the vehicle is cooled anddehumidified according to the temperatureselected.Condensation may drip from the underside ofthe vehicle when it is in cooling mode. This isnormal and not a sign that there is a malfunc-tion.

Activating/deactivatingX To activate: press the¿ button.The indicator lamp in the¿ button lightsup.

X To deactivate: press the¿ button.The indicator lamp in the¿ button goesout. The "Coolingwith air dehumidification"function has a delayed switch-off feature.

Operating the climate control systems 139

Climatecontrol

Problems with the "Cooling with air dehumidification" function

Problem Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

The indicator lamp inthe¿ buttonflashes three times orremains off. The "Cool-ing with air dehumidifi-cation" function cannotbe switched on.

Cooling with air dehumidification has been deactivated due to amalfunction.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Setting climate control to automatic

General notesIn automatic mode, the set temperature ismaintained automatically at a constant level.The system automatically regulates the tem-perature of the dispensed air, the airflow andthe air distribution.The automatic mode functions optimallywhen the "Cooling with air dehumidification"function is activated. If necessary, coolingwith air dehumidification can be deactivated.If you deactivate the "Cooling with air-dehu-midification" function, the air inside the vehi-cle will not be cooled. The air inside the vehi-cle will also not be dehumidified. The win-dows can fog up more quickly. Therefore,deactivate the cooling with air-dehumidifica-tion function only briefly.

Activating and changing the modeX Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-tion lock (Y page 149).

X Set the desired temperature.X To activate: press theà button.The indicator lamp in theà button lightsup. Automatic air distribution and airfloware activated.i 3-zone automatic climate control: whenautomatic mode is activated, you can setthe climate mode (Y page 140).

X To switch to manual mode: press the_ button.

orX Press theI orK button.The indicator lamp in theà button goesout.

Adjusting the climate mode settingsThe "Set climate mode" function is only avail-able with 3-zone automatic climate control.You can select the following climate modesettings in automatic mode:FOCUS high airflow that is set slightly

coolerMEDIUM medium airflow, standard settingDIFFUSE low airflow that is set slightly

warmer and with less draftX Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-tion lock (Y page 149).

X Press theà button.X Press theñ button repeatedly until thedesired climate mode appears in the dis-play.

140 Operating the climate control systemsClimatecontrol

Setting the temperature

Dual-zone automatic climate controlDifferent temperatures can be set for thedriver's and front-passenger sides.X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-tion lock (Y page 149).

X To increase or reduce: turn temperaturecontrol: orB counter-clockwise orclockwise (Y page 133).Only change the temperature setting insmall increments. Start at 72 ‡ (22 †).

3-zone automatic climate control

3-zone automatic climate control zones

You can select different temperature settingsfor the driver's and front-passenger sides aswell as for the rear compartment.X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-tion lock (Y page 149).

X To increase or reduce the temperaturein the front compartment: turn tempera-ture control: orB counter-clockwise orclockwise (Y page 136).Only change the temperature setting insmall increments. Start at 72 ‡ (22 †).

X To increase or reduce the temperaturein the rear compartment using the frontcontrol panel: press theá button.The indicator lamp in theá button goesout.

The temperature setting for the driver'sside is adopted for the rear compartmentand the front-passenger side.

X Turn temperature control: counter-clockwise or clockwise (Y page 136).Only change the temperature setting insmall increments. Start at 72 ‡ (22 †).

X To increase or reduce the temperaturein the rear compartment using the rearcontrol panel: press ther orsbutton on the rear control panel.Only change the temperature setting insmall increments. Start at 72 ‡ (22 †).

Setting the air distribution

Air distribution settingsP Directs air through the center and side

air ventsO Directs air through the footwell air

ventsS Directs air through the center, side and

footwell vents¯ Directs air through the defroster ventsb Directs the airflow through the

defroster, center and side air vents(Canada only)

a Directs air through the defroster andfootwell vents

_ Directs the airflow through thedefroster vents, the center and side airvents as well as the footwell air vents(Canada only)

i Regardless of the air distribution setting,airflow is always directed through the sideair vents. The side air vents can only beclosed when the controls on the side airvents are turned downwards.

Operating the climate control systems 141

Climatecontrol

Setting the air distributionX Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-tion lock (Y page 149).

X Press the_ button repeatedly until thedesired symbol appears in the display.

Setting the airflowX Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-tion lock (Y page 149).

X To increase: press theK button.X To reduce: press theI button.

i You can use 3-zone automatic climatecontrol to set the airflow in the rear com-partment separately.

If the battery is not sufficiently charged,blower output may be reduced. As soon asthe battery is sufficiently charged, full bloweroutput will be available.

Switching the ZONE function on/offX To activate: press theá button.The indicator lamp in theá button lightsup.Dual-zone automatic climate control: thetemperature setting for the driver's side isnot adopted for the front-passenger side.3-zone automatic climate control: the tem-perature setting for the driver's side is notadopted for the front-passenger side andthe rear compartment.

X To deactivate: press theá button.The indicator lamp in theá button goesout.Dual-zone automatic climate control: thetemperature setting for the driver's side isadopted for the front-passenger side.3-zone automatic climate control: the tem-perature setting for the driver's side isadopted for the front-passenger side andthe rear compartment.

Defrosting the windshieldYou can use this function to defrost the wind-shield or to defrost the inside of the wind-shield and the side windows.Switch off the "Windshield defrosting" func-tion as soon as the windshield is clear again.X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-tion lock (Y page 149).

X To activate: press the¬ button.The indicator lamp in the¬ button lightsup.The climate control system switches to thefollowing functions:Rhigh airflowRhigh temperatureRair distribution to the windshield andfront side windowsRair-recirculation mode off

If the battery is not sufficiently charged,blower output may be reduced. Once the bat-tery is sufficiently charged again, full bloweroutput will be available again.X To deactivate: press the¬ button.The indicator lamp in the¬ button goesout. The previously selected settings arerestored. Air-recirculation mode remainsdeactivated.

orX Press theà button.The indicator lamp in the¬ button goesout. Airflow and air distribution are set toautomatic mode.

orX Dual-zone automatic climate control: turntemperature control: orB counter-clockwise or clockwise (Y page 133).3-zone automatic climate control: turn tem-perature control: orB counter-clock-wise or clockwise (Y page 136).

orX Press theK orI button.

142 Operating the climate control systemsClimatecontrol

MAX COOL maximum coolingThe MAX COOL function is only available invehicles for the USA.MAX COOL is only operational when theengine is running.X To activate: press theÙ button.The indicator lamp in theÙ button lightsup.

X To deactivate: press theÙ button.The indicator lamp in theÙ button goesout. The previously selected settings arerestored.

When you activate MAX COOL, climate con-trol switches to the following functions:Rmaximum coolingRmaximum airflowRair-recirculation mode on

Defrosting the windows

Windows fogged up on the insideX Activate the¿ cooling with air dehu-midification function.

X Activate automatic modeÃ.X Adjust the side air vents so that thewarmedair is directed to the side windows.

X If the windows continue to fog up, activatethe "windshield defrosting" function¬.i You should only select this setting untilthe windshield is clear again.

Windows fogged up on the outsideX Press the_ button repeatedly until theP orO symbol appears in the dis-play.

X Adjust the side air vents so that no air isdirected to the side windows.

Rear window defroster

General notesThe rear window defroster has a high currentdraw. You should therefore switch it off assoon as the rear window is clear. Otherwise,the rear window defroster switches off auto-matically after several minutes.If the battery voltage is too low, the rear win-dow defroster may switch off.

Activating/deactivatingX Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-tion lock (Y page 149).

X Press the¤ button.The indicator lamp in the¤ button lightsup or goes out.

Operating the climate control systems 143

Climatecontrol

Problems with the rear window defroster

Problem Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

The rear windowdefroster has deactiva-ted prematurely or can-not be activated.

The battery has not been sufficiently charged.X Switch off any consumers that are not required, e.g. readinglamps, interior lighting or the seat heating.When the battery is sufficiently charged, the rear windowdefroster can be activated again.

Switching air-recirculation modeon/off

General notesYou can deactivate the flow of fresh air ifunpleasant odors are entering the vehiclefrom outside. The air already inside the vehi-cle will then be recirculated.If you switch on air-recirculation mode, thewindows can fog up more quickly, in particu-lar at low temperatures. Only use air-recircu-lation mode briefly to prevent the windowsfrom fogging up.

Activating/deactivatingX Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-tion lock (Y page 149).

X To activate: press theg button.The indicator lamp in theg button lightsup.i Dual-zone automatic climate control: air-recirculation mode is automatically activa-ted at high outside temperatures.3-zone automatic climate control: air-recir-culation mode is automatically activated athigh levels of pollution or at high outsidetemperatures.When air-recirculation mode is activatedautomatically, the indicator lamp above theg button does not light up. Outside air isadded after about 30 minutes.

X To deactivate: press theg button.The indicator lamp in theg button goesout.

i Air-recirculation mode deactivates auto-matically:Rafter approximately five minutes at out-side temperatures below approximately41 ‡ (5 †)Rafter approximately five minutes if cool-ing with air dehumidification is deactiva-tedRafter approximately 30 minutes at out-side temperatures above approximately41 ‡ (5 †) if the "Cooling with air dehu-midification" function is activated

Switching the residual heat on or off

General notesThe residual heat function is only availablewith 3-zone automatic climate control.It is possible to make use of the residual heatof the engine to continue heating the vehiclefor approximately 30minutes after the enginehas been switched off. The heating timedepends on the set interior temperature.

Activating/deactivatingX Turn the key to position 0 in the ignitionlock or remove it (Y page 149).

X To activate: press theÌ button.The indicator lamp in theÌ button lightsup.i If the residual heat function is activated,the windows may fog up on the inside.

144 Operating the climate control systemsClimatecontrol

i The blower will run at a low speed regard-less of the airflow setting.

i If you activate the residual heat functionat high temperatures, only the ventilationwill be activated. The blower runs atmedium speed.

X To deactivate: press theÌ button.The indicator lamp in theÌ button goesout.

Residual heat is deactivated automatically:Rafter approximately 30 minutesRwhen the ignition is switched onRif the battery voltage drops

Setting the air vents

Important safety notes

G WARNINGVery hot or very cold air can flow from the airvents. This could result in burns or frostbite inthe immediate vicinity of the air vents. Thereis a risk of injury.Make sure that all vehicle occupants alwaysmaintain a sufficient distance to the air out-lets. If necessary, redirect the airflow toanother area of the vehicle interior.

In order to ensure the direct flow of fresh airthrough the air vents into the vehicle interior,please observe the following notes:Rkeep the air inlet between the windshieldand the hood free of blockages, such as ice,snow or leaves.Rnever cover the air vents or air intake grillesin the vehicle interior.

Setting the center air vents

: Center air vent, left; Center air vent, right= Center vent thumbwheel, right? Center vent thumbwheel, leftX To open or close: turn thumbwheels=and? up or down.

Setting the side air vents

: Defroster vent; Side air vent= Thumbwheel for side air ventX To open or close: turn thumbwheel= upor down.

Setting the glove box air vent! Close the air vent when heating the vehi-cle.At high outside temperatures, open the airvent and activate the "coolingwith air dehu-midification" function. Otherwise, temper-

Setting the air vents 145

Climatecontrol

Z

ature-sensitive items stored in the glovebox could be damaged.

: Air vent control; Air ventWhen the climate control system is activated,the glove box can be ventilated, for instanceto cool its contents. The level of airflowdepends on the airflow and air distributionsettings.X To open or close: turn control: to theclockwise or counter-clockwise.

Setting the rear-compartment airvents

: Rear-compartment air vent thumbwheel; Rear-compartment air vent, right= Rear control panel, only with 3-zone auto-

matic climate control? Rear-compartment air vent, leftX To open or close: turn control: up ordown.

146 Setting the air ventsClimatecontrol

Useful information ............................ 148Notes on breaking-in a new vehi-cle ....................................................... 148Driving ............................................... 149Automatic transmission ................... 157Refueling ............................................ 167Parking ............................................... 170Driving tips ........................................ 173Driving systems ................................ 178

147

Drivingandparking

Useful information

i This Operator's Manual describes allmodels and all standard and optional equip-ment of your vehicle available at the time ofpublication of the Operator's Manual.Country-specific differences are possible.Please note that your vehicle may not beequipped with all features described. Thisalso applies to safety-related systems andfunctions.

i Read the information on qualified special-ist workshops (Y page 26).

Notes on breaking-in a new vehicle

Important safety notesThe sensor system of some driving and driv-ing safety systems adjusts automaticallywhile a certain distance is being driven afterthe vehicle has been delivered or afterrepairs. Full system effectiveness is notreached until the end of this teach-in proce-dure.New and replaced brake pads and discs onlyreach their optimum braking effect after sev-eral hundred kilometers of driving. Compen-sate for this by applying greater force to thebrake pedal.

The first 1000 miles (1500 km)The more you look after the engine when it isnew, the more satisfied you will be with itsperformance in the future.RYou should therefore drive at varying vehi-cle and engine speeds for the first1000 miles (1500 km).RAvoid heavy loads, e.g. driving at full throt-tle, during this period.RChange gear in good time, before the tach-ometer needle isÔ of the way to the redarea of the tachometer.

RDo not manually shift to a lower gear tobrake the vehicle.RTry to avoid depressing the acceleratorpedal beyond the point of resistance (kick-down).

Additional breaking-in notes for AMG vehi-cles:RDo not drive faster than 85 mph(140 km/h) for the first 1,000 miles(1,500 km).ROnly allow the engine to reach a maximumengine speed of 4,500 rpm briefly.RChange gear in good time.After 1000miles (1500 km), you can increasethe engine speed gradually and acceleratethe vehicle to full speed.

i You should also observe these notes onbreaking in if the engine or parts of the drivetrain on your vehicle have been replaced.

i Always observe the respective maximumpermissible speed.

AMG vehicles with self-locking rearaxle differentialYour vehicle is equipped with a self-lockingdifferential on the rear axle.Change the oil to improve protection of therear axle differential:Rafter a breaking-in period of 1,850 miles(3,000 km)Revery 31,000 miles (50,000 km) or3 years

These oil changes prolong the service life ofthe differential. Have the oil change carriedout at a qualified specialist workshop.

148 Notes on breaking-in a new vehicleDrivingandparking

Driving

Important safety notes

G WARNINGObjects in the driver's footwell can restrict thepedal travel or obstruct a depressed pedal.The operating and road safety of the vehicle isjeopardized. There is a risk of an accident.Make sure that all objects in the vehicle arestowed correctly, and that they cannot enterthe driver's footwell. Install the floormatssecurely and as specified in order to ensuresufficient clearance for the pedals. Do not useloose floormats and do not place floormats ontop of one another.

G WARNINGUnsuitable footwear can hinder correct usageof the pedals, e.g.:Rshoes with thick solesRshoes with high heelsRslippersThere is a risk of an accident.Wear suitable footwear to ensure correctusage of the pedals.

G WARNINGIf you switch off the ignition while driving,safety-relevant functions are only availablewith limitations, or not at all. This could affect,for example, the power steering and the brakeboosting effect. You will require considerablymore effort to steer and brake. There is a riskof an accident.Do not switch off the ignition while driving.

G WARNINGIf the parking brake has not been fullyreleased when driving, the parking brake can:Roverheat and cause a fireRlose its hold function.There is a risk of fire and an accident. Releasethe parking brake fully before driving off.

! Do not warm up the engine with the vehi-cle stationary. Drive off immediately. Avoidhigh engine speeds and driving at full throt-tle until the engine has reached its operat-ing temperature.Only shift the automatic transmission tothe desired drive position when the vehicleis stationary.Where possible, avoid spinning the drivewheels when pulling away on slipperyroads. You could otherwise damage thedrive train.

! AMG vehicles: at low engine oil temper-atures below 68 ‡ (+20 †), the maximumengine speed is restricted in order to pro-tect the engine. To protect the engine andmaintain smooth engine operation, avoiddriving at full throttle when the engine iscold.

SmartKey positions

SmartKey

g To remove the SmartKey1 Power supply for some consumers, such

as the windshield wipers2 Ignition (power supply for all consumers)

and drive position3 To start the engine

i The SmartKey can be turned in the igni-tion lock even if it is not the correct Smart-Key for the vehicle. The ignition is notswitched on. The engine cannot be started.

Driving 149

Drivingandparking

Z

KEYLESS-GO

General notesVehicles with KEYLESS-GO are equipped withSmartKeys featuring the integrated KEYLESS-GO function and a detachable Start/Stop but-ton.The Start/Stop buttonmust be inserted in theignition lock and the SmartKey must be in thevehicle.When you insert the Start/Stop button intothe ignition lock, the system needs approx-imately two seconds recognition time. Youcan then use the Start/Stop button.Pressing the Start/Stop button several timesin succession corresponds to the differentkey positions in the ignition lock. This is onlythe case if you are not depressing the brakepedal.If you depress the brake pedal and press theStart/Stop button, the engine starts immedi-ately.A checkwhich periodically establishes a radioconnection between the vehicle and theSmartKey determines whether a valid Smart-Key is in the vehicle. This occurs, for example,when starting the engine.To start the vehicle without actively using theSmartKey:Rthe Start/Stop button must be inserted inthe ignition lock.Rthe SmartKey must be in the vehicle.Rthe vehicle must not be locked with theSmartKey or KEYLESS-GO (Y page 85).

Do not keep the KEYLESS-GO key:Rwith electronic devices, e.g. a mobilephone or another SmartKey.Rwith metallic objects, e.g. coins or metalfoil.Rinside metallic objects, e.g. a metal case.This can affect the functionality of KEYLESS-GO.

If you lock the vehicle with the SmartKey'sremote control or with KEYLESS-GO, after ashort time:Ryouwill not be able to switch on the ignitionwith the Start/Stop button.Ryou will not be able to start the engine withthe Start/Stop button until the vehicle isunlocked again.

The engine can be switched off while the vehi-cle is in motion by pressing and holding theStart/Stop button for three seconds. Thisfunction operates independently of the ECOstart/stop automatic engine switch-off func-tion.

Key positions with KEYLESS-GO

: Start/Stop button; Ignition lockAs soon as the ignition is switched on, all theindicator lamps in the instrument cluster lightup. Further information on situations wherean indicator lamp either fails to go out afterstarting the engine or lights up while driving(Y page 275).If Start/Stop button: has not yet beenpressed, this corresponds to the key beingremoved from the ignition.

150 DrivingDrivingandparking

X To switch on the power supply: pressStart/Stop button: once.The power supply is switched on. You cannow activate the windshield wipers, forexample.

The power supply is switched off again if:Rthe driver's door is opened andRyou press Start/Stop button: twicewhenin this position

X To switch on the ignition: press Start/Stop button: twice.The ignition is switched on.

The ignition is switched off when:Rthe driver's door is opened andRyou press Start/Stop button: twicewhenin this position

Removing the Start/Stop buttonYou can remove the Start/Stop button fromthe ignition lock and start the vehicle as nor-mal using the SmartKey.It is only possible to switch between Start/Stop button mode and SmartKey operationwhen the transmission is in position P.X RemoveStart/Stop button: from ignitionlock;.

You do not have to remove the Start/Stopbutton from the ignition lock when you leavethe vehicle. You should, however, always takethe SmartKey with you when leaving the vehi-cle. As long as the SmartKey is in the vehicle:Rthe vehicle can be started using the Start/Stop buttonRthe electrically powered equipment can beoperated

Starting the engine

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf children are left unsupervised in the vehicle,they could:Ropen the doors, thus endangering otherpeople or road users.Rget out and disrupt traffic.Roperate the vehicle's equipment.Additionally, children could set the vehicle inmotion if, for example, they:Rrelease the parking brake.Rshifting the automatic transmission out ofpark position PRStart the engine.There is a risk of an accident and injury.When leaving the vehicle, always take theSmartKeywith you and lock the vehicle. Neverleave children or animals unattended in thevehicle. Always keep the SmartKey out ofreach of children.

G WARNINGCombustion engines emit poisonous exhaustgases such as carbon monoxide. Inhalingthese exhaust gases leads to poisoning. Thereis a risk of fatal injury. Therefore never leavethe engine running in enclosed spaces with-out sufficient ventilation.

G WARNINGFlammable materials introduced throughenvironmental influence or by animals canignite if in contact with the exhaust system orparts of the engine that heat up. There is a riskof fire.Carry out regular checks to make sure thatthere are no flammable foreign materials inthe engine compartment or in the exhaustsystem.

! Do not depress the accelerator whenstarting the engine.

Driving 151

Drivingandparking

Z

General notes

i The catalytic converter is preheated forup to 30 seconds after a cold start. Thesound of the enginemay change during thistime.

Automatic transmissionX Shift the transmission to position P.The transmission position display in themultifunction display shows P.

i You can start the engine in transmissionposition P and N.

Starting procedure with the SmartKey

i To start the engine using the SmartKeyinstead of KEYLESS-GO, pull the Start/Stop button out of the ignition lock.

X Turn the SmartKey to position 3 in the igni-tion lock and release it as soon as theengine is running (Y page 149).

Using KEYLESS-GO to start the engine

i The Start/Stop button can be used tostart the vehicle manually without insertingthe SmartKey into the ignition lock. TheStart/Stop button must be inserted in theignition lock and the SmartKey must be inthe vehicle. This mode for starting theengine operates independently of the ECOstart/stop automatic engine start function.

X Depress the brake pedal and keep itdepressed.

X Press the Start/Stop button once(Y page 150).The engine starts.

Pulling away

General notes

G WARNINGIf the engine speed is above the idling speedand you engage transmission position D or R,the vehicle could pull away suddenly. There isa risk of an accident.When engaging transmission position D or R,always firmly depress the brake pedal and donot simultaneously accelerate.

! If a warning tone sounds and theRelease Park. BrakeRelease Park. Brake message appearsin the multifunction display, the parkingbrake is still applied. Release the parkingbrake.

Depress the accelerator carefully when pull-ing away.The vehicle locks centrally once you havepulled away. The locking knobs in the doorsdrop down.You can open the doors from the inside at anytime.You can also deactivate the automatic lockingfeature (Y page 240).It is only possible to shift the transmissionfrom position P to the desired position if youdepress the brake pedal. If the brake pedal isnot depressed, the DIRECT SELECT lever canstill be moved but the parking lock remainsengaged.

i Upshifts take place at higher enginespeeds after a cold start. This helps thecatalytic converter to reach its operatingtemperature more quickly.

Hill start assistHill start assist helps you when pulling awayforwards or in reverse on an uphill gradient. Itholds the vehicle for a short time after youhave removed your foot from the brake pedal.This gives you enough time to move your footfrom the brake pedal to the accelerator pedal

152 DrivingDrivingandparking

and to depress it before the vehicle begins toroll.

G WARNINGAfter a short time, hill start assist will no lon-ger brake your vehicle and it could roll away.There is a risk of an accident and injury.Therefore, quickly move your foot from thebrake pedal to the accelerator pedal. Neverleave the vehicle when it is held by hill startassist.

Hill start assist is not active if:Ryou are pulling away on a level road or on adownhill gradient.Rthe transmission is in position N.Rthe parking brake is applied.RESP® is malfunctioning.

ECO start/stop function

IntroductionThe ECO start/stop function switches theengine off automatically if the vehicle is stop-ped under certain conditions.The engine starts automatically when thedriver wants to pull away again. The ECOstart/stop function thereby helps you toreduce the fuel consumption and emissionsof your vehicle.

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf the engine is switched off automatically andyou exit the vehicle, the engine is restartedautomatically. The vehicle may begin moving.There is a risk of accident and injury.If you wish to exit the vehicle, always turn offthe ignition and secure the vehicle againstrolling away.

General notes

: ECO start/stop displayThe ECO start/stop function is activatedwhenever you start the engine using the keyor the Start/Stop button.If the engine has been switched off automat-ically by the ECO start/stop function, the¤ symbol is shown in the multifunctiondisplay.AMG vehicles: in addition, the Stop/StartStop/Startactiveactive message is shown in the AMG menuin the multifunction display.AMG vehicles: the ECO start/stop functionis only available in drive program C.

Automatic engine switch-offIf the vehicle is braked to a standstill inD orN,the ECO start/stop function switches off theengine automatically.The ECO start/stop function is operationalwhen:Rthe indicator lamp in the ECO button is litgreen.Rthe outside temperature is within the rangethat is suitable for the system.Rthe engine is at normal operating temper-ature.Rthe set temperature for the vehicle interiorhas been reached.Rthe battery is sufficiently charged.Rthe system detects that the windshield isnot fogged up when the air-conditioningsystem is switched on.Rthe hood is closed.Rthe driver's door is closed and the driver'sseat belt is fastened.

Driving 153

Drivingandparking

Z

i All of the vehicle's systems remain activewhen the engine is stopped automatically.

i The HOLD function can also be activatedif the engine has been switched off auto-matically. It is then not necessary to con-tinue applying the brakes during the auto-matic stop phase. When you depress theaccelerator pedal, the engine starts auto-matically and the braking effect of theHOLD function is deactivated.

i All vehicles (apart fromAMGvehicles):automatic engine switch-off can take placeamaximumof four times consecutively (ini-tial stop then repeated three times).

i AMG vehicles: times which the enginecan be automatically switched off.

Automatic engine startThe engine starts automatically if:Ryou switch off the ECO start/stop functionby pressing the ECO buttonRin transmission position D or N the brakepedal is released and the HOLD function isnot activeRyou depress the accelerator pedalRyou engage reverse gear RRyou move the transmission out of positionPRyou switch to drive program S, S+ or M(AMG vehicles)Ryou unfasten your seat belt or open thedriver's doorRthe vehicle starts to rollRthe brake system requires thisRthe temperature in the vehicle interior devi-ates from the set rangeRthe system detects moisture on the wind-shield when the air-conditioning system isswitched onRthe battery's condition of charge is too low

i Shifting the transmission to position Pdoes not start the engine.

Deactivating or activating the ECOstart/stop function

All vehicles (except AMG vehicles)

X To deactivate: press ECO button:.Indicator lamp; goes out.

X To activate: press ECO button:.Indicator lamp; lights up.

If the indicator lamp on the ECO button is off,the ECO start/stop function has been deac-tivated manually or as the result of a mal-function.

AMG vehicles

X To deactivate: in drive program C, pressECO button:.

orX Switch to drive program S, S+ or M(Y page 163).Indicator lamp; goes out.

X To activate: press ECO button:.Indicator lamp; lights up.

154 DrivingDrivingandparking

If drive program S, S+ or M is active, theautomatic transmission switches to driveprogram C.

If the indicator lamp on the ECO button is off,the ECO start/stop function has been deac-tivated manually or as the result of a mal-function.

Driving 155

Drivingandparking

Z

Problems with the engine

Problem Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

The engine does notstart. The starter motorcan be heard.

RThere is a malfunction in the engine electronics.RThere is a malfunction in the fuel supply.Before attempting to start the engine again:X Turn the key back to position 0 in the ignition lock.orX Press the Start/Stop button repeatedly until all indicator lampsin the instrument cluster go out.

X Try to start the engine again (Y page 151). Avoid excessivelylong and frequent attempts to start the engine as thesewill drainthe battery.

If the engine does not start after several attempts:X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

The engine does notstart. You cannot hearthe starter motor.

The on-board voltage is too low because the battery is too weak ordischarged.X Jump-start the vehicle (Y page 335).If the engine does not start despite attempts to jump-start it:X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

The startermotor was exposed to a thermal load that was too high.X Allow the starter motor to cool down for approximately twominutes.

X Try to start the engine again.If the engine still does not start:X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

156 DrivingDrivingandparking

Problem Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

The engine is not run-ning smoothly and ismisfiring.

There is a malfunction in the engine electronics or in a mechanicalcomponent of the engine management system.X Only depress the accelerator pedal slightly.Otherwise, non-combusted fuel may get into the catalytic con-verter and damage it.

X Have the cause rectified immediately at a qualified specialistworkshop.

The coolant tempera-ture gauge shows avalue above 248 ‡(120 †).

The coolant level is too low. The coolant is too hot and the engineis no longer being cooled sufficiently.X Stop as soon as possible and allow the engine and the coolant tocool down.

X Check the coolant level (Y page 315). Observe the warningnotes as you do so and add coolant if necessary.

Automatic transmission

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf the engine speed is above the idling speedand you engage transmission position D or R,the vehicle could pull away suddenly. There isa risk of an accident.When engaging transmission position D or R,always firmly depress the brake pedal and donot simultaneously accelerate.

G WARNINGThe automatic transmission switches to neu-tral positionNwhen you switch off the engine.The vehicle may roll away. There is a risk of anaccident.After switching off the engine, always switchto parking positionP. Prevent the parked vehi-cle from rolling away by applying the parkingbrake.

Selector lever (AMG vehicles)

Overview of transmission positions

j Park position with parking lockk Reverse geari Neutralh Drive

Transmission position and drive pro-gram display

! If the transmission position display in themultifunction display is not working, youshould pull away carefully to checkwhetherthe desired transmission position isengaged. Ideally, you should select trans-mission positionD and automatic drive pro-gram C or S.

Automatic transmission 157

Drivingandparking

Z

: Transmission position display; Drive program displayThe current transmission position and driveprogram appear in the multifunction display.The current position of the selector lever isshown by the indicators next to the selectorlever.The indicators light up when the SmartKey isinserted into the ignition lock. The indicatorsgo out when the SmartKey is removed fromthe ignition lock.

Engaging park position P

X When the vehicle is stationary, press but-ton:.

DIRECT SELECT lever

Overview of transmission positions

j Park position with parking lockk Reverse geari Neutralh DriveThe DIRECT SELECT lever is on the right of thesteering column.The DIRECT SELECT lever always returns toits original position. The current transmissionposition P, R, N or D appears in the transmis-sion position display in the multifunction dis-play (Y page 158).

Transmission position and drive pro-gram display

! If the transmission position display in themultifunction display is not working, youshould pull away carefully to checkwhetherthe desired transmission position isengaged. Ideally, you should select trans-mission position D and drive program E orS.

The current transmission position and driveprogram appear in the multifunction display.The arrows in the transmission position dis-play show how and into which transmissionpositions you can change using the DIRECTSELECT lever.

158 Automatic transmissionDrivingandparking

: Transmission position display; Drive program display

Engaging park position P

! If the engine speed is too high or the vehi-cle is moving, do not shift the automatictransmission directly fromD toR, from R toD or directly to P. The automatic transmis-sion could otherwise be damaged.

j Park position with parking lockk Reverse geari Neutralh DriveX Push the DIRECT SELECT lever in the direc-tion of arrow P.Transmission position display P is shown inthe multifunction display.

Depressing the brake and pushing theDIRECT SELECT lever up or down disengagesthe parking lock. The transmission is in Nneutral.In order to shift from park position P directlyinto R or D:Rdepress the brake pedal andRpush the DIRECT SELECT lever up or downpast the first point of resistance

Engaging park position P automaticallyPark position P is automatically engaged if:Ryou switch off the engine using the Smart-Key and remove the SmartKeyRyou switch off the engine using the Smart-Key or using the Start/Stop button andopen the driver's door or front-passengerdoorRthe driver's door is opened when the vehi-cle is stationary or driving at very low speedand the transmission is in position D or R

Under certain conditions, the automatictransmission shifts automatically to transmis-sion position P if the HOLD function orDISTRONIC PLUS is activated. Observe theinformation on the HOLD function(Y page 192) and on DISTRONIC PLUS(Y page 185).

Engaging reverse gear R

! Only shift the automatic transmission toRwhen the vehicle is stationary.

X If the transmission is in position D or N:push the DIRECT SELECT lever up past thefirst point of resistance.

X If the transmission is in position P: depressthe brake pedal and push the DIRECTSELECT lever up past the first point ofresistance.

The ECO start/stop function is not availablewhen reverse gear is engaged. Further infor-mation on the ECO start/stop function(Y page 153).

Shifting to neutral N

G WARNINGIf children are left unsupervised in the vehicle,they could:Ropen the doors, thus endangering otherpeople or road users.Rget out and disrupt traffic.Roperate the vehicle's equipment.

Automatic transmission 159

Drivingandparking

Z

Additionally, children could set the vehicle inmotion if, for example, they:Rrelease the parking brake.Rshifting the automatic transmission out ofpark position PRStart the engine.There is a risk of an accident and injury.When leaving the vehicle, always take theSmartKeywith you and lock the vehicle. Neverleave children or animals unattended in thevehicle. Always keep the SmartKey out ofreach of children.

X If the transmission is in position D or R:push the DIRECT SELECT lever up or downto the first point of resistance.

X If the transmission is in position P: depressthe brake pedal and push the DIRECTSELECT lever up or down to the first point ofresistance.

If you switch the engine off with the trans-mission in position R or D, the automatictransmission shifts to N automatically.With the SmartKey: if you then open thedriver's door or the front-passenger door orremove the SmartKey from the ignition, theautomatic transmission shifts to P automati-cally.With KEYLESS-GO: if you then open the driv-er's or front-passenger door, the automatictransmission shifts to P.If you want the automatic transmission toremain in neutral N, e.g. when having thevehicle cleaned in an automatic car washwitha towing system:Using the SmartKey:X Switch on the ignition.X Depress the brake pedal and keep itdepressed.

X Shift to neutral N.X Release the brake pedal.

X Release the parking brake.X Switch off the ignition and leave the Smart-Key in the ignition lock.

Using KEYLESS-GO:X Remove the Start/Stop button from theignition lock.

X Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock.X Switch on the ignition.X Depress the brake pedal and keep itdepressed.

X Shift to neutral N.X Release the brake pedal.X Release the parking brake.X Switch off the ignition and leave the Smart-Key in the ignition lock.

Engaging drive position DX If the transmission is in position R or N:push the DIRECT SELECT lever down pastthe first point of resistance.

X If the transmission is in position P: depressthe brake pedal and push the DIRECTSELECT lever down past the first point ofresistance.

160 Automatic transmissionDrivingandparking

Transmission positions

B Park positionOnly shift the transmission intoposition P when the vehicle is sta-tionary (Y page 172). The parkinglock should not be used as a brakewhen parking. Always apply theparking brake in addition to theparking lock in order to secure thevehicle.If the vehicle electronics are mal-functioning, the transmission maybe locked in position P. Have thevehicle electronics checked imme-diately at a qualified specialistworkshop.Park position P is automaticallyengaged if:Ryou switch off the engine usingthe SmartKey and remove theSmartKeyRyou switch off the engine usingthe SmartKey or using the Start/Stop button and open the driv-er's door or front-passengerdoorRthe driver's door is opened whenthe vehicle is stationary or driv-ing at very low speed and thetransmission is in positionD or R

C Reverse gearOnly shift the transmission intoposition R when the vehicle is sta-tionary.

A NeutralDo not shift the transmission to Nwhile driving. Otherwise, the auto-matic transmission could be dam-aged.No power is transmitted from theengine to the drive wheels.Releasing the brakes will allow youto move the vehicle freely, e.g. topush it or tow it.If ESP® is deactivated or faulty:shift the transmission only to posi-tion N if the vehicle is in danger ofskidding, e.g. on icy roads.If you switch the engine off with thetransmission in position R orD, theautomatic transmission shifts to Nautomatically.

! Rolling in neutralN can damagethe drive train.

7 DriveThe automatic transmissionchanges gear automatically. Allforward gears are available.

Driving tips

Changing gearThe automatic transmission shifts to the indi-vidual gears automatically when it is in trans-mission position D. This automatic gear shift-ing behavior is determined by:Rthe selected drive program (Y page 162)Rthe position of the accelerator pedal(Y page 161)Rthe road speed

Accelerator pedal positionYour style of driving influences how the auto-matic transmission shifts gear:Rlittle throttle: early upshiftsRmore throttle: late upshifts

Automatic transmission 161

Drivingandparking

Z

AMG vehiclesWhen shifting down, the double-clutch func-tion is active regardless of the currently selec-ted drive program. The double-clutch functionreduces load change reactions and is condu-cive to a sporty driving style. The sound gen-erated by the double-clutch function dependson the drive program selected.

KickdownUse kickdown for maximum acceleration:X Depress the accelerator pedal beyond thepressure point.The automatic transmission shifts to alower gear depending on the engine speed.

X Ease off the accelerator pedal once thedesired speed is reached.The automatic transmission shifts back up.

Rocking the vehicle freeRocking the vehicle free by shifting back andforth between transmission positionsD andRcan help to free a vehicle that has becomestuck in mud or snow. The vehicle's enginemanagement restricts switching betweentransmission positions D and R to speeds upto a maximum of 5 mph (9 km/h). To shiftback and forth between transmission posi-tionsD and R, move the DIRECT SELECT leverup and down past the point of resistance.

Program selector button

General notes

All vehicles (except AMG vehicles and vehicleswiththe Sports package AMG)X Press program selector button: repeat-edly until the letter for the desired driveprogram appears in the multifunction dis-play.

Vehicles with the AMG Sports packageX Press program selector button: repeat-edly until the letter for the desired driveprogram appears in the multifunction dis-play.

The program selector button allows you tochoose between different driving character-istics.

i Further information about permanentdrive program M (Y page 165).As well as this permanent drive programM,you can also activate temporary drive pro-gram M (Y page 164).

162 Automatic transmissionDrivingandparking

E Economy Comfortable, economicaldriving

S Sport Sporty driving style

M Manual Manual gear shifting

i For further information on the automaticdrive program, see (Y page 164).

i The automatic transmission shifts toautomatic drive program E each time theengine is started.

AMG vehicles

Drive program selector with manual drive programX Turn drive program selector: until thedesired drive program appears in the mul-tifunction display in the speedometer.The drive program indicator on drive pro-gram selector: lights up in red.

i Further information about permanentdrive program M (Y page 165).As well as this permanent drive programM,you can also activate temporary drive pro-gram M (Y page 164).

C ControlledEfficiency

Comfortable, economicaldriving

S Sport Sporty driving style

S+ SportPlus Extremely sporty drivingstyle

M Manual Manual gear shifting

RS RACESTART

Optimal vehicle accelera-tion from a standstill

i For further information on the automaticdrive program, see (Y page 164).

i The automatic transmission shifts toautomatic drive program C each time theengine is started.

i RS cannot be selected during normal driv-ing. For further information on RACESTART, see (Y page 192).

Steering wheel paddle shifters

In the manual drive program, you can changegears manually using steering wheel paddleshifters: and;.Further information about permanent driveprogram M (Y page 165).Further information about temporary driveprogram M (Y page 164).

i You can only change gear with the steer-ing wheel paddle shifters when the trans-mission is in position D.

Automatic transmission 163

Drivingandparking

Z

Automatic drive program

Automatic drive program EDrive program E (drive program C on MAGvehicles) is characterized by the following:Rcomfort-oriented engine and automatictransmission settings.Roptimal fuel consumption resulting fromthe automatic transmission shifting upsooner.Rthe vehicle pulling away more gently inforward and reverse gears, unless theaccelerator pedal is depressed fully.Rincreased sensitivity. This improves drivingstability on slippery road surfaces, forexample.Rthe automatic transmission shifting upsooner. This results in the vehicle beingdriven at lower engine speeds and thewheels being less likely to spin.

Automatic drive program SDrive program S (or, in the case of AMG vehi-cles, drive programs S and S+) is character-ized by the following:Rsporty engine and automatic transmissionsettings.Rthe automatic transmission shifting uplater.Rthe fuel consumption possibly being higheras a result of the later automatic transmis-sion shift points.

Manual drive program M

General notesIn this drive program, you can briefly changegear yourself by using the steering wheel pad-dle shifters. The transmissionmust be in posi-tion D.You can activate manual drive program M inthe E and S automatic drive programs.

i As well as temporary drive program M,you can also activate permanent drive pro-gram M (Y page 162).Further information about permanent driveprogram M (Y page 165).

ActivatingX Shift the transmission to position D.X Pull the left or right steering wheel paddleshifter (Y page 163).Manual drive programM is temporarily acti-vated. The selected gear and M appear inthe multifunction display.

Shifting gearsIf you pull on the left or right steering wheelpaddle shifter, the automatic transmissionswitches to manual drive program M for alimited amount of time. Depending on whichpaddle shifter is pulled, the automatic trans-mission immediately shifts into the next geardown or up, if permitted.X To shift up: pull the right-hand steeringwheel paddle shifter (Y page 163).The automatic transmission shifts up to thenext gear.i If the maximum engine speed on the cur-rently engaged gear is reached and youcontinue to accelerate, the automatictransmission automatically shifts up inorder to prevent engine damage.

X To shift down: pull on the left-hand steer-ing wheel paddle shifter (Y page 163).The automatic transmission shifts down tothe next gear.i If the engine exceeds the maximumengine speedwhen shifting down, the auto-matic transmission protects against enginedamage by not shifting down.

i Automatic down shifting occurs whencoasting.

164 Automatic transmissionDrivingandparking

Shift recommendation

The gearshift recommendations assist you inadopting an economical driving style. The rec-ommended gear is shown in themultifunctiondisplay.X Shift to recommended gear; accordingto gearshift recommendation: whenshown in the multifunction display of theinstrument cluster.

DeactivatingIf you have activated manual drive programM, it will remain active for a certain amount oftime. Under certain conditions the minimumamount of time is extended, e.g. in the case oflateral acceleration, during an overrun phaseor when driving on steep terrain.If manual drive program M has been deacti-vated, the automatic transmission shifts intothe automatic drive program that was lastselected, i.e. E or S.You can also deactivate manual drive pro-gram M yourself:X Pull on the right-hand steering wheel pad-dle shifter and hold it in place (Y page 163).

orX Use the DIRECT SELECT lever to switch thetransmission position (Y page 158).

orX Use the program selector button to changethe drive program (Y page 162).Manual drive program M is deactivated.The automatic transmission switches intothe automatic drive program that was lastselected, i.e. E or S.

Manual drive program (AMG vehiclesand vehicles with Sports packageAMG)

General informationIn this drive program, you can permanentlychange gear yourself by using the steeringwheel paddle shifters. The transmission mustbe in position D.

i As well as this permanent drive programM, you can also activate temporary driveprogram M (Y page 164).

Switching on the manual drive programX Press the program selector button(Y page 162) repeatedly untilM appears inthe multifunction display.

X AMG vehicles: turn the drive programselector (Y page 163) untilM appears in themultifunction display.The indicatorM on the drive program selec-tor lights up in red.

Manual drive program M is different fromdrive programs S and S+with regard to spon-taneity, responsiveness and smoothness ofgear changes.Manual drive program M can be selectedusing the drive program selector. In manualdrive program M, you can change gear usingthe steeringwheel paddle shifters if the trans-mission is in position D. The gear currentlyselected and engaged is shown in the multi-function display.

UpshiftingX Pull the right-hand steering wheel paddleshifter.The automatic transmission shifts up to thenext gear.

AMG vehicles

! Inmanual drive programM, the automatictransmission does not shift up automati-

Automatic transmission 165

Drivingandparking

Z

cally even when the engine limiting speedfor the current gear is reached. When theengine limiting speed is reached, the fuelsupply is cut to prevent the engine fromoverrevving. Always make sure that theengine speed does not reach the red area ofthe tachometer. There is otherwise a risk ofengine damage.

: Gear indicator; Upshift indicatorBefore the engine speed reaches the red area,an upshift indicator will be shown in the mul-tifunction display.X When the UPUP message appears in the mul-tifunction display, pull on the right-handsteering wheel paddle shifter.

Shift recommendation

The gearshift recommendations assist you inadopting an economical driving style. The rec-ommended gear is shown in themultifunctiondisplay.X If corresponding gearshift recommenda-tion: appears in themultifunction displayon the instrument cluster, pull on the right-hand steering wheel paddle shifter(Y page 163).The automatic transmission shifts to rec-ommended gear;.

DownshiftingX Pull the left-hand steering wheel paddleshifter.The automatic transmission shifts down tothe next gear.

i If you brake the vehicle or stop withoutshifting down, the automatic transmissionwill shift down to a gear that will allow thevehicle to accelerate or pull away again.

i For maximum acceleration, pull the left-hand steering wheel paddle shifter until thetransmission selects the optimum gear forthe current speed.

KickdownYou can also use kickdown for maximumacceleration in manual drive program M.X Depress the accelerator pedal beyond thepressure point.The automatic transmission shifts to alower gear depending on the engine speed.

X Shift back up once the desired speed isreached.

i AMG vehicles: it is not possible to usekickdown in manual drive program M.

Switching off themanual drive programX Press the program selector button(Y page 162).

X AMG vehicles: turn the drive programselector (Y page 163).

166 Automatic transmissionDrivingandparking

Problems with the transmission

Problem Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

The transmission hasproblems shifting gear.

The transmission is losing oil.X Have the transmission checked at a qualified specialist work-shop immediately.

The acceleration abilityis deteriorating.The transmission nolonger changes gear.

The transmission is in emergency mode.It is only possible to shift into second gear and reverse gear.X Stop the vehicle.X Shift the transmission to position P.X Switch off the engine.X Wait at least ten seconds before restarting the engine.X Shift the transmission to position D or R.If D is selected, the transmission shifts into second gear; if R isselected, the transmission shifts into reverse gear.

X Have the transmission checked at a qualified specialist work-shop immediately.

Refueling

Important safety notes

G WARNINGFuel is highly flammable. If you handle fuelincorrectly, there is a risk of fire and explo-sion.You must avoid fire, open flames, creatingsparks and smoking. Switch off the engineand, if applicable, the auxiliary heating beforerefueling.

G WARNINGFuel is poisonous and hazardous to health.There is a risk of injury.You must make sure that fuel does not comeinto contact with your skin, eyes or clothingand that it is not swallowed. Do not inhale fuelvapors. Keep fuel away from children.

If you or others come into contact with fuel,observe the following:RWash away fuel from skin immediatelyusing soap and water.RIf fuel comes into contact with your eyes,immediately rinse them thoroughly withclean water. Seek medical assistance with-out delay.RIf fuel is swallowed, seek medical assis-tance without delay. Do not induce vomit-ing.RImmediately change out of clothing whichhas come into contact with fuel.

G WARNINGElectrostatic buildup can create sparks andignite fuel vapors. There is a risk of fire andexplosion.Always touch the vehicle body before openingthe fuel filler flap or touching the fuel pumpnozzle. Any existing electrostatic buildup isthereby discharged.

Refueling 167

Drivingandparking

Z

! Do not use diesel to refuel vehicles with agasoline engine. Do not switch on the igni-tion if you accidentally refuel with thewrong fuel. Otherwise, the fuel will enterthe fuel system. Even small amounts of thewrong fuel could result in damage to thefuel system and the engine. Notify a quali-fied specialist workshop and have the fueltank and fuel lines drained completely.

! Overfilling the fuel tank could damage thefuel system.

! Take care not to spill any fuel on paintedsurfaces. You could otherwise damage thepaintwork.

! Use a filter when refueling from a fuel can.Otherwise, the fuel lines and/or injectionsystem could be blocked by particles fromthe fuel can.

Do not get into the vehicle again during therefueling process. Otherwise, electrostaticcharge could build up again.If you overfill the fuel tank, fuel could sprayout when the fuel pump nozzle is removed.For further information on fuel and fuel quality(Y page 387).

Refueling

General informationPay attention to the important safety notes(Y page 167).The fuel filler flap is unlocked or locked auto-matically when you unlock or lock the vehiclewith the key or using KEYLESS-GO.The position of the fuel filler cap is displayed8 in the instrument cluster. The arrownext to the filling pump indicates the side ofthe vehicle.

Opening the fuel filler flap

Opening the fuel filler flap (example: CLS Coupe): To open the fuel filler flap; To insert the fuel filler cap= Tire pressure table? Instruction label for fuel type to be refu-

eledX Switch off the engine.X Remove the SmartKey from the ignitionlock.

or, on vehicles with KEYLESS‑GO:X Open the driver's door.The on-board electronics now have status0. This is the same as the SmartKey havingbeen removed.The driver’s door can be closed again.

X Press the fuel filler flap in the direction ofarrow:.The fuel filler flap opens slightly.

X Open the fuel filler flap fully.X Turn the fuel filler cap counterclockwiseand remove it.

X Insert the fuel filler cap into the holder onthe inside of fuel filler flap;.

X Completely insert the filler neck of the fuelpump nozzle into the tank, hook in placeand refuel.

X Only fill the tank until the pump nozzleswitches off.

Do not add any more fuel after the pumpstops filling for the first time. Otherwise, fuelmay leak out.

168 RefuelingDrivingandparking

Closing the fuel filler flapX Replace the cap on the filler neck and turnclockwise until it engages audibly.

X Close the fuel filler flap.Close the fuel filler flap before locking thevehicle. Otherwise, the locking pin of the cen-tral locking prevents the fuel filler flap fromclosing.If you are driving with the fuel filler cap open,the8 reserve fuel warning lamp flashes. Amessage appears in the multifunction display(Y page 261).

Fuel filler flap emergency release

X open the trunk lid.X Slide down the parcel net.X Open the right-hand side trim panel.X Detach the emergency release fromretainer:.

X Pull the emergency release in the directionof arrow;.The fuel filler flap is unlocked.

X Open the fuel filler flap.

Refueling 169

Drivingandparking

Z

Problems with fuel and the fuel tank

Problem Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

Fuel is leaking from thevehicle.

G WARNINGThe fuel line or the fuel tank is faulty.Risk of explosion or fire.X Apply the electric parking brake.X Switch off the engine.X Remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock.or, on vehicles with KEYLESS‑GO:X Open the driver's door.The on-board electronics now have status 0. This is the same asthe SmartKey having been removed.

X Do not restart the engine under any circumstances.X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

The fuel filler flap can-not be opened.

The fuel filler flap is not unlocked.X Unlock the vehicle (Y page 84).

The SmartKey battery is discharged or nearly discharged.X Unlock the vehicle using the mechanical key (Y page 86).X Open the trunk lid.XX Manually unlock the fuel filler flap using the emergency release(Y page 169).

The fuel filler flap is unlocked, but the opening mechanism is jam-med.X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Parking

Important safety notes

G WARNINGFlammable material such as leaves, grass ortwigsmay ignite if they come into contactwithhot parts of the exhaust system or exhaustgas flow. There is a risk of fire.Park the vehicle so that no flammable mate-rials come into contact with parts of the vehi-cle which are hot. Take particular care not to

park on dry grassland or harvested grainfields.

G WARNINGIf you switch off the ignition while driving,safety-relevant functions are only availablewith limitations, or not at all. This could affect,for example, the power steering and the brakeboosting effect. You will require considerablymore effort to steer and brake. There is a riskof an accident.Do not switch off the ignition while driving.

170 ParkingDrivingandparking

G WARNINGIf you leave children unsupervised in the vehi-cle, they could set it inmotion by, for example:Rrelease the parking brake.Rshift the automatic transmission out of theparking position P.Rstart the engine.In addition, they may operate vehicle equip-ment and become trapped. There is a risk ofan accident and injury.When leaving the vehicle, always take theSmartKeywith you and lock the vehicle. Neverleave children unsupervised in the vehicle.

! Always secure the vehicle correctlyagainst rolling away. Otherwise, the vehicleor its drivetrain could be damaged.

To ensure that the vehicle is secured againstrolling away unintentionally:Rthe parking brake must be applied.Rthe transmission must be in position P andthe SmartKey must be removed from theignition lock.Rthe front wheels must be turned towardsthe curb on steep uphill or downhill gradi-ents.

Switching off the engine

Important safety notes

G WARNINGThe automatic transmission switches to neu-tral positionNwhen you switch off the engine.The vehicle may roll away. There is a risk of anaccident.After switching off the engine, always switchto parking positionP. Prevent the parked vehi-cle from rolling away by applying the parkingbrake.

Vehicles with automatic transmissionX Apply the parking brake firmly.X All vehicles (except AMG vehicles): shiftthe transmission to position P.

X AMG vehicles:when the vehicle is station-ary, press button:.

X With the SmartKey: turn the SmartKey toposition0 in the ignition lock and remove it.The immobilizer is activated.

X With KEYLESS-GO: press the KEYLESS-GO Start/Stop button (Y page 150).The engine stops and all the indicatorlamps in the instrument cluster go out.When the driver's door is closed, this cor-responds to key position 1. When the driv-er's door is open, this corresponds to keyposition 0: "Key removed".

If you switch the engine off with the trans-mission in position R or D, the automatictransmission shifts to N automatically.With the SmartKey: if you then open thedriver's door or the front-passenger door orremove the SmartKey from the ignition, theautomatic transmission shifts to P automati-cally.With KEYLESS-GO: if you then open the driv-er's or front-passenger door, the automatictransmission shifts to P.If you want the automatic transmission toremain in neutral N, e.g. when having thevehicle cleaned in an automatic car washwitha towing system:

Parking 171

Drivingandparking

Z

Using the SmartKey:X Switch on the ignition.X Depress the brake pedal and keep itdepressed.

X Shift to neutral N.X Release the brake pedal.X Release the parking brake.X Switch off the ignition and leave the Smart-Key in the ignition lock.

Using KEYLESS-GO:X Remove the Start/Stop button from theignition lock.

X Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock.X Switch on the ignition.X Depress the brake pedal and keep itdepressed.

X Shift to neutral N.X Release the brake pedal.X Release the parking brake.X Switch off the ignition and leave the Smart-Key in the ignition lock.

The engine can be switched off while the vehi-cle is in motion by pressing and holding theStart/Stop button for about three seconds.This function operates independently of theECO start/stop automatic engine switch-offfunction.

Parking brake

G WARNINGIf you must brake the vehicle with the parkingbrake, the braking distance is considerablylonger and the wheels could lock. There is anincreased danger of skidding and accidents.Only use the parking brake to brake the vehi-cle when the service brake is faulty. Do notapply the parking brake too firmly. If thewheels lock, release the parking brake untilthe wheels begin turning again.

G WARNINGIf you leave children unsupervised in the vehi-cle, they could set it inmotion by, for example:Rrelease the parking brake.Rshift the automatic transmission out of theparking position P.Rstart the engine.In addition, they may operate vehicle equip-ment and become trapped. There is a risk ofan accident and injury.When leaving the vehicle, always take theSmartKeywith you and lock the vehicle. Neverleave children unsupervised in the vehicle.

If you brake the vehicle with the parkingbrake, the brake lamps will not light up.X To apply: depress parking brake; firmly.When the engine is running, the$ (USAonly) orJ (Canada only) indicator lamplights up in the instrument cluster.

X To release: depress the brake pedal andkeep it depressed.

X Pull release handle:.When the ignition is switched on or theengine is running, the$ (USA only) orJ (Canada only) indicator lampgoes outin the instrument cluster.

Parking the vehicle for a long periodIf you leave the vehicle parked for longer thanfour weeks, the battery may be damaged byexhaustive discharging.

172 ParkingDrivingandparking

If you leave the vehicle parked for longer thansix weeks, the vehiclemay suffer damage as aresult of lack of use.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop andseek advice.i You can obtain information about tricklechargers from a qualified specialist work-shop.

Driving tips

General notes

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf you switch off the ignition while driving,safety-relevant functions are only availablewith limitations, or not at all. This could affect,for example, the power steering and the brakeboosting effect. You will require considerablymore effort to steer and brake. There is a riskof an accident.Do not switch off the ignition while driving.

G WARNINGIf you operate mobile communication equip-ment while driving, you will be distracted fromtraffic conditions. You could also lose controlof the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident.Only operate this equipment when the vehicleis stationary.

Observe the legal requirements for the coun-try in which you are driving. Some jurisdic-tions prohibit the driver from using a mobilephone while driving a vehicle.If you make a call while driving, always usehands-freemode. Only operate the telephonewhen the traffic situation permits. If you areunsure, pull over to a safe location and stopbefore operating the telephone.Bear in mind that at a speed of only 30 mph(approximately 50 km/h), the vehicle coversa distance of 44 ft (approximately 14 m) persecond.

Drive sensibly – save fuelObserve the following tips to save fuel:X The tires should always be inflated to therecommended tire pressure.

X Remove unnecessary loads.X Remove roof racks when they are not nee-ded.

X Warm up the engine at low engine speeds.X Avoid frequent acceleration or braking.X Have all maintenance work carried out asindicated by the service intervals in theMaintenance Booklet or by the serviceinterval display.

Fuel consumption also increases when driv-ing in cold weather, in stop-start traffic and inhilly terrain.

Drinking and driving

G WARNINGDrinking and driving and/or taking drugs anddriving are very dangerous combinations.Even a small amount of alcohol or drugs canaffect your reflexes, perceptions and judg-ment.The possibility of a serious or even fatal acci-dent is greatly increased when you drink ortake drugs and drive.Do not drink or take drugs and drive or allowanyone to drive who has been drinking or tak-ing drugs.

Emission control

G WARNINGCombustion engines emit poisonous exhaustgases such as carbon monoxide. Inhalingthese exhaust gases leads to poisoning. Thereis a risk of fatal injury. Therefore never leavethe engine running in enclosed spaces with-out sufficient ventilation.

Certain engine systems are designed to keepthe level of poisonous components in exhaustfumes within legal limits.

Driving tips 173

Drivingandparking

Z

These systems only work at peak efficiency ifthey are serviced exactly in accordance withthe manufacturer's specifications. For thisreason, only have work on the engine carriedout by qualified and authorized Mercedes-Benz technicians.The engine settings must not be changedunder any circumstances. Furthermore, allspecific service work must be carried out atregular intervals and in accordance with theMercedes-Benz service requirements. Detailscan be found in the Maintenance Booklet.

ECO display

The ECO display provides feedback on howeconomical your driving characteristics are.The ECO display assists you in achieving themost economical driving style for the selec-ted settings and prevailing conditions. Yourdriving style can significantly influence thevehicle's consumption.The ECO display consists of three bars:RAccelerationAccelerationRConstantConstantRCoastingCoastingThe percent value is the average value of thethree bars. The three bars and themean valuebegin at the value of 50%. A higher percent-age indicates a more economical drivingstyle.The ECO display does not indicate the actualfuel consumption. A fixed percentage countin the ECO display does not indicate a fixedconsumption.

Apart from driving style, consumption isdependent on many factors such as, e.g.:RloadRtire pressureRcold startRchoice of routeRelectrical consumers switched onThese factors are not included in the ECO dis-play.The evaluation of your driving style is carriedout using the following three categories:RAccelerationAcceleration (evaluation of all accelera-tion processes):- The bar fills up: moderate acceleration,especially at higher speeds

- The bar empties: sporty accelerationRConstantConstant (assessment of driving behaviorat all times):- The bar fills up: constant speed andavoidance of unnecessary accelerationand deceleration

- The bar empties: fluctuations in speedRCoastingCoasting (assessment of all decelerationprocesses):- The bar fills up: anticipatory driving,keeping your distance and early releaseof the accelerator. The vehicle can coastwithout use of the brakes.

- The bar empties: frequent braking

i An economical driving style speciallyrequires driving at moderate enginespeeds.To achieve a higher value in the categoriesAccelerationAcceleration and ConstantConstant:Robserve the gearshift recommendations.Rdrive in drive program E.

i On long journeys at a constant speed, e.g.on the highway, only the bar for ConstantConstantwill change.

i The ECO display summarizes the drivingcharacteristics from the start of the journeyto its completion. For this reason, the bars

174 Driving tipsDrivingandparking

change dynamically at the beginning of thejourney. On longer journeys, there arefewer changes. Formore dynamic changes,carry out a manual reset.

For further information on the ECO display,see (Y page 230).

Braking

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf you shift down on a slippery road surface inan attempt to increase the engine's brakingeffect, the drive wheels could lose their grip.There is an increased danger of skidding andaccidents.Do not shift down for additional engine brak-ing on a slippery road surface.

Downhill gradients

! On long and steep gradients, you mustreduce the load on the brakes by shiftingearly to a lower gear. This allows you to takeadvantage of the engine braking effect andhelps avoid overheating and excessivewear of the brakes.When you take advantage of the enginebraking effect, a drive wheel may not turnfor some time, e.g. on a slippery road sur-face. This could cause damage to the drivetrain. This type of damage is not covered bythe Mercedes-Benz warranty.

Do not depress the brake pedal continuouslywhile the vehicle is in motion, e.g. causing thebrakes to rub by constantly applying lightpressure to the pedal. This results in exces-sive and premature wear to the brake pads.Change into a lower gear in good time on longand steep downhill gradients. This is espe-cially important if the vehicle is laden.

Heavy and light loads

G WARNINGIf you rest your foot on the brake pedal whiledriving, the braking system can overheat. Thisincreases the stopping distance and can evencause the braking system to fail. There is arisk of an accident.Never use the brake pedal as a footrest. Neverdepress the brake pedal and the acceleratorpedal at the same time.

! Depressing the brake pedal constantlyresults in excessive and premature wear tothe brake pads.

If the brakes have been subjected to a heavyload, do not stop the vehicle immediately, butdrive on for a short while. This allows the air-flow to cool the brakes more quickly.

Wet roadsIf you have driven for a long time in heavy rainwithout braking, theremay be a delayed reac-tion from the brakeswhen braking for the firsttime. Thismay also occur after the vehicle hasbeen washed or driven through deep water.You have to depress the brake pedal morefirmly. Maintain a greater distance from thevehicle in front.After driving on a wet road or having the vehi-cle washed, brake firmly while paying atten-tion to the traffic conditions. Thiswill warmupthe brake discs, thereby drying them morequickly and protecting them against corro-sion.

Limited braking performance on salt-treated roadsIf you drive on salted roads, a layer of saltresidue may form on the brake discs andbrake pads. This can result in a significantlylonger braking distance.

Driving tips 175

Drivingandparking

Z

RIn order to prevent any salt build-up, applythe brakes occasionally while paying atten-tion to the traffic conditions.RCarefully depress the brake pedal and thebeginning and end of a journey.RMaintain a greater distance to the vehicleahead.

Servicing the brakes

! If the red brake warning lamp lights up inthe instrument cluster and you hear awarn-ing tone while the engine is running, thebrake fluid level may be too low. Observeadditional warning messages in the multi-function display.The brake fluid level may be too low due tobrake pad wear or leaking brake lines.Have the brake system checked immedi-ately. This work should be carried out at aqualified specialist workshop.

! Vehicles with 4MATIC: function or per-formance tests may only be carried out ona 2-axle dynamometer. If you are planningto have the vehicle tested on such a dyna-mometer, contact an authorizedMercedes-Benz Center to obtain further informationfirst. Otherwise, you could damage thedrive train or the brake system.

! Vehicles with 4MATIC: as the ESP® sys-temoperates automatically, the engine andthe ignition must be switched off (Smart-Key in position 0 or 1 in the ignition lock orStart/Stop button in position 0 or 1) whilethe parking brake is being tested on a brakedynamometer.Brakingmaneuvers triggered automaticallyby ESP® may seriously damage the brakesystem.

! Vehicles with 4MATIC: as the ESP® sys-temoperates automatically, the engine andthe ignition system must be switched off(SmartKey in position 0 or 1 in the ignitionlock or Start/Stop button in position0 or1)when:Rtesting the parking brake on a brakedynamometer.Ryou intend to have the vehicle towedwithone of the axles raised.

Brakingmaneuvers triggered automaticallyby ESP® may seriously damage the brakesystem.

All checks and maintenance work on thebrake system must be carried out at a quali-fied specialist workshop. Consult a qualifiedspecialist workshop to arrange this.Have brake pads installed and brake fluidreplaced at a qualified specialist workshop.If the brake system has only been subject tomoderate loads, you should test the function-ality of your brakes at regular intervals. To doso, press firmly on the brake pedal when driv-ing at a high speed. This improves the grip ofthe brake pads.You can find a description of Brake Assist(BAS) on (Y page 71) or of BAS PLUS on(Y page 71).The braking characteristics of the vehicle canbe seriously impaired if:Rbrake pads other than those recommendedare installedRthe recommended brake fluid is not usedSafe braking can no longer be guaranteed.

AMG high-performance and ceramicbrakesThe high-performance brake system is onlyavailable on AMG vehicles.

176 Driving tipsDrivingandparking

The AMG brake systems are designed forheavy loads. This may lead to noise whenbraking. This will depend on:RspeedRbraking forceRenvironmental conditions, such as temper-ature and humidity

The wear of individual components of thebrake system, such as the brake pads/liningsor brake discs, depends on the individual driv-ing style and operating conditions.For this reason, it is impossible to state amileage that will be valid under all circum-stances. An aggressive driving style will leadto high wear. You can obtain further informa-tion about this from your authorizedMercedes-Benz Center.New and replaced brake pads and discs onlyreach their optimum braking effect after sev-eral hundred kilometers of driving. Compen-sate for this by applying greater force to thebrake pedal. Keep this in mind, and adaptyour driving and braking accordingly duringthis break-in period.Excessive heavy braking results in corre-spondingly high brake wear. Observe thebrake wear warning lamp in the instrumentcluster and note any brake status messagesin the multifunction display. Especially forhigh performance driving, it is important tomaintain and have the brake system checkedregularly.

Driving on wet roads

HydroplaningIf water has accumulated to a certain depthon the road surface, there is a danger ofhydroplaning occurring, even if:Ryou drive at low speeds.Rthe tires have adequate tread depth.

For this reason, in the event of heavy rain or inconditions in which hydroplaning may occur,you must drive in the following manner:Rlower your speed.Ravoid ruts.Ravoid sudden steering movements.Rbrake carefully.

Driving on flooded roads

! Do not drive through flooded areas.Check the depth of anywater before drivingthrough it. Drive slowly through standingwater. Otherwise, water may enter thevehicle interior or the engine compartment.This can damage the electronic compo-nents in the engine or the automatic trans-mission. Water can also be drawn in by theengine's air suction nozzles and this cancause engine damage.

Winter driving

G WARNINGIf you shift down on a slippery road surface inan attempt to increase the engine's brakingeffect, the drive wheels could lose their grip.There is an increased danger of skidding andaccidents.Do not shift down for additional engine brak-ing on a slippery road surface.

G DANGERIf the exhaust pipe is blocked or adequateventilation is not possible, poisonous gasessuch as carbon monoxide (CO) may enter thevehicle. This is the case, e.g. if the vehiclebecomes trapped in snow. There is a risk offatal injury.If you leave the engine or the auxiliary heatingrunning, make sure the exhaust pipe and areaaround the vehicle are clear of snow. Toensure an adequate supply of fresh air, open awindow on the side of the vehicle that is notfacing into the wind.

Driving tips 177

Drivingandparking

Z

Have your vehicle winter-proofed at a quali-fied specialist workshop at the onset of win-ter.Drive particularly carefully on slippery roadsurfaces. Avoid sudden acceleration, steeringand brakingmaneuvers. Do not use the cruisecontrol or DISTRONIC PLUS.If the vehicle threatens to skid or cannot bestopped when moving at low speed:X Shift the transmission to position N.The outside temperature indicator is notdesigned to serve as an ice-warning deviceand is therefore unsuitable for that purpose.Changes in the outside temperature are dis-played after a short delay.Indicated temperatures just above the freez-ing point do not guarantee that the road sur-face is free of ice. The road may still be icy,especially in wooded areas or on bridges. Thevehicle could skid if you fail to adapt yourdriving style. Always adapt your driving styleand drive at a speed to suit the prevailingweather conditions.You should pay special attention to road con-ditions when temperatures are around freez-ing point.For more information on driving with snowchains, see (Y page 347).For more information on driving with summertires, see (Y page 346).Observe the notes in the "Winter operation"section (Y page 346).

Driving systems

Mercedes-Benz Intelligent DriveMercedes-Benz Intelligent Drive stands forinnovative driver assistance and safety sys-tems which enhance comfort and support thedriver in critical situations. With these intelli-gent co-ordinated systems Mercedes-Benzhas set a milestone on the path towardsautonomous driving.

Mercedes-Benz Intelligent Drive embraces allelements of active and passive safety in onewell thought out system – for the safety of thevehicle occupants and that of other roadusers.Further information on driving safety systems(Y page 70).

Cruise Control

General notesCruise control maintains a constant roadspeed for you. It brakes automatically in orderto avoid exceeding the set speed. On long andsteep downhill gradients, especially if thevehicle is laden, youmust shift to a lower gearin time. By doing so, you will make use of thebraking effect of the engine. This relieves theload on the brake system and prevents thebrakes from overheating and wearing tooquickly.Use cruise control only if road and traffic con-ditions make it appropriate to maintain asteady speed for a prolonged period. You canstore any road speed above 20 mph(30 km/h).

Important safety notesIf you fail to adapt your driving style, cruisecontrol can neither reduce the risk of an acci-dent nor override the laws of physics. Cruisecontrol cannot take into account the road,traffic and weather conditions. Cruise controlis only an aid. You are responsible for the dis-tance to the vehicle in front, for vehicle speed,for braking in good time and for staying inyour lane.

178 Driving systemsDrivingandparking

Do not use cruise control:Rin road and traffic conditions which do notallow you to maintain a constant speed e.g.in heavy traffic or on winding roadsRon slippery road surfaces. Braking or accel-erating could cause the drivewheels to losetraction and the vehicle could then skidRwhen there is poor visibility, e.g. due to fog,heavy rain or snow

If there is a change of drivers, advise the newdriver of the speed stored.

Cruise control lever

: To activate or increase speed; To activate or reduce speed= To deactivate cruise control? To activate at the current speed/last

stored speedWhen you activate cruise control, the storedspeed is shown in the multifunction displayfor five seconds.

Activation conditionsTo activate cruise control, all of the followingactivation conditions must be fulfilled:Rthe parking brake must be released.Ryou are driving faster than 20 mph(30 km/h).RESP® must be active, but not intervening.Rthe transmission must be in position D.

Storing and maintaining the currentspeed

You can accept the current speed if you aredriving faster than 20 mph (30 km/h).X Accelerate the vehicle to the desiredspeed.

X Briefly press the cruise control lever up:or down;.

X Remove your foot from the acceleratorpedal.Cruise control is activated. The vehicleautomatically maintains the stored speed.

i Cruise control may be unable to maintainthe stored speed on uphill gradients. Thestored speed is resumed when the gradientevens out. Cruise control maintains thestored speed on downhill gradients byautomatically applying the brakes.

Storing the current speed or calling upthe last stored speed

G WARNINGIf you call up the stored speed and it is lowerthan the current speed, the vehicle deceler-ates. If you do not know the stored speed, thevehicle could decelerate unexpectedly. Thereis a risk of an accident.Pay attention to the road and traffic condi-tions before calling up the stored speed. If youdo not know the stored speed, store thedesired speed again.

Driving systems 179

Drivingandparking

Z

X Briefly pull the cruise control lever towardsyou:.

X Remove your foot from the acceleratorpedal.The first time cruise control is activated, itstores the current speed or regulates thespeed of the vehicle to the previouslystored speed.

Setting a speed

X Press the cruise control lever up: for ahigher speed or down; for a lower speed.

X To adjust the set speed in 1 mph incre-ments (1 km/h increments): brieflypress the cruise control lever up: ordown; to the pressure point.Every time the cruise control lever ispressed up: or down; the last speedstored is increased or reduced.

X To adjust the set speed in 5 mph incre-ments (10 km/h increments): briefly

press the cruise control lever up: ordown; to the pressure point.Every time the cruise control lever ispressed up: or down; the last speedstored is increased or reduced.

i Cruise control is not deactivated if youdepress the accelerator pedal. For exam-ple, if you accelerate briefly to overtake,cruise control adjusts the vehicle's speedto the last speed stored after you have fin-ished overtaking.

Deactivating cruise control

There are several ways to deactivate cruisecontrol:X Briefly press the cruise control lever for-wards:.

orX Brake.Cruise control is automatically deactivated if:Ryou depress the parking brakeRyou are driving at less than 20 mph(30 km/h)RESP® intervenes or you deactivate ESP®Ryou shift the transmission to position Nwhile driving

If cruise control is deactivated, you will hear awarning tone. You will see the Cruise Con‐Cruise Con‐trol Offtrol Off message in the multifunction dis-play for approximately five seconds.

i When you switch off the engine, the lastspeed stored is cleared.

180 Driving systemsDrivingandparking

DISTRONIC PLUS

General notesDISTRONIC PLUS regulates the speed andautomatically helps you maintain the dis-tance to the vehicle detected in front. Vehi-cles are detected with the aid of the radarsensor system. DISTRONIC PLUS brakesautomatically so that the set speed is notexceeded.Change into a lower gear in good time on longand steep downhill gradients. This is espe-cially important if the vehicle is laden. Bydoing so, you will make use of the brakingeffect of the engine. This relieves the load onthe brake system and prevents the brakesfrom overheating and wearing too quickly.If DISTRONIC PLUS detects that there is a riskof a collision, you will be warned visually andacoustically. DISTRONIC PLUS cannot pre-vent a collision without your intervention. Anintermittent warning tone will then sound andthe distance warning lamp will light up in theinstrument cluster. Brake immediately inorder to increase the distance to the vehiclein front or take evasive action provided it issafe to do so.For DISTRONIC PLUS to assist you, the radarsensor system must be operational.DISTRONIC PLUS operates in range between0 mph (0 km/h) and 120 mph (200 km/h).Do not use DISTRONIC PLUS while driving onroads with steep gradients.As DISTRONIC PLUS transmits radar waves, itcan resemble the radar detectors of theresponsible authorities. You can refer to therelevant chapter in the Operator's Manual ifquestions are asked about this.

i USA only: This device has been approvedby the FCC as a "Vehicular Radar System".The radar sensor is intended for use in anautomotive radar system only. Removal,tampering, or altering of the devicewill voidany warranties, and is not permitted by theFCC. Do not tamper with, alter, or use inany non-approved way.

Any unauthorized modification to thisdevice could void the user's authority tooperate the equipment.

i Canada only: This device complies withRSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation issubject to the following two conditions:1. This device may not cause harmful inter-ference, and2. This devicemust accept any interferencereceived, including interference that maycause undesired operation of the device.Removal, tampering, or altering of thedevice will void any warranties, and is notpermitted. Do not tamper with, alter, or usein any non-approved way.Any unauthorized modification to thisdevice could void the user's authority tooperate the equipment.

Important safety notes

G WARNINGDISTRONIC PLUS does not react to:Rpeople or animalsRstationary obstacles on the road, e.g. stop-ped or parked vehiclesRoncoming and crossing trafficAs a result, DISTRONIC PLUSmay neither givewarnings nor intervene in such situations.There is a risk of an accident.Always pay careful attention to the traffic sit-uation and be ready to brake.

G WARNINGDISTRONIC PLUS cannot always clearly iden-tify other road users and complex traffic sit-uations.In such cases, DISTRONIC PLUS may:Rgive an unnecessary warning and thenbrake the vehicleRneither give a warning nor interveneRaccelerate or brake unexpectedlyThere is a risk of an accident.

Driving systems 181

Drivingandparking

Z

Continue to drive carefully and be ready tobrake, in particular when warned to do so byDISTRONIC PLUS.

G WARNINGDISTRONIC PLUS brakes your vehicle with upto 50% of themaximumpossible deceleration.If this braking force is insufficient, DISTRONICPLUS warns you visually and audibly. There isa risk of an accident.In such cases, apply the brakes yourself andtry to take evasive action.

! If DISTRONIC PLUS or the HOLD functionis activated, the vehicle brakes automati-cally in certain situations.To prevent damage to the vehicle, deacti-vate DISTRONIC PLUS and the HOLD func-tion in the following or other similar situa-tions:Rwhen towing the vehicleRin the car wash

If you fail to adapt your driving style,DISTRONIC PLUS can neither reduce the riskof accident nor override the laws of physics.DISTRONIC PLUS cannot take into accountthe road, traffic and weather conditions.DISTRONIC PLUS is only an aid. You areresponsible for the distance to the vehicle infront, for vehicle speed, for braking in goodtime and for staying in your lane.Do not use DISTRONIC PLUS:Rin road and traffic conditions which do notallow you tomaintain a constant speed, e.g.in heavy traffic or on winding roadsRon slippery road surfaces. Braking or accel-erating could cause the drivewheels to losetraction and the vehicle could then skidRwhen there is poor visibility, e.g. due to fog,heavy rain or snow

DISTRONIC PLUS may not detect narrowvehicles driving in front, e.g. motorcycles, orvehicles driving on a different line.

In particular, the detection of obstacles canbe impaired if:Rthere is dirt on the sensors or anything elsecovering the sensorsRthere is snow or heavy rainRthere is interference by other radar sourcesRthere are strong radar reflections, forexample, in parking garages

If DISTRONIC PLUS no longer detects a vehi-cle in front, DISTRONIC PLUS may unexpect-edly accelerate the vehicle to the storedspeed.This speed may:Rbe too high if you are driving in a filter laneor an exit laneRbe so high in the right lane that you passvehicles driving on the left (left-hand drivecountries)Rbe so high in the left lane that you passvehicles driving on the right (right-handdrive countries)

If there is a change of drivers, advise the newdriver of the speed stored.

Cruise control lever

: To store the current speed or a higherspeed

; To store the current speed or a lowerspeed

= To deactivate DISTRONIC PLUS? To store the current speed or call up the

last stored speedA To set the specified minimum distance

182 Driving systemsDrivingandparking

Activating DISTRONIC PLUS

Activation conditionsIn order to activate DISTRONIC PLUS, the fol-lowing conditions must be fulfilled:Rthe engine must be started. It may take upto two minutes after pulling away beforeDISTRONIC PLUS is operational.Rthe parking brake must be released.RESP® must be active, but not intervening.RActive Parking Assist must not be activa-ted.Rthe transmission must be in position D.Rthe hood must be closed.Rthe driver's door must be closed when youshift from P to D or your seat belt must befastened.Rthe front-passenger door and rear doorsmust be closed.Rthe vehicle must not skid.

Activating

X Briefly pull the cruise control lever towardsyou; or press it up: or down=.DISTRONIC PLUS is selected.

X Press the cruise control lever repeatedlyup: or down= until the desired speed isset.

X Remove your foot from the acceleratorpedal.Your vehicle adapts its speed to that of thevehicle in front, but only up to the desiredstored speed.

If the vehicle in front of you is stationary, youcan only activate DISTRONIC PLUS once yourvehicle is stationary as well.

i If you do not fully release the acceleratorpedal, the DISTRONIC PLUS OverrideDISTRONIC PLUS Overridemessage appears in the multifunction dis-play. The set distance to a slower-movingvehicle in front will then not be maintained.You will be driving at the speed you deter-mine by the position of the acceleratorpedal.

You can also activate DISTRONIC PLUS whenstationary. The lowest speed that can be set is18 mph (30 km/h).X Briefly pull the cruise control lever towardsyou; up: or down= .DISTRONIC PLUS is selected.

Activating at the current speed/laststored speedG WARNINGIf you call up the stored speed and it differsfrom the current speed, the vehicle acceler-ates or decelerates. If you do not know thestored speed, the vehicle could accelerate orbrake unexpectedly. There is a risk of an acci-dent.Pay attention to the road and traffic condi-tions before calling up the stored speed. If youdo not know the stored speed, store thedesired speed again.

Driving systems 183

Drivingandparking

Z

X Briefly pull the cruise control lever towardsyou:.

X Remove your foot from the acceleratorpedal.DISTRONIC PLUS is activated. The firsttime it is activated, the current speed isstored. Otherwise, it sets the vehicle cruisespeed to the previously stored value.

Driving with DISTRONIC PLUS

Pulling away and driving

X If you want to pull away withDISTRONIC PLUS: remove your foot fromthe brake pedal.

X Briefly pull the cruise control lever towardsyou:.

orX Accelerate briefly.Your vehicle pulls away and adapts itsspeed to that of the vehicle in front.If no vehicle is detected in front, your vehi-cle accelerates to the set speed.

i The vehicle can also pull away when it isfacing an unidentified obstacle or is drivingon a different line from another vehicle. Thevehicle then brakes automatically. There isa risk of an accident. Be ready to brake at alltimes.

If there is no vehicle in front, DISTRONICPLUS operates in the same way as cruisecontrol.If DISTRONIC PLUS detects that the vehicle infront has slowed down, it brakes your vehicle.

In this way, the distance you have selected ismaintained.If DISTRONIC PLUS detects a faster-movingvehicle in front, it increases the driving speed.However, the vehicle is only accelerated up tothe speed you have stored.

Selecting the drive programDISTRONIC PLUS supports a sporty drivingstylewhen you have selected theS orM (AMGvehicles: S, S+ or M) driving program(Y page 162). Acceleration behind the vehiclein front or to the set speed is then noticeablymore dynamic. If you have selected the E(AMG vehicles: C) driving program, the vehi-cle accelerates more gently. This setting isrecommended in stop-and-start traffic.

Changing lanesIf you change to the passing lane, DISTRONICPLUS supports you when:Ryou are driving faster than 45 mph(70 km/h)RDISTRONIC PLUS is maintaining the dis-tance to a vehicle in frontRyou have switched on the correspondingturn signalRDISTRONIC PLUS does not detect a dangerof collision

If these conditions are fulfilled, your vehicle isaccelerated. Acceleration will be interruptedif changing lanes takes too long or if the dis-tance between your vehicle and the vehicle infront becomes too small.

i When changing lanes, DISTRONIC PLUSmonitors the left lane on left-hand drivevehicles and the right lane on right-handdrive vehicles.

184 Driving systemsDrivingandparking

StoppingG WARNINGWhen leaving the vehicle, even if it is brakedonly by DISTRONIC PLUS, it could roll away if:Rthere is a malfunction in the system or inthe voltage supply.RDISTRONIC PLUS has been deactivatedwith the cruise control lever, e.g. by a vehi-cle occupant or from outside the vehicle.Rthe electrical system in the engine com-partment, the battery or the fuses havebeen tampered with.Rthe battery is disconnected.Rthe accelerator pedal has been depressed,e.g. by a vehicle occupant.

There is a risk of an accident.If you wish to exit the vehicle, always turn offDISTRONIC PLUS and secure the vehicleagainst rolling away.

For further information on deactivatingDISTRONIC PLUS (Y page 187).If DISTRONIC PLUS detects that the vehicle infront is stopping, it brakes your vehicle until itis stationary.Once your vehicle is stationary, it remainsstationary and you do not need to depress thebrake.Depending on the specified minimum dis-tance, your vehicle will come to a standstill ata sufficient distance behind the vehicle infront. The specified minimum distance is setusing the control on the cruise control lever.When DISTRONIC PLUS is activated, thetransmission is shifted automatically to posi-tion P if:Rthe driver's door is open and the driver'sseat belt is unfastened.Rthe engine is switched off, unless it is auto-matically switched off by the ECO start/stop function.Ra system malfunction occurs.Rthe power supply is not sufficient.

Setting a speed

X Press the cruise control lever up: for ahigher speed or down; for a lower speed.

X To adjust the set speed in 1 mph incre-ments (1 km/h increments): brieflypress the cruise control lever up: ordown; to the pressure point.Every time the cruise control lever ispressed up: or down;, the last speedstored is increased or reduced.

X To adjust the set speed in 5 mph incre-ments (10 km/h increments): brieflypress the cruise control lever up: ordown; to the pressure point.Every time the cruise control lever ispressed up: or down;, the last speedstored is increased or reduced.

i If you accelerate to overtake, DISTRONICPLUS adjusts the vehicle's speed to the lastspeed stored after you have finished over-taking.

Setting the specifiedminimumdistanceYou can set the specified minimum distancefor DISTRONIC PLUS by varying the time spanbetween one and two seconds.With this func-tion, you can set the minimum distance thatDISTRONIC PLUS keeps to the vehicle infront, dependent on vehicle speed. You cansee this distance in the multifunction display(Y page 186).

i Make sure that you maintain a sufficientdistance to the vehicle in front and complywith the minimum distance as required by

Driving systems 185

Drivingandparking

Z

law. Adjust the distance to the vehicle infront if necessary.

You can set the specified minimum distancefor DISTRONIC PLUS by varying the time spanbetween one and two seconds.With this func-tion, you can set the minimum distance thatDISTRONIC PLUS keeps to the vehicle infront, dependent on vehicle speed. You cansee this distance in the multifunction display(Y page 186).X To increase: turn control; in direction=.DISTRONIC PLUS then maintains a greaterdistance between your vehicle and thevehicle in front.

X To decrease: turn control; in direc-tion:.DISTRONIC PLUS then maintains a shorterdistance between your vehicle and thevehicle in front.

DISTRONIC PLUS displays in the speed-ometer

When DISTRONIC PLUS is activated, one ortwo segments; in the set speed range lightup.If DISTRONIC PLUS detects a vehicle in front,segments; between speed of the vehicle infront: and stored speed= light up.

i For design reasons, the speed displayedin the speedometer may differ slightly fromthe speed set for DISTRONIC PLUS.

DISTRONIC PLUS displays in the multi-function display

General notesIn the Assistance menu (Y page 235) of theon-board computer, you can select the assis-tance display.

Display when DISTRONIC PLUS is deacti-vated

: Vehicle in front, if detected; Distance indicator, current distance to

the vehicle in front= Specified minimum distance to the vehi-

cle in front; adjustable? Own vehicleX Select the Assistance GraphicAssistance Graphic functionusing the on-board computer(Y page 235).

186 Driving systemsDrivingandparking

Display when DISTRONIC PLUS is activa-ted

: Vehicle in front, if detected; Specified minimum distance to the vehi-

cle in front; adjustable= Own vehicle? DISTRONIC PLUS active (text only

appears when the cruise control lever isactuated)

X Select the Assistance GraphicAssistance Graphic functionusing the on-board computer(Y page 235).

i You will see the stored speed for aboutfive seconds when you activate DISTRONICPLUS.

Deactivating DISTRONIC PLUS

There are several ways to deactivateDISTRONIC PLUS:X Briefly press the cruise control lever for-wards:.

orX Brake, unless the vehicle is stationaryWhen you deactivate DISTRONIC PLUS, youwill see the DISTRONICDISTRONIC PLUSPLUS OffOffmessage in

the multifunction display for approximatelyfive seconds.

i The last speed stored remains stored untilyou switch off the engine.

i DISTRONIC PLUS is not deactivated if youdepress the accelerator pedal.

DISTRONIC PLUS is automatically deactiva-ted if:Ryou engage the parking brakeRESP® intervenes or you deactivate ESP®Rthe transmission is in the P, R orN positionRyou pull the cruise control lever towardsyou in order to pull away and the front-passenger door or one of the rear doors isopenRthe vehicle is skiddingRyou activate Active Parking AssistIf DISTRONIC PLUS is deactivated, you willhear a warning tone. You will see theDISTRONIC PLUS OffDISTRONIC PLUS Off message in the multi-function display for approximately five sec-onds.

Tips for driving with DISTRONIC PLUS

General notesPay particular attention in the following trafficsituations:RCornering, going into and coming out of abendRVehicles traveling on a different lineROther vehicles changing lanesRNarrow vehiclesRObstructions and stationary vehiclesRCrossing vehiclesIn such situations, brake if necessary.DISTRONIC PLUS is then deactivated.

Driving systems 187

Drivingandparking

Z

Cornering, going into and coming out of abend

The ability of DISTRONIC PLUS to detect vehi-cles when cornering is limited. Your vehiclemay brake unexpectedly or late.

Vehicles traveling on a different line

DISTRONIC PLUS may not detect vehiclestraveling on a different line. The distance tothe vehicle in front will be too short.

Other vehicles changing lanes

DISTRONIC PLUS has not detected the vehi-cle cutting in yet. The distance to this vehiclewill be too short.

Narrow vehicles

DISTRONIC PLUS has not yet detected thevehicle in front on the edge of the road,because of its narrow width. The distance tothe vehicle in front will be too short.

Obstructions and stationary vehicles

DISTRONIC PLUS does not brake for obsta-cles or stationary vehicles. If, for example, thedetected vehicle turns a corner and revealsan obstacle or stationary vehicle, DISTRONICPLUS will not brake for these.

188 Driving systemsDrivingandparking

Crossing vehicles

DISTRONIC PLUS may mistakenly detectvehicles that are crossing your lane. Activat-ing DISTRONIC PLUS at traffic lights withcrossing traffic, for example, could causeyour vehicle to pull away unintentionally.

DISTRONIC PLUS with Steering Assistand Stop&Go Pilot

General notes

DISTRONIC PLUS with Steering Assist andStop&Go Pilot aids you in keeping the vehiclein the center of the driving lane by means ofmoderate steering interventions in the speedrange from 0 - 125 mph (0 - 200 km/h).It monitors the area in front of your vehicle bymeans of multifunction camera:, at the topof the windshield.At speeds of 0 - 37 mph (0 - 60 km/h),Stop&Go Pilot focuses on the vehicle in front,taking into account lane markings, e.g. whenfollowing vehicles in a traffic jam.At speeds of more than 37 mph (60 km/h)Steering Assist focuses on detected lane

markings (left and right), and only on the vehi-cle in front if lane markings are missing.If these conditions are not present, SteeringAssist and Stop&Go Pilot cannot provideassistance.DISTRONIC PLUS must be active in order forthe function to be available.

Important safety notesIf you fail to adapt your driving style,DISTRONIC PLUS with Steering Assist andStop&Go Pilot can neither reduce the risk ofan accident nor override the laws of physics.It cannot take account of road, weather andtraffic conditions. DISTRONIC PLUS withSteering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot is only anaid. You are responsible for the distance tothe vehicle in front, for vehicle speed, forbraking in good time and for staying in yourlane.DISTRONIC PLUS with Steering Assist andStop&Go Pilot does not detect road and traf-fic conditions. If you are following a vehiclewhich is driving towards the edge of the road,your vehicle could come into contact with thecurb or other road boundaries. Be particularlyaware of other road users, e.g. cyclists, thatare directly next to your vehicle.Obstacles such as building site huts on thelane or projecting out into the lane are notdetected.An inappropriate steering intervention, e.g.after intentionally driving over a lanemarking,can be corrected at any time if you steerslightly in the opposite direction.DISTRONIC PLUS with Steering Assist andStop&Go Pilot cannot continuously keep yourvehicle in lane. In some cases, the steeringintervention is not sufficient to bring the vehi-cle back to the lane. In such cases, you muststeer the vehicle yourself to ensure that itdoes not leave the lane.

Driving systems 189

Drivingandparking

Z

The support provided by the system can beimpaired if:Rthere is poor visibility, e.g. due to insuffi-cient illumination of the road, or due tosnow, rain, fog or sprayRthere is glare, e.g. from oncoming traffic,the sun or reflections (e.g. when the roadsurface is wet)Rthe windshield is dirty, fogged up, damagedor covered, for instance by a sticker, in thevicinity of the cameraRno, or several, unclear lane markings arepresent for one lane, e.g. in a constructionareaRthe lane markings are worn away, dark orcovered up, e.g. by dirt or snowRthe distance to the vehicle in front is toosmall and the lanemarkings thus cannot bedetectedRthe lane markings change quickly, e.g.lanes branch off, cross one another ormergeRthe road is narrow and windingRthere are strong shadows cast on the roadThe system is switched to passive and no lon-ger assists you by performing steering inter-ventions if:Ryou actively change lanesRyou switch on the turn signalRtake your hands off the steeringwheel or donot steer for a prolonged period of time

i After you have finished changing lanes,Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot are auto-matically active again.

DISTRONIC PLUS Steering Assist does notprovide assistance:Ron very sharp cornersRwhen a loss of tire pressure or a defectivetire has been detected and displayed.

Pay attention also to the important safetynotes for DISTRONIC PLUS (Y page 181).The steering interventions are carried outwith a limited steering moment. The system

requires the driver to keep his hands on thesteering wheel and to steer himself.If you do not steer yourself or if you take yourhands off the steering wheel for a prolongedperiod of time, the system will first alert youwith a visual warning. A steering wheel sym-bol appears in themultifunction display. If youhave still not started to steer and have nottaken hold of the steering wheel after fiveseconds at the latest, a warning tone alsosounds to remind you to take control of thevehicle. SteeringAssist andStop&GoPilot areswitched to passive. DISTRONIC PLUSremains active.

Activating Steering Assist and Stop&GoPilotX Activate the DISTRONIC PLUS with Steer-ing Assist and Stop&Go Pilot function usingthe on-board computer (Y page 236).The DTR+:DTR+: SteeringSteering AssistantAssistant OnOnmes-sage appears in the multifunction display.Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot areactive.

Information in the multifunction display

If Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot are acti-vated but not ready for a steering interven-tion, steering wheel symbol: appears ingray. If the system provides you with supportby means of steering interventions, sym-bol: is shown in green.

Deactivating Steering Assist and Stop&GoPilotX Deactivate the DISTRONIC PLUS withSteering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot functionusing the on-board computer(Y page 236).The DTR+: Steering Assistant OffDTR+: Steering Assistant Offmessage appears in the multifunction dis-

190 Driving systemsDrivingandparking

play. Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot aredeactivated.

When DISTRONIC PLUS is deactivated or notavailable, Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilotare deactivated automatically.

HOLD function

General notesThe HOLD function can assist the driver in thefollowing situations:Rwhen pulling away, especially on steepslopesRwhen maneuvering on steep slopesRwhen waiting in trafficThe vehicle is kept stationary without thedriver having to depress the brake pedal.The braking effect is canceled and the HOLDfunction deactivated when you depress theaccelerator pedal to pull away.

Important safety notes

G WARNINGWhen leaving the vehicle, it can still roll awaydespite being braked by the HOLD function if:Rthere is a malfunction in the system or inthe voltage supply.Rthe HOLD function has been deactivated bypressing the accelerator pedal or the brakepedal, e.g. by a vehicle occupant.Rthe electrical system in the engine com-partment, the battery or the fuses havebeen tampered with.Rthe battery is disconnectedThere is a risk of an accident.If you wish to exit the vehicle, always turn offthe HOLD function and secure the vehicleagainst rolling away.

! If DISTRONIC PLUS or the HOLD functionis activated, the vehicle brakes automati-cally in certain situations.

To prevent damage to the vehicle, deacti-vate DISTRONIC PLUS and the HOLD func-tion in the following or other similar situa-tions:Rwhen towing the vehicleRin the car wash

Activation conditionsYou can activate the HOLD function if:Rthe vehicle is stationaryRthe engine is running or if it has been auto-matically switched off by the ECO start/stop functionRthe driver's door is closed or your seat beltis fastenedRthe parking brake is releasedRthe transmission is in position D, R or NRDISTRONIC PLUS is deactivated

Activating the HOLD function

X Make sure that the activation conditionsare met.

X Depress the brake pedal.X Quickly depress the brake pedal furtheruntilë: appears in the multifunctiondisplay.The HOLD function is activated. You canrelease the brake pedal.

i If depressing the brake pedal the firsttime does not activate the HOLD function,wait briefly and then try again.

Driving systems 191

Drivingandparking

Z

Deactivating the HOLD functionThe HOLD function is deactivated automati-cally if:Ryou accelerate and the transmission is inposition D or R.Ryou shift the transmission to position P.Ryou depress the brake pedal again with acertain amount of pressure untilë dis-appears from the multifunction display.Ryou activate DISTRONIC PLUS.When the HOLD function is activated, thetransmission is shifted automatically to posi-tion P if:Rthe driver's door is open and the driver'sseat belt is unfastened.Rthe engine is switched off, unless it is auto-matically switched off by the ECO start/stop function.Rthe hood is opened.Ra system malfunction occurs.Rthe power supply is not sufficient.

RACE START

Important safety notes

i Observe the safety notes for the SPORThandling mode (Y page 77).

RACE START is intended solely for activationon dedicated race circuits.RACE START enables optimal accelerationfrom a standing start. The precondition forthis is a suitable high-grip road surface.

i RACE START is only available in AMG vehi-cles.

Conditions for activationYou can activate RACE START if:Rthe doors are closed.Rthe engine is running and it has reached anoperating temperature of approximately176 ‡ (80 †). This is the case when the

engine oil temperature in the multifunctiondisplay stops flashing.RSPORT handling mode is activated.(Y page 77)Rthe steering wheel is in the straight-aheadposition.Rthe vehicle is stationary and the brakepedal is depressed (left foot).Rthe transmission is in position D.

Activating RACE STARTX Depress the brake pedal with your left footand keep it depressed.

X Turn the drive program selector clockwise(Y page 163) until the RS lamp lights up.The RACE START Confirm: Paddle UPRACE START Confirm: Paddle UPCancel: Paddle DOWNCancel: Paddle DOWN message appearsin the multifunction display.i If the activation conditions are no longerfulfilled, RACE START is canceled. TheRACE START CanceledRACE START Canceled message appearsin the multifunction display.

X To cancel: pull the left steering wheel pad-dle shifter (Y page 163).

orX To confirm: pull the right steering wheelpaddle shifter (Y page 163).The RACE START Available DepressRACE START Available Depressgas pedalgas pedal message appears in the multi-function display.i If you do not depress the acceleratorpedal fully within two seconds, RACESTART is canceled. The RACE START NotRACE START NotPossiblePossible SeeSee Operator'sOperator's ManualManualmes-sage appears in the multifunction display.

X Fully depress the accelerator pedal.The engine speed rises to approximately3,500 rpm.The RACE START Release brake toRACE START Release brake tostartstart message appears in the multifunc-tion display.i If you do not release the brake pedalwithin five seconds, RACE START is can-

192 Driving systemsDrivingandparking

celed. The RACE START CanceledRACE START Canceled mes-sage appears in the multifunction display.

X Take your foot off the brake, but keep theaccelerator pedal depressed.The vehicle pulls away at maximum accel-eration.The RACERACE STARTSTART ActiveActivemessage appearsin the multifunction display.

RACE START is deactivated when the vehiclereaches a speed of approximately 30 mph(Canada: 50 km/h). Drive program S+ is acti-vated. SPORT handling mode remains activa-ted.RACE START is deactivated immediately ifyou release the accelerator pedal duringRACE START or if any of the activation condi-tions are no longer fulfilled. The RACERACE STARTSTARTNot Possible See Operator's ManualNot Possible See Operator's Manualmessage appears in the multifunction dis-play.

i If RACE START is used repeatedly within ashort period of time, it is only availableagain after the vehicle has been driven acertain distance.

AIRMATIC

Vehicle level

Important safety notesG WARNINGWhen the vehicle is being lowered, peoplecould become trapped if their limbs arebetween the vehicle body and the wheels orunderneath the vehicle. There is a risk ofinjury.Make sure no one is underneath the vehicle orin the immediate vicinity of the wheel archeswhen the vehicle is being lowered.

G WARNINGVehicles with level control:

The vehicle is slightly lowered if:Ryou have selected comfort suspension tun-ing andRyou lock the vehicle within approximately60 seconds of switching off the engine

You and people in the vicinity of the wheelarch or the underbodymay thus become trap-ped. There is a risk of injury.Make sure that nobody is in the vicinity of thewheel arch or the underbody when you lockthe vehicle.

! The vehicle is lowered by about 15 mm if:Ryou have selected "Comfort tuning"Ryou switch off the engine and thenRyou lock the vehiclewithin approximately60 seconds

When parking, position your vehicle so thatit does not make contact with the curb asthe vehicle is lowered. Your vehicle couldotherwise be damaged.

If you unlock the vehicle within 60 seconds ofhaving switched the engine off, the vehicle islowered slightly when Comfort suspensionmode is selected.Your vehicle regulates its height automati-cally. All-round level control ensures the bestpossible suspension and constant groundclearance, even with a laden vehicle. Whenyou drive fast, the vehicle is lowered auto-matically to improve driving safety and toreduce fuel consumption.The following vehicle levels are possible:RNormalRRaised: the vehicle is raised by approx-imately 0.80 in (20 mm) when comparedwith the normal levelRLowered: the vehicle is raised by approx-imately 0.40 in (10 mm) when comparedwith the normal level

i These changes in level are so slight thatyou are hardly aware of them.

The "Normal" and "Raised" vehicle levels canbe set manually.

Driving systems 193

Drivingandparking

Z

The "Lowered” vehicle level is set automati-cally:Rat speeds above 70 mph (113 km/h)Rif you have selected "Sports tuning"(Y page 194)

Setting the vehicle levelSelect the "Normal" setting for normal roadsurfaces and "Raised" for driving with snowchains or on particularly poor road surfaces.Your selection remains stored even if youremove the SmartKey from the ignition lock.

Setting raised level

X Start the engine.

If indicator lamp; is not lit:X Press the: button.Indicator lamp; lights up. The vehicleheight is adjusted to raised level.The Vehicle RisingVehicle Rising message appears inthe display.

The "Raised level" setting is canceled if you:Rdrive at a speed over approximately 75mph(120 km/h)Rdrive for approximately three minutes at aspeed over 50 mph (80 km/h).

The "Raised level" remains active when youare not driving within these speed ranges.

Setting the normal levelX Start the engine.

If indicator lamp; is lit:X Press button: .Indicator lamp; goes out. The vehicle isadjusted to normal level.

Suspension tuning

General notesThe electronically controlled damping systemworks continuously. This improves drivingsafety and ride comfort.The damping is tuned individually to eachwheel and depends on:Ryour driving style, e.g. sportyRthe road surface condition, e.g. bumpsRyour individual selection, i.e. sports or com-fort

Your selection remains stored even if youremove the SmartKey from the ignition lock.

Sports tuning

The firmer suspension tuning in Sport modeensures even better contact with the road.Select this mode when employing a sportydriving style, e.g. on winding country roads.X Press button:.Indicator lamp; lights up. Sports suspen-sion tuning is selected.The AIRMATIC SPORTAIRMATIC SPORT message appears inthe multifunction display.

Comfort tuningIn comfort mode, the driving characteristicsof your vehicle are more comfortable. There-fore, select this mode if you favor a more

194 Driving systemsDrivingandparking

comfortable driving style. Select comfortmode alsowhen driving fast on straight roads,e.g. on straight stretches of highway.X Press button:.Indicator lamp= lights up. Comfort tuningis selected.The AIRMATIC COMFORTAIRMATIC COMFORT message appearsin the multifunction display.

AMG adaptive sport suspension sys-tem

Important safety notes

G WARNINGWhen the vehicle is being lowered, peoplecould become trapped if their limbs arebetween the vehicle body and the wheels orunderneath the vehicle. There is a risk ofinjury.Make sure no one is underneath the vehicle orin the immediate vicinity of the wheel archeswhen the vehicle is being lowered.

G WARNINGVehicles with level control:The vehicle is slightly lowered if:Ryou have selected comfort suspension tun-ing andRyou lock the vehicle within approximately60 seconds of switching off the engine

You and people in the vicinity of the wheelarch or the underbodymay thus become trap-ped. There is a risk of injury.Make sure that nobody is in the vicinity of thewheel arch or the underbody when you lockthe vehicle.

! The vehicle is lowered by about 0.8 in(20 mm) if:Ryou have selected "Comfortable tuning"Ryou switch off the engine and thenRyou lock the vehiclewithin approximately60 seconds

When parking, position your vehicle so thatit does not make contact with the curb asthe vehicle is lowered. Your vehicle couldotherwise be damaged.

Suspension tuning

General notesThe electronically controlled damping systemworks continuously. This improves drivingsafety and ride comfort.The damping is tuned individually to eachwheel and depends on:Ryour driving style, e.g. sportyRthe road surface condition, e.g. bumpsRyour individual selection of Sport, Sport +or Comfort

Sport mode

: Mode selection button; Button to store, recall and display the

selected mode= Sport + mode indicator lamp? Sport mode indicator lampThe firmer suspension tuning in Sport modeensures better contact with the road. Selectthis mode when employing a sporty drivingstyle, e.g. on winding country roads.X Press button:.Indicator lamp? lights up. You have selec-ted Sport mode.The AMGAMG SuspensionSuspension SystemSystem SPORTSPORTmes-sage appears in the multifunction display.

Driving systems 195

Drivingandparking

Z

Sport + modeThe very firm setting of the suspension tuningin Sport + mode ensures the best possiblecontact with the road. Select this mode pref-erably when driving on race circuits.If indicator lamps= and? are off:X Press button: twice.Indicator lamps= and? light up. Youhave selected Sport + mode.The AMG Suspension System SPORT +AMG Suspension System SPORT +message appears in the multifunction dis-play.

If indicator lamp? lights up:X Press button: once.Second indicator lamp= lights up. Youhave selected Sport + mode.The AMG Suspension System SPORT +AMG Suspension System SPORT +message appears in the multifunction dis-play.

Comfort modeWhen comfort mode is selected, the drivingcharacteristics of your vehicle are more com-fortable. Select this mode if you favor a com-fort-oriented driving style. Select comfortmode alsowhen driving fast on straight roads,e.g. on straight stretches of highway.X Press button: repeatedly until indicatorlamps= and? go out.You have selected Comfort mode.The AMG Suspension System COMFORTAMG Suspension System COMFORTmessage appears in the multifunction dis-play.

Storing and calling up settingsOnce the suspension tuning and drive pro-gram have been selected, you can store andcall up your settings using AMG button;.X To store: press and hold AMG button;until you hear a tone.

X To call up: press AMG button;.The stored suspension tuning and driveprogram are selected.

X To display: briefly press AMG button;.Your selection appears in the multifunctiondisplay.

Vehicle level

Important safety notesG WARNINGWhen the vehicle is being lowered, peoplecould become trapped if their limbs arebetween the vehicle body and the wheels orunderneath the vehicle. There is a risk ofinjury.Make sure no one is underneath the vehicle orin the immediate vicinity of the wheel archeswhen the vehicle is being lowered.

The vehicle may be lowered if you press thesuspension setting selector button or theAMG button. The vehicle also lowers if it isstationary.

! If Sport or Sport + suspension tuning hasbeen selected, the vehicle's ground clear-ance decreases. Make sure that no objectsbecome trapped or that the vehicle doesnot become damaged, for example, on thecurb.

i The vehicle levelmay change visibly at therear axle if you park the vehicle and theoutside temperature changes. If the tem-perature drops, the vehicle level lowers;with an increase in temperature, the vehi-cle level rises.

Changing the rear axle ride heightThis function is only available for the CLS 63AMG 4MATIC.The vehicle level at the rear axle depends onthe selected suspension tuning and the vehi-cle speed.The vehicle level at the rear axle changes dur-ing the journey depending on the selectedsuspension tuning:RComfort: +0.4 in (+10 mm)RSport + and Sport: -0.6 in (-15 mm)

196 Driving systemsDrivingandparking

When changing from Comfort to Sport orSport +, the axle is lowered approximately1.0 in (25 mm). When changing from Sport orSport + to Comfort, the axle is raised approx-imately 1.0 in (25 mm). This level change alsotakes place when the vehicle is stationary.If you drive faster than 105 mph (170 km/h),the rear axle level is set to a middle level. Thisincreases driving safety and reduces airresistance. If you then drive slower than93 mph (150 km/h), the level of the rear axleis again adjusted to correspond to the selec-ted suspension mode.

Load compensationThe vehicle can compensate differences inthe vehicle level by raising or lowering therear axle. This is the case, for example, if peo-ple get out or if luggage is being loaded.Load compensation takes place if:Ra door, the trunk lid or the tailgate isopenedRthe parked vehicle is unlockedFor larger level changes, the engine must berunning.

4MATIC (permanent four-wheel drive)If you fail to adapt your driving style, 4MATICcan neither reduce the risk of accident noroverride the laws of physics. 4MATIC cannottake account of road, weather and traffic con-ditions. 4MATIC is only an aid. You areresponsible for the distance to the vehicle infront, for vehicle speed, for braking in goodtime and for staying in your lane.If a drive wheel spins due to insufficient grip:ROnly depress the accelerator pedal as far asnecessary when pulling away.RAccelerate less when driving.

! Never tow the vehicle with one axleraised. This may damage the transfer case.Damage of this sort is not covered by theMercedes-Benz Limited Warranty. Allwheelsmust remain either on the ground or

be fully raised. Observe the instructions fortowing the vehicle with all wheels in fullcontact with the ground.

i In wintry driving conditions, themaximumeffect of 4MATIC can only be achieved ifyou use winter tires (M+S tires), with snowchains if necessary.

4MATIC ensures that all four wheels are per-manently driven. Together with ESP®, itimproves the traction of your vehicle when-ever a drive wheel spins due to insufficientgrip.

PARKTRONIC

Important safety notesPARKTRONIC is an electronic parking aid withultrasonic sensors. It monitors the areaaround your vehicle using six sensors in thefront bumper and six sensors in the rearbumper. PARKTRONIC indicates visually andaudibly the distance between your vehicleand an object.PARKTRONIC is only an aid. It is not a replace-ment for your attention to your immediatesurroundings. You are always responsible forsafe maneuvering, parking and exiting a park-ing space. When maneuvering, parking orpulling out of a parking space, make sure thatthere are no persons, animals or objects inthe area in which you are maneuvering.

! When parking, pay particular attention toobjects above or below the sensors, suchas flower pots or trailer drawbars.PARKTRONIC does not detect such objectswhen they are in the immediate vicinity ofthe vehicle. You could damage the vehicleor the objects.The sensorsmay not detect snow and otherobjects that absorb ultrasonic waves.Ultrasonic sources such as an automaticcar wash, the compressed-air brakes on atruck or a pneumatic drill could causePARKTRONIC to malfunction.

Driving systems 197

Drivingandparking

Z

PARKTRONICmay not function correctly onuneven terrain.

PARKTRONIC is activated automatically whenyou:Rswitch on the ignitionRshift the transmission to position D, R or NRrelease the parking brakePARKTRONIC is deactivated at speeds above11 mph (18 km/h). It is reactivated at lowerspeeds.

Range of the sensors

General notesPARKTRONIC does not take objects into con-sideration that are:Rbelow the detection range, e.g. people, ani-mals or objects.Rabove the detection range, e.g. overhang-ing loads, truck overhangs or loadingramps.

: Sensors in the front bumper, left-handside (example)

The sensors must be free from dirt, ice orslush. They can otherwise not function cor-rectly. Clean the sensors regularly, takingcare not to scratch or damage them(Y page 321).

Range

Front sensors

Center Approx. 40 in (approx.100 cm)

Corners Approx. 24 in (approx.60 cm)

Rear sensors

Center Approx. 48 in (approx.120 cm)

Corners Approx. 32 in (approx.80 cm)

Minimum distance

Center Approx. 8 in (approx.20 cm)

Corners Approx. 6 in (approx.15 cm)

If there is an obstacle within this range, therelevant warning displays light up and a warn-

198 Driving systemsDrivingandparking

ing tone sounds. If the distance falls belowthe minimum, the distance may no longer beshown.

Warning displays

Warning display for the front area: Segments on the left-hand side of the

vehicle; Segments on the right-hand side of the

vehicle= Segments showing operational readinessThe warning displays show the distancebetween the sensors and the obstacle. Thewarning display for the front area is locatedon the dashboard above the center air vents.The warning display for the rear area is loca-ted on the headliner in the rear compartment.The warning display for each side of the vehi-cle is divided into five yellow and two red seg-ments. PARKTRONIC is operational if yellowsegments showing operational readiness=light up.The selected transmission position and thedirection in which the vehicle is rolling deter-minewhichwarning display is activewhen theengine is running.

Transmissionposition

Warning display

D Front area activated

R, N or the vehicleis rolling back-wards

Rear and front areasactivated

P No areas activated

One or more segments light up as the vehicleapproaches an obstacle, depending on thevehicle's distance from the obstacle.From the:Rsixth segment onwards, you will hear anintermittent warning tone for approx-imately two seconds.Rseventh segment onwards, you will hear awarning tone for approximately two sec-onds. This indicates that you have nowreached the minimum distance.

Deactivating/activating PARKTRONIC

: Indicator lamp; Deactivates/activates PARKTRONICIf indicator lamp; lights up, PARKTRONIC isdeactivated. Active Parking Assist is then alsodeactivated.

i PARKTRONIC is automatically activatedwhen you turn the SmartKey to position2 inthe ignition lock.

Driving systems 199

Drivingandparking

Z

Problems with PARKTRONIC

Problem Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

Only the red segmentsin the PARKTRONICwarning displays are lit.You also hear a warningtone for approximatelytwo seconds.PARKTRONIC is thendeactivated and theindicator lamp on thePARKTRONIC buttonlights up.

PARKTRONIC has malfunctioned and has switched off.X If problems persist, have PARKTRONIC checked at a qualifiedspecialist workshop.

Only the red segmentsin the PARKTRONICwarning displays are lit.PARKTRONIC is thendeactivated.

The PARKTRONIC sensors are dirty or there is interference.X Clean the PARKTRONIC sensors (Y page 321).X Switch the ignition back on.

The problem may be caused by an external source of radio orultrasound waves.X See if PARKTRONIC functions in a different location.

Active Parking Assist

General notesActive Parking Assist is an electronic parkingaid with ultrasound. It measures the road onboth sides of the vehicle. A parking symbolindicates a suitable parking space. Activesteering intervention and brake applicationcan assist you during parking. You may alsouse PARKTRONIC (Y page 197).

Important safety notesActive Parking Assist is merely an aid. It is nota replacement for your attention to yourimmediate surroundings. You are alwaysresponsible for safe maneuvering, parkingand exiting a parking space. Make sure thatno persons, animals or objects are in themaneuvering range.When PARKTRONIC is switched off, ActiveParking Assist is also unavailable.

G WARNINGWhile parking or pulling out of a parkingspace, the vehicle swings out and can driveonto areas of the oncoming lane. This couldresult in a collision with another road user.There is a risk of an accident.Pay attention to other road users. Stop thevehicle if necessary or cancel the Active Park-ing Assist parking procedure.

! If unavoidable, you should drive overobstacles such as curbs slowly and not at asharp angle. Otherwise, you may damagethe wheels or tires.

Active Parking Assist may possibly indicateparking spaces which are not suitable forparking, for example:Rwhere parking or stopping is prohibitedRin front of driveways or entrances and exitsRon unsuitable surfaces

200 Driving systemsDrivingandparking

Parking tips:ROn narrow roads, drive as close to the park-ing space as possible.RParking spaces that are littered or over-grown might be identified or measuredincorrectly.RParking spaces that are partially occupiedby trailer drawbars might not be identifiedas such or be measured incorrectly.RSnowfall or heavy rainmay lead to a parkingspace being measured inaccurately.RPay attention to the PARKTRONIC(Y page 199) warning messages during theparking procedure.RYou can intervene in the steering procedureto correct it at any time. Active ParkingAssist will then be canceled.RWhen transporting a load which protrudesfrom your vehicle, you should not useActive Parking Assist.RNever use Active Parking Assist when snowchains are installed.RMake sure that the tire pressures arealways correct. This has a direct influenceon the parking characteristics of the vehi-cle.

Use Active Parking Assist for parking spaces:Rparallel or at right angles to the direction oftravelRthat are on straight roads, not bendsRthat are on the same level as the road, e.g.not on the pavement

Detecting parking spacesObjects located above the height range ofActive Parking Assist will not be detectedwhen the parking space is measured. Theseare not taken into account when the parkingprocedure is calculated, e.g. overhangingloads, tail sections or loading ramps of goodsvehicles.

G WARNINGIf there are objects above the detection range:RActive Park Assist may steer too earlyRthe vehicle may not stop in front of theseobjects.

You may cause a collision as a result. There isa risk of an accident.If there are objects above the detection range,stop and deactivate Active Parking Assist.

For further information on the detectionrange (Y page 198).Active Parking Assist does not assist youparking in spaces at right angles to the direc-tion of travel if:Rtwo parking spaces are located directlynext to one anotherRthe parking space is directly next to a lowobstacle such as a low curbRyou park forwardsActive Parking Assist does not assist youparking in spaces that are parallel or at rightangles to the direction of travel if:Rthe parking space is on a curbRthe system reads the parking space asbeing blocked, for example by foliage orgrass paving blocksRthe area is too small for the vehicle tomaneuver intoRthe parking space is bordered by an obsta-cle, e.g. a tree, a post or a trailer

Example: detected parking space: Detected parking space on the left; Parking symbol= Detected parking space on the rightActive Parking Assist is switched on automat-ically when driving forwards. The system is

Driving systems 201

Drivingandparking

Z

operational at speeds of up to approximately22 mph (35 km/h). While in operation, thesystem independently locates and measuresparking spaces on both sides of the vehicle.Active Parking Assist will only detect parkingspaces:Rparallel or at right angles to the direction oftravelRthat are parallel to the direction of traveland at least 59 in (1.5 m) wideRthat are parallel to the direction of traveland at least 39.5 in (1.0m) longer than yourvehicleRthat are at right angles to the direction oftravel and at least 39.5 in (1.0 m) widerthan your vehicle

i Note that Active Parking Assist cannotmeasure the length of a parking space if itis at right angles to the direction of travel.You will need to judge whether your vehiclewill fit into the parking space.

When driving at speeds below 19 mph(30 km/h), you will see the parking symbol asa status indicator in the instrument cluster.When a parking space has been detected, anarrow towards the right or the left alsoappears. By default, Active Parking Assistonly displays parking spaces on the front-passenger side. Parking spaces on the driv-er's side are displayed as soon as the turnsignal on the driver's side is activated. Whenparking on the driver's side, this must remainswitched on until you acknowledge the use ofActive Parking Assist by pressing theabutton on the multifunction steering wheel.The system automatically determineswhether the parking space is parallel or atright angles to the direction of travel.A parking space is displayed while you aredriving past it, and until you are approx-imately 50 ft (15 m) away from it.

Parking

G WARNINGIf you leave the vehicle when it is only beingbraked by Active Parking Assist it could rollaway if:Rthere is a malfunction in the system or inthe voltage supply.Rthe electrical system in the engine com-partment, the battery or the fuses havebeen tampered with.Rthe battery is disconnected.Rthe accelerator pedal has been depressed,e.g. by a vehicle occupant.

There is a risk of an accident.Before leaving the vehicle, always secure itagainst rolling away.

i When PARKTRONIC detects obstacles,Active Parking Assist brakes automaticallyduring the parking process. You are respon-sible for braking in good time.

X Stop the vehicle when the parking spacesymbol shows the desired parking space inthe instrument cluster.

X Shift the transmission to position R.The StartStart ParkPark Assist?Assist? Yes:Yes: OKOK No:No:%message appears in themultifunctiondisplay.

X To cancel the procedure: press the%button on the multifunction steering wheelor pull away.

orX To park using Active Parking Assist:press thea button on the multifunctionsteering wheel.The Park Assist Active AcceleratePark Assist Active Accelerateandand BrakeBrake ObserveObserve SurroundingsSurroundingsmes-sage appears in the multifunction display.

X Let go of the multifunction steering wheel.X Back up the vehicle, being ready to brake atall times.When backing up, drive at a speedbelow approximately 6 mph (10 km/h).

202 Driving systemsDrivingandparking

Otherwise Active Parking Assist will be can-celed.Active Parking Assist brakes the vehicle toa standstill when the vehicle approachesthe rear border of the parking space.Maneuvering may be required in tight park-ing spaces.

The Park Assist Active Select DPark Assist Active Select DObserveObserve SurroundingsSurroundingsmessage appears inthe multifunction display.X Shift the transmission to position D whilethe vehicle is stationary.Active Parking Assist immediately steers inthe other direction.The Park Assist Active AcceleratePark Assist Active Accelerateandand BrakeBrake ObserveObserve SurroundingsSurroundingsmes-sage appears in the multifunction display.i You will achieve the best results by wait-ing for the steering procedure to completebefore pulling away.

X Drive forwards and be ready to brake at alltimes.Active Parking Assist brakes the vehicle toa standstill when the vehicle is in the park-ing space.

The Park Assist Active Select RPark Assist Active Select RObserveObserve SurroundingsSurroundingsmessage appears inthe multifunction display.Further transmission shifts may be neces-sary.As soon as the parking procedure is com-plete, the Park Assist DisabledPark Assist Disabled messageappears in the multifunction display and youwill hear a tone. The vehicle is now parked.The vehicle is kept stationary without thedriver having to depress the brake pedal. Thebraking effect is canceled when you depressthe accelerator pedal.Active Parking Assist no longer supports youwith steering interventions and brake appli-cations. When Active Parking Assist is fin-ished, you must steer and brake again your-self. PARKTRONIC is still available.

X Maneuver if necessary.X Always observe the warning messages dis-played by PARKTRONIC (Y page 199).

Parking tips:RThe way your vehicle is positioned in theparking space after parking is dependenton various factors. These include the posi-tion and shape of the vehicles parked infront and behind it and the conditions of thelocation. It may be the case that ActiveParking Assist guides you too far into aparking space, or not far enough into it. Insome cases, it may also lead you across oronto the curb. If necessary, you should can-cel the parking procedure with Active Park-ing Assist.RYou can also select preselect transmissionposition D. The vehicle redirects and doesnot drive as far into the parking space.Should a gear be changed too early, theparking procedure will be canceled. A sen-sible parking position can no longer be ach-ieved from this position.

Exiting a parking spaceIn order that Active Parking Assist can sup-port you when exiting the parking space:Rthe border of the parking space must behigh enough at the front and the rear. Acurb is too small, for example.Rthe border of the parking spacemust not betoowide, as the position of the vehiclemustnot exceed an angle of 45° to the startingposition as it is maneuvering into the park-ing space.Ra maneuvering distance of at least 3.3 ft(1.0 m) must be available.

i If PARKTRONIC detects obstacles, ActiveParking Assist brakes automatically whilstthe vehicle exits the parking space. You areresponsible for braking in good time.

Active Parking Assist can only assist you withexiting a parking space if you have parked the

Driving systems 203

Drivingandparking

Z

vehicle parallel to the direction of travel usingActive Parking Assist.X Start the engine.X Release the parking brake.X Switch on the turn signal in the directionyou are pulling away.

X Shift the transmission to position D or R.The Start Park Assist? Yes: OK No:Start Park Assist? Yes: OK No:%message appears in themultifunctiondisplay.

X To cancel the procedure: press the%button on the multifunction steering wheelor pull away.

orX To exit a parking space using ActiveParking Assist: press thea button onthe multifunction steering wheel.The Park Assist Active AcceleratePark Assist Active Accelerateandand BrakeBrake ObserveObserve SurroundingsSurroundingsmes-sage appears in the multifunction display.

X Let go of the multifunction steering wheel.X Pull away, being ready to brake at all times.Do not exceed a maximum speed ofapproximately 6 mph (10 km/h) when exit-ing a parking space. Otherwise Active Park-ing Assist will be canceled.

X Shift the transmission to position D or R asrequired or according to themessage whilethe vehicle is stationary.Active Parking Assist immediately steers inthe other direction. The Park AssistPark AssistActive Accelerate and BrakeActive Accelerate and BrakeObserveObserve SurroundingsSurroundingsmessage appearsin the multifunction display.i You will achieve the best results by wait-ing for the steering procedure to completebefore pulling away.If you back up after activation, the steeringwheel is moved to the straight-ahead posi-tion.

X Drive forwards and back up as instructedby the PARKTRONIC warning displays.

Once you have exited the parking space com-pletely, the steering wheel is moved to the

straight-ahead position. You hear a tone andthe Park Assist FinishedPark Assist Finished messageappears in the multifunction display. You willthen have to steer and merge into traffic onyour own. PARKTRONIC is still available. Youcan take over the steering, before the vehiclehas exited the parking space completely. Thisis useful, for example when you recognizethat it is already possible to pull out of theparking space.

Canceling Active Parking AssistYou can cancel Active Parking Assist at anytime.X Stop the movement of the multifunctionsteering wheel or steer yourself.Active Parking Assist will be canceled atonce. The Park Assist CanceledPark Assist Canceled mes-sage appears in the multifunction displayand you hear a tone.

orX Press the PARKTRONIC button on the cen-ter console (Y page 199).PARKTRONIC is switched off and ActiveParking Assist is immediately canceled.The Park Assist CanceledPark Assist Canceled messageappears in the multifunction display andyou hear a tone.

Active Parking Assist is canceled automati-cally if:Rthe transmission is shifted too earlyRtransmission position P is selectedRparking using Active Parking Assist is nolonger possibleRyou are driving faster than 6mph (10 km/h)Ra wheel spins, ESP® intervenes or fails. Insuch cases the÷warning lamp lights upin the instrument cluster.

A warning tone sounds. The parking symboldisappears and the multifunction displayshows the Park Assist CanceledPark Assist Canceled mes-sage.When Active Parking Assist is canceled, youmust steer and brake again yourself.

204 Driving systemsDrivingandparking

If a system malfunction occurs, the vehicle isbraked to a standstill. To drive on, depress theaccelerator again.

Rear view camera

General notes

Example: CLS Coupe

Rear view camera: is an optical parking andmaneuvering aid. It shows the area behindyour vehicle with guidelines in the Audio 20 orCOMAND display.The area behind the vehicle is displayed as amirror image, as in the rear view mirror.

i The text shown in the Audio 20 orCOMAND display depends on the languagesetting. The following are examples of rearview camera messages in the COMANDdisplay.

Important safety notesThe rear view camera is only an aid. It is not areplacement for your attention to your imme-diate surroundings. You are always responsi-ble for safe maneuvering and parking. Whenmaneuvering or parking,make sure that thereare no persons, animals or objects in the areain which you are maneuvering.Under the following circumstances, the rearview camera will not function, or will functionin a limited manner:Rif the trunk lid or tailgate is openRin heavy rain, snow or fog

Rat night or in very dark placesRif the camera is exposed to very bright lightRif the area is lit by fluorescent bulbs or LEDlighting (the display may flicker)Rif there is a sudden change in temperature,e.g. when driving into a heated garage inwinterRif the camera lens is dirty or obstructed.Observe the notes on cleaning(Y page 321)Rif the rear of your vehicle is damaged. In thisevent, have the camera position and settingchecked at a qualified specialist workshop

The field of vision and other functions of therear view camera may be restricted due toadditional accessories on the rear of the vehi-cle (e.g. license plate holder, bicycle rack).On vehicles with height-adjustable chassis,leaving the standard height can result in inac-curacies in the guide lines, depending ontechnical conditions.

i The rear view camera is protected fromraindrops and dust by means of a flap.When the rear view camera is activated,this flap opens.The flap closes again when:Ryou have finished the maneuvering proc-essRyou switch off the engineRyou open the trunkObserve the notes on cleaning(Y page 321).For technical reasons, the flap may remainopen briefly after the rear view camera hasbeen deactivated.

Activating/deactivating the rear viewcameraX To activate:make sure that the SmartKeyis in position 2 in the ignition lock.

X Make sure that the Activation by RActivation by Rgeargear function is selected in Audio 20 or

Driving systems 205

Drivingandparking

Z

COMAND, see the Digital Operator's Man-ual.

X Engage reverse gear.The rear view camera flap opens. The areabehind the vehicle is shownwith guide linesin the Audio 20 or COMAND display.The image from the rear view camera isavailable throughout the maneuveringprocess.

To deactivate: the rear view camera deacti-vates if you shift the transmission toP or afterdriving forwards a short distance.

Messages in the Audio 20/COMANDdisplayThe rear view camera may show a distortedview of obstacles, show them incorrectly ornot at all. The rear view camera does not showobjects in the following positions:Rvery close to the rear bumperRunder the rear bumperRin the area immediately above the tailgatehandle

! Objects not at ground level may appear tobe further away than they actually are, e.g.:Rthe bumper of a parked vehicleRthe drawbar of a trailerRthe ball coupling of a trailer tow hitchRthe rear section of an HGVRa slanted postUse the guidelines only for orientation.Approach objects no further than the bot-tom-most guideline.

: Yellow guide line at a distance of approx-imately 13 ft (4.0 m) from the rear of thevehicle

; White guide line without turning the steer-ing wheel, vehicle width including theexterior mirrors (static)

= Yellow guide line for the vehicle widthincluding the exterior mirrors, for currentsteering wheel angle (dynamic)

? Yellow lanemarking tires at current steer-ing wheel angle (dynamic)

A Yellow guide line at a distance of approx-imately 3 ft (1.0 m) from the rear of thevehicle

B Vehicle center axle (marker assistance)C BumperD Red guide line at a distance of approx-

imately 12 in (0.30 m) from the rear of thevehicle

The guide lines are shown when the trans-mission is in position R.The distance specifications only apply toobjects that are at ground level.

206 Driving systemsDrivingandparking

: Front warning display; Additional PARKTRONIC measurement

operational readiness indicator= Rear warning displayVehicles with PARKTRONIC: whenPARKTRONIC is operational (Y page 199),additional measurement operational readi-ness indicator appears in the Audio 20 orCOMAND display;. If the PARKTRONICwarning displays are active or light up, warn-ing displays: and= are also active or lightup correspondingly in the Audio 20 orCOMAND display.

"Reverse parking" function

Backing up straight into a parking spacewithout turning the steering wheel

: White guide line without turning the steer-ing wheel, vehicle width including theexterior mirrors (static)

; Yellow guide line for the vehicle widthincluding the exterior mirrors, for currentsteering wheel angle (dynamic)

= Yellow guide line at a distance of approx-imately 3 ft (1.0 m) from the rear of thevehicle

? Red guide line at a distance of approx-imately 12 in (0.30 m) from the rear of thevehicle

X Make sure that the rear view camera isswitched on (Y page 205).The lane and the guide lines are shown.

X With the help of white guide line:, checkwhether the vehicle will fit into the parkingspace.

X Using white guide line: as a guide, care-fully back up until you reach the end posi-tion.Red guide line? is then at the end of theparking space. The vehicle is almost paral-lel in the parking space.

Reverse perpendicular parking with thesteering wheel at an angle

: Parking space marking; Yellow guide line for the vehicle width

including the exterior mirrors, for currentsteering wheel angle (dynamic)

X Drive past the parking space and bring thevehicle to a standstill.

X Make sure that the rear view camera isswitched on (Y page 205).The lane and the guide lines are shown.

X While the vehicle is at a standstill, turn thesteering wheel in the direction of the park-

Driving systems 207

Drivingandparking

Z

ing space until yellow guide line; reachesparking space marking:.

X Keep the steering wheel in that positionand back up carefully.

: Yellow guide line for the vehicle widthincluding the exterior mirrors, for currentsteering wheel angle (dynamic)

X Stop the vehicle when it is almost exactly infront of the parking space.Thewhite lane should be as close to parallelwith the parking space marking as possi-ble.

: White guide line at current steering wheelangle

; Parking space markingX Turn the steering wheel to the center posi-tion while the vehicle is stationary.

: Red guide line at a distance of approx-imately 12 in (0.30m) from the rear of thevehicle

; White guide line without turning the steer-ing wheel

= End of parking spaceX Back up carefully until you have reachedthe final position.Red guide line: is then at end of parkingspace=. The vehicle is almost parallel inthe parking space.

Wide-angle function

: Symbol for the wide-angle view function; Own vehicle= PARKTRONIC warning displaysYou can also use the rear view camera toselect a wide-angle view.When PARKTRONIC is operational(Y page 199), a symbol for your own vehicleappears in the Audio 20 or COMAND display.If the PARKTRONIC warning displays areactive, warning displays= light up in the

208 Driving systemsDrivingandparking

Audio 20 or COMAND display in yellow or redrespectively.

360° camera

General notesThe 360° camera is a system consisting offour cameras.The system analyzes images from the follow-ing cameras:RRear view cameraRFront cameraRTwo cameras in the exterior rear view mir-rors

The cameras capture the immediate sur-roundings of the vehicle. The system sup-ports you, e.g. when parking or if vision isrestricted at an exit.You can show pictures from the 360° camerain full-screen mode or in six different split-screen views on the COMAND/Audio 20 dis-play. A split-screen view also includes a topview of the vehicle. This view is calculatedfrom the data supplied by the installed cam-eras (virtual camera).The six split-screen views are:Rtop view and picture from the rear viewcamera (130° viewing angle)Rtop view and image from the front camera(130° viewing angle without displaying themaximum steering wheel angle)Rtop view and enlarged rear viewRtop view and enlarged front viewRtop view and images from the side mirrorcameras (rear wheel view)Rtop view and images from the side mirrorcameras (front wheel view)

When the function is active and you shift thetransmission from D or R to N, the dynamicguidelines are hidden.When you change between transmissionpositions D and R, you see the previouslyselected front or rear view.

Distances measured by PARKTRONIC willalso be optically displayed:Rin split screen view as red or yellow brack-ets around the vehicle icon in the top view,orRat the bottom right as red or yellow brack-ets around the vehicle symbol in full-screenmode

The line thickness and color of the bracketsshow how far the vehicle is from an object.Ryellow brackets with thin lines:PARKTRONIC is activeRyellow brackets with normal lines: anobject is present in close range of the vehi-cleRred line: an object is present in the imme-diate close range of the vehicle

Important safety notesThe 360°camera is only an aid and may showa distorted view of obstacles, show themincorrectly or not at all. The 360°camera isnot a substitute for attentive driving.You are always responsible for safe maneu-vering and parking. When maneuvering orparking, make sure that there are no persons,animals or objects in the area inwhich you aremaneuvering.You are always responsible for safety, andmust always pay attention to your surround-ings when parking and maneuvering. Thisapplies to the areas behind, in front of andbeside the vehicle. You could otherwiseendanger yourself and others.The 360° camera will not function or willfunction in a limited manner:Rif the doors are openRif the exterior mirrors are folded inRif the trunk lid/tailgate is openRin heavy rain, snow or fogRat night or in very dark placesRif the cameras are exposed to very brightlight

Driving systems 209

Drivingandparking

Z

Rif the area is lit by fluorescent bulbs or LEDlighting (the display may flicker)Rif there is a sudden change in temperature,e.g. when driving into a heated garage inwinterRif the camera lenses are dirty or coveredRif the vehicle components in which thecameras are installed are damaged. In thisevent, have the camera position and settingchecked at a qualified specialist workshop.

Do not use the 360° camera in this case. Youcan otherwise injure others or cause damageto objects or the vehicle.Guide lines are always shown at road level.On vehicles with height-adjustable chassis,depending on technical conditions, leavingthe standard height can result in:Rinaccuracies in the guide linesRinaccuracies in the display of generatedimages (top view)

Activation conditionsThe 360° camera image can be displayed if:Ryour vehicle is equipped with a 360° cam-eraRthe SmartKey is in position 2 in the ignitionlockRCOMAND/Audio 20 is switched onRthe 360° Camera360° Camera function is switched onSwitching on the 360° cameraX Press theØ button in the center con-sole for longer than two seconds.Depending on whether position D or R isengaged, the following is shown:Ra split screen with top view and theimage from the front camera orRa split screen with top view and theimage from the rear view camera

or

X Press theØ button in the center con-sole.The vehicle menu is displayed.

X Select 360° Camera360° Camera and press7 to con-firm.Depending on whether position D or R isengaged, the following is shown:Ra split screen with top view and theimage from the front camera orRa split screen with top view and theimage from the rear view camera

Activating the 360° camera usingreverse gearThe 360° camera images can be automati-cally displayed by engaging reverse gear.X Make sure that the SmartKey is in position2 in the ignition lock.

X Make sure that the Activation by RActivation by Rgeargear function is selected in COMAND/Audio 20 (see the separate COMAND/Audio 20 operating instructions).

X To show the360° camera image: engagereverse gear.The area behind the vehicle is shown in theCOMAND/Audio 20 display in split-screenmode. You see the top view of the vehicleand the image from the rear view camera.

Selecting the split-screen and fullscreen displaysSwitching between split screen viewsX To switch to the line with the vehicle icons:slide5 the controller.

X To select one of the vehicle icons: turn3 the controller.

X To switch to 180° View180° View: turn3 thecontroller to select 180° View180° View and press7 to confirm.

i The 180° View180° View option is only available inthe following views:

210 Driving systemsDrivingandparking

RTop view with picture from the rear viewcameraRTop viewwith picture from the front cam-era

Displays in the COMAND/Audio 20 dis-play

Important safety notesThe camera system may show a distortedview of obstacles, show them incorrectly ornot at all. Obstacles are not shown by thesystem in the following locations:Runder the front and rear bumpersRvery close to the front and rear bumpersRin the area immediately above the tailgatehandle/trunk lid handleRvery close to the exterior mirrorsRin the transitional areas between the vari-ous cameras in the virtual top view

! Objects not at ground level may appear tobe further away than they actually are, e.g.:Rthe bumper of a parked vehicleRthe drawbar of a trailerRthe ball coupling of a trailer tow hitchRthe rear section of an HGVRa slanted postUse the guidelines only for orientation.Approach objects no further than the bot-tom-most guideline.

Top view with picture from the rear viewcamera

: Yellow guide line at a distance of approx-imately 13 ft (4.0 m) from the rear of thevehicle

; Symbol for the split screen setting withtop view and rear view camera image

= Guide line for themaximumsteering angle? Yellow lanemarking tires at current steer-

ing wheel angle (dynamic)A Yellow guide line for the vehicle width

including the exterior mirrors, for currentsteering wheel angle (dynamic)

B Vehicle center axle (marker assistance)C Yellow guide line at a distance of approx-

imately 3 ft (1.0 m) from the rear of thevehicle

D BumperE Red guide line at a distance of approx-

imately 12 in (0.30m) from the rear of thevehicle

The guide lines are shown when the trans-mission is in position R.

Driving systems 211

Drivingandparking

Z

The distance specifications only apply toobjects that are at ground level.

Top view with picture from the front cam-era

: Symbol for the split screen setting withtop view and front camera image

; Yellow guide line at a distance of approx-imately 13 ft (4.0 m) from the front of thevehicle

= Yellow guide line for the vehicle widthincluding the exterior mirrors, for currentsteering wheel angle (dynamic)

? Yellow lanemarking tires at current steer-ing wheel angle (dynamic)

A Red guide line at a distance of approx-imately 12 in (0.30m) from the front of thevehicle

B Yellow guide line at a distance of approx-imately 3 ft (1.0 m) from the front of thevehicle

Top view and enlarged rear view

: Symbol for the split screen setting withtop view and rear view camera imageenlarged

; Red guide line at a distance of approx-imately 12 in (0.30 m) from the rear of thevehicle

This view assists you in estimating the dis-tance to the vehicle behind you.

i This setting can also be selected as anenlarged front view.

Top view with image from the side mirrorcameras

: Symbol for the top view and forward-facing side mirror camera setting

; Yellow guide line for the vehicle widthincluding the exteriormirrors (right side ofvehicle)

= Yellow guide line for the vehicle widthincluding the exterior mirrors (left side ofvehicle)

i You can also select the side mirror cam-era setting for the rear-facing view.

212 Driving systemsDrivingandparking

180° view

: Symbol for the full screen settingwith rearview camera image

; Own vehicle= PARKTRONIC warning displays

i 180° view can also be selected as frontview.

Select this viewwhen you are driving out of anexit and the view of crossing traffic is restric-ted, for example.

Exiting 360° camera display modeThe 360° camera display is stoppedRwhen you select transmission positionP, orRwhen you are driving at moderate speedsThe previous display appears on theCOMAND/Audio 20 display. You can alsoswitch the display by selecting the& sym-bol in the display and pressing7 the con-troller to confirm.

ATTENTION ASSIST

General notesATTENTION ASSIST helps you during long,monotonous journeys, such as on highways.It is active in the 37 mph (60 km/h) to125 mph (200 km/h) range. If ATTEN-TIONASSIST detects typical indicators of fati-gue or increasing lapses in concentration onthe part of the driver, it suggests taking abreak.

Important safety notesATTENTION ASSIST is only an aid to thedriver. It might not always recognize fatigueor increasing inattentiveness in time or fail torecognize them at all. The system is not asubstitute for a well-rested and attentivedriver.The functionality of ATTENTION ASSIST isrestricted and warnings may be delayed ornot occur at all:Rif the length of the journey is less thanapproximately 30 minutesRif the road condition is poor, e.g. if the sur-face is uneven or if there are potholesRif there is a strong side windRif you have adopted a sporty driving stylewith high cornering speeds or high rates ofaccelerationRif you are predominantly driving at a speedbelow37mph (60 km/h) or above 124mph(200 km/h)Rif you are driving with the DISTRONIC PLUSSteering Assist activatedRif the time has been set incorrectlyRin active driving situations, such as whenyou change lanes or change your speed

ATTENTION ASSIST is reset when you con-tinue your journey and starts assessing yourtiredness again if:Ryou switch off the engineRyou take off your seat belt and open thedriver's door, e.g. for a change of drivers orto take a break

Displaying the attention level

Driving systems 213

Drivingandparking

Z

You can have current status information dis-played in the assistance menu (Y page 235)of the on-board computer.X Select the Assistance display for ATTEN-TION ASSIST using the on-board computer(Y page 235).

The following information is displayed:Rlength of the journey since the last break.Rthe attention level determined by ATTEN-TION ASSIST, displayed in a bar display infive levels from high to low.Rif ATTENTION ASSIST is unable to calculatethe attention level and cannot output awarning, the System SuspendedSystem Suspended messageappears. The bar display then changes thedisplay, e.g. if you are driving at a speedbelow37mph (60 km/h) or above 124mph(200 km/h).

Activating ATTENTION ASSISTX Activate ATTENTION ASSIST using the on-board computer (Y page 236).The system determines the attention levelof the driver depending on the settingselected:

Standard selected: the sensitivity withwhich the system determines the attentionlevel is set to normal.Sensitive selected: the sensitivity is sethigher. The attention level detected by Atten-tion Assist is adapted accordingly and thedriver is warned earlier.When ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated, theÀ symbol and OFF appear in the multi-function display in the assistance displaywhen the engine is running.When ATTENTION ASSIST has been deactiva-ted, it is automatically reactivated after theengine has been stopped. The sensitivityselected corresponds to the last selectionactivated (standard/sensitive).

Warning in the multifunction displayIf fatigue or increasing lapses in concentra-tion are detected, a warning appears in themultifunction display: Attention Assist:Attention Assist:Take a Break!Take a Break!In addition to the message shown in the mul-tifunction display, you will then hear a warn-ing tone.X If necessary, take a break.X Confirm the message by pressing theabutton on the steering wheel.

On long journeys, take regular breaks in goodtime to allow yourself to rest properly. If youdo not take a break, you will be warned againafter 15 minutes at the earliest. This will onlyhappen if ATTENTION ASSIST still detectstypical indicators of fatigue or increasing lap-ses in concentration.Vehicles with COMAND: if a warning isissued in the multifunction display, a servicestation search is performed in COMAND. Youcan select a service station and navigation tothis service station will then begin. This func-tion can be activated and deactivated inCOMAND.

Lane Tracking package

General notesThe Lane Tracking package consists of BlindSpot Assist (Y page 214) and Lane KeepingAssist (Y page 216).

Blind Spot Assist

General notesBlind Spot Assist uses a radar sensor systemto monitor the areas on both sides of yourvehicle. It supports you from a speed ofapproximately 20 mph (30 km/h). A warningdisplay in the exterior mirrors draws yourattention to vehicles detected in the moni-tored area. If you then switch on the corre-sponding turn signal to change lanes, you willalso receive an optical and audible collision

214 Driving systemsDrivingandparking

warning. Blind Spot Assist uses sensors in therear bumper for monitoring purposes.

Important safety notesG WARNINGBlind Spot Assist does not react to:Rvehicles overtaken too closely on the side,placing them in the blind spot areaRvehicles which approach with a large speeddifferential and overtake your vehicle

As a result, Blind Spot Assist may not givewarnings in such situations. There is a risk ofan accident.Always observe the traffic conditions care-fully, and maintain a safe lateral distance.

Blind Spot Assist is only an aid. It may fail todetect some vehicles and is no substitute forattentive driving. Always ensure that there issufficient distance to the side for other roadusers and obstacles.

i USA only:This device has been approved by the FCCas a "Vehicular Radar System". The radarsensor is intended for use in an automotiveradar system only. Removing, tamperingwith, or altering the device will void anywarranties, and is not permitted by theFCC. Do not tamper with, alter, or use inany non-approved way.Any unauthorized modification to thisdevice could void the user’s authority tooperate the equipment.

Monitoring range of the sensorsIn particular, the detection of obstacles canbe impaired if:Rthere is dirt on the sensors or anything elsecovering the sensorsRthere is poor visibility, e.g. due to fog, heavyrain, snow or sprayRthere are narrow vehicles, e.g. motorcyclesor bicyclesRthe road has very wide lanesRthe road has narrow lanes

Ryou are not driving in the middle of the laneRthere are barriers or similar lane bordersVehicles in the monitoring range are then notindicated.

If the lanes are narrow, vehicles driving in thelane beyond the lane next to your vehicle maybe indicated, especially if the vehicles are notdriving in themiddle of their lane. This may bethe case if there are vehicles driving at theinner edge of their lanes.Due to the nature of the system:Rwarnings may be issued in error when driv-ing close to crash barriers or similar solidlane borders.Rthe warning is canceled when driving for anextended period next to long vehicles, suchas trucks.

The two radar sensors for Blind Spot Assistare integrated into the sides of the rearbumper. Make sure that the bumper is free ofdirt, ice or slush in the vicinity of the sensors.The sensors must not be covered, for exam-ple by cycle racks or overhanging loads. Fol-lowing a severe impact or in the event of dam-age to the bumpers, have the function of thesensors checked at a qualified specialistworkshop. Blind Spot Assist may otherwisenot work properly.

Driving systems 215

Drivingandparking

Z

Indicator and warning display

: Indicator lamp (yellow)Warning lamp (red)

Blind Spot Assist is not active at speeds belowapproximately 20mph (30 km/h). Vehicles inthe monitoring range are then not indicated.When Blind Spot Assist is activated, indicatorlamp: in the exterior mirrors lights up yel-low at speeds of up to 20 mph (30 km/h). Atspeeds above 20 mph (30 km/h), the indica-tor lamp goes out and Blind Spot Assist isoperational.If a vehicle is detected within the blind spotmonitoring range at speeds above 20 mph(30 km/h), warning lamp: on the corre-sponding side lights up red. This warning isalways emitted when a vehicle enters theblind spot monitoring range from behind orfrom the side. When you overtake a vehicle,the warning only occurs if the difference inspeed is less than 7 mph (12 km/h).The yellow indicator lamp goes out if reversegear is engaged. In this event, Blind SpotAssist is no longer active.The brightness of the indicator or warninglamps is adjusted automatically according tothe ambient light.

Collision warningIf a vehicle is detected in themonitoring rangeof Blind Spot Assist and you switch on thecorresponding turn signal, a double warningtone sounds. Red warning lamp: flashes. Ifthe turn signal remains on, detected vehiclesare indicated by the flashing of red warninglamp:. There are no further warning tones.

Switching on Blind Spot AssistX Make sure that Blind Spot Assist is activa-ted in the on-board computer(Y page 237).

X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-tion lock.Warning lamps: in the exterior mirrorslight up red for approximately 1.5 secondsand then turn yellow.

Lane Keeping Assist

General notes

Lane Keeping Assist monitors the area infront of your vehicle with camera:, which ismounted at the top of the windshield. ActiveLaneKeepingAssist detects lanemarkings onthe road and can warn you before you leaveyour lane unintentionally.This function is available in the range between40 mph and 120 mph (60 km/h and200 km/h).A warning may be given if a front wheelpasses over a lanemarking. It will warn you bymeans of intermittent vibration in the steer-ing wheel for up to 1.5 seconds.

Important safety notesG WARNINGLane Keeping Assist may not always clearlyrecognize lane markings.In this case, Lane Keeping Assist may:Rgive an unnecessary warningRnot give a warning

216 Driving systemsDrivingandparking

There is a risk of an accident.Always pay particular attention to the trafficsituation and stay in lane, in particular ifwarned by Lane Keeping Assist.

G WARNINGThe Lane Keeping Assist warning does notreturn the vehicle to the original lane. There isa risk of an accident.You should always steer, brake or accelerateyourself, in particular if warned by Lane Keep-ing Assist.

If you fail to adapt your driving style, LaneKeeping Assist can neither reduce the risk ofan accident nor override the laws of physics.Lane Keeping Assist cannot take into accountthe road, traffic and weather conditions. LaneKeeping Assist is merely an aid. You areresponsible for the distance to the vehicle infront, for vehicle speed, for braking in goodtime and for staying in your lane.The Lane Keeping Assist does not keep thevehicle in the lane.The systemmay be impaired or may not func-tion if:Rthere is poor visibility, e.g. due to insuffi-cient illumination of the road, or due tosnow, rain, fog or sprayRthere is glare, e.g. from oncoming traffic,the sun or reflections (e.g. when the roadsurface is wet)Rthe windshield is dirty, fogged up, damagedor covered, for instance by a sticker, in thevicinity of the cameraRthere are no, several or unclear lane mark-ings for a lane, e.g. in areas with road con-struction workRthe lane markings are worn away, dark orcovered up, e.g. by dirt or snowRthe distance to the vehicle in front is toosmall and the lanemarkings thus cannot bedetected

Rthe lane markings change quickly, e.g.lanes branch off, cross one another ormergeRthe road is narrow and windingRthere are strong shadows cast on the road

Switching on Lane Keeping AssistX Switch on Active Lane Keeping Assist usingthe on-board computer; to do so, selectStandardStandard or AdaptiveAdaptive (Y page 237).If you drive at speeds above 40 mph(60 km/h) and lanemarkings are detected,the lines in the assistance graphics display(Y page 235) are shown in green. LaneKeeping Assist is ready for use.

StandardIf StandardStandard is selected, no warning vibrationoccurs if:Ryou have switched on the turn signals. Inthis event, the warnings are suppressed fora certain period of time.Ra driving safety system intervenes, such asABS, BAS or ESP®.

AdaptiveWhen AdaptiveAdaptive is selected, nowarning vibra-tion occurs if:Ryou have switched on the turn signals. Inthis event, the warnings are suppressed fora certain period of time.Ra driving safety system intervenes, e.g.ABS, BAS or ESP®.Ryou accelerate hard, e.g. kickdown.Ryou brake hard.Ryou steer actively, e.g. swerve to avoid anobstacle or change lanes quickly.Ryou cut the corner on a sharp bend.In order that you are warned only when nec-essary and in good time if you cross the lanemarking, the system recognizes certain con-ditions and warns you accordingly.

Driving systems 217

Drivingandparking

Z

The warning vibration occurs earlier if:Ryou approach the outer lane marking on abend.Rthe road has very wide lanes, e.g. a high-way.Rthe system recognizes solid lane markings.The warning vibration occurs later if:Rthe road has narrow lanes.Ryou cut the corner on a bend.

Active Driving Assistance package

General notesThe Active Driving Assistance package con-sists of DISTRONICPLUS (Ypage181), ActiveBlind Spot Assist (Y page 218) and ActiveLane Keeping Assist (Y page 221).

Active Blind Spot Assist

General notesActive Blind Spot Assist uses a radar sensorsystem, pointed toward the rear of the vehi-cle, to monitor the area to the sides of thevehicle which the driver is unable to see. Awarning display in the exterior mirrors drawsyour attention to vehicles detected in themonitored area. If you then switch on the cor-responding turn signal to change lanes, youwill also receive a visual and audible collisionwarning. If a risk of lateral collision is detec-ted, corrective braking may help you avoid acollision. Before a course-correcting brakeapplication, Active Blind Spot Assist evalu-ates the space in the direction of travel and atthe sides of the vehicle. For this, Active BlindSpot Assist uses the forward-facing radarsensors.Active Blind Spot Assist supports you from aspeed of approximately 20 mph (30 km/h).

Important safety notesActive Blind Spot Assist is only an aid and isnot a substitute for attentive driving.

G WARNINGActive Blind Spot Assist does not react to:Rvehicles overtaken too closely on the side,placing them in the blind spot areaRvehicles which approach with a large speeddifferential and overtake your vehicle

As a result, Active Blind Spot Assist may nei-ther give warnings nor intervene in such sit-uations. There is a risk of an accident.Always observe the traffic conditions care-fully, and maintain a safe lateral distance.

i USA only:This device has been approved by the FCCas a "Vehicular Radar System". The radarsensor is intended for use in an automotiveradar system only. Removing, tamperingwith, or altering the device will void anywarranties, and is not permitted by theFCC. Do not tamper with, alter, or use inany non-approved way.Any unauthorized modification to thisdevice could void the user’s authority tooperate the equipment.

i Canada only: This device complies withRSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation issubject to the following two conditions:1. This device may not cause harmful inter-ference, and2. This devicemust accept any interferencereceived, including interference that maycause undesired operation of the device.Removal, tampering, or altering of thedevice will void any warranties, and is notpermitted. Do not tamper with, alter, or usein any non-approved way.Any unauthorized modification to thisdevice could void the user's authority tooperate the equipment.

Radar sensorsThe Active Blind Spot Assist radar sensors areintegrated into the front and rear bumpersand behind a cover in the radiator trim. Makesure that the bumpers and the cover in the

218 Driving systemsDrivingandparking

radiator grill are free of dirt, ice or slush. Therear sensors must not be covered, for exam-ple by cycle racks or overhanging cargo. Fol-lowing a severe impact or in the event of dam-age to the bumpers, have the function of theradar sensors checked at a qualified special-ist workshop. Active Blind Spot Assist mayotherwise no longer work properly.

Monitoring areaG WARNINGActive Blind Spot Assist does not detect alltraffic situations and road users. There is arisk of an accident.Always make sure that there is sufficient dis-tance on the side for other traffic or obstacles.

The detection of obstacles can be impaired inthe case of:Rthere is dirt on the sensors or anything elsecovering the sensorsRpoor visibility, e.g. due to rain, snow orspray

Vehicles in the monitoring range are then notindicated or indicated with a delay.Active Blind Spot Assist may not detect nar-row vehicles, such as motorcycles or bicy-cles, or may only detect them too late.If the lanes are narrow, vehicles driving in thelane beyond the lane next to your vehicle may

be indicated, especially if the vehicles are notdriving in themiddle of their lane. This may bethe case if there are vehicles at the edge oftheir lane.Due to the nature of the system:Rwarnings may be issued in error when driv-ing close to crash barriers or similar solidlane borders.Rthe warning is canceled when driving for anextended period next to long vehicles, suchas trucks.

Warning display

: Warning displayActive Blind Spot Assist is not active atspeeds below approximately 20 mph(30 km/h). Vehicles in the monitoring rangeare then not indicated.When Active Blind Spot Assist is activated,indicator lamp: in the exteriormirrors lightsup yellow at speeds of up to 20 mph(30 km/h). At speeds above 20 mph(30 km/h), the indicator lamp goes out andActive Blind Spot Assist is operational.If a vehicle is detected within the blind spotmonitoring range at speeds above 20 mph(30 km/h), warning lamp: on the corre-sponding side lights up red. This warning isalways given when a vehicle enters the blindspot monitoring range from behind or fromthe side. When you overtake a vehicle, thewarning only occurs if the difference in speedis less than 7 mph (12 km/h).

Driving systems 219

Drivingandparking

Z

The yellow indicator lamp goes out if reversegear is engaged. Active Blind Spot Assist isnot operational.The brightness of the warning lamps is auto-matically adapted to the brightness of thesurroundings.

Visual and acoustic collision warningIf you switch on the turn signals to changelanes and a vehicle is detected in the sidemonitoring range, you receive a visual andacoustic collision warning. You then hear adouble warning tone and redwarning lamp:flashes. If the turn signal remains on, detec-ted vehicles are indicated by the flashing ofred warning lamp:. There are no furtherwarning tones.

Course-correcting brake applicationIf Active Blind Spot Assist detects a risk of alateral collision in the monitoring range, acourse-correcting brake application is carriedout. This is meant to assist you in avoiding acollision.

G WARNINGA course-correcting brake application cannotalways prevent a collision. There is a risk of anaccident.Always steer, brake or accelerate yourself,especially if Active Blind Spot Assist warnsyou ormakes a course-correcting brake appli-cation. Always maintain a safe distance at thesides.

If a course-correcting brake applicationoccurs, red warning lamp: flashes in theexterior mirror and a dual warning tonesounds. In addition, display; appears in themultifunction display underlining the dangerof a side collision.In very rare cases, the system may make aninappropriate brake application. An inappro-priate course-correcting brake applicationmay be interrupted at any time if you steerslightly in the opposite direction or acceler-ate, for example.The course-correcting brake application isavailable in the speed range between 20 mph(30 km/h) and 120 mph (200 km/h).Either no braking application, or a course-correcting brake application adapted to thedriving situation occurs if:Rthere are vehicles or obstacles, e.g. crashbarriers, located on both sides of your vehi-cle.Ra vehicle approaches you too closely at theside.Ryou have adopted a sporty driving stylewithhigh cornering speeds.Ryou clearly brake or accelerate.Ra driving safety system intervenes, e.g.ESP® or PRE-SAFE® Brake.RESP® is switched off.Ra loss of tire pressure or a defective tire isdetected.

220 Driving systemsDrivingandparking

Switching on Active Blind Spot AssistX Make sure that Active Blind Spot Assist isactivated in the on-board computer(Y page 237).

X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-tion lock.Warning lamps: in the exterior mirrorslight up red for approximately 1.5 secondsand then turn yellow.

Active Lane Keeping Assist

General notes

Active Lane Keeping Assist monitors the areain front of your vehicle by means of multi-function camera: at the top of the wind-shield. Various different areas to the front,rear and side of your vehicle are also moni-tored with the aid of the radar sensor system.Active Lane Keeping Assist detects lanemarkings on the road and can warn youbefore you leave your lane unintentionally. Ifyou do not react to the warning, a lane-cor-recting application of the brakes can bring thevehicle back into the original lane.This function is available in the range between40 mph and 120 mph (60 km/h and200 km/h).For Active Lane Keeping Assist to assist youwhen driving, the radar sensor system mustbe operational

Important safety notesIf you fail to adapt your driving style, ActiveLane Keeping Assist can neither reduce therisk of accident nor override the laws of phys-

ics. Active Lane Keeping Assist cannot takeaccount of road and weather conditions. Itmay not recognize traffic situations. ActiveLane Keeping Assist is only an aid. You areresponsible for the distance to the vehicle infront, for vehicle speed, for braking in goodtime and for staying in your lane.Active Lane Keeping Assist cannot continu-ously keep your vehicle in its lane.

G WARNINGActive Lane Keeping Assist cannot alwaysclearly detect lane markings.In such cases, Active Lane Keeping Assistcan:Rgive an unnecessary warning and thenmake a course-correcting brake applicationto the vehicleRnot give a warning or interveneThere is a risk of an accident.Always pay particular attention to the trafficsituation and keep within the lane, especiallyif Active Lane Keeping Assist alerts you. Ter-minate the intervention in a non-critical driv-ing situation.

The systemmay be impaired or may not func-tion if:Rthere is poor visibility, e.g. due to insuffi-cient illumination of the road, or due tosnow, rain, fog or sprayRthere is glare, e.g. from oncoming traffic,the sun or reflections (e.g. when the roadsurface is wet)Rthe windshield is dirty, fogged up, damagedor covered, for instance by a sticker, in thevicinity of the cameraRthe radar sensors in the front or rear bump-ers or the radiator trim are dirty, e.g.obscured by snowRthere are no, several or unclear lane mark-ings for a lane, e.g. in areas with road con-struction workRthe lane markings are worn away, dark orcovered up, e.g. by dirt or snow

Driving systems 221

Drivingandparking

Z

Rthe distance to the vehicle in front is toosmall and the lanemarkings thus cannot bedetectedRthe lane markings change quickly, e.g.lanes branch off, cross one another ormergeRthe road is narrow and windingRthere are strong shadows cast on the roadIf no vehicle is detected in the adjacent laneand broken lane markings are detected, nolane-correcting brake application is made.

Warning vibration in the steering wheelA warning may be given if a front wheelpasses over a lanemarking. It will warn you bymeans of intermittent vibration in the steer-ing wheel for up to 1.5 seconds.

Lane-correcting brake applicationG WARNINGA lane-correcting brake application cannotalways bring the vehicle back into the originallane. There is a risk of an accident.Always steer, brake or accelerate yourself,especially if Active Lane Keeping Assist warnsyou or makes a lane-correcting brake appli-cation.

G WARNINGActive Lane Keeping Assist only detects traf-fic conditions or road users to a limitedextent. In very rare cases, the system maymake an inappropriate brake application, e.g.after intentionally driving over a solid lanemarking. There is a risk of an accident.An inappropriate brake application may beinterrupted at any time if you steer slightly inthe opposite direction. Alwaysmake sure thatthere is sufficient distance on the side forother traffic or obstacles.

If you leave your lane, under certain circum-stances the vehicle will brake briefly on oneside. This is meant to assist you in bringingthe vehicle back to the original lane.If a lane-correcting brake application occurs,display: appears in the multifunction dis-play.A lane-correcting brake application can bemade after driving over a lane marking rec-ognize as being solid or broken. Before this, awarning must be given by means of intermit-tent vibration in the steering wheel. In addi-tion, a lane with lane markings on both sidesmust be recognized.In the case of a broken lane marking beingdetected, a lane-correcting brake applicationcan only be made if a vehicle has been detec-ted in the adjacent lane. The following vehi-cles can have an influence on brake applica-tion: oncoming traffic, vehicles that are over-taking and vehicles that are driving parallel toyour vehicle.

i A further lane-correcting brake applica-tion can only occur after your vehicle hasreturned to the original lane.

No lane-correcting brake application occursif:Ryou clearly and actively steer, brake oraccelerate.Ryou cut the corner on a sharp bend.Ryou have adopted a sporty driving stylewithhigh cornering speeds or high rates ofacceleration.Ryou have switched on the turn signals.Ra driving safety system intervenes, e.g.ESP®, PRE-SAFE® Brake or Active BlindSpot Assist.RESP® is switched off.

222 Driving systemsDrivingandparking

Rthe transmission is not in position D.Ran obstacle has been detected in the lane inwhich you are driving.Rwhen a loss of tire pressure or a defectivetire has been detected and displayed.

There is a possibility that the Active LaneKeeping Assist could misjudge the given traf-fic situation. An inappropriate brake applica-tion may be interrupted at any time if you:Rsteer slightly in the opposite directionRswitch on the turn signalRclearly brake or accelerateA lane-correcting brake application is inter-rupted automatically if:Ra driving safety system intervenes, e.g.ESP®, PRE-SAFE® Brake or Active BlindSpot Assist.Rlanemarkings can no longer be recognized.

Switching on Active Lane Keeping AssistX Switch on Active Lane Keeping Assist usingthe on-board computer; to do so, selectStandardStandard or AdaptiveAdaptive (Y page 237).If you drive at speeds above 40 mph(60 km/h) and lanemarkings are detected,the lines in the assistance graphics display(Y page 235) are shown in green. ActiveLane Keeping Assist is ready for use.If StandardStandard is selected, no warning vibra-tion occurs if:Ryou have switched on the turn signals. Inthis event, the warnings are suppressedfor a certain period of time.Ra driving safety system intervenes, suchas ABS, BAS or ESP®.

When AdaptiveAdaptive is selected, no warningvibration occurs if:Ryou have switched on the turn signals. Inthis event, the warnings are suppressedfor a certain period of time.Ra driving safety system intervenes, e.g.ABS, BAS or ESP®.Ryou accelerate hard, e.g. kickdown.Ryou brake hard.

Ryou steer actively, e.g. swerve to avoid anobstacle or change lanes quickly.Ryou cut the corner on a sharp bend.

In order that you are warned only when nec-essary and in good time if you cross the lanemarking, the system recognizes certain con-ditions and warns you accordingly.The warning vibration occurs earlier if:Ryou approach the outer lane marking on abend.Rthe road has very wide lanes, e.g. a high-way.Rthe system recognizes solid lane markings.The warning vibration occurs later if:Rthe road has narrow lanes.Ryou cut the corner on a bend.

Driving systems 223

Drivingandparking

Z

224

Useful information ............................ 226Important safety notes ..................... 226Displays and operation ..................... 226Menus and submenus ...................... 229Display messages ............................. 245Warning and indicator lamps in theinstrument cluster ............................ 274

225

On-board

computerand

displays

Useful information

i This Operator's Manual describes allmodels and all standard and optional equip-ment of your vehicle available at the time ofpublication of the Operator's Manual.Country-specific differences are possible.Please note that your vehicle may not beequipped with all features described. Thisalso applies to safety-related systems andfunctions.

i Read the information on qualified special-ist workshops (Y page 26).

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf you operate information systems and com-munication equipment integrated in the vehi-cle while driving, you will be distracted fromtraffic conditions. You could also lose controlof the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident.Only operate the equipment when the trafficsituation permits. If you are not sure that thisis possible, park the vehicle paying attentionto traffic conditions and operate the equip-ment when the vehicle is stationary.

You must observe the legal requirements forthe country in which you are currently drivingwhen operating the on-board computer.

G WARNINGIf the instrument cluster has failed or mal-functioned, you may not recognize functionrestrictions in systems relevant to safety. Theoperating safety of your vehicle may beimpaired. There is a risk of an accident.Drive on carefully. Have the vehicle checkedat a qualified specialist workshop immedi-ately.

The on-board computer only showsmessagesor warnings from certain systems in the mul-tifunction display. You should therefore make

sure your vehicle is operating safely at alltimes.If the operating safety of your vehicle isimpaired, pull over as soon as it is safe to doso. Contact a qualified specialist workshop.For an overview, see the instrument panelillustration (Y page 33).

Displays and operation

Coolant temperature display

G WARNINGOpening the hood when the engine is over-heated or when there is a fire in the enginecompartment could expose you to hot gasesor other service products. There is a risk ofinjury.Let an overheated engine cool down beforeopening the hood. If there is a fire in theengine compartment, keep the hood closedand contact the fire department.

! A display message is shown if the coolanttemperature is too high.If the coolant temperature is over 248 ‡(120 †), do not continue driving. Theengine will otherwise be damaged.

The coolant temperature gauge is in theinstrument cluster on the left-hand side(Y page 33).Under normal operating conditions and withthe specified coolant level, the coolant tem-perature may rise to 248 ‡ (120 †).

Tachometer! Do not drive in the overrevving range, asthis could damage the engine.

The red band in the tachometer indicates theengine's overrevving range.The fuel supply is interrupted to protect theengine when the red band is reached.

226 Displays and operationOn

-board

computerand

displays

Outside temperature displayYou should pay special attention to road con-ditions when temperatures are around freez-ing point.Bear in mind that the outside temperaturedisplay indicates the temperature measuredand does not record the road temperature.The outside temperature display is in themul-tifunction display (Y page 229).Changes in the outside temperature are dis-played after a short delay.

Speedometer with segmentsThe segments in the speedometer indicatewhich speed range is available.RCruise control activated (Y page 178):The segments light up from the storedspeed to the maximum speed.RDISTRONIC PLUS activated (Y page 181):One or two segments in the set speedrange light up.RDISTRONIC PLUS detects a vehicle in front:The segments between the speed of thevehicle in front and the stored speed lightup.

Operating the on-board computer

Overview

: Multifunction display; Right control panel= Left control panelX To activate the on-board computer: turnthe SmartKey to position 1 in the ignitionlock.

You can control the multifunction display andthe settings in the on-board computer usingthe buttons on the multifunction steeringwheel.

Displays and operation 227

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Left control panel

=

;

RCalls up the menu and menu bar

9

:

Press briefly:RScrolls in listsRSelects a submenu or functionRVehicles with Audio 20: in theAudioAudio menu, selects the previ-ous or next stored station, whenthe preset list or station list isactive, or an audio trackRVehicles with COMAND: in theAudioAudio menu, selects the previ-ous or next station, when thepreset list or station list is active,or an audio track or video sceneRIn the TelTel (telephone) menu:switches to the phone book andselects a name or telephonenumber

9

:

Press and hold:RVehicles with Audio 20: in theAudioAudio menu, selects the previ-ous or next station, when thepreset list or station list is active,selects an audio track usingrapid scrolling, or selects a videosceneRVehicles with COMAND: in theAudioAudiomenu, selects a preset listor station list in the desired fre-quency range or an audio trackor video scene using rapid scroll-ingRIn the TelTel (Telephone) menu:starts rapid scrolling if the phonebook is open

a RConfirms the selection or displaymessageRIn the TelTel (Telephone) menu:switches to the telephone bookand starts dialing the selectednumber

% Press briefly:RBackRVehicles with Audio 20:Switches off voice-operated con-trol for navigation (see manufac-turer's operating instructions)RVehicles with COMAND:Switches off the Voice ControlSystem (see the separate oper-ating instructions)RHides display messages or callsup the last TripTrip menu functionusedRExits the telephone book/redialmemory

% Press and hold:RCalls up the standard display inthe TripTrip menu

Right control panel

~ RRejects or ends a callRExits the telephone book/redialmemory

6 RMakes or accepts a callRSwitches to the redial memory

WX

RAdjusts the volume

8 RMute

? RVehicles with Audio 20:Switches on voice-operated con-trol for navigation (see manufac-turer's operating instructions)RVehicles with COMAND:Switches on the Voice ControlSystem (see the separate oper-ating instructions)

228 Displays and operationOn

-board

computerand

displays

Multifunction display

: Text field; Menu bar= Drive program, vehicles with a DIRECT

SELECT selector lever (Y page 158) orAMG vehicles (Y page 157)

? Transmission position, vehicles with aDIRECT SELECT selector lever(Y page 158) or AMG vehicles(Y page 157)

A Permanent display: outside temperatureor speed (Y page 238)

X To display menu bar;: press the=or; button on the steering wheel.Menu bar; disappears after a few sec-onds.Text field: shows the selected menu orsubmenu as well as display messages.

The following messages may appear in themultifunction display:Z Gearshift recommendation when

shifting manually (Y page 164)XjY Active Parking Assist (Y page 200)CRUISECRUISE Cruise Control (Y page 178)_ Adaptive Highbeam Assist

(Y page 126)¤ ECO start/stop function

(Y page 153)ë HOLD function (Y page 191)

Menus and submenus

Menu overviewPress the= or; button on the steer-ing wheel to call up the menu bar and select amenu.Operating the on-board computer(Y page 227).Depending on the equipment installed in thevehicle, you can call up the following menus:RTripTrip menu (Y page 229)RNaviNavi menu (navigation instructions)(Y page 231)RAudioAudio menu (Y page 232)RTelTel menu (telephone) (Y page 233)RDriveAssistDriveAssist menu (assistance)(Y page 235)RServServ menu (Y page 237)RSettSett menu (settings) (Y page 237)RAMGAMG menu in AMG vehicles (Y page 242)The AudioAudio, NaviNavi and TelTelmenus differ slightlyin vehicles with Audio 20 and in vehicles withCOMAND. The examples given in this Opera-tor's Manual apply to vehicles equipped withCOMAND.

Trip menu

Standard display

X Press and hold the% button on thesteering wheel until the TripTrip menu withtrip odometer: and odometer; isshown.

Menus and submenus 229

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Trip computer "From Start" or "FromReset"

: Distance; Driving time= Average speed? Average fuel consumptionX Press the=or;button on the steer-ing wheel to select the TripTrip menu.

X Press the9 or: button to selectFrom StartFrom Start or From ResetFrom Reset.

The values in the From StartFrom Start submenu arecalculated from the start of a journey whilstthe values in the From ResetFrom Reset submenu arecalculated from the last time the submenuwas reset (Y page 231).The From StartFrom Start trip computer is automati-cally reset if:Rthe ignition has been switched off for morethan four hours.R999 hours have been exceeded.R9,999 miles have been exceeded.The From ResetFrom Reset trip computer is automati-cally reset if the value exceeds 9,999 hours or99,999 miles.

ECO display

X Press the=or;button on the steer-ing wheel to select the TripTrip menu.

X Press the9 or: button to selectECO DISPLAYECO DISPLAY.

If the ignition remains switched off for longerthan four hours, the ECO display will be auto-matically reset.For further information on the ECO display,see (Y page 174).

Displaying the range and current fuelconsumption

Fuel consumption is not displayed in AMGvehicles.X Press the=or;button on the steer-ing wheel to select the TripTrip menu.

X Press the9 or: button to select thecurrent fuel consumption and approximaterange.

The approximate range that can be covereddepends on the fuel level and your currentdriving style. If there is only a small amount offuel left in the fuel tank, the display shows avehicle being refueledC instead of therange.

Digital speedometer

X Press the=or;button on the steer-ing wheel to select the TripTrip menu.

X Press the9 or: button to select thedigital speedometer.In addition, the multifunction display mayshow a gearshift recommendation Z.

230 Menus and submenusOn

-board

computera

nddisplays

Observe the information on gearshift rec-ommendation Z when shifting manually(Y page 164).AMG vehicles: a gearshift recommendationappears in the status area of the multifunc-tion display and not in the display of thedigital speedometer.

Resetting values

X Press the=or;button on the steer-ing wheel to select the TripTrip menu.

X Press the9 or: button to select thefunction that you wish to reset.

X Press thea button.X Press the: button to select YesYes andpress thea button to confirm.

You can reset the values of the following func-tions:RTrip odometerR"From Start" trip computerR"From Reset" trip computerRECO display

i If you reset the values in the ECO display,the values in the "From start" trip computerare also reset. If you reset the values in the"From start" trip computer, the values inthe ECO display are also reset.

Navigation system menu

Displaying navigation instructionsIn the NaviNavi menu, the multifunction displayshows navigation instructions.Observe the additional information on navi-gation in the separate Audio 20 or COMANDoperating instructions.

X Switch on Audio 20 or COMAND, see theseparate operating instructions.

X Press the=or;button on the steer-ing wheel to select the NaviNavi menu.

Route guidance not active

: Direction of travel; Current road

Route guidance active

No change of direction announced

: Distance to the destination; Distance to the next change of direction= Current road? "Follow the road's course" symbol

Change of direction announced without alane recommendation

: Road into which the change of directionleads

; Distance to change of direction and visualdistance display

= Change-of-direction symbol

Menus and submenus 231

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

When a change of direction is announced, youwill see symbol= for the change of directionand distance graphic;. The distance indi-cator shortens towards the top of the displayas you approach the point of the announcedchange of direction.

Change of direction announced with alane recommendation

: Road into which the change of directionleads

; Distance to change of direction and visualdistance display

= Lanes not recommended? Recommended lane and new lane during a

change of directionA Change-of-direction symbolOn multilane roads, lane recommendationscan be displayed for the next change of direc-tion if the digital map supports this data. Dur-ing the change of direction, new lanesmay beadded.Lane not recommended=: you will not beable to complete the next change of directionif you stay in this lane.Recommended lane and new lane during achange of direction?: in this lane you will beable to complete the next two changes ofdirection without changing lane.

Other status indicators of the naviga-tion system

The navigation system displays additionalinformation and the vehicle status.Possible displays:RNew Route...New Route... or Calculating RouteCalculating RouteA new route is calculated.RRoad Not MappedRoad Not MappedThe vehicle position is inside the area of thedigital map but the road is not recognized,e.g. newly built streets, car parks or privateland.RNo RouteNo RouteNo route could be calculated to the selec-ted destination.RO: you have reached the destination or anintermediate destination.

Audio menu

Selecting a radio station

: Active station list; Station frequency with memory position

i The menu shows station; with stationfrequency or station name. The preset posi-tion is only displayed along with station;if this has been stored.

X Switch on Audio 20 or COMAND and selectRadio; see the separate operating instruc-tions.

X Press the=or;button on the steer-ing wheel to select the AudioAudio menu.

Vehicles with Audio 20:X To select a station in the preset list:briefly press the9 or: button.

X To select a station in the station list:press and hold the9 or: button.

232 Menus and submenusOn

-board

computerand

displays

Vehicles with COMAND:X To select a preset list or station list:press and briefly hold the9 or:button until the preset list or station list inthe desired frequency range is shown.

X To select a station: press9 or:briefly.

i SIRIUS XM satellite radio functions like anormal radio.Further information on navigation can befound in the "Satellite radio" section in theseparate Audio 20 or COMAND operatinginstructions.

Operating an audio player or audiomedia

Audio data from various audio devices ormedia can be played, depending on the equip-ment installed in the vehicle.X Switch on Audio 20 or COMAND and selectaudio CD or MP3 mode; see the separateoperating instructions.

X Press the=or;button on the steer-ing wheel to select the AudioAudio menu.

X To select the next/previous track:briefly press the9 or: button.

X To select a track from the track list(rapid scrolling): press and hold the9or: button until desired track:appears.If you press and hold9 or:, therapid scrolling speed is increased. Not allaudio drives or data carriers support thisfunction.

If track information is stored on the audiodevice or medium, the multifunction displaywill show the number and title of the track.

Video DVD operation

Only for vehicles with COMAND: you can usethe AudioAudio menu to play video DVDs.X Switch on COMAND and select video DVD(see the separate operating instructions).

X Press the=or;button on the steer-ing wheel to select the AudioAudio menu.

X To select the next/previous scene:briefly press the9 or: button.

X To select a scene from the scene list(rapid scrolling): press and hold the9or: button until desired scene: hasbeen reached.

Telephone menu

Introduction

G WARNINGIf you operate information systems and com-munication equipment integrated in the vehi-cle while driving, you will be distracted fromtraffic conditions. You could also lose controlof the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident.Only operate the equipment when the trafficsituation permits. If you are not sure that thisis possible, park the vehicle paying attentionto traffic conditions and operate the equip-ment when the vehicle is stationary.

When telephoning, you must observe thelegal requirements for the country in whichyou are currently driving.X Switch on the mobile phone (see the man-ufacturer’s operating instructions).

X Switch on Audio 20 or COMAND, see theseparate operating instructions.

Menus and submenus 233

On-board

computera

nddisplays

Z

X Establish a Bluetooth® connection to Audio20 or COMAND, see the separate operatinginstructions.

X Press the=or;button on the steer-ing wheel to select the TelTel menu.

You will see one of the following display mes-sages in the multifunction display:RPhone READYPhone READY or the name of the networkprovider: the mobile phone has found anetwork and is ready to receive.RPhone No servicePhone No service: there is no networkavailable or the mobile phone is searchingfor a network.

Accepting a call

X Press the6 button on the steeringwheel to accept an incoming call.

If someone calls you when you are in the TelTelmenu, a display message appears in the mul-tifunction display.You can accept a call even if you are not in theTelTel menu.Rejecting or ending a callX Press the~ button on the steeringwheel.

You can end or reject a call even if you are notin the TelTel menu.Dialing an entry from the phone bookX Press the=or;button on the steer-ing wheel to select the TelTel menu.

X Press the9,: ora button toswitch to the phone book.

X Authorize access to the phone book on thephone.

X Press the9 or: button to select thedesired name.

orX To begin rapid scrolling: press and holdthe9 or: button for longer thanone second.Rapid scrolling stops when you release thebutton or reach the end of the list.

X If only one telephone number is storedfor a name: press the6 ora buttonto start dialing.

orX If there is more than one number for aparticular name: press the6 orabutton to display the numbers.

X Press the9 or: button to select thenumber you want to dial.

X Press the6 ora button to start dial-ing.

orX To exit the phone book: press the~ or% button.

RedialingThe on-board computer saves the last namesor numbers dialed in the redial memory.X Press the=or;button on the steer-ing wheel to select the TelTel menu.

X Press the6 button to switch to theredial memory.

X Press the9 or: button to select thedesired name or number.

X Press the6 ora button to start dial-ing.

orX To exit the redial memory: press the~ or% button.

234 Menus and submenusOn

-board

computera

nddisplays

Assistance menu

Introduction

Depending on the equipment installed in thevehicle, you have the following options in theDriveAssist.DriveAssist. menu:RDisplaying the assistance graphic(Y page 235)RActivating/deactivating ESP® (except AMGvehicles) (Y page 235)RActivating/deactivating Steering Assistand Stop&Go Pilot of DISTRONIC PLUS(Y page 236)RActivating/deactivating PRE-SAFE® Brake(Y page 236)RActivating/deactivating COLLISION PRE-VENTION ASSIST PLUS (Y page 236)RActivating/deactivating ATTENTIONASSIST (Y page 236)RActivating/deactivating Blind Spot Assistor Active Blind Spot Assist (Y page 237)RActivating/deactivating Lane KeepingAssist or Active Lane Keeping Assist(Y page 237)

Displaying the assistance graphic

X Press the=or;button on the steer-ingwheel to select the DriveAssistDriveAssistmenu.

X Press9 or: to select Assist.Assist.GraphicGraphic.

X Press thea button.The multifunction display shows theDISTRONIC PLUS distance display in theassistance graphic.The assistance graphic shows you the sta-tus and further information on the followingdriving systems or driving safety systems:RDISTRONIC PLUS (Y page 186)RPRE-SAFE® Brake (Y page 79)RCOLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS(Y page 73)RATTENTION ASSIST (Y page 213)RLane Keeping Assist (Y page 216)RActive Lane Keeping Assist(Y page 221)

X Press: to display the ATTEN-TION ASSIST assessment.

Deactivating/activating ESP®

i Observe the important safety notes onESP® (Y page 76).

G WARNINGIf you deactivate ESP®, ESP® no longer sta-bilizes the vehicle. There is an increased riskof skidding and an accident.Only deactivate ESP® in the situations descri-bed in the following.

It may be best to deactivate ESP® in the fol-lowing situations:Rwhen using snow chainsRin deep snowRon sand or gravelActivating/deactivating ESP® on AMG vehi-cles (Y page 77).For further information about ESP®, see(Y page 75).X Start the engine.X Press the=or;button on the steer-ing wheel to select the Assist.Assist. menu.

X Press9 or: to select ESPESP.

Menus and submenus 235

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

X Press thea button.The current selection appears.

X To activate/deactivate: press theabutton again.

ESP® is deactivated if the å warning lampin the instrument cluster lights up continu-ously when the engine is running.If the ÷ warning lamp and the å warn-ing lamp are lit continuously, ESP® is notavailable due to a malfunction.Observe the information on warning lamps(Y page 277).Observe the information on displaymessages(Y page 246).

Activating/deactivating PRE-SAFE®Brake

PRE‑SAFE® Brake is only available in vehicleswith DISTRONIC PLUS.X Press= or; on the steering wheelto select the DriveAssistDriveAssist menu.

X Press the9 or: button to selectPRE-SAFE BrakePRE-SAFE Brake.

X Press thea button.The current selection is displayed.

X To activate/deactivate: press theabutton again.When PRE-SAFE® Brake is deactivated, theassistance graphic shows theæ symbolin the multifunction display.

For more information on PRE‑SAFE® Brake,see (Y page 79).

Activating/deactivating COLLISIONPREVENTION ASSIST PLUSX Press the=or;button on the steer-ingwheel to select the DriveAssistDriveAssistmenu.

X Press the9 or: button to selectCollision Prevent.Collision Prevent..

X Press thea button.The current selection is displayed.

X To activate/deactivate: press theabutton again.If COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS isdeactivated, the assistance graphic showstheæ symbol in the multifunction dis-play.

For further information about COLLISIONPREVENTION ASSIST PLUS, see (Y page 73).

Activating/deactivating SteeringAssist and Stop&Go PilotX Press the=or;button on the steer-ingwheel to select the DriveAssistDriveAssistmenu.

X Using9 or:, select DTR+:DTR+: Steer.Steer.Asst.Asst.

X Press thea button.The current selection is displayed.

X To activate/deactivate: press theabutton again.When Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilotare activated, the multifunction displayshows the DTR+: Steer. Asst.DTR+: Steer. Asst. OnOn mes-sage.

Further information about DISTRONIC PLUSwith Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot(Y page 189).

Activating/deactivating ATTENTIONASSISTX Press= or; on the steering wheelto select the DriveAssistDriveAssist menu.

X Press9 or: to select AttentionAttentionAssistAssist.

X Press thea button.The current selection is displayed.

X Pressa to confirm.X Press the: or9 button to set OffOff,StandardStandard or SensitiveSensitive.

X Press thea button to save the setting.When ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated,theé symbol appears in the multifunc-

236 Menus and submenusOn

-board

computerand

displays

tion display in the assistance graphics dis-play.

For further information about ATTENTIONASSIST, see (Y page 213).

Activating/deactivating Blind SpotAssistX Press the=or;button on the steer-ingwheel to select the DriveAssistDriveAssistmenu.

X Press the9 or: button to selectBlind Spot AssistBlind Spot Assist.

X Press thea button.The current selection appears.

X To activate/deactivate: press theabutton again.

For further information about Blind SpotAssist, see (Y page 214).For further information about Active BlindSpot Assist, see (Y page 218).

Activating/deactivating Lane KeepingAssistX Press the=or;button on the steer-ingwheel to select the DriveAssistDriveAssistmenu.

X Press the9 or: button to selectLane Keep. AssistLane Keep. Assist.

X Press thea button.The current selection appears.

X Pressa to confirm.X Press the: or9 button to set OffOff,StandardStandard or AdaptiveAdaptive.

X Press thea button to save the setting.For further information about Lane KeepingAssist, see (Y page 216).For further information about Active LaneKeeping Assist, see (Y page 221).

Service menu

Depending on the equipment installed in thevehicle, you have the following options in theServ.Serv. menu:RCalling up display messages in messagememory (Y page 245)RRestarting the tire pressure loss warningsystem (Y page 352)RChecking the tire pressure electronically(Y page 352)RCalling up the service due date(Y page 316)

Settings menu

Introduction

Depending on the equipment installed in thevehicle, In the Sett.Sett. menu you have the fol-lowing options:RChanging the instrument cluster settings(Y page 238)RChanging the light settings (Y page 238)RChanging the vehicle settings(Y page 240)RChanging the convenience settings(Y page 240)RRestoring the factory settings(Y page 241)

Menus and submenus 237

On-board

computera

nddisplays

Z

Instrument cluster

Selecting the unit ofmeasurement for dis-tanceThe Display Unit Speed-/Odometer:Display Unit Speed-/Odometer:function allows you to choose whether cer-tain displays appear in kilometers or miles inthe multifunction display.X Press the=or;button on the steer-ing wheel to select the Sett.Sett. menu.

X Press the: or9 button to select theInstr. ClusterInstr. Cluster submenu.

X Pressa to confirm.X Press the: or9 button to select theDisplay Unit Speed-/OdometerDisplay Unit Speed-/Odometer func-tion.You will see the selected setting: kmkm ormilesmiles.

X Press thea button to save the setting.The selected unit of measurement for dis-tance applies to:RDigital speedometer in the TripTrip menuROdometer and the trip odometerRTrip computerRCurrent consumption and the rangeRNavigation instructions in the NaviNavi menuRCruise controlRDISTRONIC PLUSRASSYST PLUS service interval display

Selecting the permanent display functionYou can determine whether the multifunctiondisplay permanently shows your speed or theoutside temperature.X Press the=or;button on the steer-ing wheel to select the SettSett menu.

X Press the: or9 button to select theInst. ClusterInst. Cluster submenu.

X Pressa to confirm.X Press the: or9 button to select thePermanent DisplayPermanent Display function.You will see the selected setting OutsideOutsideTemperatureTemperature or Additional Speedome‐Additional Speedome‐

ter [km/h]ter [km/h]/AdditionalAdditional SpeedometerSpeedometer[mph][mph].

X Press thea button to save the setting.

i The speed is highlighted in km/h or inmph conversely to your speedometer.

Lights

Setting the brightness of the instrumentcluster lighting and switchesThe lighting in the instrument cluster, in thedisplays and the controls in the vehicle inte-rior can be adjusted with the BrightnessBrightnessDisplay/Switches:Display/Switches: function.X Press the=or;button on the steer-ing wheel to select the Sett.Sett. menu.

X Press the: or9 button to select theLightsLights submenu.

X Pressa to confirm.X Press the: or9 button to select theBrightness Display/Switches:Brightness Display/Switches: func-tion.You will see the selected setting.

X Pressa to confirm.X Press the: or9 button to adjust thebrightness to any level from Level 1Level 1 toLevel 5Level 5 (bright).

X Press thea or% button to save thesetting.If the light switch is set toÃ, T orL, the brightness is dependent uponthe brightness of the ambient light.

i The light sensor in the instrument clusterautomatically controls the brightness ofthe multifunction display.In daylight, the displays in the instrumentcluster are not illuminated.

Switching the daytime running lamps on/offi This function is not available in Canada.

238 Menus and submenusOn

-board

computerand

displays

X Press the=or;button on the steer-ing wheel to select the Sett.Sett. menu.

X Press the: or9 button to select theLightsLights submenu.

X Pressa to confirm.X Press: or9 to select the DayDayLightsLights function.If the Day LightsDay Lights function has beenswitched on, the cone of light and theWsymbol in the multifunction display areshown in orange.

X Press thea button to save the setting.Further information on daytime runninglamps (Y page 122).

Setting the brightness of the ambientlightingX Press the=or;button on the steer-ing wheel to select the Sett.Sett. menu.

X Press the: or9 button to select theLightsLights submenu.

X Pressa to confirm.X Press the: or9 button to select theAmb. Light +/-.Amb. Light +/-. function.You will see the selected setting.

X Pressa to confirm.X Press the: or9 button to adjust thebrightness to any level from OffOff to Level 5Level 5(bright).

X Press thea or% button to save thesetting.

Setting the ambient lighting colorX Press the=or;button on the steer-ing wheel to select the Sett.Sett. menu.

X Press the: or9 button to select theLightsLights submenu.

X Pressa to confirm.X Press the: or9 button to select theAmb. Light Col.Amb. Light Col. function.

X Pressa to confirm.

X Press the: or9 button to set thecolor to SOLARSOLAR, NEUTRALNEUTRAL or POLARPOLAR.

X Press thea or% button to save thesetting.

Activating/deactivating surround light-ing and exterior lighting delayed switch-offX Press the=or;button on the steer-ing wheel to select the Sett.Sett. menu.

X Press the: or9 button to select theLightsLights submenu.

X Pressa to confirm.X Press: or9 to select the Sur‐Sur‐round Lightinground Lighting function.If the SurroundSurround LightingLighting function is acti-vated, the light cone and the area aroundthe vehicle are displayed in orange in themultifunction display.

X Press thea button to save the setting.

Deactivating delayed switch-off of the exte-rior lighting temporarily:X Before leaving the vehicle, turn the Smart-Key to position 0 in the ignition lock.

X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-tion lock.The exterior lighting delayed switch-off isdeactivated.

Delayed switch-off of the exterior lighting isreactivated the next time you start theengine.If you have activated the Surround Light‐Surround Light‐inging function and the light switch is set toÃ, the following functions are activatedwhen it is dark:Rsurround lighting: the exterior lightingremains lit for 40 seconds after unlockingwith the SmartKey. If you start the engine,the surround lighting is switched off andautomatic headlamp mode is activated(Y page 122).Rexterior lighting delayed switch-off: theexterior lighting remains lit for 60 secondsafter the engine is switched off. If you close

Menus and submenus 239

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

all the doors and the trunk lid/tailgate, theexterior lighting goes off after 15 seconds.

i Depending on your vehicle's equipment,when the surround lighting and delayedswitch-off exterior lighting are on, the fol-lowing light up:RParking lampsRSide marker lampsRSurround lighting in the exterior mirrors

Activating/deactivating the interior light-ing delayed switch-offIf you activate the Interior LightingInterior LightingDelayDelay function, the interior lighting remainson for 20 seconds after you remove theSmartKey from the ignition lock.X Press the=or;button on the steer-ing wheel to select the Sett.Sett. menu.

X Press the: or9 button to select theLightsLights submenu.

X Pressa to confirm.X Press the: or9 button to select theLight. DelayLight. Delay function.If the Light. DelayLight. Delay function has beenswitched on, the vehicle interior is dis-played in orange in the multifunction dis-play.

X Press thea button to save the setting.

Vehicle

Activating/deactivating the automaticdoor locking mechanismX Press the=or;button on the steer-ing wheel to select the Sett.Sett. menu.

X Press: or9 to select the VehicleVehiclesubmenu.

X Pressa to confirm.X Press: or9 to select the Auto.Auto.Door LocksDoor Locks function.When the Auto. Door LocksAuto. Door Locks function isactivated, the vehicle doors are displayedin orange in the multifunction display.

X Press thea button to save the setting.

If you activate the Auto. Door LocksAuto. Door Locks func-tion, the vehicle is centrally locked above aspeed of around 9 mph (15 km/h).For further information on the automatic lock-ing feature, see (Y page 91).

Activating/deactivating the acousticlocking verification signalIf you switch on the AcousticAcoustic LockLock function,an acoustic signal sounds when you lock thevehicle.X Press the=or;button on the steer-ing wheel to select the Sett.Sett. menu.

X Press: or9 to select the VehicleVehiclesubmenu.

X Pressa to confirm.X Press the: or9 button to select theAcoustic LockAcoustic Lock function.If the AcousticAcoustic LockLock function is activated,the& symbol in the multifunction dis-play lights up orange.

X Press thea button to save the setting.

Convenience

Activating/deactivating the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT featureG WARNINGWhen the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature adjuststhe steering wheel, you and other vehicleoccupants – particularly children – couldbecome trapped. There is a risk of injury.While the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature is mak-ing adjustments, make sure that no one hasany body parts in the sweep of the steeringwheel.If somebody becomes trapped:Rpress one of the memory function positionbuttons, orRmove the switch for steering wheel adjust-ment in the opposite direction to that inwhich the steering wheel is moving.

The adjustment process is stopped.

240 Menus and submenusOn

-board

computerand

displays

X Press the=or;button on the steer-ing wheel to select the Sett.Sett. menu.

X Press the: or9 button to select theConvenienceConvenience submenu.

X Pressa to confirm.X Press the: or9 button to select theEasy Entry/ExitEasy Entry/Exit function.If the Easy Entry/ExitEasy Entry/Exit function is activa-ted, the vehicle steering wheel is displayedin orange in the multifunction display.

X Press thea button to save the setting.Further information on the EASY-ENTRY/EXITfeature (Y page 115).

Switching the belt adjustment on/offX Press the=or;button on the steer-ing wheel to select the Sett.Sett. menu.

X Press the: or9 button to select theConvenienceConvenience submenu.

X Pressa to confirm.X Press the: or9 button to select theBelt AdjustmentBelt Adjustment function.If the Belt AdjustmentBelt Adjustment function is activa-ted, the vehicle seat belt is shown in orangein the multifunction display.

X Press thea button to save the setting.For further information on belt adjustment,see (Y page 49).

Switching the fold-in mirrors when lock-ing feature on/offThis function is only available when the vehi-cle is equippedwith the electrical fold-in func-tion.When you switch on the Auto. MirrorAuto. MirrorFoldingFolding function, the exterior mirrors arefolded in when the vehicle is locked. If youunlock the vehicle and then open the driver'sor front-passenger door, the exterior mirrorsfold out again.X Press the=or;button on the steer-ing wheel to select the SettingsSettings menu.

X Press the: or9 button to select theConvenienceConvenience submenu.

X Pressa to confirm.

X Press the: or9 button to select theAuto. Mirror FoldingAuto. Mirror Folding function.If the Auto. Mirror FoldingAuto. Mirror Folding function isswitched on, the multifunction displayshows the vehicle's exterior mirror inorange.

X Press thea button to save the setting.

If you have switched on the Auto. MirrorAuto. MirrorFoldingFolding function and you fold in the exteriormirrors by pressing button:, the exteriormirrors will not fold out automatically(Y page 117).You can then only fold out the exteriormirrorsusing button:.

Restoring the factory settingsX Press the=or;button on the steer-ing wheel to select the Sett.Sett. menu.

X Press the: or9 button to select theFactory SettingFactory Setting submenu.

X Pressa to confirm.The Reset All Settings?Reset All Settings? messageappears.

X Press the: or9 button to select NoNoor YesYes.

X Pressa to confirm the selection.If you select YesYes, the multifunction displayshows a confirmation message.

For safety reasons, the Day LightsDay Lights functionin the LightsLights submenu is only reset if thevehicle is stationary.

Menus and submenus 241

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

AMG menu in AMG vehicles

AMG displays

: Digital speedometer; Gear indicator= Upshift indicator? Engine oil temperatureA Coolant temperatureB Status indicator for ECO start/stop func-

tion (Y page 153)X Press= or; on the steering wheelto select the AMGAMG menu.

Upshift indicator: upshift indicator UPUP=indicates that the engine has reached theoverrevving range when in the manual driveprogram.Engine oil temperature: when the engineand transmission are at normal operatingtemperature, oil temperature? is displayedin white in the multifunction display.If the multifunction display shows oil temper-ature? in blue, the engine or the transmis-sion are not yet at normal operating temper-ature. Avoid driving at full engine output dur-ing this time.If the conditions for the ECO start/stop func-tion are fulfilled and the vehicle is stationary,status indicatorB is shown.

SETUP

: Drive program (CC/SS+SS+/MM); ESP® mode ONON/OFFOFF or SPORT handling

mode SPORTSPORT= Suspension setting COMFORTCOMFORT/SPORTSPORT/

SPORT +SPORT +SETUP shows the drive program, the ESP®(Electronic Stability Program) mode and thesuspension tuning.X Press the=or;button on the steer-ing wheel to select the AMGAMG menu.

X Press the9 button repeatedly untilSETUP is displayed.

orX Briefly press the AMG button on the centerconsole (Y page 195).

RACETIMER

Displaying and starting RACETIMER

: Lap; RACETIMERThe RACETIMER is only intended for use on aclosed race circuit. Do not use the function onpublic roads.

242 Menus and submenusOn

-board

computerand

displays

You can start the RACETIMER when theengine is running or if the SmartKey is in posi-tion 2 in the ignition lock.X Press the=or;button on the steer-ing wheel to select the AMGAMG menu.

X Press the9 button repeatedly until theRACETIMER is shown.

X To start: press thea button to start theRACETIMER.

Displaying the intermediate time

X Press= or; to select Interm.Interm.TimeTime.

X Pressa to confirm.The intermediate time is displayed for fiveseconds.

Starting a new lap

: RACETIMER; Fastest lap time (best lap)= LapX Pressa to confirm New LapNew Lap.i It is possible to store a maximum of six-teen laps. The 16th lap can only be com-pleted with Finish LapFinish Lap.

Stopping the RACETIMER

X Press the% button on the steeringwheel.

X Confirm YesYes witha.The RACETIMER interrupts timing if you stopthe vehicle and turn the SmartKey to position1 in the ignition lock. If you turn the key toposition 3 and then pressa to confirmStartStart, timing is continued.Resetting the current lapX Stop the RACETIMER.X Press= or; to select Reset LapReset Lap.X Pressa to reset the lap time to "0".

Deleting all laps

If you switch off the engine, the RACETIMER isreset to "0" after 30 seconds. All laps aredeleted.You cannot delete individual stored laps. Ifyou have stopped 16 laps, the current lapdoes not have to be reset.X Reset the current lap.X Pressa to confirm ResetReset.Reset Race-Timer?Reset Race-Timer? appears in the multi-function display.

X Press the: button to select YesYes andpress thea button to confirm.All laps are deleted.

Menus and submenus 243

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Overall statistics

: RACETIMER overall evaluation; Total time driven= Average speed? Distance coveredA Maximum speedThis function is shown if you have stored atleast one lap and stopped the RACETIMER.X Press= or; on the steering wheelto select the AMGAMG menu.

X Press the9 button repeatedly until theoverall evaluation is shown.

Lap statistics

: Lap; Lap time= Average lap speed? Lap lengthA Top speed during lap

This function is only available if you havestored at least two laps and have stopped theRACETIMER.X Press= or; on the steering wheelto select the AMGAMG menu.

X Press the9 button repeatedly until thelap evaluation is shown.Each lap is shown in a separate submenu.The fastest lap is indicated by flashing sym-bol:.

X Press the9 or: button to select adifferent lap evaluation.

244 Menus and submenusOn

-board

computerand

displays

Display messages

Introduction

General notesDisplay messages appear in the multifunction display.Display messages with graphic displays may be shown in simplified form in the Operator'sManual and may differ from the messages shown in the multifunction display.Please respond in accordancewith the displaymessages and follow the additional notes in thisOperator's Manual.Certain display messages are accompanied by an audible warning tone or a continuous tone.When the ignition is switched off, all display messages are deleted, apart from some high-priority display messages. Once the causes of the high-priority display messages have beenrectified, the corresponding display messages are also deleted.When you stop and park the vehicle, please observe the notes on:RHOLD function (Y page 191)RParking (Y page 170)

Hiding display messagesX Press thea or% button on the steering wheel to hide the display message.The display message is cleared.

The multifunction display shows high-priority display messages in red. Some high-priority dis-play messages cannot be hidden.The multifunction display shows these messages continuously until the causes for the mes-sages have been remedied.

Message memoryThe on-board computer saves certain displaymessages in themessagememory. You can callup the display messages:X Press the= or; button on the steering wheel to select the Serv.Serv. menu.If there are display messages, the multifunction display shows 2 Messages2 Messages, for example.

X Press the9 or: button to select the entry, e.g. 2 Messages2 Messages.X Pressa to confirm.X Press the9 or: button to scroll through the display messages.

Display messages 245

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Safety systems

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

!÷Currently Unavail‐Currently Unavail‐able See Opera‐able See Opera‐tor's Manualtor's Manual

ABS (Anti-lock Braking System), ESP® (Electronic Stability Pro-gram), BAS (Brake Assist System), the HOLD function, PRE‑SAFE®and hill start assist are temporarily unavailable.BAS PLUS with Cross-Traffic Assist, COLLISION PREVENTIONASSIST PLUS, PRE‑SAFE® PLUS and PRE‑SAFE® Brake may alsohave failed.In addition, the ÷, å and ! warning lamps light up in theinstrument cluster.ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated.For example, the on-board voltage may be insufficient.

G WARNINGThe brake system continues to function normally, but without thefunctions listed above. The wheels could therefore lock if youbrake hard, for example.The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affec-ted. The braking distance in an emergency braking situation canincrease.If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle.There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.X Drive on carefully.If the display message disappears, the functions mentionedabove are available again.

If the multifunction display still shows the display message:X Drive on carefully.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

!÷Inoperative SeeInoperative SeeOperator's ManualOperator's Manual

ABS, ESP®, BAS, the HOLD function, PRE‑SAFE® and hill startassist are not available due to a malfunction.BAS PLUS with Cross-Traffic Assist, COLLISION PREVENTIONASSIST PLUS, PRE‑SAFE® PLUS and PRE‑SAFE® Brake may alsohave failed.The$ (USA only) orJ (Canada only), ÷, å and !warning lamps in the instrument cluster also light up.ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated.

G WARNINGThe brake system continues to function normally, but without thefunctions listed above. The wheels could therefore lock if youbrake hard, for example.

246 Display messagesOn

-board

computerand

displays

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andMM SolutionsThe steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affec-ted. The braking distance in an emergency braking situation canincrease.If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle.There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.X Drive on carefully.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

÷Inoperative SeeInoperative SeeOperator's ManualOperator's Manual

ESP®, BAS, the HOLD function, PRE‑SAFE® and hill start assist arenot available due to a malfunction.BAS PLUS with Cross-Traffic Assist, COLLISION PREVENTIONASSIST PLUS, PRE‑SAFE® PLUS and PRE‑SAFE® Brake may alsohave failed.In addition, the ÷ and å warning lamps light up in theinstrument cluster.The self-diagnosis function might not be complete, for example.ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated.

G WARNINGThe brake system continues to function normally, but without thefunctions listed above.The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can thusincrease.If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle.There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.X Drive on carefully.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Display messages 247

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

T!÷Inoperative SeeInoperative SeeOperator's ManualOperator's Manual

EBD (electronic brake force distribution), ABS, ESP®, BAS, theHOLD function, PRE-SAFE® and hill start assist are not availabledue to a malfunction.BAS PLUS with Cross-Traffic Assist, COLLISION PREVENTIONASSIST PLUS, PRE‑SAFE® PLUS and PRE‑SAFE® Brake may alsohave failed.In addition, the ÷, å and ! warning lamps light up in theinstrument cluster and a warning tone sounds.

G WARNINGThe brake system continues to function normally, but without thefunctions listed above. The front and rear wheels could thereforelock if you brake hard, for example.The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affec-ted. The braking distance in an emergency braking situation canincrease.If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle.There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.X Drive on carefully.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

F(USA

only)J(Canadaonly)Please ReleasePlease ReleaseParking BrakeParking Brake

You are driving with the parking brake applied. A warning tone alsosounds.X Release the parking brake.

$(USA

only)J(Canadaonly)Check Brake FluidCheck Brake FluidLevelLevel

There is not enough brake fluid in the brake fluid reservoir.In addition, the$ (USA only) orJ (Canada only) warninglamp lights up in the instrument cluster and a warning tonesounds.

G WARNINGThe braking effect may be impaired.There is a risk of an accident.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, payingattention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue drivingunder any circumstances.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 170).X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.X Do not add brake fluid. This does not correct the malfunction.

248 Display messagesOn

-board

computerand

displays

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

#Check Brake PadCheck Brake PadWearWear

The brake pads/linings have reached their wear limit.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Gmbrace Inoperativembrace Inoperative

One or more main features of the mbrace system are malfunc-tioning.X Have the mbrace system checked at a qualified specialist work-shop.

Collision Preven‐Collision Preven‐tion Assist Plustion Assist PlusCurrently Unavail‐Currently Unavail‐able See Opera‐able See Opera‐tor's Manualtor's Manual

COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS is temporarily not opera-tional. Possible causes are:Rthe radar sensor system is temporarily inoperative, e.g. due toelectromagnetic radiation emitted by nearby TV or radio sta-tions or other sources of electromagnetic radiation.Rthe system is outside the operating temperature range.Rthe on-board voltage is too low.When the causes stated above no longer apply, the display mes-sage disappears.COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS is operational again.If the display message does not disappear:X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, payingattention to road and traffic conditions.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 170).X Restart the engine.

Collision Preven‐Collision Preven‐tion Assist Plustion Assist PlusInoperativeInoperative

COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS is temporarily inoperativedue to a malfunction. Adaptive Brake Assist may also have failed.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

PRE-SAFEPRE-SAFEInoperative SeeInoperative SeeOperator's ManualOperator's Manual

Important functions of PRE-SAFE® have failed. All other occupantsafety systems, e.g. air bags, remain available.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

Display messages 249

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

PRE-SAFEPRE-SAFEFunctions Cur‐Functions Cur‐rentlyrently LimitedLimited SeeSeeOperator's ManualOperator's Manual

PRE‑SAFE® PLUS or PRE‑SAFE® Brake is temporarily inoperative.Possible causes are:Rfunction is impaired due to heavy rain or snow.Rthe radar sensor system is temporarily inoperative, e.g. due toelectromagnetic radiation emitted by nearby TV or radio sta-tions or other sources of electromagnetic radiation.RAMG vehicles: ESP® is deactivated.Rthe system is outside the operating temperature range.Rthe on-board voltage is too low.When the causes stated above no longer apply, the display mes-sage disappears.PRE‑SAFE® PLUS and PRE‑SAFE® Brake are operational again.If the display message does not disappear:X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, payingattention to road and traffic conditions.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 170).X Restart the engine.X AMG vehicles: reactivate ESP® (Y page 77).

PRE-SAFEPRE-SAFEFunctions LimitedFunctions LimitedSeeSee Operator'sOperator's Man‐Man‐ualual

PRE‑SAFE® PLUS or PRE‑SAFE® Brake is unavailable due to a mal-function. BAS PLUS with Cross-Traffic Assist may also have failed.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

250 Display messagesOn

-board

computerand

displays

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

Radar SensorsRadar SensorsDirty See Opera‐Dirty See Opera‐tor's Manualtor's Manual

At least one of the following driving systems or driving safety sys-tems is temporarily restricted or inoperative:RCOLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUSRPRE-SAFE® BrakeRPRE-SAFE® PLUSRActive Lane Keeping AssistRActive Blind Spot AssistRDISTRONIC PLUS with Steering Assist and Stop&Go PilotIf the radar sensor system in front is dirty, Active Blind Spot Assistwill not perform a course-correcting brake application.Possible causes are:Rthe sensors in the radiator trim and/or in the bumpers are dirty.Rthe function of the driving system or driving safety system isimpaired due to heavy rain or snow

A warning tone also sounds.When the causes stated above no longer apply, the display mes-sage disappears. All driving systems or driving safety systems areoperative again.If the display message does not disappear:X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, payingattention to road and traffic conditions.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 170).X Switch off the engine.X Clean the sensors in the following locations (Y page 321):Rin the radiator trimRin the front bumperRin the rear bumper, particularly in the middle of the rearbumper

X Restart the engine.The display message disappears.

Display messages 251

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

6SRS. MalfunctionSRS. MalfunctionService RequiredService Required

The restraint system is faulty. The 6 warning lamp also lightsup in the instrument cluster.

G WARNINGThe air bags or Emergency Tensioning Devices may either be trig-gered unintentionally or, in the event of an accident, may not betriggered.There is an increased risk of injury.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.Observe the additional information on restraint systems(Y page 44).

6FrontFront LeftLeft Malfunc‐Malfunc‐tion Servicetion ServiceRequiredRequired or FrontFrontRight MalfunctionRight MalfunctionService RequiredService Required

The restraint system has malfunctioned at the front on the left orright. The 6 warning lamp also lights up in the instrument clus-ter.

G WARNINGThe air bags or Emergency Tensioning Devices may either be trig-gered unintentionally or, in the event of an accident, may not betriggered.There is an increased risk of injury.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

6Rear Left Malfunc‐Rear Left Malfunc‐tion Servicetion ServiceRequiredRequired or RearRearRight MalfunctionRight MalfunctionService RequiredService Required

The restraint system has malfunctioned at the rear on the left orright. The 6 warning lamp also lights up in the instrument clus-ter.

G WARNINGThe air bags or Emergency Tensioning Devices may either be trig-gered unintentionally or, in the event of an accident, may not betriggered.There is an increased risk of injury.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

6Left Side CurtainLeft Side CurtainAirbagAirbag MalfunctionMalfunctionService RequiredService Requiredor Right Side Cur‐Right Side Cur‐tain Airbag Mal‐tain Airbag Mal‐function Servicefunction ServiceRequiredRequired

There is a malfunction in the left-hand or right-hand window cur-tain air bag.The 6 warning lamp also lights up in the instrument cluster.

G WARNINGThe left or right window curtain air bag may either be triggeredunintentionally or, in the event of an accident, may not be trig-gered.There is an increased risk of injury.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

252 Display messagesOn

-board

computerand

displays

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

Front PassengerFront PassengerAirbag DisabledAirbag DisabledSeeSee Operator'sOperator's Man‐Man‐ualual

The front-passenger air bag and front-passenger knee bag aredeactivated during the journey, although:Ran adultorRa person of the corresponding stature is on the front-passengerseat

If additional forces are applied to the seat, the system may inter-pret the occupant's weight as lower than it actually is.

G WARNINGThe front-passenger front air bag and front passenger knee bagmay not be triggered in the event of an accident.There is an increased risk of injury.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, payingattention to road and traffic conditions.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 170).X Switch the ignition off.X Have the occupant get out of the vehicle.X Keep the seat unoccupied, close the front-passenger door andswitch on the ignition.

X Observe the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp in thecenter console and the multifunction display and check the fol-lowing:Seat unoccupied and ignition switched on:Rthe PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp must then lightup and remain lit. If the indicator lamp is on, OCS has disabledthe front-passenger front air bag and front-passenger kneebag (Y page 54)Rthe FrontFront PassengerPassenger AirbagAirbag EnabledEnabled SeeSee Operator'sOperator'sManualManual or FrontFront PassengerPassenger AirbagAirbag DisabledDisabled SeeSee Oper‐Oper‐ator's Manualator's Manual display messages must not be shown in themultifunction display

X Wait for a period of at least 60 seconds until the necessary sys-tem checks have been completed.

X Make sure that the display messages do not appear in the mul-tifunction display.

If these conditions are fulfilled, the front-passenger seat can beoccupied again. Whether the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicatorlamp remains lit or goes out depends on how OCS classifies theoccupant.If the conditions are not fulfilled, the system is not operating cor-rectly.

Display messages 253

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andMM SolutionsX Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.Observe the additional information on OCS (Y page 54).

Front PassengerFront PassengerAirbag EnabledAirbag EnabledSeeSee Operator'sOperator's Man‐Man‐ualual

The front-passenger air bag and front-passenger knee bag areenabled during the journey, even though:Ra child, a small adult or an object weighing less than the sys-tem's weight threshold is located on the front-passenger seatorRthe front-passenger seat is unoccupiedThe system may detect objects or forces applying additionalweight on the seat.

G WARNINGThe front-passenger front air bag and front-passenger knee bagmay be triggered unintentionally.There is an increased risk of injury.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, payingattention to road and traffic conditions.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 170).X Switch the ignition off.X Open the front-passenger door.X Remove the child and the child restraint system from the front-passenger seat.

X Make sure that there are no objects on the seat adding to theweight.The system may otherwise detect the additional weight andinterpret the seat occupant's weight as greater than it actuallyis.

X Keep the seat unoccupied, close the front-passenger door andswitch on the ignition.

X Observe the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp in thecenter console and the multifunction display and check the fol-lowing:

Seat unoccupied and ignition switched on:Rthe PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp must then light upand remain lit. When the indicator lamp is on, OCS (OccupantClassification System) has disabled the front-passenger front airbag and front-passenger knee bag (Y page 54)Rthe Front Passenger Airbag Enabled See Operator'sFront Passenger Airbag Enabled See Operator'sManualManual or Front Passenger Airbag Disabled See Oper‐Front Passenger Airbag Disabled See Oper‐ator's Manualator's Manual display messages must not be shown in themultifunction display

254 Display messagesOn

-board

computerand

displays

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andMM SolutionsX Wait for a period of at least 60 seconds until the necessary sys-tem checks have been completed.

X Make sure that the display messages do not appear in the mul-tifunction display.

If these conditions are fulfilled, the front-passenger seat can beoccupied again. Whether the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicatorlamp remains lit or goes out depends on how OCS classifies theoccupant.If the conditions are not fulfilled, the system is not operating cor-rectly.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.Observe the additional information on OCS (Y page 54).

Lightsi Vehicles with LED bulbs in the light clusters:The display message for the corresponding light will only appear if all the LEDs have failed.

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

bCheck Left Corner‐Check Left Corner‐ing Lighting Light or CheckCheckRight CorneringRight CorneringLightLight

The left or right-hand cornering light is defective.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

bCheck Left LowCheck Left LowBeamBeam or CheckCheckRight Low BeamRight Low Beam

The left or right-hand low-beam headlamp is defective.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

bCheck Rear LeftCheck Rear LeftTurn SignalTurn Signal orCheck Rear RightCheck Rear RightTurn SignalTurn Signal

The rear left-hand or rear right-hand turn signal is defective.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

bCheck Front LeftCheck Front LeftTurn SignalTurn Signal orCheck Front RightCheck Front RightTurn SignalTurn Signal

The front left-hand or front right-hand turn signal is defective.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Display messages 255

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

bCheck Left MirrorCheck Left MirrorTurn SignalTurn Signal orCheckCheck RightRight MirrorMirrorTurn SignalTurn Signal

The turn signal in the left-hand or right-hand exterior mirror isdefective.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

bCheckCheck CenterCenter BrakeBrakeLampLamp

The high-mounted brake lamp is faulty.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

bCheck Left TailCheck Left Tailand Brake Lampsand Brake Lamps orCheck Right TailCheck Right Tailand Brake Lampsand Brake Lamps

The left or right-hand tail lamp/brake lamp is defective.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

bCheck Left HighCheck Left HighBeamBeam or CheckCheckRight High BeamRight High Beam

The left or right-hand high beam is defective.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

bCheckCheck LeftLeft LicenseLicensePlate LampPlate Lamp orCheck RightCheck RightLicense Plate LampLicense Plate Lamp

The left or right-hand license plate lamp is faulty.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

bRear fog lampRear fog lamp

The rear fog lamp is faulty.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

bCheck Front LeftCheck Front LeftParking LampParking Lamp orCheck Front RightCheck Front RightParking LampParking Lamp

The front left or front right parking or standing lamp is defective.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

bCheckCheck LeftLeft ReverseReverseLampLamp or CheckCheckRight Reverse LampRight Reverse Lamp

The left or right-hand backup lamp is defective.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

256 Display messagesOn

-board

computerand

displays

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

bCheck Front LeftCheck Front LeftSidemarker LampSidemarker Lamp orCheck Front RightCheck Front RightSidemarker LampSidemarker Lamp

The front left-hand or front right-hand side marker lamp is faulty.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

bCheck Rear LeftCheck Rear LeftSidemarker LampSidemarker Lamp orRear right sideRear right sidemarker lampmarker lamp

The rear left-hand or rear right-hand side marker lamp is faulty.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

bCheckCheck LeftLeft DaytimeDaytimeRunning LightRunning Light orCheck Right Day‐Check Right Day‐time Running Lighttime Running Light

The left or right-hand daytime running lamp is faulty.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

bActive Light Sys‐Active Light Sys‐tem Inoperativetem Inoperative

The active light function is faulty.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

bMalfunction SeeMalfunction SeeOperator's ManualOperator's Manual

The exterior lighting is defective.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

bAutoAuto LampLamp FunctionFunctionInoperativeInoperative

The light sensor is defective.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

bSwitch Off LightsSwitch Off Lights

The lights are still switched on when you leave the vehicle. Awarning tone also sounds.X Turn the light switch toÃ.

Display messages 257

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

Adaptive HighbeamAdaptive HighbeamAssist CurrentlyAssist CurrentlyUnavailable SeeUnavailable SeeOperator's ManualOperator's Manual

Adaptive Highbeam Assist is deactivated and temporarily inoper-ative. Possible causes are:Rthe windshield in the camera's field of vision is dirty.Rvisibility is impaired due to heavy rain, snow or fog.X Clean the windshield.If the system detects that the camera is fully operational again, theAdaptiveAdaptive HighbeamHighbeam AssistAssist availableavailable againagainmessage is dis-played.Adaptive Highbeam Assist is operational again.

Adaptive HighbeamAdaptive HighbeamAssist InoperativeAssist Inoperative

Adaptive Highbeam Assist is faulty.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Engine

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

+Check CoolantCheck CoolantLevel See Opera‐Level See Opera‐tor's Manualtor's Manual

The coolant level is too low.

! Avoidmaking long journeys with too little coolant in the enginecooling system. The engine will otherwise be damaged.

X Add coolant, observing the warning notes before doing so(Y page 315).

X If coolant needs to be added more often than usual, have theengine coolant system checked at a qualified specialist work-shop.

? The fan motor is faulty.X At coolant temperatures below 248 ‡ (120 †), drive to thenearest qualified specialist workshop.

X Avoid subjecting the engine to heavy loads, e.g. driving inmoun-tainous terrain, and stop-and-go traffic.

258 Display messagesOn

-board

computerand

displays

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

?Coolant Too HotCoolant Too HotStop Vehicle TurnStop Vehicle TurnEngine OffEngine Off

The coolant is too hot.A warning tone also sounds.

G WARNINGDo not drive when your engine is overheated. This can cause somefluids which may have leaked into the engine compartment tocatch fire.Steam from the overheated engine can also cause serious burnswhich can occur just by opening the hood.There is a risk of injury.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine,paying attention to road and traffic conditions.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 170).X Wait until the engine has cooled down.X Make sure that the air supply to the engine radiator is notblocked, e.g. by snow, slush or ice.

X Do not start the engine again until the display message goes outand the coolant temperature is below 248 ‡ (120 †). Other-wise, the engine could be damaged.

X Pay attention to the coolant temperature display.X If the temperature increases again, visit a qualified specialistworkshop immediately.

Under normal operating conditions and with the specified coolantlevel, the coolant temperature may rise to 248 ‡ (120 †).

#SeeSee Operator'sOperator's Man‐Man‐ualual

The battery is not being charged.A warning tone also sounds.Possible causes are:Ra defective alternatorRa torn poly-V-beltRa malfunction in the electronics

! Do not continue driving. The engine could otherwise overheat.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine,paying attention to road and traffic conditions.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 170).X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Display messages 259

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

#Stop Vehicle SeeStop Vehicle SeeOperator's ManualOperator's Manual

The battery is no longer being charged and the battery charge levelis too low.A warning tone also sounds.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine,paying attention to road and traffic conditions.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 170).X Observe the instructions in the# SeeSee Operator'sOperator's ManualManualdisplay message.

X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

#Start Engine SeeStart Engine SeeOperator's ManualOperator's Manual

The engine is switched off and the battery charge level is too low.X Switch off electrical consumers that you do not need, such asthe rear window defroster and interior lighting.

X Leave the engine running for a few minutes or drive a long dis-tance.The battery is being charged.

4Check Engine OilCheck Engine OilAt Next RefuelingAt Next Refueling

The engine oil level has dropped to the minimum level.A warning tone also sounds.

! Avoid long journeys with too little engine oil. The engine willotherwise be damaged.

X Check the oil level when next refueling, at the latest(Y page 313).

X If necessary, add engine oil (Y page 314).X Have the engine checked at a qualified specialist workshop ifengine oil needs to be added more often than usual.

Information on approved engine oils can be obtained from anyqualified specialist workshop or on the Internet at http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com.

4Check Engine OilCheck Engine OilLevelLevel (Add(Add 11 quart)quart)

AMG vehicles: the engine oil level is too low.

! Avoid long journeys with too little engine oil. The engine willotherwise be damaged.

X Check the oil level when next refueling, at the latest(Y page 313).

X If necessary, add engine oil (Y page 314).X Have the engine checked at a qualified specialist workshop ifengine oil needs to be added more often than usual.

Information on approved engine oils can be obtained from anyqualified specialist workshop or on the Internet at http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com.

260 Display messagesOn

-board

computerand

displays

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

4Engine Oil LevelEngine Oil LevelStop Vehicle TurnStop Vehicle TurnEngine OffEngine Off

The engine oil level is too low. There is a risk of engine damage.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine,paying attention to road and traffic conditions.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 170).X Check the engine oil level (Y page 313).X If necessary, add engine oil (Y page 314).

8Fuel Level LowFuel Level Low

The fuel level has dropped into the reserve range.X Refuel at the nearest gas station.

C There is only a very small amount of fuel in the fuel tank.X Refuel at the nearest gas station without fail.

8Gas Cap LooseGas Cap Loose

The fuel system pressure is too low. The fuel filler cap is not closedcorrectly or the fuel system is leaking.X Check that the fuel filler cap is correctly closed.If the fuel filler cap is not correctly closed:X Close the fuel filler cap.If the fuel filler cap is correctly closed:X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Driving systems

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

ÀAttention Assist:Attention Assist:Take a Break!Take a Break!

Based on certain criteria, ATTENTION ASSIST has detected fatigueor a lack of concentration on the part of the driver. A warning tonealso sounds.X If necessary, take a break.During long journeys, take regular breaks in good time so you getenough rest.

ÀAttention AssistAttention AssistInoperativeInoperative

ATTENTION ASSIST is inoperative.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

¨Vehicle RisingVehicle Rising

Your vehicle is adjusting to the level you have selected.

Display messages 261

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

¨Vehicle RisingVehicle RisingPlease WaitPlease Wait

The vehicle level is too low when the vehicle is stationary. A warn-ing tone also sounds.X Do not pull away.The vehicle level is set when the display message disappears.

¨Stop Vehicle Vehi‐Stop Vehicle Vehi‐cle Too Lowcle Too Low

You have pulled away while the vehicle level is still too low.AIRMATIC sets the vehicle to the selected level after a shortperiod.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, payingattention to road and traffic conditions.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 170).X Wait until the display message disappears before pulling away.

AIRMATIC is defective. A warning tone also sounds.X Do not drive at speeds above 50 mph (80 km/h).X Make only slight steering movements. Otherwise, the frontfender or the tires could be damaged if the steering movementis too large.

X Listen for scraping sounds.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely, paying attention to roadand traffic conditions, and set a higher vehicle level.Depending on the malfunction, it may be possible to raise thevehicle.

X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

¨MalfunctionMalfunction

The AIRMATIC function is restricted. The vehicle's handling char-acteristics may be affected.X Do not drive at speeds above 50 mph (80 km/h).X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

ëOffOff

The HOLD function is deactivated. The vehicle is skidding.A warning tone also sounds.X Reactivate the HOLD function later (Y page 191).

262 Display messagesOn

-board

computerand

displays

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

Lane KeepingLane KeepingAssist CurrentlyAssist CurrentlyUnavailable SeeUnavailable SeeOperator's ManualOperator's Manualor Active LaneActive LaneKeepingKeeping AssistAssist Cur‐Cur‐rentlyrently UnavailableUnavailableSeeSee Operator'sOperator's Man‐Man‐ualual

Lane Keeping Assist or Active Lane Keeping Assist is deactivatedand temporarily inoperative. Possible causes are:Rthe windshield in the camera's field of vision is dirty.Rvisibility is impaired due to heavy rain, snow or fog.Rthere have been no lane markings for an extended period.Rthe lanemarkings areworn, dark or covered, e.g. by dirt or snow.When the causes stated above no longer apply, the display mes-sage disappears.Lane Keeping Assist or Active Lane Keeping Assist is operationalagain.If the display message does not disappear:X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, payingattention to road and traffic conditions.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 170).X Clean the windshield.

Lane KeepingLane KeepingAssist Inopera‐Assist Inopera‐tivetive or ActiveActiveLane KeepingLane KeepingAssist InoperativeAssist Inoperative

Lane Keeping Assist or Active Lane Keeping Assist is defective.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Blind Spot AssistBlind Spot AssistCurrently Unavail‐Currently Unavail‐able See Opera‐able See Opera‐tor's Manualtor's Manual orActive Blind SpotActive Blind SpotAssist CurrentlyAssist CurrentlyUnavailable SeeUnavailable SeeOperator's ManualOperator's Manual

Blind Spot Assist or Active Blind Spot Assist is temporarily inop-erative. Possible causes are:Rfunction is impaired due to heavy rain or snow.Rthe radar sensor system is outside the operating temperaturerange.Rthe radar sensor system is temporarily inoperative, e.g. due toelectromagnetic radiation emitted by nearby TV or radio sta-tions or other sources of electromagnetic radiation.

The yellow9 indicator lamps also light up in the exterior mir-rors.When the causes stated above no longer apply, the display mes-sage disappears.Blind Spot Assist or Active Blind Spot Assist is operational again.If the display message does not disappear:X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, payingattention to road and traffic conditions.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 170).X Restart the engine.

Display messages 263

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

Blind Spot AssistBlind Spot AssistInoperativeInoperative orActive Blind SpotActive Blind SpotAssist InoperativeAssist Inoperative

Blind Spot Assist or Active Blind Spot Assist is defective.The yellow9 indicator lamps also light up in the exterior mir-rors.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Park Assist Can‐Park Assist Can‐celedceled

The driver's door is open and the driver's seat belt has not beenfastened.X Repeat the parking process with the seat belt fastened and thedriver's door closed.

You have inadvertently touched the multifunction steering wheelwhile steering intervention was active.X While steering intervention is active, make sure that the multi-function steering wheel is not touched unintentionally.

The vehicle has started to skid and ESP® has intervened.X Use Active Parking Assist again later (Y page 200).

ParkPark AssistAssist Inoper‐Inoper‐ativeative

You have just carried out a large number of turning or parkingmaneuvers.Active Parking Assist will become available again after approx-imately ten minutes (Y page 200).X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, payingattention to road and traffic conditions.

X Switch off and restart the engine.

If the multifunction display still shows the display message:X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

PARKTRONIC is defective.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Park Assist Fin‐Park Assist Fin‐ishedished

The vehicle is parked. A warning tone also sounds.The display message disappears automatically.

DISTRONIC PLUS OffDISTRONIC PLUS Off DISTRONIC PLUS has been deactivated (Y page 181).If it was not deactivated by the driver, a warning tone also sounds.

DISTRONICDISTRONIC PLUSPLUS NowNowAvailableAvailable

DISTRONIC PLUS is operational again after having been tempo-rarily unavailable. You can now reactivate DISTRONIC PLUS(Y page 181).

264 Display messagesOn

-board

computerand

displays

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

DISTRONICDISTRONIC PLUSPLUS Cur‐Cur‐rentlyrently UnavailableUnavailableSeeSee Operator'sOperator's Man‐Man‐ualual

DISTRONIC PLUS is temporarily inoperative.Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot are temporarily inoperative.Possible causes are:Rfunction is impaired due to heavy rain or snow.Rthe radar sensor system is temporarily inoperative, e.g. due toelectromagnetic radiation emitted by nearby TV or radio sta-tions or other sources of electromagnetic radiation.Rthe system is outside the operating temperature range.Rthe on-board voltage is too low.A warning tone also sounds.When the causes stated above no longer apply, the display mes-sage disappears.DISTRONIC PLUS is operational again.If the display message does not disappear:X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, payingattention to road and traffic conditions.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 170).X Restart the engine.

DISTRONIC PLUSDISTRONIC PLUSInoperativeInoperative

DISTRONIC PLUS is defective.The following may have also failed:RBAS PLUS with Cross-Traffic AssistRPRE-SAFE® BrakeRSteering Assist and Stop&Go PilotA warning tone also sounds.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

DISTRONICDISTRONIC PLUSPLUS Sus‐Sus‐pendedpended

You have depressed the accelerator pedal. DISTRONIC PLUS is nolonger controlling the speed of the vehicle.X Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal.

DISTRONIC PLUSDISTRONIC PLUS- - - mph- - - mph

An activation condition for DISTRONIC PLUS is not fulfilled.X Check the activation conditions for DISTRONIC PLUS(Y page 181).

Display messages 265

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

DTR+: SteeringDTR+: SteeringAssist. CurrentlyAssist. CurrentlyUnavailable SeeUnavailable SeeOperator's ManualOperator's Manual

Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot are temporarily inoperative.Possible causes are:Rthe windshield in the camera's field of vision is dirty.Rvisibility is impaired due to heavy rain, snow or fog.Rthere are no lane markings for a longer period.Rthe lanemarkings areworn, dark or covered, e.g. by dirt or snow.When the causes stated above no longer apply, the display mes-sage disappears.Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot are operative again.If the display message does not disappear:X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, payingattention to road and traffic conditions.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 170).X Clean the windshield.

DTR+: SteeringDTR+: SteeringAssist. Inopera‐Assist. Inopera‐tivetive

Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot are faulty.However, the DISTRONIC PLUS functions are still available.A warning tone also sounds.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Cruise ControlCruise ControlInoperativeInoperative

Cruise control is malfunctioning.A warning tone also sounds.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Cruise ControlCruise Control- - - mph- - - mph

A condition for activating cruise control has not been fulfilled.You have tried to store a speed below 20 mph (30 km/h), forexample.X If conditions permit, drive faster than 20 mph (30 km/h) andstore the speed.

X Check the activation conditions for cruise control (Y page 178).

266 Display messagesOn

-board

computerand

displays

Tires

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions

CheckCheckTire Pressure SoonTire Pressure Soon

The tire pressure loss warning system has detected a significantloss in pressure.A warning tone also sounds.Possible causes:Ryou have changed the positions of the wheels and tires or instal-led new wheels and tires.Rthe tire pressure in one or more tires is not correct.

G WARNINGWith tire pressures which are too low, there is a risk of the fol-lowing hazards:Rthey may burst, especially as the load and vehicle speedincrease.Rthey may wear excessively and/or unevenly, which may greatlyimpair tire traction.Rthe driving characteristics, as well as steering and braking, maybe greatly impaired.

There is a risk of an accident.X Stop the vehicle without making any sudden steering or brakingmaneuvers. Pay attention to the traffic conditions as you do so.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 170).X Check the tires and, if necessary, follow the instructions for aflat tire (Y page 327).

X Check the tire pressures and, if necessary, correct the tire pres-sure.

X Restart the tire pressure loss warning system when the tirepressure is correct (Y page 352).

CheckCheck TireTire PressurePressureThen Restart RunThen Restart RunFlat IndicatorFlat Indicator

The tire pressure loss warning system generated a display mes-sage and has not been restarted since.X Set the correct tire pressure in all four tires.X Restart the tire pressure loss warning system (Y page 352).

Run Flat IndicatorRun Flat IndicatorInoperativeInoperative

The tire pressure loss warning system is faulty.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Display messages 267

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

CorrectCorrectTire PressureTire Pressure

The tire pressure is too low in at least one of the tires, or the tirepressure difference between the wheels is too great.X Check the tire pressures at the next opportunity (Y page 352).X If necessary, correct the tire pressure.X Restart the tire pressure monitor (Y page 355).

CheckCheckTiresTires

The tire pressure in one or more tires has dropped significantly.The wheel position is displayed in the multifunction display.A warning tone also sounds.

G WARNINGWith tire pressures which are too low, there is a risk of the fol-lowing hazards:Rthey may burst, especially as the load and vehicle speedincrease.Rthey may wear excessively and/or unevenly, which may greatlyimpair tire traction.Rthe driving characteristics, as well as steering and braking, maybe greatly impaired.

There is a risk of an accident.X Stop the vehicle without making any sudden steering or brakingmaneuvers. Pay attention to the traffic conditions as you do so.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 170).X Check the tires and, if necessary, follow the instructions for aflat tire (Y page 327).

X Check the tire pressure (Y page 352).X If necessary, correct the tire pressure.

268 Display messagesOn

-board

computerand

displays

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

WarningWarningTire MalfunctionTire Malfunction

The tire pressure in one or more tires has dropped suddenly. Thewheel position is shown in the multifunction display.

G WARNINGIf you drive with a flat tire, there is a risk of the following hazards:Ra flat tire affects the ability to steer or brake the vehicle.Ryou could lose control of the vehicle.Rcontinued driving with a flat tire will cause excessive heat build-up and possibly a fire.

There is a risk of an accident.X Stop the vehicle without making any sudden steering or brakingmaneuvers. Pay attention to the traffic conditions as you do so.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 170).X Check the tires and, if necessary, follow the instructions for aflat tire (Y page 327).

TireTire Press.Press. MonitorMonitorCurrently Unavail‐Currently Unavail‐ableable

As a result of interference from a strong source of radio waves, nosignals are detected from the tire pressure sensors. The tire pres-sure monitor is temporarily malfunctioning.X Drive on.The tire pressure monitor restarts automatically as soon as theproblem has been solved.

TirePress. Sen‐TirePress. Sen‐sor(s)Missingsor(s)Missing

There is no signal from the tire pressure sensor of one or severalwheels. The pressure of the affected tire is not displayed in themultifunction display.X Have the faulty tire pressure sensor replaced at a qualified spe-cialist workshop.

Tire Pressure Mon‐Tire Pressure Mon‐itor Inoperativeitor InoperativeNo Wheel SensorsNo Wheel Sensors

The wheels mounted do not have a suitable tire pressure sensor.The tire pressure monitor is deactivated.X Mount wheels with suitable tire pressure sensors.The tire pressuremonitor is activated automatically after drivingfor a few minutes.

TireTire Press.Press. MonitorMonitorInoperativeInoperative

The tire pressure monitor is faulty.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Display messages 269

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Vehicle

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

ShiftShift toto 'P''P' oror 'N''N'to Start Engineto Start Engine

You have attempted to start the engine with the transmission inposition R or D.X Shift the selector lever to position P or N.

Apply BrakeApply Braketo Shift from 'P'to Shift from 'P'

You have attempted to shift the selector lever to positionD, R orNwithout depressing the brake pedal.X Depress the brake pedal.

Risk of RollingRisk of RollingAwayAwayVehicle Not in 'P'Vehicle Not in 'P'

The driver's door is open or not fully closed and the selector leveris in position R, N or D.A warning tone also sounds.

G WARNINGThe vehicle may roll away.There is a risk of an accident.X Shift the selector lever to position P.X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 170).X Close the driver's door completely.

Service RequiredService RequiredDoDo NotNot ShiftShift GearsGearsVisit DealerVisit Dealer

You cannot change the transmission position due to amalfunction.A warning tone also sounds.If transmission position D is selected:X Drive to a qualified specialist workshop without shifting thetransmission from position D.

If transmission position R, N or P is selected:X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 170).X Notify a qualified specialist workshop or breakdown service.

Only ShiftOnly Shiftto 'P' when Vehi‐to 'P' when Vehi‐cle is Stationarycle is Stationary

The vehicle is moving.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, payingattention to road and traffic conditions.

X Shift the selector lever to position P.

270 Display messagesOn

-board

computera

nddisplays

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

Transmission Mal‐Transmission Mal‐function Stopfunction Stop

A malfunction has occurred in the mechanical transmission com-ponents.A warning tone also sounds. The gearbox automatically shifts toposition N.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, payingattention to road and traffic conditions.

X Shift the selector lever to position P.X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 170).X Notify a qualified specialist workshop or breakdown service.

Auxiliary BatteryAuxiliary BatteryMalfunctionMalfunction

The auxiliary battery for the transmission is no longer beingcharged.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop at the next opportunity.X Until then, shift the selector lever to positionP before you switchoff the engine.

X Before leaving the vehicle, apply the parking brake.

N the trunk lid is open.Sedan: the trunk lid is open.X Close the trunk lid.

M The hood is open. A warning tone also sounds.

G WARNINGThe open hood may block your view when the vehicle is in motion.There is a risk of an accident.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, payingattention to road and traffic conditions.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 170).X Close the hood.

C At least one door is open. A warning tone also sounds.X Close all the doors.

_RearRear LeftLeft BackrestBackrestNot LatchedNot Latched orRear Right Back‐Rear Right Back‐rest Not Latchedrest Not Latched

The backrest in the rear is not engaged on the left-hand and/orright-hand side. A warning tone also sounds.X Push the backrest back until it engages.

Display messages 271

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

ÐPowerPower SteeringSteering Mal‐Mal‐function See Oper‐function See Oper‐ator's Manualator's Manual

The power steering is malfunctioning.A warning tone also sounds.

G WARNINGYou will need to use more force to steer.There is a risk of an accident.X Check whether you are able to apply the extra force required.X If you are able to steer safely: carefully drive on to a qualifiedspecialist workshop.

X If you are unable to steer safely: do not drive on. Contact thenearest qualified specialist workshop.

Phone No ServicePhone No Service Your vehicle is outside the network provider's transmitter/receiver range.X Wait until the mobile phone operational readiness symbolappears in the multifunction display.

¥Check Washer FluidCheck Washer Fluid

The washer fluid level in the washer fluid reservoir has droppedbelow the minimum.X Add washer fluid (Y page 315).

SmartKey

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

ÂKey Does NotKey Does NotBelong to VehicleBelong to Vehicle

You have put the wrong SmartKey in the ignition lock.X Use the correct SmartKey.

ÂTakeTake YourYour KeyKey fromfromIgnitionIgnition

The SmartKey is in the ignition lock.X Remove the SmartKey.

ÂObtain a New KeyObtain a New Key

The SmartKey needs to be replaced.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

ÂReplaceReplace KeyKey BatteryBattery

The battery of the KEYLESS-GO key is discharged.X Change the batteries (Y page 87).

272 Display messagesOn

-board

computerand

displays

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

ÂDon't Forget YourDon't Forget YourKeyKey

The display message is shown for a maximum of 60 seconds andis only a reminder.You have opened the driver's door with the engine switched off.The KEYLESS-GO key is not in the ignition lock.X Remember to take the KEYLESS-GO key with you when youleave the vehicle.

ÂKey Not DetectedKey Not Detected(red display message)

The KEYLESS-GO key is not in the vehicle.A warning tone also sounds.If the engine is switched off, you can no longer lock the vehiclecentrally or start the engine.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, payingattention to road and traffic conditions.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 170).X Locate the KEYLESS-GO key.

A strong source of radio waves is causing interference and this ispreventing the KEYLESS-GO key from being recognized when theengine is running.A warning tone also sounds.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, payingattention to road and traffic conditions.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 170).X Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock and bring into keymode.

ÂKey Not DetectedKey Not Detected(white display mes-sage)

The KEYLESS-GO key cannot be detected at present.X Change the location of the SmartKey with the KEYLESS-GOfunctions in the vehicle.

If the KEYLESS-GO key is still not detected:X Operate the vehicle with the SmartKey in the ignition lock.

ÂRemoveRemove 'Start''Start' But‐But‐ton and Insert Keyton and Insert Key

The KEYLESS-GO key can continuously not be detected.KEYLESS-GO is temporarily malfunctioning or is defective. A warn-ing tone also sounds.X Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock and turn it to thedesired position.

X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Display messages 273

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster

General notesSome systems carry out a self-diagnosis when the ignition is switched on. Therefore, someindicator and warning lamps may light up or flash temporarily. This behavior is non-critical.These indicator and warning lamps only indicate a malfunction if they light up or flash afterstarting the engine or whilst driving.

Safety

Seat belts

Problem Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

ü

After starting theengine, the red seatbelt warning lamp lightsup for 6 seconds.

The seat belt warning lamp reminds the driver and front passengerto fasten their seat belts.X Fasten your seat belt (Y page 48).

ü

After starting theengine, the red seatbelt warning lamp lightsup. In addition, a warn-ing tone sounds for upto 6 seconds.

The driver's seat belt is not fastened.X Fasten your seat belt (Y page 48).The warning tone ceases.

ü

The red seat belt warn-ing lamp lights up afterthe engine starts, assoon as the driver's orthe front-passengerdoor is closed.

The driver or front passenger has not fastened their seat belt.X Fasten your seat belt (Y page 48).The warning lamp goes out.

There are objects on the front-passenger seat.X Remove the objects from the front-passenger seat and stowthem in a secure place.The warning lamp goes out.

274 Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument clusterOn

-board

computerand

displays

Problem Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

ü

The red seat belt warn-ing lamp flashes and anintermittent audiblewarning sounds.

The driver or front passenger has not fastened their seat belt. Thevehicle is being driven faster than 15mph (25 km/h) or has brieflybeen driven faster than 15 mph (25 km/h).X Fasten your seat belt (Y page 48).The warning lamp goes out and the intermittent warning toneceases.

There are objects on the front-passenger seat. The vehicle is beingdriven faster than 15 mph (25 km/h) or has briefly been drivenfaster than 15 mph (25 km/h).X Remove the objects from the front-passenger seat and stowthem in a secure place.The warning lamp goes out and the intermittent warning toneceases.

Safety systems

Problem Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

$ (USA only)J (Canada only)The red brake systemwarning lamp comes onwhile the vehicle ismoving. A warning tonealso sounds.

You are driving with the parking brake applied.X Release the parking brake.The warning lamp goes out and the warning tone ceases.

$ (USA only)J (Canada only)The red brake systemwarning lamp comes onwhile the engine is run-ning. A warning tonealso sounds.

G WARNINGThe brake boosting effect is malfunctioning and the braking char-acteristics may be affected.There is a risk of an accident.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, payingattention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue drivingunder any circumstances.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 170).X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunctiondisplay.

Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster 275

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Problem Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

$ (USA only)J (Canada only)The red brake systemwarning lamp comes onwhile the engine is run-ning. A warning tonealso sounds.

G WARNINGThere is not enough brake fluid in the brake fluid reservoir.The braking effect may be impaired.There is a risk of an accident.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, payingattention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue drivingunder any circumstances.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 170).X Do not add brake fluid. Adding more will not remedy the mal-function.

X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunctiondisplay.

!

The yellowABSwarninglamp is lit while theengine is running.

ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) is deactivated due to a malfunc-tion. Therefore, BAS (Brake Assist System), BAS PLUS with Cross-Traffic Assist, COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS, ESP® (Elec-tronic Stability Program), PRE‑SAFE®, PRE‑SAFE® PLUS,PRE‑SAFE® Brake, the HOLD function and hill start assist, forexample, are also deactivated.ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated.

G WARNINGThe brake system continues to function normally, but without thefunctions listed above. The wheels could therefore lock if youbrake hard, for example.The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affec-ted. The braking distance in an emergency braking situation canincrease.If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle.There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunctiondisplay.

X Drive on carefully.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.If the ABS control unit is faulty, there is also a possibility that othersystems, such as the navigation system or the automatic trans-mission, will not be available.

276 Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument clusterOn

-board

computerand

displays

Problem Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

!

The yellowABSwarninglamp is lit while theengine is running. Awarning tone alsosounds.

EBD is not available due to a malfunction. Therefore, ABS, BAS,BAS PLUS with Cross-Traffic Assist, COLLISION PREVENTIONASSIST PLUS, ESP®, PRE‑SAFE®, PRE‑SAFE® PLUS, PRE‑SAFE®Brake, theHOLD function and hill start assist, for example, are alsounavailable.ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated.

G WARNINGThe brake system continues to function normally, but without thefunctions listed above. The front and rear wheels could thereforelock if you brake hard, for example.The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affec-ted. The braking distance in an emergency braking situation canincrease.If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle.There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunctiondisplay.

X Drive on carefully.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

$ (USA only)J (Canada only)÷ å !

The red brake warninglamp, the yellow ESP®and ESP® OFF warninglamps and the yellowABS warning lamp arelit while the engine isrunning.

ABS and ESP® are not available due to a malfunction. Therefore,BAS, BAS PLUS with Cross-Traffic Assist, COLLISION PREVEN-TION ASSIST PLUS, EBD, PRE‑SAFE®, PRE‑SAFE® PLUS,PRE‑SAFE® Brake, the HOLD function and hill start assist, forexample, are also unavailable.ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated.

G WARNINGThe brake system continues to function normally, but without thefunctions listed above. The front and rear wheels could thereforelock if you brake hard, for example.The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affec-ted. The braking distance in an emergency braking situation canincrease.If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle.There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunctiondisplay.

X Drive on carefully.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster 277

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Problem Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

÷

The yellow ESP® warn-ing lamp flashes whilethe vehicle is in motion.

ESP® or traction control has intervened because there is a risk ofskidding or at least one wheel has started to spin.Cruise control or DISTRONIC PLUS is deactivated.X When pulling away, only depress the accelerator pedal as far asnecessary.

X Ease off the accelerator pedal while the vehicle is in motion.X Adapt your driving style to suit the road and weather conditions.X Do not deactivate ESP®.In rare cases (Y page 76) it may be best to deactivate ESP®.Observe the important safety notes on ESP® (Y page 76).

å

The yellow ESP® OFFwarning lamp is lit whilethe engine is running.

ESP® is deactivated.

G WARNING

If ESP® is switched off, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle.Further driving systems or driving safety systems are thus restric-ted, e.g. Active Blind Spot Assist. The system does not performbraking actions.There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.X Reactivate ESP®.In rare cases (Y page 76) it may be best to deactivate ESP®.Observe the important safety notes on ESP® (Y page 76).

X Adapt your driving style to suit the road and weather conditions.

If ESP® cannot be activated:X Drive on carefully.X Have ESP® checked at a qualified specialist workshop.

M

AMG vehicles only:The yellow SPORT han-dling mode warninglamp is lit while theengine is running.

SPORT handling mode is activated.

G WARNING

When SPORT handling mode is switched on, ESP® is unable tostabilize the vehicle.There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.X Only switch to SPORT handling mode in accordance with theconditions described in the "Activating/deactivating SPORThandling mode" section (Y page 77).

278 Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument clusterOn

-board

computerand

displays

Problem Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

÷ å

The yellow ESP® andESP® OFF warninglamps are lit while theengine is running.

ESP®, BAS, BAS PLUS with Cross-Traffic Assist, COLLISION PRE-VENTION ASSIST PLUS, PRE‑SAFE®, PRE‑SAFE® PLUS,PRE‑SAFE® Brake, the HOLD function and hill start assist areunavailable due to a malfunction.ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated.

G WARNINGThe brake system continues to function normally, but without thefunctions listed above.The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can thusincrease.If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle.There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunctiondisplay.

X Drive on carefully.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

6

The red restraint sys-tem warning lamp is litwhile the engine is run-ning.

The restraint system is faulty.

G WARNINGThe air bags or Emergency Tensioning Devices may either be trig-gered unintentionally or, in the event of an accident, may not betriggered.There is an increased risk of injury.X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunctiondisplay.

X Drive on carefully.X Have the restraint system checked immediately at a qualifiedspecialist workshop.

Observe the additional information on restraint systems(Y page 44).

Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster 279

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Engine

Problem Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

;

The yellow CheckEngine warning lamplights up while theengine is running.

There may be a malfunction, for example:Rin the engine managementRin the fuel injection systemRin the exhaust systemRin the ignition systemRin the fuel systemThe emission limit values may be exceeded and the engine may bein emergency mode.X Have the vehicle checked as soon as possible at a qualifiedspecialist workshop.

i In some states, you must immediately visit a qualified special-ist workshop as soon as the yellow Check Engine warning lamplights up. This is due to the legal requirements in effect in thesestates. If in doubt, check whether such legal regulations apply inthe state in which you are currently driving.

8

The yellow reserve fuelwarning lamp lights upwhile the engine is run-ning.

The fuel level has dropped into the reserve range.X Refuel at the nearest gas station.

8

The yellow reserve fuelwarning lamp flasheswhile the vehicle is inmotion.In addition, the;Check Engine warninglamp may light up.

The fuel system pressure is too low. The fuel filler cap is not closedcorrectly or the fuel system is leaking.X Check that the fuel filler cap is correctly closed.X If the fuel filler cap is not correctly closed: close the fuel fillercap.

X If the fuel filler cap is closed: visit a qualified specialist work-shop.

?

The red coolant warn-ing lamp lights up whilethe engine is runningand the coolant tem-perature gauge is at thestart of the scale.

The temperature sensor for the coolant temperature gauge isdefective.The coolant temperature is no longer being monitored. There is arisk of engine damage if the coolant temperature is too high.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine,paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continuedriving under any circumstances.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 170).X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

280 Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument clusterOn

-board

computerand

displays

Problem Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

?

The red coolant warn-ing lamp comes onwhile the engine is run-ning.

The coolant level is too low.If the coolant level is correct, the airflow to the engine radiatormaybe blocked or the electric engine radiator fan may be malfunc-tioning.The coolant is too hot and the engine is no longer being cooledsufficiently.X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunctiondisplay.

X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine,paying attention to road and traffic conditions.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 170).X Leave the vehicle and keep a safe distance from the vehicle untilthe engine has cooled down.

X Check the coolant level and add coolant, observing the warningnotes (Y page 315).

X If you need to add coolant more often than usual, have theengine coolant system checked.

X Make sure that the air supply to the engine radiator is notblocked, e.g. by snow, slush or ice.

X Do not start the engine again until the coolant temperature isbelow248‡ (120†). Otherwise, the engine could be damaged.

X Drive to the nearest qualified specialist workshop.X Avoid subjecting the engine to heavy loads, e.g. driving inmoun-tainous terrain, and stop-and-go traffic.

?

The red coolant warn-ing lamp comes onwhile the engine is run-ning. A warning tonealso sounds.

The coolant temperature has exceeded 248 ‡ (120 †). The air-flow to the engine radiatormay be blocked or the coolant levelmaybe too low.

G WARNINGThe engine is not being cooled sufficiently and may be damaged.Do not drive when your engine is overheated. This can cause somefluids which may have leaked into the engine compartment tocatch fire.Steam from the overheated engine can also cause serious burnswhich can occur just by opening the hood.There is a risk of injury.X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunctiondisplay.

X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine,paying attention to road and traffic conditions.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 170).

Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster 281

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Problem Possible causes/consequences andMM SolutionsX Leave the vehicle and keep a safe distance from the vehicle untilthe engine has cooled down.

X Check the coolant level and add coolant, observing the warningnotes (Y page 315).

X If you need to add coolant more often than usual, have theengine coolant system checked.

X Make sure that the air supply to the engine radiator is notblocked, e.g. by snow, slush or ice.

X At coolant temperatures below 248 ‡ (120 †), drive to thenearest qualified specialist workshop.

X Avoid subjecting the engine to heavy loads, e.g. driving inmoun-tainous terrain, and stop-and-go traffic.

Driving systems

Problem Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

·

The red distance warn-ing lamp lights up whilethe vehicle is in motion.A warning tone alsosounds.

You are approaching a vehicle, a pedestrian or a stationary obsta-cle in your line of travel at too high a speed.X Be prepared to brake immediately.X Pay careful attention to the traffic situation. You may have tobrake or take evasive action.

Observe the additional information on PRE‑SAFE® Brake(Y page 79).Observe the additional information on the distance warning func-tion of COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS (Y page 73).

282 Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument clusterOn

-board

computerand

displays

Tires

Problem Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions

h

The yellow tire pressuremonitor warning lamp(pressure loss/malfunction) is lit.

The tire pressure monitor has detected a loss of pressure in atleast one of the tires.

G WARNINGWith tire pressures which are too low, there is a risk of the fol-lowing hazards:Rthey may burst, especially as the load and vehicle speedincrease.Rthey may wear excessively and/or unevenly, which may greatlyimpair tire traction.Rthe driving characteristics, as well as steering and braking, maybe greatly impaired.There is a risk of an accident.

X Stop the vehicle without making any sudden steering or brakingmaneuvers. Pay attention to the traffic conditions as you do so.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 170).X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunctiondisplay.

X Check the tires and, if necessary, follow the instructions for aflat tire (Y page 327).

X Check the tire pressure (Y page 352).X If necessary, correct the tire pressure.

h

The yellow tire pressuremonitor warning lamp(pressure loss/malfunction) flashes forapproximately oneminute and thenremains lit.

The tire pressure monitor is faulty.

G WARNINGThe system is possibly unable to recognize or register low tirepressure.There is a risk of an accident.X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunctiondisplay.

X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster 283

On-board

computera

nddisplays

Z

284

Useful information ............................ 286Stowage areas ................................... 286Features ............................................. 293

285

Stow

ageandfeatures

Useful information

i This Operator's Manual describes allmodels and all standard and optional equip-ment of your vehicle available at the time ofpublication of the Operator's Manual.Country-specific differences are possible.Please note that your vehicle may not beequipped with all features described. Thisalso applies to safety-related systems andfunctions.

i Read the information on qualified special-ist workshops (Y page 26).

Stowage areas

Loading guidelines

G WARNINGIf objects, luggage or loads are not secured ornot secured sufficiently, they could slip, tipover or be flung around and thereby hit vehicleoccupants. There is a risk of injury, particu-larly in the event of sudden braking or a sud-den change in direction.Always store objects so that they cannot beflung around. Secure objects, luggage orloads against slipping or tipping before thejourney.

G WARNINGCombustion engines emit poisonous exhaustgases such as carbon monoxide. Exhaustgases can enter the vehicle interior if thetrunk lid is open when the engine is running,especially if the vehicle is in motion. There is arisk of poisoning.Always switch off the engine before openingthe trunk lid. Never drive with the trunk lidopen.

G WARNINGThe exhaust tail pipe and tail pipe trim canbecome very hot. If you come into contactwith these parts of the vehicle, you could burnyourself. There is a risk of injury.

Always be particularly careful around theexhaust tail pipe and the tail pipe trim. Allowthese components to cool down before touch-ing them.

The handling characteristics of a laden vehi-cle are dependent on the distribution of theload within the vehicle. For this reason, youshould observe the following notes whentransporting a load:RNever exceed the maximum permissiblegross vehicle mass or the gross axle weightrating for the vehicle (including occupants).The values are specified on the vehicleidentification plate on the B-pillar of thedriver's door.RThe trunk is the preferred place to carryobjects.RPosition heavy loads as far forwards as pos-sible and as low down in the trunk as pos-sible.RThe load must not protrude above theupper edge of the seat backrests.RAlways place the load against the rear orfront seat backrests. Make sure that theseat backrests are securely locked intoplace.RAlways place the load behind unoccupiedseats if possible.RUse the cargo tie-down rings and the parcelnets to transport loads and luggage.RUse cargo tie-down rings and fasteningmaterials appropriate for the weight andsize of the load.RSecure the load with sufficiently strong andwear-resistant tie-downs. Pad sharp edgesfor protection.

Stowage spaces

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf you do not correctly store objects in thevehicle interior, they can slip or be flung

286 Stowage areasStow

ageandfeatures

around, thus striking vehicle occupants.There is a risk of injury, especially when brak-ing or abruptly changing directions.RAlways store objects so that they cannot beflung around in these or in similar situa-tions.RAlways make sure that objects do not pro-trude from stowage compartments, parcelnets or stowage nets.RClose lockable stowage compartmentswhile driving.RStow and secure objects that are heavy,hard, pointy, sharp-edged, fragile or toolarge in the trunk.

Observe the loading guidelines (Y page 286).

Glove box

X Toopen: pull handle: and open glove boxflap;.

X To close: fold glove box flap; upwardsuntil it engages.

i The glove box can be ventilated(Y page 145).

The glove box can only be locked andunlocked using the mechanical key.X To lock: insert the mechanical key into thelock and turn it 90° clockwise to position2.

X To unlock: insert the mechanical key intothe lock and turn it 90° counter-clockwiseto position1.

Eyeglasses compartment

There is a compartment to stow eyeglasses inthe headliner on the driver's side.X To open: pull down eyeglasses compart-ment: by the handle.

Stowage areas 287

Stow

ageandfeatures

Z

Stowage compartments in the centerconsole

All models except AMG vehiclesX To open: slide the cover forwards by han-dle: in the direction of the arrow until itengages.

X To close: briefly press the front of han-dle:.

AMG vehiclesX Briefly press trim:.i The stowage tray can be removed.

Stowage compartment under the arm-rest

X To open: pull handle: up.The armrest folds out.

Depending on the vehicle's equipment, thefollowing may be in the stowage compart-ment: amultimedia connector unit with an SDcard slot and 2 USB ports (Media Interface),e.g. for use with an iPod®, iPhone® or MP3player; see the separate operating instruc-tions.

Stowage compartment under the frontseats

G WARNINGIf you exceed the maximum load for the stow-age compartment, the cover may not be ableto restrain the items. Itemsmay be thrown outof the stowage compartment and hit vehicleoccupants. There is a risk of injury, particu-larly in the event of sudden braking or a sud-den change in direction.Never exceed the maximum permissible loadfor the stowage compartment. Stow andsecure heavy objects in the trunk.

The maximum permissible load of the stow-age compartment is 3.3 lbs (1.5 kg).

288 Stowage areasStow

ageandfeatures

X To open: pull handle: up and foldcover; forwards.

i On vehicles with a fire extinguisher, thefire extinguisher is located in the stowagecompartment under the driver's seat.

Stowage compartments in the rear cen-ter console

X To open: slide covers: and; in thedirection of the arrow.

i There is a 12 V power socket in the frontstowage compartment.

Stowage compartment in the rear seatarmrest

! Do not sit on or support your body weighton the rear seat armrest when it is foldeddown, as you could otherwise damage it.

! Close the cover of the stowage compart-ment before folding the rear seat armrestback into the seat backrest.

X To open: fold down seat armrest;.X Fold cover: of the armrest upwards.

Stowage netsStowage nets are located in the front-passenger footwell and on the left-hand sideof the trunk.Observe the loading guidelines (Y page 286)and the safety notes regarding stowagespaces (Y page 286).

Rear bench seat through-loading fea-ture

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf the rear bench seat/rear seat and seatbackrest are not engaged they could fold for-wards, e.g. when braking suddenly or in theevent of an accident.RThe vehicle occupant would thereby bepushed into the seat belt by the rear benchseat/rear seat or by the seat backrest. Theseat belt can no longer offer the intendedlevel of protection and could even causeinjuries.RObjects or loads in the trunk cannot berestrained by the seat backrest.

There is an increased risk of injury.Before every trip, make sure that the seatbackrests and the rear bench seat/rear seatare engaged.

Stowage areas 289

Stow

ageandfeatures

Z

Observe the loading guidelines (Y page 286).The left-hand and right-hand rear seat backr-ests can be folded down separately toincrease the trunk capacity.

Folding the seat backrest forward

i Vehicles with memory function: when youfold one or both parts of the rear seat back-rest forwards, the respective front seatmoves forward slightly, when necessary, inorder to avoid contact.

X Vehicles without memory function: if nec-essary, move the driver's or front-passenger seat forward.

X Open the trunk.X Pull right-hand or left-hand rear seat back-rest release handle:.The corresponding rear seat backrest isreleased.

X Fold rear seat backrest; forwards.X Move the driver's or front-passenger seatback if necessary.

Folding the seat backrest back

! Make sure that the seat belt does notbecome trapped when folding the rear seatbackrest back. Otherwise, it could be dam-aged.

X Move the driver's or front-passenger seatforward if necessary.

X Fold rear seat backrest: back until itengages.If the rear seat backrest is not engaged andlocked, this will be shown in the multifunc-tion display in the instrument cluster. Awarning tone also sounds.

X Move the driver's or front-passenger seatback if necessary.

i You should always engage the rear seatbackrests if you do not need the through-loading feature. This will prevent unauthor-ized access to the trunk from the vehicleinterior.

Securing cargo

Cargo tie-down rings

General notesObserve the following notes on securingloads:RObserve the loading guidelines(Y page 286).RSecure the load using the cargo tie-downrings.

290 Stowage areasStow

ageandfeatures

RDistribute the load on the cargo tie-downrings evenly.RDo not use elastic straps or nets to securea load, as these are only intended as ananti-slip protection for light loads.RDo not route tie-downs across sharp edgesor corners.RPad sharp edges for protection.

Trunk

: Cargo tie-down rings

EASY-PACK trunk box

Important safety notes

G WARNINGWhen the load surface moves up, your handsmay become trapped on the frame of theEASY-PACK trunk box. There is a risk of injury.When the load surface moves up, make surethat your hands are not within the sweep ofthe load surface. If someone becomes trap-ped, carefully push the center of the load sur-face downward.

! When the EASY-PACK trunk box is pulledout, no objects may be placed on the frameof the box, nor should the frame be pushedfrom above. Otherwise, the box could bedamaged.

! Sharp-edged, pointed or fragile objectscan damage the EASY-PACK trunk box andthen be thrown out. There is a risk of injury.

Do not transport sharp-edged, pointed orfragile objects in the EASY-PACK trunk box.Always store and secure these or similarobjects in the trunk outside of the EASY-PACK trunk box.

! If you exceed the maximum permittedload of the EASY-PACK trunk box, objectscan be thrown out of the EASY-PACK trunkbox and strike vehicle occupants. There is arisk of injury, particularly in the event ofsudden braking or a sudden change indirection.Always observe the maximum permittedload of the EASY-PACK trunk box. Alwaysstore and secure heavy objects in the trunkoutside of the EASY-PACK trunk box.

The maximum permitted load of the EASY-PACK trunk box is 22 lbs (10 kg). With a loadof above approximately 11 lbs (5 kg), the bot-tom of the box moves downward until it restson the mat of the trunk floor. Thus, overload-ing of the box is avoided.

Adjusting the height to any position

X Pull the box out by handle: in the direc-tion of the arrow all the way to the stop.

X Lowering the load surface: push the cen-ter of load surface; down by hand in thedirection of the arrow until load surface;has reached the desired position and thebox is the desired size.

Stowage areas 291

Stow

ageandfeatures

Z

X To raise the load surface: press switch=.Load surface; of the box moves up auto-matically.

X To stow the box: push the box in by han-dle: all the way to the stop.

Removing and installing

X To install: insert retainer; of box: intoslots=

X Raise box: and press hooksA intoanchorage? as far as they will go.

X Turn left-hand rotating catchB clockwiseand right-hand rotating catchB counter-clockwise by 90°.

X To remove: turn left-hand rotating catchB counter-clockwise and right-hand rotat-ing catchB clockwise by 90°.

X Move box: downwards and pull it outfrom anchorages?.

i Store the EASY-PACK trunk box on a flatsurface after removal, e.g. on a suitableshelf.

Stowage well under the trunk floor! Unhook the handle before again beforeclosing the trunk lid and clip it in securely toprevent the handle flap from protruding.Otherwise, you could damage the handle.

The TIREFIT kit, the vehicle tool kit, etc. arelocated in the stowage compartment.X To open: pull handle: up.

X Hook handle: into rain trough;.

Roof carrier

Important safety notes

G WARNINGWhen you load the roof, the center of gravityof the vehicle rises and the driving character-istics change. If you exceed themaximum roofload, the driving characteristics, as well assteering and braking, will be greatly impaired.There is a risk of an accident.Never exceed the maximum roof load andadjust your driving style.

292 Stowage areasStow

ageandfeatures

! Mercedes-Benz recommends that youonly use roof carriers that have been testedand approved for Mercedes-Benz vehicles.This helps to prevent damage to the vehi-cle.Position the load on the roof carrier in sucha way that the vehicle will not sustain dam-age even when it is in motion.Ensure that, depending on the vehicle'sequipment, you can raise the sliding sun-roof fully and open the trunk lid fully whenthe roof carrier is installed.

! To avoid damaging or scratching the cov-ers, do not use metallic or hard objects toopen them.

Youwill find information on themaximum roofload in the "Technical data" section(Y page 392).An incorrectly secured roof carrier or roofload may become detached from the vehicle.You must therefore ensure that you observethe roof carrier manufacturer's installationinstructions.

Attaching the roof carrier

X Open covers: carefully in the direction ofthe arrow.

X Only secure the roof carrier to the anchor-age points under covers:.

X Observe the manufacturer's installationinstructions.

Features

Cup holder

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf objects in the passenger compartment arestowed incorrectly, they can slide or bethrown around and hit vehicle occupants.There is a risk of injury, particularly in theevent of sudden braking or a sudden changein direction.RAlways stow objects so that they cannot bethrown around in such situations.RAlways make sure that objects do not pro-trude from stowage spaces, parcel nets orstowage nets.RClose the lockable stowage spaces whiledriving.RAlways stow and secure heavy, hard, poin-ted, sharp-edged, fragile or bulky objects inthe trunk/cargo compartment.

! Do not expose drinks bottles in the cupholder in the center console to continuous,strong and direct sunlight. The passengercompartment in the area of the center con-sole can otherwise be damaged by the con-centrated and reflected sunlight.

Observe the loading guidelines (Y page 286).

Cup holder in the front-compartmentcenter console

All vehicles (except AMG): Cup holder

Features 293

Stow

ageandfeatures

Z

You can remove the cup holder's rubber matfor cleaning. Clean with clear, lukewarmwater only.

AMG vehicles: Cup holder; CoverYou can remove the rubber mat of the cupholder in the direction of the arrow to clean it.Clean with clear, lukewarm water only.X To open: slide cover; to its foremostposition.

Cup holder in the rear-compartmentcenter console

X To open: slide cover: forwards.X To remove the insert: slide catch;inwards in the direction of the arrow.

X Remove cup holder insert= upwards.X To re-install the insert: place the insert inthe stowage space.

X Slide catch; outwards in the direction ofthe arrow until it engages.

You can remove the insert and the rubbermatof the cup holder to clean them. Clean themwith clean, lukewarm water only.

Cup holder in the rear seat armrest

! Do not sit on or support your body weighton the rear seat armrest when it is foldeddown, as you could otherwise damage it.

! Close the cup holder before folding therear seat armrest up. Otherwise, the cupholder could be damaged.

X Fold down the rear seat armrest.X To open: raise the rear seat armrest cover.X Press release catch:.Cup holder; folds out forwards.

X Swing the rear seat armrest cover backdown, if necessary.

X To close: raise the rear seat armrest cover.Swing cup holder; back until it engages.

Bottle holder

G WARNINGIf objects in the passenger compartment arestowed incorrectly, they can slide or bethrown around and hit vehicle occupants.There is a risk of injury, particularly in theevent of sudden braking or a sudden changein direction.

294 FeaturesStow

ageandfeatures

RAlways stow objects so that they cannot bethrown around in such situations.RAlways make sure that objects do not pro-trude from stowage spaces, parcel nets orstowage nets.RClose the lockable stowage spaces whiledriving.RAlways stow and secure heavy, hard, poin-ted, sharp-edged, fragile or bulky objects inthe trunk/cargo compartment.

Observe the loading guidelines (Y page 286).

! Make sure that any bottles weighingmorethan 1.1 lb(0.5 kg) that are stored in thebottle holder, rest on the vehicle floor. Thebottle holder could otherwise be damaged.

X Press the outer edge of button: and slidein the direction of the arrow until the bottlefits into the opening.

X Insert the bottle into the bottle holder.The bottle holder is suitable for bottles with acapacity of 25 fl. oz. (0.7 l) to 54 fl. oz. (1.5 l).The bottle holder does not secure the bottles;it merely prevents them from tipping over.

Sun visors

Overview

G WARNINGIf themirror cover of the vanitymirror is foldedup when the vehicle is in motion, you could beblinded by incident light. There is a risk of anaccident.

Always keep the mirror cover folded downwhile driving.

: Mirror light; Bracket= Retaining clip, e.g. for a car park ticket? Vanity mirrorA Mirror cover

Vanity mirror in the sun visorMirror light: only functions if the sun visoris clipped into bracket; andmirror coverAhas been folded up.

Glare from the side

X Fold down sun visor:.X Pull sun visor: out of retainer;.X Swing sun visor: to the side.X Slide sun visor: horizontally as required.

Features 295

Stow

ageandfeatures

Z

Rear window roller sunblind

Important safety notes

G WARNINGParts of the body could be trapped in thesweep of the roller sunblind when the rollersunblind is extended or retracted. There is arisk of injury.When extending or retracting make sure thatno parts of the body are in the sweep of theroller sunblind. Briefly press the button againif someone becomes trapped. The opening orclosing process is briefly stopped. The rollersunblind then returns to its initial position.

! Make sure that the roller sunblind canmove freely. Otherwise, the roller sunblindor other objects could be damaged.

Extending/retracting from the driver'sseat

X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in theignition lock (Y page 149).

X To extend or retract: briefly press but-ton:.The roller sunblind fully extends or fullyretracts.

X To stop: briefly press button: again.The roller sunblind stops briefly and movesback into the out-of-use position.

Ashtray

Front ashtray

! The stowage space under the ashtray isnot heat resistant. Before placing lit ciga-rettes in the ashtray, make sure that theashtray is properly engaged.Otherwise, thestowage space could be damaged.

All vehicles (except AMG)X To open: slide cover: forwards until itengages.

X To remove the insert: hold insert= bythe ribbing at the sides and lift it up; andout.

X To re-install the insert: press insert=into the holder until it engages.

X To close: briefly press cover: at thefront.The cover moves back.

AMG vehicles

296 FeaturesStow

ageandfeatures

X To open: briefly press the trim on cover:.The stowage compartment opens.

X To remove the insert: slide insert; for-wards in the direction of the arrow.

X Remove insert;.X To re-install the insert: place the insertinto the holder and press it in the oppositedirection of the arrow until it engages.

X To close: fold down cover:.You can remove the ashtray insert and usethe resulting compartment for stowage.

Rear-compartment ashtray

X To open: slide cover; forwards.X To remove the insert: pull insert: upand out.

X To install the insert: install insert: fromabove into the holder and press down intothe holder until it engages.

Cigarette lighter

Important safety notes

G WARNINGYou can burn yourself if you touch the hotheating element or the socket of the cigarettelighter.In addition, flammable materials can ignite if:Rthe hot cigarette lighter fallsRa child holds the hot cigarette lighter toobjects, for example

There is a risk of fire and injury.Always hold the cigarette lighter by the knob.Always make sure that the cigarette lighter isout of reach of children. Never leave childrenunsupervised in the vehicle.

Your attentionmust always be focused on thetraffic conditions. Only use the cigarettelighter when road and traffic conditions per-mit.

Cigarette lighter in the front compart-ment

All vehicles (except AMG)X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-tion lock (Y page 149).

X To open: slide cover: forwards until itengages.

X Press in cigarette lighter;.Cigarette lighter; will pop out automati-cally when the heating element is red-hot.

X To close: briefly press cover: at thefront.The cover moves back.

Features 297

Stow

ageandfeatures

Z

AMG vehiclesX Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-tion lock (Y page 149).

X To open: briefly press the trim on cover:.The stowage compartment opens.

X Press in cigarette lighter;.Cigarette lighter; will pop out automati-cally when the heating element is red-hot.

12 V sockets

General notesX Turn the SmartKey to position 1 in the igni-tion lock (Y page 149).

The sockets can be used for accessories witha maximum draw of 180 W (15 A). Accesso-ries include such items as chargers formobilephones.If you use the sockets for long periods whenthe engine is switched off, the battery maydischarge.An emergency cut-out ensures that the on-board voltage does not drop too low. If the on-board voltage is too low, the power to thesockets is automatically cut. This ensuresthat there is sufficient power to start theengine.

Socket in the front-compartment centerconsole

All vehicles (except AMG)X To open: slide cover: forwards until itengages.

X Lift up the cover of socket;.X To close: briefly press cover: at thefront.The cover moves back.

AMG vehiclesX To open: briefly press the trim on cover:.The stowage compartment opens.

X Lift up the cover of socket;.X To close: fold down cover:.

298 FeaturesStow

ageandfeatures

Socket in the rear-compartment centerconsole

X Slide cover; forwards.X Lift up the cover of socket:.

mbrace

General notesThe mbrace system is only available in theUSA.You must have a license agreement to acti-vate the mbrace service. Make sure that yoursystem is activated and operational. To log in,press the ï MB Info call button. If any ofthe steps mentioned are not carried out, thesystem may not be activated.If you have questions about the activation,contact one of the following telephone hot-lines:Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Centerat 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372)or 1-866-990-9007Shortly after successfully registering with thembrace service, a user ID and password willbe sent to you by mail. You can use this pass-word to log onto thembrace area under "Own-ers Online" at http://www.mbusa.com.The system is available if:Rit has been activated and is operationalRthe correspondingmobile phone network isavailable for transmitting data to the Cus-tomer Center

Ra service subscription is availableRthe starter battery is sufficiently chargedDetermining the location of the vehicle on amap is only possible if:RGPS reception is available.Rthe vehicle position can be forwarded tothe Customer Assistance Center.

The mbrace systemTo adjust the volume during a call, proceed asfollows:X Press theW orX button on the mul-tifunction steering wheel.

orX Use the COMAND/Audio 20 volume con-trol.

The system offers various services, e.g.:RAutomatic and manual emergency callRRoadside Assistance callRMB Info callYou can find information and a description ofall available features under "Owners Online"at http://www.mbusa.com.

System self-testAfter you have switched on the ignition, thesystem carries out a self-diagnosis.A malfunction in the system has been detec-ted if one of the following occurs:RThe indicator lamp in the SOS button doesnot come on during the system self-test.RThe indicator lamp in the F RoadsideAssistance button does not light up duringself-diagnosis of the system.RThe indicator lamp in the ï MB Info callbutton does not light up during self-diag-nosis of the system.

Features 299

Stow

ageandfeatures

Z

RThe indicator lamp in one or more of thefollowing buttons continues to light up redafter the system self-diagnosis:- SOS button- F Roadside Assistance call button- ï MB Info call buttonRThe InoperativeInoperative or the Service NotService NotActivatedActivated message appears in the multi-function display after the system self-diag-nosis.

If a malfunction is indicated as outlinedabove, the systemmay not operate as expec-ted. In the event of an emergency, help willhave to be summoned by other means.Have the system checked at the nearestauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center or contactthe following service hotlines:Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Centerat 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372)or 1-866-990-9007

Emergency call

Important safety notesG WARNINGIt can be dangerous to remain in the vehicle,even if you have pressed the SOS button in anemergency if:Ryou see smoke inside or outside of the vehi-cle, e.g. if there is a fire after an accidentRthe vehicle is on a dangerous section ofroadRthe vehicle is not visible or cannot easily beseen by other road users, particularly whendark or in poor visibility conditions

There is a risk of an accident and injury.Leave the vehicle immediately in this or simi-lar situations as soon as it is safe to do so.Move to a safe location along with other vehi-cle occupants. In such situations, secure thevehicle in accordance with national regula-tions, e. g. with a warning triangle.

General notesObserve the notes on system activation(Y page 299).An emergency call is dialed automatically if anair bag or Emergency Tensioning Device istriggered. You cannot end an automaticallytriggered emergency call yourself.An emergency call can also be initiated man-ually.As soon as the emergency call has been ini-tiated, the indicator lamp in the SOS buttonflashes. The Connecting CallConnecting Call messageappears in the multifunction display.The audio output is muted.Once the connection has been made, theCall ConnectedCall Connected message appears in themultifunction display.All important information on the emergency istransmitted, for example:Rcurrent location of the vehicle (as deter-mined by the GPS system)Rvehicle identification numberRinformation on the severity of the accidentShortly after the emergency call has been ini-tiated, a voice connection is automaticallyestablished between the Customer Assis-tance Center and the vehicle occupants.RIf the vehicle occupants respond, theMercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Cen-ter attempts to getmore information on theemergency.RIf there is no response from the vehicleoccupants, an ambulance is immediatelysent to the vehicle.

If no voice connection can be established tothe Mercedes-Benz Customer AssistanceCenter, the systemhas been unable to initiatean emergency call.This can occur, for example, if the relevantmobile phone network is not available. Theindicator lamp in the SOS button flashes con-tinuously.The Call FailedCall Failed message appears in themultifunction display and must be confirmed.

300 FeaturesStow

ageandfeatures

In this case, summon assistance by othermeans.

Making an emergency call

X To initiate an emergency call manually:press cover: briefly to open.

X Press SOS button; briefly.The indicator lamp in SOS button;flashes until the emergency call is conclu-ded.

X Wait for a voice connection to theMercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Cen-ter.

X After the emergency call, close cover:.If the mobile phone network is unavailable,mbrace will not be able to make the emer-gency call. If you leave the vehicle immedi-ately after pressing the SOS button, you willnot know whether mbrace placed the emer-gency call. In this case, always summon assis-tance by other means.

Roadside Assistance button

X To call Roadside Assistance: press Road-side Assistance button:.This initiates a call to the Mercedes-BenzCustomer Assistance Center.The indicator lamp in Roadside Assistancebutton: flashes while the call is active.The ConnectingConnecting CallCallmessage appears inthe multifunction display. The audio outputis muted.

If a connection can be made, the Call Con‐Call Con‐nectednectedmessage appears in themultifunctiondisplay.If a mobile phone network and GPS receptionare available, the system transfers data to theMercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center,for example:Rcurrent location of the vehicleRvehicle identification numberThe COMAND/Audio 20 display indicatesthat a call is active. During the call, you canchange to the navigation menu by pressingthe NAVI button in COMAND/Audio 20, forexample.Voice output is not available in this case.A voice connection is established betweenthe Mercedes-Benz Customer AssistanceCenter and the vehicle occupants.From the remote malfunction diagnosis, theMercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Centercan ascertain the nature of the problem(Y page 305).The Mercedes-Benz Customer AssistanceCenter either sends a qualified Mercedes-Benz technician or makes arrangements foryour vehicle to be transported to the nearestauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center.You may be charged for services such asrepair work and/or towing.You can findmore information in the separatembrace manual.

Features 301

Stow

ageandfeatures

Z

The system has not been able to initiate aRoadside Assistance call, if:Rthe indicator lamp for Roadside Assistancecall button F is flashing continuously.Rno voice connection to the Mercedes-BenzCustomer Assistance Center was estab-lished.

This can occur if the relevant mobile phonenetwork is not available, for example.The Call FailedCall Failed message appears in themultifunction display.X To end a call: press the~ button on themultifunction steering wheel.

orX Press the corresponding COMAND/Audio20 button for ending a phone call.

MB Info call button

X To call MB Info: press MB Info call but-ton:.This initiates a call to the Mercedes-BenzCustomer Assistance Center.The indicator lamp inMB Info call button:flasheswhile the connection is beingmade.The ConnectingConnecting CallCallmessage appears inthe multifunction display. The audio outputis muted.

If a connection can be made, the Call Con‐Call Con‐nectednectedmessage appears in themultifunctiondisplay.

If a mobile phone network and GPS receptionare available, the system transfers data to theMercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center,for example:Rcurrent location of the vehicleRvehicle identification numberThe COMAND/Audio 20 display indicatesthat a call is active. During the call, you canchange to the navigation menu by pressingthe NAVI button in COMAND/Audio 20, forexample.Voice output is not available in this case.A voice connection is established betweenthe Mercedes-Benz Customer AssistanceCenter and the vehicle occupants.You receive information about operating yourvehicle, about the nearest authorizedMercedes-Benz Center and about other prod-ucts and services from Mercedes-Benz.You can find further information on thembrace system under "Owners Online" athttp://www.mbusa.com.The system has not been able to initiate anMB Info call, if:Rthe indicator lamp in MB Info call button

ï is flashing continuously.Rno voice connection to the Mercedes-BenzCustomer Assistance Center was estab-lished.

This can occur if the relevant mobile phonenetwork is not available, for example.The Call FailedCall Failed message appears in themultifunction display.X To end a call: press the~ button on themultifunction steering wheel.

orX Press the corresponding COMAND/Audio20 button for ending a phone call.

Call priorityWhen service calls are active, e.g. RoadsideAssistance or MB Info calls, an emergencycall can still be initiated. In this case, an emer-

302 FeaturesStow

ageandfeatures

gency call will take priority and override allother active calls.The indicator lamp of the respective buttonflashes until the call is ended.An emergency call can only be terminated bythe Mercedes-Benz Customer AssistanceCenter.All other calls can be ended by pressing:Rthe~ button on themultifunction steer-ing wheelRthe corresponding button in COMAND/Audio 20 to end the voice call

When a call is initiated, the audio system ismuted.The mobile phone is no longer connected toCOMAND/Audio 20.However, if you want to use your mobilephone, do so only when the vehicle is station-ary and in a safe location.

Downloading destinations

Downloading destinationsDownloading destinations gives you accessto a database with over 15 million points ofinterest (POIs). These can be downloaded onthe navigation system in your vehicle. If youknow the destination, the address can bedownloaded. Alternatively, you can obtain thelocation of Points of Interest (POIs)/impor-tant destinations in the vicinity.Furthermore, you can download routes withup to four way points.You are prompted to confirm route guidanceto the address entered.X Select YesYes by turning cVd or sliding XVYthe controller and confirm withW.The system calculates the route and sub-sequently starts the route guidance withthe address entered.If you select NoNo the address can be stored inthe address book.

The destination download function is availa-ble if:Rthe vehicle is equipped with a navigationsystem.Rthe relevant mobile phone network is avail-able and data transfer is possible.

Route AssistanceThis service is part of the mbrace PLUS Pack-age and cannot be purchased separately.You can use the route assistance functioneven if the vehicle is not equipped with a nav-igation system.Within the framework of this service, youreceive a professional and reliable form ofnavigation support without having to leaveyour vehicle.The customer service representative finds asuitable route depending on your vehicle'scurrent position and the desired destination.You will then be guided live through the cur-rent route section.

Search & Send

General notesTo use "Search & Send", your vehicle must beequipped with mbrace and a navigation sys-tem. Additionally, an mbrace service sub-scription must be completed."Search & Send" is a destination entry ser-vice. A destination address which is found onGoogle Maps® can be transferred via mbracedirectly to your vehicle's navigation system.

Specifying and sending the destinationaddressX Go to the website http://maps.google.com and enter a destinationaddress into the entry field.

X To send the destination address to thee-mail address of your mbrace account:click on the corresponding button on thewebsite.Example:

Features 303

Stow

ageandfeatures

Z

If you select 'Send to vehicle' and then'Mercedes-Benz', the destination addresswill be sent to your vehicle.

X When the "Send" dialog window appears:Enter the e-mail address you specifiedwhen setting up your mbrace account intothe corresponding field.

X Click "Send".Information on specific commands such as"Address entry" or "Send" can be found on thewebsite.

Calling up a transmitted destinationaddressX Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-tion lock (Y page 149).The transmitted destination address is loa-ded into the vehicle's navigation system.A display message appears, askingwhether navigation should be started.

X Select YesYes by turning cVd or sliding XVYthe controller and confirm withW.The system calculates the route and sub-sequently starts the route guidance withthe address entered.If you select NoNo the address can be stored inthe address book.If you have sent more than one destinationaddress, each individual destination mustbe confirmed separately.

Destination addresses are loaded in the sameorder as the order in which they were sent.If you own multiple Mercedes-Benz vehicleswith mbrace and activated mbrace accounts:If multiple vehicles are registered under thesame e-mail address, the destination will besent to all the vehicles.

Vehicle remote openingYou can use the vehicle remote opening if youhave unintentionally locked your vehicle anda replacement SmartKey is not available.The vehicle can be opened by the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center.

The vehicle can be immediately openedremotely within four days of the ignition beingturned off. After this time, the remote unlock-ingmay be delayed by 15 to 60minutes. After30 days, the vehicle can no longer be openedremotely.The vehicle remote unlocking feature is avail-able if the relevant mobile phone network isavailable and a data connection is possible.X Contact the following service hotlines:Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Cen-ter at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes(1-800-367-6372) or 1-866-990-9007You will be asked for your password.

X Return to your vehicle at the time agreedupon with the Mercedes-Benz CustomerAssistance Center.

Alternatively, the vehicle can be opened via:Rthe Internet, under the "Owners Online"sectionRthe telephone application (e.g. for iPhone®,Android)

To do this, you will need your identificationnumber and password.

Vehicle remote closingThe vehicle remote-closing feature can beused when you have forgotten to lock thevehicle and you are no longer nearby.The vehicle can then be locked by theMercedes-Benz Customer AssistanceCenter.The vehicle can be immediately remotelylocked within four days of the ignition beingturned off. After this time, remote closingmaybe delayed by 15 to 60minutes. After 30 daysthe vehicle can no longer be locked remotely.The vehicle remote closing feature is availa-ble if the relevant mobile phone network isavailable and a data connection is possible.X Contact the following service hotlines:Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Cen-ter at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes(1-800-367-6372) or 1-866-990-9007You will be asked for your password.

304 FeaturesStow

ageandfeatures

The next time you are inside the vehicle andyou switch on the ignition, the DoorsDoorsLocked RemotelyLocked Remotely message appears in themultifunction display.Alternatively, the vehicle can be locked via:Rthe Internet, under the "Owners Online"sectionRthe telephone application (e.g. for iPhone®,Android)

To do this, you will need your identificationnumber and password.

Stolen vehicle recovery serviceIf your vehicle has been stolen:X Notify the police.The police will issue a numbered incidentreport.

X This number will be forwarded to theMercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Cen-ter together with your PIN.The Mercedes-Benz Customer AssistanceCenter then tries to locate the system. TheMercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Cen-ter contacts you and the local law enforce-ment agency if the vehicle is located.However, only the law enforcement agencyis informed of the location of the vehicle.

If the anti-theft alarm system is activated forlonger than 30 seconds, the Mercedes-BenzCustomer Assistance Center is automaticallynotified.

Vehicle Health CheckWith the Vehicle Health Check, the CustomerAssistance Center can provide improved sup-port for problemswith your vehicle. During anexisting call, vehicle data is transferred to theCustomer Assistance Center.The customer service representative can usethe received data to decide what kind ofassistance is required. You are then, forexample, guided to the nearest authorizedMercedes-Benz Center or a recovery vehicleis called.

If vehicle data needs to be transferred duringan MB Info call or a Roadside Assistance call,this is initiated by the Customer AssistanceCenter.The Roadside Assistance ConnectedRoadside Assistance Connectedmessage appears in the display. If the VehicleHealth Check can be started, the RequestRequestfor Vehicle Diagnostics Receivedfor Vehicle Diagnostics ReceivedStart vehicle diagnostics?Start vehicle diagnostics? messageappears in the display.X Press the YesYes button to confirm the mes-sage.

X When the Vehicle DiagnosticsVehicle DiagnosticsPlease Start IgnitionPlease Start Ignition messageappears: turn the SmartKey to position 2 inthe ignition lock (Y page 149).

X If the Please follow the instruc‐Please follow the instruc‐tions received by phone and movetions received by phone and moveyour vehicle to a safe position.your vehicle to a safe position.message appears: please follow theinstructions received by phone and moveyour vehicle to a safe position.The message in the display disappears.The vehicle operating state check begins.During this procedure, you will see theVehicleVehicle DiagnosticsDiagnostics ActiveActivemessage.If you select CancelCancel, the Vehicle HealthCheck is canceled completely.

When the check is complete, the SendingSendingvehicle diagnostics data. (Voicevehicle diagnostics data. (Voiceconnection may be interrupted dur‐connection may be interrupted dur‐inging datadata transfer)transfer)message appears. Thevehicle data can now be sent.X Press the OKOK button to confirm the mes-sage.The voice connection with the CustomerAssistance Center is terminated.The Vehicle Diagnostics: Transfer‐Vehicle Diagnostics: Transfer‐ring Data...ring Data... message appears.The vehicle data is sent to the CustomerAssistance Center.

Depending on what the customer service rep-resentative agreed with you, the voice con-nection is re-established after the transfer iscomplete. If necessary, you will be contacted

Features 305

Stow

ageandfeatures

Z

at a later time by another means, e.g. by e-mail or phone.Another function of the Vehicle Health Checkis the transfer of service data to the CustomerAssistance Center. If a service is due, the dis-play shows a message to this effect togetherwith information about any special offers atyour workshop.This information can also be called up under"Owners Online" at http://www.mbusa.com.Information on the data stored in the vehicle(Y page 28).Information on Roadside Assistance(Y page 24).

Downloading routesDownloading routes allows you to transferand save predefined routes in the navigationsystem.A route can be prepared and sent by either acustomer service representative or under"Owners Online" at http://www.mbusa.com.Each route can include up to four way points.Once a route has been received by the navi-gation system, you will see the TheThe <Route<Routename>name> externalexternal routeroute hashas beenbeen savedsavedto "Previous Destinations". Wouldto "Previous Destinations". Wouldyouyou likelike toto startstart navigation?navigation?messageon the COMAND/Audio 20 display.The route is saved.X To start route guidance: select YesYes.An overview of the route is shown in thedisplay.If you select NoNo the saved route can becalled up later in the navigation menu.

X Select StartStart.Starting route guidance.

Downloaded and saved routes can be calledup again.You can find further information in the sepa-rate COMAND/Audio 20 operating instruc-tions.

Speed alertYou can define the upper speed limit, whichmust not be exceeded by the vehicle.If this selected speed is exceeded by the vehi-cle, a message will be sent to the CustomerAssistance Center. The Customer AssistanceCenter then forwards this information to you.You can select the way in which you receivethis information beforehand. Possible optionsinclude text message, e-mail or an automatedcall.The data you receive contains the followinginformation:Rthe location where the speed limit wasexceededRthe time at which the speed limit wasexceededRthe selected speed limit which was excee-ded

Geo fencingGeo fencing allows you to select areas whichthe vehicle should not enter or leave. You willbe informed if the vehicle crosses the boun-daries of the selected areas. You can selectthe way in which you receive this informationbeforehand. Possible options include textmessage, e-mail or an automated call.The area can be determined as either a circleor a polygon with a maximum of ten corners.You can specify up to ten areas simultane-ously. Different settings are possible for eacharea.These settings can be called up under "Own-ers Online" at http://www.mbusa.com.Alternatively, you can trigger an MB Info calland inform the customer service representa-tive that you wish to activate geo fencing.Currently inactive areas can be activated bytext message.

306 FeaturesStow

ageandfeatures

Triggering the vehicle alarmWith this function, you can trigger the vehi-cle's panic alarm via text message. An alarmsounds and the exterior lighting flashes.Depending on the setting, the panic alarmlasts five or ten seconds. Afterwards, thealarm switches off.

Garage door opener

General notes

The HomeLink® garage door opener integra-ted in the rear-viewmirror allows you to oper-ate up to three different door and gate sys-tems.Use the integrated garage door opener onlyon garage doors that:Rhave safety stop and reverse features andRmeet current U.S. federal safety standardsOnce programed, the integrated garage dooropener in the rear-viewmirror will assume thefunction of the garage door system's remotecontrol. Please also read the operatinginstructions for the garage door system.When programming a garage door opener,park the vehicle outside the garage. Do notrun the engine while programming.Certain garage door drives are incompatiblewith the integrated garage door opener. If youhave difficulty programing the integratedgarage door opener, contact an authorizedMercedes-Benz Center.Alternatively, you can call the following tele-phone assistance services:RUSA:Mercedes-BenzCustomer AssistanceCenter at 1-800-FOR-MERCedesRCanada: Customer Service at1-800-387-0100RHomeLink® hotline 1-800-355-3515 (freeof charge)

More information on HomeLink® and/orcompatible products is also available onlineat http://www.homelink.com.

Notes on the declaration of conformity(Y page 26).USA: FCC ID: CB2HMIHL4Canada: IC: 279B-HMIHL4

Important safety notes

G WARNINGWhen you operate or program the garage doorwith the integrated garage door opener, per-sons in the range of movement of the garagedoor can become trapped or struck by thegarage door. There is a risk of injury.When using the integrated garage dooropener, always make sure that nobody iswithin the range of movement of the garagedoor.

G WARNINGCombustion engines emit poisonous exhaustgases such as carbon monoxide. Inhalingthese exhaust gases leads to poisoning. Thereis a risk of fatal injury. Therefore never leavethe engine running in enclosed spaces with-out sufficient ventilation.

Programming

Programming buttonsPay attention to the "Important safety notes"(Y page 307).

Garage door remote controlA is not inclu-ded with the integrated garage door opener.

Features 307

Stow

ageandfeatures

Z

X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-tion lock (Y page 149).

X Select one of buttons; to? to use tocontrol the garage door drive.

X To start programming mode: press andhold one of buttons; to? on the inte-grated garage door opener.The garage door opener is now in program-ming mode. After a short time, indicatorlamp: lights up yellow.Indicator lamp: lights up yellow as soonas button;,= or? is programmed forthe first time. If the selected button hasalready been programmed, indicatorlamp: will only light up yellow after tenseconds have elapsed.

X Release button;,= or?. Indicatorlamp: flashes yellow.

X To program the remote control: pointgarage door remote controlA towardsbuttons; to? on the rear-view mirror ata distance of 2 to 8 inches (5 to 20 cm).

X Press and hold buttonB on remote controlA until indicator lamp: lights up green.When indicator lamp: lights up green:programming is finished.When indicator lamp: flashes green: pro-gramming was successful. The next step isto synchronize the rolling code(Y page 308).

X Release buttonB on remote controlA forthe garage door drive system.If indicator lamp: lights up red: repeat theprograming procedure for the correspond-ing button on the rear-view mirror. Whendoing so, vary the distance between remotecontrolA and the rear-view mirror.The required distance between remotecontrolA and the integrated garage dooropener depends on the garage door drivesystem. Several attempts might be neces-sary. You should test every position for atleast 25 seconds before trying anotherposition.

Synchronizing the rolling codePay attention to the "Important safety notes"(Y page 307).If the garage door system uses a rolling code,you will also have to synchronize the garagedoor system with the integrated garage dooropener in the rear-view mirror. To do this youwill need to use the programming button onthe door drive control panel. The program-ming button may be positioned in differentplaces depending on the manufacturer. It isusually located on the door drive unit on thegarage ceiling.Familiarize yourself with the garage doordrive operating instructions, e.g. under "Pro-gramming of additional remote controls",before carrying out the following steps.Your vehicle must be within reach of thegarage door or gate opener drive. Make surethat neither your vehicle nor any persons/objects are present within the sweep of thedoor or gate.X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-tion lock (Y page 149).

X Get out of the vehicle.X Press the programming button on the doordrive unit.Usually, you now have 30 seconds to ini-tiate the next step.

X Get into the vehicle.X Press previously programmed button;,= or? on the integrated garage dooropener until the door closes.The rolling code synchronization is thencomplete.

Notes on programming the remote con-trolCanadian radio frequency laws require a"break" (or interruption) of the transmissionsignals after broadcasting for a few seconds.Therefore, these signals may not last longenough for the integrated garage dooropener. The signal is not recognized duringprogramming. Comparable with Canadian

308 FeaturesStow

ageandfeatures

law, some U.S. garage door openers also fea-ture a "break".Proceed as follows:Rif you live in CanadaRif you have difficulties programming thegarage door opener (regardless of whereyou live) when using the programmingsteps.

X Press and hold one of buttons; to? onthe integrated garage door opener.After a short time, indicator lamp: lightsup yellow.

X Release the button.Indicator lamp: flashes yellow.

X Press buttonB of garage door remotecontrolA for two seconds, then release itfor two seconds.

X Press buttonB again for two seconds.X Repeat this sequence on buttonB ofremote controlA until indicator lamp:lights up green.When indicator lamp: lights up green:programming is finished.When indicator lamp: flashes green: pro-gramming was successful. The next step isto synchronize the rolling code.

X Release buttonB of remote controlA ofthe garage door drive.If indicator lamp: lights up red: repeat theprogramming process for the correspond-ing button on the rear-view mirror. Whendoing so, vary the distance between remotecontrolA and the rear-view mirror.The required distance between remotecontrolA and the integrated garage dooropener depends on the garage door drivesystem. Several attempts might be neces-sary. You should test every position for atleast 25 seconds before trying anotherposition.

Problems when programmingIf you are experiencing problems programingthe integrated garage door opener on therear-view mirror, take note of the followinginstructions:RCheck the transmitter frequency used bygarage door drive remote controlA andwhether it is supported. The transmitterfrequency can usually be found on the backof the garage door drive remote control.The integrated garage door opener is com-patible with devices that have units whichoperate in the frequency range of 280 to433 MHz.RReplace the batteries in garage doorremote controlA. This increases the like-lihood that garage door remote controlAwill transmit a strong and precise signal tothe integrated garage door opener.RWhen programming, hold remote controlA at varying distances and angles from thebuttonwhich you are programming. Try var-ious angles at a distance between 2and12 inches (5to 30 cm) or at the same anglebut at varying distances.RIf another remote control is available for thesame garage door drive, repeat the sameprogramming steps with this remote con-trol. Before performing these steps, makesure that new batteries have been installedin garage door drive remote controlA.RNote that some remote controls only trans-mit for a limited amount of time (the indi-cator lamp on the remote control goes out).Press buttonB on remote controlA againbefore transmission ends.RAlign the antenna cable of the garage dooropener unit. This can improve signal recep-tion/transmission.

Opening/closing the garage doorAfter it has been programmed, the integratedgarage door opener performs the function ofthe garage door system remote control.

Features 309

Stow

ageandfeatures

Z

Please also read the operating instructionsfor the garage door system.X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-tion lock (Y page 149).

X Press button;,= or? which you haveprogrammed to operate the garage door.Garage door system with a fixed code: indi-cator lamp: lights up green.Garage door system with a rolling code:indicator lamp: flashes green.The transmitter will transmit a signal aslong as the button is pressed. The trans-mission is halted after a maximum of tenseconds and indicator lamp: lights upyellow.

X Press button;,= or? again if neces-sary.

Clearing the memoryMake sure that you clear the memory of theintegrated garage door opener before sellingthe vehicle.X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-tion lock (Y page 149).

X Press and hold buttons; and?.The indicator lamp initially lights up yellowand then green.

X Release buttons; and?.The memory of the integrated garage dooropener in the rear-view mirror is cleared.

Floormats

G WARNINGObjects in the driver's footwell can restrict thepedal travel or obstruct a depressed pedal.The operating and road safety of the vehicle isjeopardized. There is a risk of an accident.Make sure that all objects in the vehicle arestowed correctly, and that they cannot enterthe driver's footwell. Install the floormatssecurely and as specified in order to ensuresufficient clearance for the pedals. Do not use

loose floormats and do not place floormats ontop of one another.

X Slide the relevant seat back.X To install: place the floormat in the foot-well.

X Press studs: onto retainers;.X To remove: pull the floormat off retain-ers;.

X Remove the floormat.

310 FeaturesStow

ageandfeatures

Useful information ............................ 312Engine compartment ........................ 312Maintenance ...................................... 316Care .................................................... 317

311

Maintenance

andcare

Useful information

i This Operator's Manual describes allmodels and all standard and optional equip-ment of your vehicle available at the time ofpublication of the Operator's Manual.Country-specific differences are possible.Please note that your vehicle may not beequipped with all features described. Thisalso applies to safety-related systems andfunctions.

i Read the information on qualified special-ist workshops (Y page 26).

Engine compartment

Hood

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf the hood is unlatched, it may open up whenthe vehicle is in motion and block your view.There is a risk of an accident.Never unlatch the hood while driving. Beforeevery trip, ensure that the hood is locked.

G WARNINGWhen opening and closing the hood, it maysuddenly fall into the closed position. There isa risk of injury to persons within range ofmovement of the hood.Open and close the hood only when no one iswithin its range of movement.

G WARNINGOpening the hood when the engine is over-heated or when there is a fire in the enginecompartment could expose you to hot gasesor other service products. There is a risk ofinjury.Let an overheated engine cool down beforeopening the hood. If there is a fire in theengine compartment, keep the hood closedand contact the fire department.

G WARNINGThe engine compartment contains movingcomponents. Certain components, such asthe radiator fan, may continue to run or startagain suddenly when the ignition is off. Thereis a risk of injury.If you need to do any work inside the enginecompartment:Rswitch off the ignitionRnever reach into the area where there is arisk of danger from moving components,such as the fan rotation areaRremove jewelry and watchesRkeep items of clothing and hair, for exam-ple, away from moving parts

G WARNINGThe ignition system and the fuel injection sys-tem work under high voltage. If you touchcomponents which are under voltage, youcould get an electric shock. There is a risk ofinjury.Never touch components of the ignition sys-tem or fuel injection system when the ignitionis switched on.

Opening the hood

G WARNINGCertain components in the engine compart-ment, such as the engine, radiator and partsof the exhaust system, can become very hot.Working in the engine compartment poses arisk of injury.Where possible, let the engine cool down andtouch only the components described in thefollowing.

G WARNINGWhen the hood is open and the windshieldwipers are set inmotion, you can be injured bythe wiper linkage. There is a risk of injury.Always switch off the windshield wipers andthe ignition before opening the hood.

312 Engine compartmentMaintenance

andcare

! Make sure that the windshield wipers arenot folded away from the windshield. Youcould otherwise damage the windshieldwipers or the hood.

X Make sure that the windshield wipers areturned off.

X Pull release lever: on the hood.The hood is released.

X Reach into the gap, pull hood catch han-dle; up and lift the hood.If you lift the hood by approximately 15 in(40 cm), the hood is opened and held openautomatically by the gas-filled strut.

Closing the hoodX Lower the hood and let it fall from a heightof approximately 8 in (20 cm).

X Check that the hood has engaged properly.If the hood can be raised slightly, it is notproperly engaged. Open it again and closeit with a little more force.

Engine oil

General notesDepending on your driving style, the vehicleconsumes up to 0.9 US qt (0.8 liters) of oil per600 miles (1,000 km). The oil consumptionmay be higher than this when the vehicle isnew or if you frequently drive at high enginespeeds.Depending on the engine, the oil dipstick maybe in a different location.When checking the oil level:Rpark the vehicle on a level surface.Rthe engine should be switched off forapproximately five minutes if the engine isat normal operating temperature.Rif the engine is not at normal operatingtemperature, e.g. if the engine was onlystarted briefly, wait about 30 minutesbefore carrying out the measurement.

Checking the oil level using the oil dip-stick

G WARNINGCertain components in the engine compart-ment, such as the engine, radiator and partsof the exhaust system, can become very hot.Working in the engine compartment poses arisk of injury.Where possible, let the engine cool down andtouch only the components described in thefollowing.

Engine compartment 313

Maintenance

andcare

Z

ExampleX Pull oil dipstick: out of the dipstick guidetube.

X Wipe off oil dipstick:.X Slowly slide oil dipstick: into the guidetube to the stop, and take it out again.If the level is between MIN mark= andMAX mark;, the oil level is correct.

X If the oil level has dropped to MIN mark=or below, add 1.0 l of engine oil.

Adding engine oil

G WARNINGCertain components in the engine compart-ment, such as the engine, radiator and partsof the exhaust system, can become very hot.Working in the engine compartment poses arisk of injury.Where possible, let the engine cool down andtouch only the components described in thefollowing.

G WARNINGIf engine oil comes into contact with hot com-ponents in the engine compartment, it mayignite. There is a risk of fire and injury.Make sure that engine oil is not spilled next tothe filler neck. Let the engine cool down andthoroughly clean the engine oil off the com-ponents before starting the engine.

H Environmental noteWhen adding oil, take care not to spill any. Ifoil enters the soil or waterways, it is harmful tothe environment.

! Only use engine oils and oil filters thathave been approved for vehicles with a ser-vice system. You can obtain a list of theengine oils and oil filters tested andapproved in accordance with theMercedes-Benz Specifications for ServiceProducts at any Mercedes-Benz Servicecenter.

Damage to the engine or exhaust system iscaused by the following:Rusing engine oils and oil filters that havenot been specifically approved for theservice systemRreplacing engine oil and oil filters afterthe interval for replacement specified bythe service system has been exceededRusing engine oil additives.

! Do not add toomuch oil. adding toomuchengine oil can result in damage to theengine or to the catalytic converter. Haveexcess engine oil siphoned off.

ExampleX Turn cap: counter-clockwise and removeit.

X Add engine oil.If the oil level is at or below theMINmark onthe oil dipstick, add 1.1 US qt (1.0 l) ofengine oil.

X Replace cap: on the filler neck and turnclockwise.Ensure that the cap locks into placesecurely.

X Check the oil level again with the oil dip-stick (Y page 313).

Further information on engine oil(Y page 389).

314 Engine compartmentMaintenance

andcare

Additional service products

Checking coolant level

G WARNINGCertain components in the engine compart-ment, such as the engine, radiator and partsof the exhaust system, can become very hot.Working in the engine compartment poses arisk of injury.Where possible, let the engine cool down andtouch only the components described in thefollowing.

G WARNINGThe engine cooling system is pressurized, par-ticularly when the engine is warm. Whenopening the cap, you could be scalded by hotcoolant spraying out. There is a risk of injury.Let the engine cool down before opening thecap. Wear eye and hand protection whenopening the cap. Open the cap slowly half aturn to allow pressure to escape.

X Park the vehicle on a level surface.Only check the coolant level when the vehi-cle is on a level surface and the engine hascooled down.

X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-tion lock (Y page 149).On vehicles with KEYLESS-GO, press theStart/Stop button twice (Y page 150).

X Check the coolant temperature display inthe instrument cluster.The coolant temperature must be below158 ‡ (70 †).

X Turn the SmartKey to position 0 in the igni-tion lock (Y page 149).

X Slowly turn cap: half a turn counter-clockwise to allow excess pressure toescape.

X Turn cap: further counter-clockwise andremove it.If the coolant is at the level ofmarker bar=in the filler neck when cold, there is enoughcoolant in coolant expansion tank;.If the coolant level is approximately 0.6 in(1.5 cm) above marker bar= in the fillerneck when warm, there is enough coolantin expansion tank;.

X If necessary, add coolant that has been tes-ted and approved by Mercedes-Benz.

X Replace cap: and turn it clockwise as faras it will go.

For further information on coolant, see(Y page 390).

Adding washer fluid to the windshieldwasher system/headlamp cleaningsystem

G WARNINGCertain components in the engine compart-ment, such as the engine, radiator and partsof the exhaust system, can become very hot.Working in the engine compartment poses arisk of injury.Where possible, let the engine cool down andtouch only the components described in thefollowing.

G WARNINGWindshield washer concentrate could ignite ifit comes into contact with hot engine compo-nents or the exhaust system. There is a risk offire and injury.Make sure that no windshield washer con-centrate is spilled next to the filler neck.

Engine compartment 315

Maintenance

andcare

Z

X To open: pull cap: upwards by the tab.X Add the premixed washer fluid.X To close: press cap: onto the filler neckuntil it engages.

If the washer fluid level drops below the rec-ommended minimum of 1 liter, a messageappears in the multifunction display prompt-ing you to add washer fluid (Y page 272).Further information on windshield washerfluid/antifreeze (Y page 391).

Maintenance

ASSYST PLUS

Service messagesThe ASSYST PLUS service interval displayinforms you of the next service due date.Information on the type of service and serviceintervals (see the separate MaintenanceBooklet).You can obtain further information from anauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center or athttp://www.mbusa.com (USA only).

i The ASSYST PLUS service interval displaydoes not show any information on theengine oil level. Observe the notes on theengine oil level (Y page 313).

The multifunction display shows a servicemessage for several seconds, e.g.:RService A in .. daysService A in .. daysRService A DueService A DueRService A Exceeded by .. DaysService A Exceeded by .. Days

Depending on the operating conditions of thevehicle, the remaining time or distance untilthe next service due date is displayed.The letter AA or BB, possibly in connection with anumber or another letter, indicates the typeof service. AA stands for a minor service and BBfor a major service.You can obtain further information from anauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center.The ASSYST PLUS service interval displaydoes not take into account any periods oftime during which the battery is disconnec-ted.Maintaining the time-dependent serviceschedule:X Note down the service due date displayedin the multifunction display before discon-necting the battery.

orX After reconnecting the battery, subtractthe battery disconnection periods from theservice date shown on the display.

Hiding a service messageX Press theaor%button on the steer-ing wheel.

Displaying service messagesX Switch on the ignition.X Press the=or;button on the steer-ing wheel to select the Serv.Serv. menu.

X Press the9 or: button to select theASSYST PLUSASSYST PLUS submenu and confirm bypressing thea button.The service due date appears in the multi-function display.

Information about Service

Resetting the ASSYST PLUS service inter-val display! If the ASSYST PLUS service interval dis-play has been inadvertently reset, this set-

316 MaintenanceMaintenance

andcare

ting can be corrected at a qualified special-ist workshop.Have service work carried out as describedin the Maintenance Booklet. This may oth-erwise lead to increased wear and damageto the major assemblies or the vehicle.

A qualified specialist workshop, e.g. anauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center, will resetthe ASSYST PLUS service interval displayafter the service work has been carried out.You can also obtain further information onmaintenance work, for example.

Special service requirementsThe specifiedmaintenance interval takes onlythe normal operation of the vehicle intoaccount. Under arduous operating conditionsor increased load on the vehicle, mainte-nance work must be carried out more fre-quently, for example:Rregular city driving with frequent intermedi-ate stopsRif the vehicle is primarily used to travelshort distancesRuse in mountainous terrain or on poor roadsurfacesRif the engine is often left idling for long peri-ods

Under these or similar conditions, have, forexample, the air filter, engine oil and oil filterreplaced or changed more frequently. Underarduous operating conditions, the tires mustbe checked more often. Further informationcan be obtained at a qualified specialist work-shop, e.g. an authorized Mercedes-Benz Cen-ter.

Driving abroadAn extensiveMercedes-Benz Service networkis also available in other countries. You canobtain further information from any author-ized Mercedes-Benz Center.

Care

General notes

H Environmental noteDispose of empty packaging and cleaningcloths in an environmentally responsibleman-ner.

! For cleaning your vehicle, do not use anyof the following:Rdry, rough or hard clothsRabrasive cleaning agentsRsolventsRcleaning agents containing solventsDo not scrub.Do not touch the surfaces or protectivefilms with hard objects, e.g. a ring or icescraper. You could otherwise scratch ordamage the surfaces and protective film.

! Do not park the vehicle for an extendedperiod straight after cleaning it, particularlyafter having cleaned the wheels with wheelcleaner. Wheel cleaners could causeincreased corrosion of the brake discs andbrake pads/linings. For this reason, youshould drive for a few minutes after clean-ing. Braking heats the brake discs and thebrake pads/linings, thus drying them. Thevehicle can then be parked.

Regular care of your vehicle is a condition forretaining the quality in the long term.Use care products and cleaning agents rec-ommended and approved by Mercedes-Benz.

Washing the vehicle and cleaning thepaintwork

Automatic car wash

G WARNINGBraking efficiency is reduced after washingthe vehicle. There is a risk of an accident.

Care 317

Maintenance

andcare

Z

After the vehicle has been washed, brakecarefully while paying attention to the trafficconditions until full braking power is restored.

! If DISTRONIC PLUS or the HOLD functionis activated, the vehicle brakes automati-cally in certain situations.To prevent damage to the vehicle, deacti-vate DISTRONIC PLUS and the HOLD func-tion in the following or other similar situa-tions:Rwhen towing the vehicleRin the car wash

! Never clean your vehicle in a TouchlessAutomatic Car Wash as these use specialcleaning agents. These cleaning agents candamage the paintwork or plastic parts.

! Make sure that:Rthe side windows and the sliding sunroofare fully closed.Rthe ventilation/heating is switched off(the OFF button has been pressed).Rthe windshield wiper switch is in position0.

Otherwise, the vehicle might be damaged.

! In car washes with a towing mechanism,make sure that the automatic transmissionis in transmission positionN, otherwise thevehicle could be damaged.RVehicles with a SmartKey:Do not remove the SmartKey from theignition lock. Do not open the driver'sdoor or front-passenger door when theengine is switched off. Otherwise, theautomatic transmission selects parkposition P automatically and locks thewheels. You can prevent this by shiftingthe automatic transmission to N before-hand.RVehicles with KEYLESS-GO:Do not open the driver's door or front-passenger door when the engine isswitched off. Otherwise, the automatic

transmission selects park position Pautomatically and locks the wheels.

Observe the following to make sure that theautomatic transmission stays in position N:X Make sure the vehicle is stationary and theignition is switched off.

X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-tion lock (Y page 149).Use the SmartKey instead of the Start/Stop button on vehicles with KEYLESS-GO.

X Depress and hold the brake pedal.X Shift the automatic transmission to posi-tion N.

X Release the brake pedal.X Release the parking brake.X Switch off the ignition and leave the Smart-Key in the ignition lock.

You can wash the vehicle in an automatic carwash from the very start.If the vehicle is very dirty, pre-wash it beforecleaning it in an automatic car wash.After using an automatic car wash, wipe offwax from the windshield and the wiperblades. This will prevent smears and reducewiping noises caused by residue on the wind-shield.

Washing by handIn some countries, washing by hand is onlyallowed at specially equipped washing bays.Observe the legal requirements in all coun-tries concerned.X Do not use hot water and do not wash thevehicle in direct sunlight.

X Use a soft sponge to clean.X Use a mild cleaning agent, such as a carshampoo approved by Mercedes-Benz.

X Thoroughly hose down the vehicle with agentle jet of water.

X Do not point the water jet directly towardsthe air inlet.

X Use plenty of water and rinse out thesponge frequently.

318 CareMaintenance

andcare

X Rinse the vehicle with clean water and drythoroughly with a chamois.

X Do not let the cleaning agent dry on thepaintwork.

When using the vehicle in winter, remove alltraces of road salt deposits carefully and assoon as possible.

Power washers

G WARNINGThe water jet from a circular jet nozzle (dirtblasters) can cause invisible exterior damageto the tires or chassis components. Compo-nents damaged in this way may fail unexpect-edly. There is a risk of an accident.Do not use power washers with circular jetnozzles to clean the vehicle. Have damagedtires or chassis components replaced imme-diately.

! Always maintain a distance of at least11.8 in (30 cm) between the vehicle and thepower washer nozzle. Information aboutthe correct distance is available from theequipment manufacturer.Move the power washer nozzle aroundwhen cleaning your vehicle.Do not aim directly at any of the following:RtiresRdoor gaps, roof gaps, joints, etc.Relectrical componentsRbatteryRconnectorsRlightsRsealsRtrimRventilation slotsDamaged seals or electrical componentscan lead to leaks or failures.

Cleaning the paintwork

! Do not affix:RstickersRfilmsRmagnetic plates or similar itemsto painted surfaces. You could otherwisedamage the paintwork.

Scratches, corrosive deposits, areas affectedby corrosion and damage caused by inade-quate care cannot always be completelyrepaired. In such cases, visit a qualified spe-cialist workshop.X Remove dirt immediately, where possible,while avoiding rubbing too hard.

X Soak insect remains with insect removerand rinse off the treated areas afterwards.

X Soak bird droppings with water and rinseoff the treated areas afterwards.

X Remove coolant, brake fluid, tree resin,oils, fuels and greases by rubbing gentlywith a cloth soaked in petroleum ether orlighter fluid.

X Use tar remover to remove tar stains.X Use silicone remover to remove wax.If water no longer forms "beads" on the paintsurface, use the paint care products recom-mended and approved by Mercedes-Benz.This is the case approximately every three tofive months, depending on the climate con-ditions and the care product used.If dirt has penetrated the paint surface or ifthe paint has become dull, the paint cleanerrecommended and approved by Mercedes-Benz should be used.Do not use these care products in the sun oron the hood while the hood is hot.X Use a suitable touch-up stick, e.g. MBTouch-Up Stick, to repair slight damage tothe paintwork quickly and provisionally.

Care 319

Maintenance

andcare

Z

Matte finish care

! Never polish the vehicle or the light alloywheels. Polishing causes the finish toshine.

! The following may cause the paint tobecome shiny and thus reduce the matteeffect:RVigorous rubbing with unsuitable mate-rials.RFrequent use of car washes.RWashing the vehicle in direct sunlight.

! Never use paint cleaner, buffing or pol-ishing products, or gloss preserver, e.g.wax. These products are only suitable forhigh-gloss surfaces. Their use on vehicleswith matte finish leads to considerable sur-face damage (shiny, spotted areas).Always have paintwork repairs carried outat a qualified specialist workshop.

! Do not use wash programs with a hot waxtreatment under any circumstances.

Observe these notes if your vehicle has aclear matte finish. This will help you to avoiddamage to the paintwork due to incorrecttreatment.These notes also apply to light alloy wheelswith a clear matte finish.

i The vehicle should preferably be washedby hand using a soft sponge, car shampooand plenty of water.

i Use only insect remover and car shampoofrom the range of recommended andapproved Mercedes-Benz care products.

Cleaning the vehicle parts

Cleaning the wheels

G WARNINGThe water jet from a circular jet nozzle (dirtblasters) can cause invisible exterior damageto the tires or chassis components. Compo-

nents damaged in this way may fail unexpect-edly. There is a risk of an accident.Do not use power washers with circular jetnozzles to clean the vehicle. Have damagedtires or chassis components replaced imme-diately.

! Donot use acidicwheel cleaning productsto remove brake dust. This could damagewheel bolts and brake components.

! Do not park the vehicle for an extendedperiod straight after cleaning it, particularlyafter having cleaned the wheels with wheelcleaner. Wheel cleaners could causeincreased corrosion of the brake discs andbrake pads/linings. For this reason, youshould drive for a few minutes after clean-ing. Braking heats the brake discs and thebrake pads/linings, thus drying them. Thevehicle can then be parked.

Cleaning the windows

G WARNINGYou could become trapped by the windshieldwipers if they start moving while cleaning thewindshield or wiper blades. There is a risk ofinjury.Always switch off the windshield wipers andthe ignition before cleaning the windshield orwiper blades.

! Do not use dry cloths, abrasive products,solvents or cleaning agents containing sol-vents to clean the inside of thewindows. Donot touch the insides of the windows withhard objects, e.g. an ice scraper or ring.There is otherwise a risk of damaging thewindows.

! Clean the water drainage channels of thewindshield and the rear window at regularintervals. Deposits such as leaves, petalsand pollen may under certain circumstan-ces prevent water from draining away. Thiscan lead to corrosion damage and damageto electronic components.

320 CareMaintenance

andcare

X Clean the inside and outside of the win-dows with a damp cloth and a cleaningproduct that is recommended andapproved by Mercedes-Benz.

Cleaning wiper blades

G WARNINGYou could become trapped by the windshieldwipers if they start moving while cleaning thewindshield or wiper blades. There is a risk ofinjury.Always switch off the windshield wipers andthe ignition before cleaning the windshield orwiper blades.

! Do not pull the wiper blade. Otherwise,the wiper blade could be damaged.

! Do not clean wiper blades too often anddo not rub them too hard. Otherwise, thegraphite coating could be damaged. Thiscould cause wiper noise.

! Hold the wiper arm securely when foldingback. The windshield could be damaged ifthe wiper arm smacks against it suddenly.

X Fold the windshield wiper arms away fromthe windshield.

X Carefully clean the wiper blades with adamp cloth.

X Fold the windshield wiper arms back againbefore switching on the ignition.

Cleaning the exterior lighting

! Only use cleaning agents or cleaningcloths which are suitable for plastic lightlenses. Unsuitable cleaning agents orcleaning cloths could scratch or damagethe plastic light lenses.

X Clean the plastic lenses of the exteriorlighting using a wet sponge and a mildcleaning agent, e.g. Mercedes-Benz carshampoo or cleaning cloths.

Mirror turn signals

! Only use cleaning agents or cleaningcloths that are suitable for plastic lenses.Unsuitable cleaning agents or cleaningcloths could scratch or damage the plasticlenses of the mirror turn signals.

X Clean the plastic lenses of the mirror turnsignals in the exterior mirror housing usinga wet sponge and mild cleaning agent, e.g.Mercedes-Benz car shampoo or cleaningcloths.

Cleaning the sensors

! If you clean the sensors with a powerwasher, make sure that you keep a dis-tance of at least 11.8 in (30 cm) betweenthe vehicle and the power washer nozzle.Information about the correct distance isavailable from the equipment manufac-turer.

X Clean sensors: of the driving systemswith water, car shampoo and a soft cloth.

Cleaning the rear view camera

! Do not clean the camera lens and the areaaround the rear view camera with a powerwasher.

Care 321

Maintenance

andcare

Z

X Use clear water and a soft cloth to cleancamera lens:.

Cleaning the 360° camera

! Do not clean the camera lens and the areaaround the 360° camera with a powerwasher.360

X Use clear water and a soft cloth to cleancamera lens:.

Cleaning the exhaust pipes

G WARNINGThe exhaust tail pipe and tail pipe trim canbecome very hot. If you come into contactwith these parts of the vehicle, you could burnyourself. There is a risk of injury.Always be particularly careful around theexhaust tail pipe and the tail pipe trim. Allowthese components to cool down before touch-ing them.

! Do not clean the exhaust pipe with acid-based cleaning agents, such as bathroomcleaner or wheel cleaner.

Impurities combined with the effects of roadgrit and corrosive environmental factors maycause flash rust to form on the surface. Youcan restore the original shine of the exhaustpipe by cleaning it regularly, especially in win-ter and after washing.X Clean the exhaust pipe with a care producttested and approved by Mercedes-Benz.

Interior care

Cleaning the display

! For cleaning, do not use any of the fol-lowing:Ralcohol-based thinner or gasolineRabrasive cleaning agentsRcommercially-available household clean-ing agents

These may damage the display surface. Donot put pressure on the display surfacewhen cleaning. This could lead to irrepara-ble damage to the display.

X Before cleaning the display, make sure thatit is switched off and has cooled down.

X Clean the display surface using a commer-cially available microfiber cloth andTFT/LCD display cleaner.

X Dry the display surface using a dry micro-fiber cloth.

Cleaning the plastic trim

G WARNINGCare products and cleaning agents containingsolvents cause surfaces in the cockpit tobecome porous. As a result, plastic parts maycome loose in the event of air bag deploy-ment. There is a risk of injury.Do not use any care products and cleaningagents to clean the cockpit.

322 CareMaintenance

andcare

! Do not affix the following to plastic surfa-ces:RstickersRfilmsRscented oil bottles or similar itemsYou can otherwise damage the plastic.

! Do not allow cosmetics, insect repellentor sunscreen to come into contact with theplastic trim. This maintains the high-qualitylook of the surfaces.

X Wipe the plastic trim with a damp, lint-freecloth, e.g. a microfiber cloth.

X Heavy soiling: use care and cleaning prod-ucts recommended and approved byMercedes-Benz.The surface may change color temporarily.Wait until the surface is dry again.

Cleaning the steering wheel and gear orselector leverX Thoroughly wipe with a damp cloth or useleather care agents that have been recom-mended and approved by Mercedes-Benz.

Cleaning genuine wood and trim ele-ments

! Do not use solvent-based cleaning agentssuch as tar remover, wheel cleaners, pol-ishes or waxes. There is otherwise a risk ofdamaging the surface.

! Do not use chrome polish on trim pieces.The trim pieces have a chrome look but aremostly made of anodized aluminum andcan lose their shine if chrome polish isused. Use a damp, lint-free cloth insteadwhen cleaning the trim pieces.If the chrome-plated trim pieces are verydirty, you can use a chrome polish. If youare unsure as to whether the trim piecesare chrome-plated or not, consult anauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

X Wipe the wooden trim and trim pieces witha damp, lint-free cloth, e.g. a microfibercloth.

X Heavy soiling: use car care and cleaningproducts recommended and approved byMercedes-Benz.

Cleaning the seat covers

General notes! Do not usemicrofiber cloths to clean gen-uine leather, artificial leather or DINAMICAcovers. If used often, these can damage thecover.

i Note that regular care is essential toensure that the appearance and comfort ofthe covers is retained over time.

Genuine leather seat coversLeather is a natural product.It exhibits natural surface characteristics, forexample:Rdifferences in the textureRmarks caused by growth and injuryRslight nuances of colorThese are characteristics of leather and notmaterial defects.

! To retain the natural appearance of theleather, observe the following cleaninginstructions:RClean genuine leather covers carefullywith a damp cloth and then wipe the cov-ers down with a dry cloth.RMake sure that the leather does notbecome soaked. It may otherwisebecome rough and cracked.ROnly use leather care agents that havebeen tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz. You can obtain these from a quali-fied specialist workshop.

Care 323

Maintenance

andcare

Z

Seat covers of other materials! Observe the following when cleaning:Rclean artificial leather covers with a clothmoistened with a solution containing 1%detergent (e.g. dish washing liquid).Rclean cloth covers with amicrofiber clothmoistened with a solution containing 1%detergent (e.g. dish washing liquid). Rubcarefully and alwayswipe entire seat sec-tions to avoid leaving visible lines. Leavethe seat to dry afterwards. Cleaningresults depend on the type of dirt andhow long it has been there.Rclean DINAMICA covers with a dampcloth. Make sure that you wipe entireseat sections to avoid leaving visiblelines.

Cleaning the seat belts

G WARNINGSeat belts can become severely weakened ifbleached or dyed. This could cause the seatbelts to tear or fail, for instance, in the event ofan accident. This poses an increased risk ofinjury or fatal injury.Never bleach or dye the seat belts.

! Donot clean the seat belts using chemicalcleaning agents. Do not dry the seat beltsby heating at temperatures above 176 ‡(80 †) or in direct sunlight.

X Use clean, lukewarm water and soap solu-tion.

Cleaning the headliner and carpetsX Headliner: if it is very dirty, use a soft brushor dry shampoo.

X Carpets: use the carpet and textile clean-ing agents recommended and approved byMercedes-Benz.

324 CareMaintenance

andcare

Useful information ............................ 326Where will I find...? ........................... 326Flat tire .............................................. 327Battery (vehicle) ................................ 331Jump-starting .................................... 335Towing and tow-starting .................. 337Fuses .................................................. 340

325

Roadside

Assistance

Useful information

i This Operator's Manual describes allmodels and all standard and optional equip-ment of your vehicle available at the time ofpublication of the Operator's Manual.Country-specific differences are possible.Please note that your vehicle may not beequipped with all features described. Thisalso applies to safety-related systems andfunctions.

i Read the information on qualified special-ist workshops (Y page 26).

Where will I find...?

Vehicle tool kit

General notesThe vehicle tool kit can be found in the stow-age well under the trunk floor (Y page 292).

Vehicles with a "Minispare" emergencyspare wheel

(Example: equipment and country-specific varia-tions possible): Vehicle tool kit tray; Stowage well= "Minispare" emergency spare wheelX Open the trunk lid.X Lift the trunk floor upwards (Y page 292).

The vehicle tool kit contains:RFolding wheel chockRFuse allocation chartRJackRAlignment boltROne pair of glovesRLug wrenchRTowing eye

Vehicles with a collapsible spare wheel(AMG vehicles)

(Example: equipment and country-specific varia-tions possible): Towing eye; One pair of gloves= Jack? Folding wheel chockA Alignment boltB Sheet for faulty wheelC Tire inflation compressorD Lug wrenchE Fuse allocation chartX Open the trunk lid.X Lift the trunk floor upwards (Y page 292).

Vehicleswith alloywheels andhubcapsOn vehicles with alloy wheels and hub caps, asocket is also provided.

326 Where will I find...?Roadside

Assistance

Flat tire

Preparing the vehicleYour vehicle may be equipped with:RMOExtended tires (tires with run-flat prop-erties) (Y page 327)Vehicle preparation is not necessary onvehicles with MOExtended tiresRa TIREFIT kit (Y page 326)Ran emergency spare wheel (Y page 379)Vehicles equippedwithMOExtended tires arenot equipped with a TIREFIT kit at the factory.It is therefore recommended that you addi-tionally equip your vehicle with a TIREFIT kit ifyou mount tires that do not feature run-flatproperties, e.g. winter tires. A TIREFIT kit maybe obtained from a qualified specialist work-shop.Information on changing/mounting a wheel(Y page 367).X Stop the vehicle on solid, non-slippery andlevel ground, as far away as possible fromtraffic.

X Switch on the hazard warning lamps.X Secure the vehicle against rolling away(Y page 170).

X If possible, bring the front wheels into thestraight-ahead position.

X Vehicles with AIRMATIC: make sure that"normal" level is selected (Y page 193).

X Switch off the engine.X Remove the SmartKey from the ignitionlock.

or, on vehicles with KEYLESS‑GO:X Open the driver's door.The on-board electronics now have status0. This is the same as the SmartKey havingbeen removed.

X Remove the Start/Stop button from theignition lock (Y page 150).

X Make sure that the passengers are notendangered as they do so. Make sure thatno one is near the danger area while awheel is being changed. Anyone who is not

directly assisting in the wheel changeshould, for example, stand behind the bar-rier.

X Get out of the vehicle. Pay attention to traf-fic conditions when doing so.

X Close the driver's door.

MOExtended tires (tires with run-flatproperties)

General notesWith MOExtended tires (tires with run flatcharacteristics), you can continue to driveyour vehicle even if there is a total loss ofpressure in one or more tires. The affectedtiremust not showany clearly visible damage.You can recognize MOExtended tires by theMOExtended marking which appears on thesidewall of the tire. You will find this markingnext to the tire size designation, the load-bearing capacity and the speed index(Y page 361).MOExtended tires may only be used in con-junction with an active tire pressure losswarning systemorwith an active tire pressuremonitor.If a pressure loss warning messageappears in the multifunction display:Robserve the instructions in the displaymes-sages (Y page 267).Rcheck the tire for damage.Rif driving on, observe the following notes.The driving distance possible in run-flat modeis approximately 50 miles (80 km) when thevehicle is partially laden and approximately18 miles (30 km) when the vehicle is fullyladen.In addition to the vehicle load, the driving dis-tance possible depends upon:Rvehicle speedRroad conditionRoutside temperature

Flat tire 327

Roadside

Assistance

The driving distance possible in run-flat modemay be reduced by extreme driving condi-tions/maneuvers, or it can be increasedthrough a moderate style of driving.The driving distance possible in run-flat modeis counted from themoment the tire pressureloss warning appears in the multifunction dis-play.You must not exceed a maximum speed of50 mph (80 km/h).When replacing one or all tires, pleaseobserve the following specifications for yourvehicle's tires:RsizeRthe type andRthe "MOExtended" markIf a tire has gone flat and cannot be replacedwith a MOExtended tire, a standard tire maybe used as a temporary measure. Make surethat you use the proper size and type (sum-mer or winter tire).Vehicles equippedwithMOExtended tires arenot equipped with a TIREFIT kit at the factory.It is therefore recommended that you addi-tionally equip your vehicle with a TIREFIT kit ifyou mount tires that do not feature run-flatproperties, e.g. winter tires. A TIREFIT kit maybe obtained from a qualified specialist work-shop.

Important safety notes

G WARNINGWhen driving in emergency mode, the drivingcharacteristics deteriorate, e.g. when corner-ing, accelerating quickly and when braking.There is a risk of an accident.Do not exceed the stated maximum speed.Avoid abrupt steering and driving maneuvers,and driving over obstacles (curbs, potholes,off-road). This applies in particular to a ladenvehicle.Stop driving in emergency mode if:Ryou hear banging noises.Rthe vehicle starts to shake.

Ryou see smoke and smell rubber.RESP® is intervening constantly.Rthere are tears in the sidewalls of the tire.After driving in emergency mode, have thewheel rims checked at a qualified specialistworkshop with regard to their further use. Thedefective tire must be replaced in every case.

TIREFIT kit

Important safety notesTIREFIT is a tire sealant.You can use TIREFIT to seal punctures of up to0.16 in (4 mm), particularly those in the tiretread. You can use TIREFIT at outside tem-peratures down to Ò4 ‡ (Ò20 †).

G WARNINGIn the following situations, the tire sealant isunable to provide sufficient breakdown assis-tance, as it is unable to seal the tire properly:Rthere are cuts or punctures in the tire largerthan those mentioned above.Rthe wheel rim is damaged.Ryou have driven at very low tire pressures oron a flat tire.

There is a risk of an accident.Do not drive the vehicle. Contact a qualifiedspecialist workshop.

G WARNINGThe tire sealant is harmful and causes irrita-tion. It must not come into contact with yourskin, eyes or clothing or be swallowed. Do notinhale TIREFIT fumes. Keep tire sealant awayfrom children. There is a risk of injury.If you come into contact with the tire sealant,observe the following:RRinse off the tire sealant from your skinimmediately with water.RIf the tire sealant comes into contact withyour eyes, immediately rinse them thor-oughly with clean water.

328 Flat tireRoadside

Assistance

RIf tire sealant is swallowed, immediatelyrinse your mouth out thoroughly and drinkplenty of water. Do not induce vomiting,and seek medical attention immediately.RImmediately change out of clothing whichhas come into contact with tire sealant.RIf an allergic reaction occurs, seek medicalattention immediately.

! Do not operate the tire inflation compres-sor for longer than eight minutes at a timewithout a break. It may otherwise overheat.The tire inflation compressor can be oper-ated again once it has cooled down.

Comply with the manufacturer’s safetyinstructions on the sticker on the tire inflationcompressor.

Using the TIREFIT kit

X Do not remove any foreign objects whichhave penetrated the tire, e.g. screws ornails.

X Remove the tire sealant bottle, the accom-panying TIREFIT sticker and the tire infla-tion compressor from the stowage wellunderneath the trunk floor (Y page 326).

X Affix part: of the TIREFIT sticker to theinstrument cluster within the driver's fieldof vision.

X Affix part; of the TIREFIT sticker near thevalve on the wheel with the defective tire.

X Pull plug?with the cable and hoseA outof the housing.

X Screw hoseA onto flangeB of tire seal-ant bottle:.

X Place tire sealant bottle: head down-wards into recess; of the tire inflationcompressor.

X Remove the cap from valveC on the faultytire.

X Screw filler hoseD onto valveC.X Insert connector? into a 12 V socket(Y page 298) in your vehicle.

X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 in the igni-tion lock (Y page 149).

X Press on/off switch= on the tire inflationcompressor to I.The tire inflation compressor is switchedon. The tire is inflated.First, tire sealant is pumped into the tire.The pressure can briefly rise to approx-imately 500 kPa (5 bar/73 psi).

Flat tire 329

Roadside

Assistance

Z

Do not switch off the tire inflation com-pressor during this phase.

X Allow the tire inflation compressor to runfor five minutes. The tire should then haveattained a pressure of at least 180 kPa(1.8 bar/26 psi).

If a pressure of 180 kPa (1.8 bar/26 psi) hasbeen attained after five minutes, see "Tirepressure reached" (Y page 330).If a tire pressure of 180 kPa (1.8 bar/26 psi)has not been attained after five minutes, see"Tire pressure not reached" (Y page 330).If tire sealant leaks out, allow it to dry. It canthen be removed like a layer of film.If your clothes are soiled with tire sealant,have them cleaned with perchloroethylene ata dry cleaner as soon as possible.

Tire pressure not reachedIf a pressure of 180 kPa (1.8 bar/26 psi) hasnot been attained after five minutes:X Switch off the tire inflation compressor.X Unscrew the filler hose from the valve ofthe faulty tire.

X Very slowly drive forwards or reverseapproximately 30 ft (10 m).

X Pump up the tire again.After a maximum of five minutes the tirepressuremust be at least 180 kPa (1.8 bar/26 psi).

G WARNINGIf the required tire pressure is not reachedafter the specified time, the tire is too badlydamaged. The tire sealant cannot repair thetire in this instance. Damaged tires and a tirepressure that is too low can significantlyimpair the vehicle's braking and driving char-acteristics. There is a risk of accident.Do not continue driving. Contact a qualifiedspecialist workshop.

Tire pressure reached

G WARNINGA tire temporarily sealed with tire sealantimpairs the driving characteristics and is notsuitable for higher speeds. There is a risk ofaccident.You should therefore adapt your driving styleaccordingly and drive carefully. Do not exceedthe specified maximum speed with a tire thathas been repaired using tire sealant.

The maximum speed for a tire sealed with tiresealant is 50 mph (80 km/h). The upper partof the TIREFIT sticker must be affixed to theinstrument cluster in the driver's field ofvision.

! Residue from the tire sealant may comeout of the filler hose after use. This couldcause stains.Therefore, place the filler hose in the plasticbag which contained the TIREFIT kit.

H Environmental noteHave the used tire sealant bottle disposed ofprofessionally, e.g. at a qualified specialistworkshop.

If a tire pressure of 180 kPa (1.8 bar/26 psi)has been attained after five minutes:X Switch off the tire inflation compressor.X Unscrew the filler hose from the valve ofthe faulty tire.

X Stow the tire sealant bottle and the tireinflation compressor.

X Pull away immediately.X Stop after driving for approximately tenminutes and check the tire pressure withthe tire inflation compressor.The tire pressure must now be at least130 kPa (1.3 bar/19 psi).

G WARNINGIf the required tire pressure is not reachedafter driving for a short period, the tire is toobadly damaged. The tire sealant cannot repair

330 Flat tireRoadside

Assistance

the tire in this instance. Damaged tires and atire pressure that is too low can significantlyimpair the vehicle's braking and driving char-acteristics. There is a risk of accident.Do not continue driving. Contact a qualifiedspecialist workshop.

i In cases such as the one mentionedabove, contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. Or call 1-800-FOR-MERCedes(in the USA) or 1-800-387-0100 (in Can-ada).

X Correct the tire pressure if it is still at least130 kPa (1.3 bar/19 psi). See the Tire andLoading Information placard on the driver'sside B-pillar or the tire pressure table in thefuel filler flap for values.

X To increase the tire pressure: switch onthe tire inflation compressor.

X To reduce the tire pressure: depresspressure release buttonE next to pres-sure gaugeF.

X When the tire pressure is correct, unscrewthe filler hose from the valve of the sealedtire.

X Screw the valve cap onto the tire valve ofthe sealed tire.

X Pull the tire sealant bottle out of the tireinflation compressor.The filler hose remains attached to the tiresealant bottle.

X Drive to the nearest qualified specialistworkshop and have the tire changed there.

X Have the tire sealant bottle replaced assoon as possible at a qualified specialistworkshop.

X Have the tire sealant bottle replaced everyfour years at a qualified specialist work-shop.

Battery (vehicle)

Important safety notesSpecial tools and expert knowledge arerequired when working on the battery, e.g.removal and installation. You should there-fore have all work involving the battery car-ried out at a qualified specialist workshop.

G WARNINGWork carried out incorrectly on the batterycan lead, for example, to a short circuit andthus damage the vehicle electronics. This canlead to function restrictions applying tosafety-relevant systems, e.g the lighting sys-tem, the ABS (anti-lock braking system) or theESP® (Electronic Stability Program). The oper-ating safety of your vehicle may be restricted.You could lose control of the vehicle, forexample:Rwhen brakingRin the event of abrupt steering maneuversand/or when the vehicle's speed is notadapted to the road conditions

There is a risk of an accident.In the event of a short circuit or a similar inci-dent, contact a qualified specialist workshopimmediately. Do not drive any further. Youshould have all work involving the battery car-ried out at a qualified specialist workshop.

For further information about ABS and ESP®,see (Y page 70) and (Y page 75).

G WARNINGElectrostatic build-up can lead to the creationof sparks, which could ignite the highly explo-sive gases of a battery. There is a risk of anexplosion.

Battery (vehicle) 331

Roadside

Assistance

Z

Before handling the battery, touch the vehiclebody to remove any existing electrostaticbuild-up.

The highly flammable gasmixture formswhencharging the battery as well as when jump-starting.Always make sure that neither you nor thebattery is electrostatically charged. A build-up of electrostatic charge can be caused, forexample:Rby wearing clothing made from syntheticfibersRdue to friction between clothing and seatsRif you push or pull the battery across thecarpet or other synthetic materialsRif you wipe the battery with a cloth

G WARNINGDuring the charging process, a battery produ-ces hydrogen gas. If a short circuit occurs orsparks are created, the hydrogen gas canignite. There is a risk of an explosion.RMake sure that the positive terminal of aconnected battery does not come into con-tact with vehicle parts.RNever placemetal objects or tools on a bat-tery.RIt is important that you observe the descri-bed order of the battery terminals whenconnecting and disconnecting a battery.RWhen jump-starting, make sure that thebattery poles with identical polarity areconnected.RIt is particularly important to observe thedescribed order when connecting and dis-connecting the jumper cables.RNever connect or disconnect the batteryterminals while the engine is running.

G WARNINGBattery acid is caustic. There is a risk of injury.Avoid contact with skin, eyes or clothing. Donot inhale any battery gases. Do not lean overthe battery. Keep children away from batter-

ies. Wash away battery acid immediately withplenty of clean water and seek medical atten-tion.

H Environmental noteBatteries contain dangeroussubstances. It is against thelaw to dispose of them withthe household rubbish. Theymust be collected separatelyand recycled to protect theenvironment.Dispose of batteries in anenvironmentally friendlymanner. Take dischargedbatteries to a qualified spe-cialist workshop or a specialcollection point for used bat-teries.

! Have the battery checked regularly at aqualified specialist workshop.Observe the service intervals in the Main-tenance Booklet or contact a qualified spe-cialist workshop for more information.

! You should have all work involving thebattery carried out at a qualified specialistworkshop. In the exceptional case that it isnecessary for you to disconnect the batteryyourself, make sure that:Ryou switch off the engine and remove theSmartKey. On vehicles with KEYLESS-GO, ensure that the ignition is switchedoff. Check that all the indicator lamps inthe instrument cluster are off. Otherwise,electronic components, such as thealternator, may be damaged.Ryou first remove the negative terminalclamp and then the positive terminalclamp. Never swap the terminal clamps.Otherwise, the vehicle's electronic sys-tem may be damaged.Rthe transmission is locked in position Pafter disconnecting the battery. The vehi-cle is secured against rolling away. Youcan then no longer move the vehicle.

332 Battery (vehicle)Roadside

Assistance

The battery and the cover of the positiveterminal clamp must be installed securelyduring operation.

Comply with safety precautions and take pro-tective measures when handling batteries.

Risk of explosion.

Fire, open flames and smoking areprohibited when handling the bat-tery. Avoid creating sparks.

Battery acid is caustic. Avoid con-tact with skin, eyes or clothing.Wear suitable protective clothing,especially gloves, apron and face-guard.Rinse any acid spills immediatelywith clear water. Contact a physi-cian if necessary.Wear eye protection.

Keep children away.

Observe this Operator's Manual.

For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recom-mends that you only use batteries which havebeen tested and approved for your vehicle byMercedes-Benz. These batteries provideincreased impact protection to prevent vehi-cle occupants from suffering acid burnsshould the battery be damaged in the event ofan accident.In order for the battery to achieve the maxi-mum possible service life, it must always besufficiently charged.The vehicle battery, like other batteries, candischarge over time if you do not use thevehicle. In this case, have the battery discon-nected at a qualified specialist workshop. You

can also charge the battery with a chargerrecommended by Mercedes-Benz. Contact aqualified specialist workshop for further infor-mation.Have the battery condition of charge checkedmore frequently if you use the vehicle mainlyfor short trips or if you leave it standing idlefor a lengthy period. Consult a qualified spe-cialist workshop if you wish to leave yourvehicle parked for a long period of time.

i Remove the SmartKey if you park thevehicle and do not require any electricalconsumers. The vehicle will then use verylittle energy, thus conserving batterypower.

Charging the battery

G WARNINGDuring charging and jump-starting, explosivegases can escape from the battery. There is arisk of an explosion.Particularly avoid fire, open flames, creatingsparks and smoking. Ensure there is sufficientventilation while charging and jump-starting.Do not lean over a battery.

G WARNINGBattery acid is caustic. There is a risk of injury.Avoid contact with skin, eyes or clothing. Donot inhale any battery gases. Do not lean overthe battery. Keep children away from batter-ies. Wash away battery acid immediately withplenty of clean water and seek medical atten-tion.

G WARNINGA discharged battery can freeze at tempera-tures below freezing point. When jump-start-ing the vehicle or charging the battery, gasescan escape from the battery. There is a risk ofan explosion.Allow the frozen battery to thaw out beforecharging it or jump-starting.

Battery (vehicle) 333

Roadside

Assistance

Z

! Only use battery chargers with a maxi-mum charging voltage of 14.8 V.

! Only charge the battery using the jump-starting connection point.

The jump-starting connection point is in theengine compartment (Y page 335).X Open the hood.X Connect the battery charger to the positiveterminal and ground point in the sameorder as when connecting the donor bat-tery in the jump-starting procedure(Y page 335).

If the indicator/warning lamps do not light upat low temperatures, it is very likely that thedischarged battery has frozen. In this case,you may neither charge the battery nor jump-start the vehicle. The service life of a thawed-out battery may be shorter. The starting char-acteristics may be impaired, especially at lowtemperatures. Have the thawed-out batterychecked at a qualified specialist workshop.Never charge a battery still installed in thevehicle unless a battery charger unitapproved by Mercedes-Benz is being used . Abattery charger unit specially adapted forMercedes-Benz vehicles and tested andapproved byMercedes-Benz is available as anaccessory. It permits the charging of the bat-tery in its installed position. Contact anauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center for furtherinformation and availability. Read the batterycharger's operating instructions beforecharging the battery.

334 Battery (vehicle)Roadside

Assistance

Jump-starting

For the jump-starting procedure, use only the jump-starting connection point, consisting of apositive terminal and a ground point, in the engine compartment.

G WARNINGBattery acid is caustic. There is a risk of injury.Avoid contact with skin, eyes or clothing. Do not inhale any battery gases. Do not lean over thebattery. Keep children away from batteries. Wash away battery acid immediately with plenty ofclean water and seek medical attention.

G WARNINGDuring charging and jump-starting, explosive gases can escape from the battery. There is a riskof an explosion.Particularly avoid fire, open flames, creating sparks and smoking. Ensure there is sufficient ven-tilation while charging and jump-starting. Do not lean over a battery.

G WARNINGDuring the charging process, a battery produces hydrogen gas. If a short circuit occurs or sparksare created, the hydrogen gas can ignite. There is a risk of an explosion.RMake sure that the positive terminal of a connected battery does not come into contact withvehicle parts.RNever place metal objects or tools on a battery.RIt is important that you observe the described order of the battery terminals when connectingand disconnecting a battery.RWhen jump-starting, make sure that the battery poles with identical polarity are connected.RIt is particularly important to observe the described order when connecting and disconnectingthe jumper cables.RNever connect or disconnect the battery terminals while the engine is running.

G WARNINGA discharged battery can freeze at temperatures below freezing point. When jump-starting thevehicle or charging the battery, gases can escape from the battery. There is a risk of an explosion.Allow the frozen battery to thaw out before charging it or jump-starting.

! Avoid repeated and lengthy starting attempts. Otherwise, the catalytic converter could bedamaged by the non-combusted fuel.

Do not start the vehicle using a rapid charging device. If your vehicle's battery is discharged,the engine can be jump-started from another vehicle or from a second battery using jumpercables. Observe the following points:RThe battery is not accessible in all vehicles. If the other vehicle's battery is not accessible,jump-start the vehicle using a second battery or a jump-starting device.RYou may only jump-start the vehicle when the engine and exhaust system are cold.RDo not start the engine if the battery is frozen. Let the battery thaw first.

Jump-starting 335

Roadside

Assistance

Z

ROnly jump-start from batteries with a 12 V voltage rating.ROnly use jumper cables which have a sufficient cross-section and insulated terminal clamps.RIf the battery is fully discharged, leave the battery that is being used to jump-start connectedfor a few minutes before attempting to start. This charges the battery slightly.RMake sure that the two vehicles do not touch.Make sure that:Rthe jumper cables are not damaged.Rwhen the jumper cables are connected to the battery, uninsulated sections of the terminalclamp do not come into contact with other metal sections.Rthe jumper cables cannot come into contact with parts which can move when the engine isrunning, such as the V-belt pulley or the fan.

X Apply the parking brake firmly.X Shift the transmission to position P.X Switch off all electrical consumers, e.g. rear window defroster, lighting, etc.X Open the hood.

Position numberB identifies the charged battery of the other vehicle or an equivalent jump-starting device.X Slide cover: of positive terminal; in the direction of the arrow.X Connect positive terminal; on your vehicle to positive terminal= of donor batteryBusing the jumper cable, always begin with positive terminal; on your own vehicle first.

X Start the engine of the donor vehicle and run it at idling speed.X Connect negative terminal? of donor batteryB to ground pointA of your vehicle usingthe jumper cable, connecting the jumper cable to battery of other vehicleB first.

X Start the engine.X Before disconnecting the jumper cables, let the engine run for several minutes.

336 Jump-startingRoadside

Assistance

X First, remove the jumper cables from ground pointA and negative terminal?, then frompositive clamp; and positive terminal=. Begin each time at the contacts on your ownvehicle first.

X Close cover: of positive clamp; after removing the jumper cables.X Have the battery checked at a qualified specialist workshop.

i Jump-starting is not considered to be a normal operating condition.

i Jumper cables and further information regarding jump-starting can be obtained at anyqualified specialist workshop.

Towing and tow-starting

Important safety notes

G WARNINGFunctions relevant to safety are restricted orno longer available if:Rthe engine is not running.Rthe brake system or the power steering ismalfunctioning.Rthere is a malfunction in the voltage supplyor the vehicle's electrical system.

If your vehicle is being towed, much moreforce may be necessary to steer or brake.There is a risk of an accident.In such cases, use a tow bar. Before towing,make sure that the steering moves freely.

G WARNINGWhen towing or tow-starting another vehicleand its weight is greater than the permissiblegross weight of your vehicle, the:Rthe towing eye could detach itselfRthe vehicle/trailer combination could roll-over.

There is a risk of an accident.When towing or tow-starting another vehicle,its weight should not be greater than the per-missible gross weight of your vehicle.

i Details on the permissible gross vehicleweight of your vehicle can be found on thevehicle identification plate (Y page 386).

! If DISTRONIC PLUS or the HOLD functionis activated, the vehicle brakes automati-cally in certain situations.To prevent damage to the vehicle, deacti-vate DISTRONIC PLUS and the HOLD func-tion in the following or other similar situa-tions:Rwhen towing the vehicleRin the car wash

! Only secure the tow rope or tow bar at thetowing eyes. Otherwise, the vehicle couldbe damaged.

! Do not use the towing eye for recovery,this could damage the vehicle. If in doubt,recover the vehicle with a crane.

! When towing, pull away slowly andsmoothly. If the tractive power is too high,the vehicles could be damaged.

! Do not tow with sling-type equipment.This could damage the vehicle.

! When towing vehicles with KEYLESS-GO,use the key instead of the Start/Stop but-ton. Otherwise, the automatic transmissionmay shift to position P when the driver's orfront-passenger door are opened, whichcould lead to damage to the transmission.

! The vehicle can be towed a maximum of30 miles (50km). The towing speed of30 mph (50 km/h) must not be exceeded.If the vehicle has to be towed more than30miles (50km), the entire vehicle must beraised and transported.

Towing and tow-starting 337

Roadside

Assistance

Z

! If you tow or tow-start another vehicle, itsweight must not exceed the maximum per-missible gross vehicle weight of your vehi-cle.

It is better to have the vehicle transportedthan to have it towed away.If the vehicle has suffered transmission dam-age, have it transported on a transporter ortrailer.The automatic transmission must be in posi-tion N when the vehicle is being towed.The battery must be connected and charged.Otherwise, you:Rcannot turn the SmartKey to position 2 inthe ignition lockRcannot shift the automatic transmission toposition N

In the event of damage to the electricalsystemIf the battery is defective, the automatictransmission will be locked in position P. Toshift the automatic transmission to positionN, you must provide power to the vehicle'selectrical system in the same way as whenjump-starting (Y page 335).Have the vehicle transported on a transporteror trailer.

i Disarm the automatic locking feature(Y page 91). You could otherwise be lockedout when pushing or towing the vehicle.

Installing/removing the towing eye

Installing the towing eye

G WARNINGThe exhaust tail pipemay be very hot. There isa risk of burns when removing the rear cover.Do not touch the exhaust pipe. Take particularcare when removing the rear cover.

Example: towing eye covers

Towing eye covers (AMG vehicles)

Themountings for the removable towing eyesare located in the bumpers. They are at thefront and at the rear, behind the covers.X Remove the towing eye from the vehicletool kit (Y page 326).

X Pull cover: out of the bumper in thedirection of the arrow by inserting your fin-gers into the recess.

X Press the mark on cover; inwards in thedirection of the arrow.

338 Towing and tow-startingRoadside

Assistance

X Take cover; off the opening.X Screw in the towing eye clockwise as far asit will go and tighten it.

Removing the towing eyeX Unscrew and remove the towing eye.X Position cover: on top of the bumper andpress it in at the bottom until it engages.

X Attach cover; to the bumper and pressuntil it engages.

X Place the towing eye in the vehicle tool kit.

Towing a vehicle with both axles onthe groundIt is important that you observe the safetyinstructions when towing away your vehicle(Y page 337).The automatic transmission automaticallyshifts to positionPwhen you open the driver'sor front-passenger door or when you removethe SmartKey from the ignition lock. In orderto ensure that the automatic transmissionstays in position N when towing the vehicle,you must observe the following points:X Make sure that the vehicle is stationary andthe SmartKey in the ignition lock is in posi-tion 0.

X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-tion lock.On vehicles with KEYLESS-GO, use theSmartKey instead of the Start/Stop button(Y page 151).

X Depress and hold the brake pedal.X Shift the automatic transmission to posi-tion N.

X Release the brake pedal.X Release the parking brake.X Switch on the hazard warning lamps(Y page 124).

X Leave the SmartKey in position 2 in theignition lock.

i When towing with the hazard warninglamps switched on, use the combinationswitch as usual to signal a change of direc-tion. In this case, only the indicator lampsfor the direction of travel flash. After reset-ting the combination switch, the hazardwarning lamp starts flashing again.

Towing the vehicle with the rear axleraised! Vehicles with 4MATIC must not be towedwith either the front or the rear axle raised,as doing so will damage the transmission.

! Vehicles with automatic transmissionmust not be towedwith the rear axle raised.The vehicle/trailer combination may oth-erwise swerve or even roll over.

! The ignition must be switched off if youare towing the vehicle with the rear axleraised. Intervention by ESP® could other-wise damage the brake system.

Transporting the vehicle! You may only secure the vehicle by thewheels, not by parts of the vehicle such asaxle or steering components. Otherwise,the vehicle could be damaged.

The towing eye can be used to pull the vehicleonto a trailer or transporter for transportingpurposes.X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the igni-tion lock.

X Shift the automatic transmission to posi-tion N.

As soon as the vehicle has been loaded:X Prevent the vehicle from rolling away byapplying the parking brake.

X Shift the automatic transmission to posi-tion P.

Towing and tow-starting 339

Roadside

Assistance

Z

X Turn the SmartKey to position 0 in the igni-tion lock and remove the SmartKey fromthe ignition lock.

X Secure the vehicle.

Notes on 4MATIC vehicles! Vehicles with 4MATIC must not be towedwith either the front or the rear axle raised,as doing so will damage the transmission.

If the vehicle has transmission damage ordamage to the front or rear axle, have it trans-ported on a transporter or trailer.In the event of damage to the electricalsystemIf the battery is defective, the automatictransmission will be locked in position P. Toshift the automatic transmission to positionN, you must provide power to the vehicle'selectrical system in the same way as whenjump-starting (Y page 335).Have the vehicle transported on a transporteror trailer.

Tow-starting (emergency enginestarting)! Vehicles with automatic transmissionmust not be started by tow-starting. Thiscould otherwise damage the transmission.

i You can find information on "Jump-start-ing" under (Y page 335).

Fuses

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf you manipulate or bridge a faulty fuse or ifyou replace it with a fuse with a higher amper-age, the electric cables could be overloaded.This could result in a fire. There is a risk of anaccident and injury.

Always replace faulty fuses with the specifiednew fuses having the correct amperage.

! Only use fuses that have been approvedfor Mercedes-Benz vehicles and whichhave the correct fuse rating for the systemconcerned. Otherwise, components or sys-tems could be damaged.

The fuses in your vehicle serve to close downfaulty circuits. If a fuse blows, all the compo-nents on the circuit and their functions stopoperating.Blown fuses must be replaced with fuses ofthe same rating, which you can recognize bythe color and value. The fuse ratings are listedin the fuse allocation chart.If a newly inserted fuse also blows, have thecause traced and rectified at a qualified spe-cialist workshop, e.g. an authorizedMercedes-Benz Center.

Before changing a fusePay attention to the important safety notes(Y page 340).X Secure the vehicle against rolling away(Y page 170).

X Switch off the engine.X Switch off all electrical consumers.X Remove the SmartKey from the ignitionlock.

or, on vehicles with KEYLESS‑GO:X Open the driver's door.The on-board electronics now have status0. This is the same as the SmartKey havingbeen removed.The driver’s door can be closed again.

All indicator lamps in the instrument clustermust be off.

340 FusesRoadside

Assistance

The fuses are located in various fuse boxes:RFuse box in the engine compartment on theleft-hand side of the vehicle, when viewedin the direction of travelRfuse box located in the trunk on the right-hand side when viewed in the direction oftravel

the fuse allocation chart is located in the vehi-cle tool kit in the stowage compartmentunder the trunk floor (Y page 326).

Fuse box in the engine compartmentPay attention to the important safety notes(Y page 340).

G WARNINGWhen the hood is open and the windshieldwipers are set inmotion, you can be injured bythe wiper linkage. There is a risk of injury.Always switch off the windshield wipers andthe ignition before opening the hood.

! Make sure that no moisture can enter thefuse box when the cover is open.

! When closing the cover, make sure that itis lying correctly on the fuse box. Moistureseeping in or dirt could otherwise impairthe operation of the fuses.

X Make sure that the windshield wipers areturned off.

X Open the hood.X Use a dry cloth to remove any moisturefrom the fuse box.

X To open: take lines: out of the guides.X Move lines: to one side.X Open retaining clamps;.X Remove the fuse box cover forwards.X To close: check whether the seal is lyingcorrectly in the cover.

X Insert the cover at the rear of the fuse boxinto the retainer.

X Fold down the cover and close clamps;.X Secure lines: in the guides.X Close the hood.

Fuse box in the trunkPay attention to the important safety notes(Y page 340).

! Make sure that no moisture can enter thefuse box when the cover is open.

! When closing the cover, make sure that itis lying correctly on the fuse box. Moistureseeping in or dirt could otherwise impairthe operation of the fuses.

X Open the trunk lid.X To open: release cover: at the top rightand left-hand sides with a flat object.

X Open cover: downwards in the directionof the arrow.

Fuses 341

Roadside

Assistance

Z

342

Useful information ............................ 344Important safety notes ..................... 344Operation ........................................... 344Winter operation ............................... 346Tire pressure ..................................... 348Loading the vehicle .......................... 355All about wheels and tires ............... 359Changing a wheel .............................. 367Wheel and tire combinations ........... 372Emergency spare wheel ................... 379

343

Wheelsandtires

Useful information

i This Operator's Manual describes allmodels and all standard and optional equip-ment of your vehicle available at the time ofpublication of the Operator's Manual.Country-specific differences are possible.Please note that your vehicle may not beequipped with all features described. Thisalso applies to safety-related systems andfunctions.

i Read the information on qualified special-ist workshops (Y page 26).

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf wheels and tires of the wrong size are used,the wheel brakes or suspension componentsmay be damaged. There is a risk of an acci-dent.Always replace wheels and tires with thosethat fulfill the specifications of the originalpart.When replacing wheels, make sure to use thecorrect:RdesignationRmodelWhen replacing tires, make sure to use thecorrect:RdesignationRmanufacturerRmodel

G WARNINGA flat tire severely impairs the driving, steer-ing and braking characteristics of the vehicle.There is a risk of accident.Tires without run-flat characteristics:Rdo not drive with a flat tire.Rimmediately replace the flat tire with youremergency spare wheel or spare wheel, orconsult a qualified specialist workshop.

Tires with run-flat characteristics:Rpay attention to the information and warn-ing notices on MOExtended tires (tires withrun-flat characteristics).

Accessories that are not approved for yourvehicle by Mercedes-Benz or are not beingused correctly can impair the operatingsafety.Before purchasing and using non-approvedaccessories, visit a qualified specialist work-shop and ask about:RsuitabilityRlegal stipulationsRfactory recommendationsInformation on the sizes and types of wheelsand tires for your vehicle can be found under"Wheel/tire combinations" (Y page 372).Information on tire pressure can be found:Ron the vehicle's Tire and Loading Informa-tion placard on the B-pillar (Y page 355)Ron the tire pressure label on the fuel fillerflap (Y page 168)Runder "Tire pressure" (Y page 348)

Operation

Information on drivingCheck the tire pressure when the vehicle isheavily laden and adjust prior to a trip.While driving, pay attention to vibrations,noises and unusual handling characteristics,e.g. pulling to one side. This may indicate thatthe wheels or tires are damaged. If you sus-pect that a tire is defective, reduce yourspeed immediately. Stop the vehicle as soonas possible to check the wheels and tires fordamage. Hidden tire damage could also becausing the unusual handling characteristics.If you find no signs of damage, have the tiresand wheels checked at a qualified specialistworkshop.When parking your vehicle, make sure thatthe tires do not get deformed by the curb or

344 OperationWheelsandtires

other obstacles. If it is necessary to drive overcurbs, speed humps or similar elevations, tryto do so slowly and at an obtuse angle. Oth-erwise, the tires, particularly the sidewalls,may be damaged.

Regular checking of wheels and tires

G WARNINGDamaged tires can cause tire inflation pres-sure loss. As a result, you could lose control ofyour vehicle. There is a risk of accident.Check the tires regularly for signs of damageand replace any damaged tires immediately.

Regularly check the wheels and tires of yourvehicle for damage at least once a month, aswell as after driving off-road or on roughroads. Damaged wheels can cause a loss oftire pressure. Pay particular attention to dam-age such as:Rcuts in the tiresRpuncturesRtears in the tiresRbulges on tiresRdeformation or severe corrosion on wheelsRegularly check the tire tread depth and thecondition of the tread across the whole widthof the tire (Y page 345). If necessary, turn thefront wheels to full lock in order to inspect theinner side of the tire surface.All wheels must have a valve cap to protectthe valve against dirt and moisture. Do notmount anything onto the valve other than thestandard valve cap or other valve capsapproved by Mercedes-Benz for your vehicle.Do not use any other valve caps or systems,e.g. tire pressure monitoring systems.Regularly check the pressure of all the tiresparticularly prior to long trips. Adjust the tirepressure as necessary (Y page 348).Observe the notes on the emergency sparewheel (Y page 379).

The service life of tires depends, among otherthings, on the following factors:RDriving styleRTire pressureRDistance covered

Notes on tire tread

G WARNINGInsufficient tire tread will reduce tire traction.The tire is no longer able to dissipate water.This means that on wet road surfaces, the riskof hydroplaning increases, in particular wherespeed is not adapted to suit the driving con-ditions. There is a risk of accident.If the tire pressure is too high or too low, tiresmay exhibit different levels of wear at differ-ent locations on the tire tread. Thus, youshould regularly check the tread depth andthe condition of the tread across the entirewidth of all tires.Minimum tire tread depth for:RSummer tires:â in (3 mm)RM+S tires:ã in (4 mm)For safety reasons, replace the tires beforethe legally prescribed limit for the minimumtire tread depth is reached.

Marking: shows where the bar indicator(arrow) for tread wear is integrated into thetire tread.Tread wear indicators (TWI) are required bylaw. Six indicators are positioned on the tiretread. They are visible once a tread depth of

Operation 345

Wheelsandtires

Z

approximatelyá in (1.6 mm) has beenreached. If this is the case, the tire is so wornthat it must be replaced.

Selecting, mounting and replacingtiresROnly mount tires and wheels of the sametype and make.Exception: it is permissible to install a dif-ferent type or make in the event of a flattire. Observe the "MOExtended tires (tireswith run-flat characteristics" section(Y page 327).ROnly mount tires of the correct size ontothe wheels.RBreak in new tires at moderate speeds forthe first 60miles (100 km). They only reachtheir full performance after this distance.RDo not drive with tires which have too littletread depth, as this significantly reducesthe traction on wet roads (hydroplaning).RReplace the tires after six years at the lat-est, regardless of wear.

Observe the notes on the emergency sparewheel (Y page 379).

MOExtended tires (tires with run-flatproperties)With MOExtended tires (tires with run flatcharacteristics), you can continue to driveyour vehicle even if there is a total loss ofpressure in one or more tires.MOExtended tires may only be used in con-junction with an active tire pressure losswarning systemorwith an active tire pressuremonitor and on wheels specifically tested byMercedes-Benz.Notes on driving with MOExtended tires witha flat tire (Y page 327).Vehicles equipped withMOExtended tires arenot equipped with a TIREFIT kit at the factory.It is therefore recommended that you addi-tionally equip your vehicle with a TIREFIT kit if

you mount tires that do not feature run-flatproperties, e.g. winter tires. A TIREFIT kit canbe obtained from a qualified specialist work-shop.

Winter operation

General notesHave your vehicle winter-proofed at a quali-fied specialist workshop at the onset of win-ter.Observe the notes in the "Changing a wheel"section (Y page 367).

Driving with summer tiresAt temperatures below 45‡ (+7†), summertires lose elasticity and therefore traction andbraking power. Change the tires on your vehi-cle to M+S tires. Using summer tires at verycold temperatures could cause cracks toform, thereby damaging the tires perma-nently. Mercedes-Benz cannot acceptresponsibility for this type of damage.

G WARNINGDamaged tires can cause tire inflation pres-sure loss. As a result, you could lose control ofyour vehicle. There is a risk of accident.Check the tires regularly for signs of damageand replace any damaged tires immediately.

M+S tires

G WARNINGM+S tires with a tire tread depth of less thanã in (4 mm) are not suitable for use in winterand do not provide sufficient traction. There isa risk of an accident.M+S tires with a tread depth of less thanã in(4 mm) must be replaced immediately.

At temperatures below 45‡ (+7†), use win-ter tires or all-season tires. Both types of tireare identified by the M+S marking.

346 Winter operationWheelsandtires

Only winter tires bearing thei snowflakesymbol in addition to the M+S marking pro-vide the best possible grip in wintry road con-ditions.Only these tires will allow driving safety sys-tems such as ABS and ESP® to function opti-mally in winter. These tires have been devel-oped specifically for driving in snow.UseM+S tires of the samemake and tread onall wheels to maintain safe handling charac-teristics.Always observe the maximum permissiblespeed specified for the M+S tires you havemounted.When you have mounted the M+S tires:X Check the tire pressures (Y page 351).X Vehicles for Canada: restart the tire pres-sure loss warning system (Y page 352).

X Restart the tire pressure monitor(Y page 355).

Information about driving with an emergencyspare wheel (Y page 379).

Snow chains

G WARNINGIf snow chains are installed to the frontwheels, they may drag against the vehiclebody or chassis components. This couldcause damage to the vehicle or the tires.There is a risk of an accident.To avoid hazardous situations:Rnever install snow chains to the frontwheelsRalways install snow chains in pairs to therear wheels.

! On vehicles with AIRMATIC, you mustdrive at raised vehicle level if snow chainshave been mounted. The vehicle may oth-erwise be damaged.

! On some tire sizes there is not enoughspace for snow chains. To avoid damage tothe vehicle or tires, observe the "Wheel and

tire combinations" section under "Tires andwheels".

For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recom-mends that you only use snow chains thathave been specially approved for your vehicleby Mercedes-Benz, or are of a correspondingstandard of quality. For more information,contact a qualified specialist workshop.If you intend to mount snow chains, pleasebear the following points in mind:RSnow chains may not be mounted on allwheel/tire combinations. Permissiblewheel-tire combinations (Y page 372).ROnly use snow chains when driving onroads completely covered by snow.Remove the snow chains as soon as possi-ble when you come to a road that is notsnow-covered.RLocal regulations may restrict the use ofsnow chains. Observe the appropriate reg-ulations if you wish to mount snow chains.RDo not exceed the maximum permissiblespeed of 30 mph (50 km/h).

i You may wish to deactivate ESP® whenpulling away with snow chains installed:RAll vehicles (except AMG vehicles)(Y page 76)RAMG vehicles: (Y page 77)You can thereby allow the wheels to spin ina controlled manner, achieving anincreased driving force (cutting action).

Information about driving with an emergencyspare wheel (Y page 379).

Winter operation 347

Wheelsandtires

Z

Tire pressure

Tire pressure specifications

Important safety notes

G WARNINGUnderinflated or overinflated tires pose thefollowing risks:Rthe tires may burst, especially as the loadand vehicle speed increase.Rthe tires may wear excessively and/orunevenly, which may greatly impair tiretraction.Rthe driving characteristics, as well as steer-ing and braking, may be greatly impaired.

There is a risk of an accident.Follow recommended tire inflation pressuresand check the pressure of all the tires includ-ing the spare wheel:Rmonthly, at leastRif the load changesRbefore beginning a long journeyRunder different operating conditions, e.g.off-road driving

If necessary, correct the tire pressure.

i The specifications on the sample Tire andLoading Information placard and tire pres-sure tables are examples. Tire pressurespecifications are vehicle-specific and maydeviate from the data shown here. The tirepressure specifications that are valid foryour vehicle can be found on the Tire andLoading Information placard and tire pres-sure table on the vehicle.

General notesThe recommended tire pressures for the tiresmounted at the factory can be found on thelabels described here.Operation with an emergency sparewheel: information on operation with anemergency spare wheel can be found in the

general notes in the "Emergency sparewheel"section (Y page 379).Further information on tire pressures can beobtained at a qualified specialist workshop.

Tire and Loading Information placard

: Recommended tire pressuresThe Tire and Loading Information placard ison the B-pillar on the driver's side(Y page 355).The Tire and Loading Information placard con-tains the recommended tire pressures forcold tires. The recommended tire pressuresare valid for the maximum permissible loadand up to the maximum permissible vehiclespeed.

Tire pressure tableThe tire pressure table is on the inside of thefuel filler flap.

Example: tire pressure table for all tires permittedfor this vehicle by the factory

The tire pressure table contains the recom-mended pressures for cold tires for various

348 Tire pressureWheelsandtires

operating conditions, i.e. differing load andspeed conditions.

Example: tire pressure table with tire dimensions

If a tire size precedes a tire pressure, the tirepressure information following is only validfor that tire size. The load conditions "partiallyladen" and "fully laden" are defined in thetable for different numbers of occupants andamounts of luggage. The actual number ofseats may differ.

Some tire pressure tables show only the rimdiameters instead of the full tire size, e.g.R18. The rim diameter is part of the tire sizeand can be found on the tire sidewall(Y page 361).If the tire pressures have been set to thelower values for lighter loads and/or lowerroad speeds, the pressures should be reset tothe higher values:Rif you want to drive with an increased loadand/orRif you want to drive at higher road speeds

i The tire pressures for increased loadsand/or higher road speeds, shown in the

tire pressure table, may have a negativeeffect on driving comfort.

If the tire pressure is not set correctly, thiscan lead to an excessive build-up of heat anda sudden loss of pressure.Formore information, contact a qualified spe-cialist workshop.

Important notes on tire pressure

G WARNINGIf the tire pressure drops repeatedly, thewheel, valve or tire may be damaged. Tirepressure that is too low may result in a tireblow-out. There is a risk of an accident.RCheck the tire for foreign objects.RCheck whether the wheel is losing air or thevalve is leaking.

If you are unable to rectify the damage, con-tact a qualified specialist workshop.

G WARNINGIf you fit unsuitable accessories onto tirevalves, the tire valves may be overloaded andmalfunction, which can cause tire pressureloss. Due to their design, retrofitted tire pres-sure monitors keep the tire valve open. Thiscan also result in tire pressure loss. There is arisk of an accident.Only screw the standard valve cap or othervalve caps approved by Mercedes-Benz foryour vehicle onto the tire valve.

Use a suitable pressure gauge to check thetire pressure. The outer appearance of a tiredoes not permit any reliable conclusion aboutthe tire pressure. On vehicles equipped withthe electronic tire pressure monitor, the tirepressure can be checked in the on-boardcomputer.The tire temperature and pressure increasewhen the vehicle is in motion. This is depend-ent on the driving speed and the load.Therefore, you should only correct tire pres-sures when the tires are cold.

Tire pressure 349

Wheelsandtires

Z

The tires are cold:Rif the vehicle has been parked withoutdirect sunlight on the tires for at least threehours andRif the vehicle has not been driven furtherthan 1 mile (1.6 km)

The tire temperature changes depending onthe outside temperature, the vehicle speedand the tire load. If the tire temperaturechanges by 18 ‡ (10 †), the tire pressurechanges by approximately 10 kPa (0.1 bar/1.5 psi). Take this into account when check-ing the pressure of warm tires. Only correctthe tire pressure if it is too low for the currentoperating conditions. If you check the tirepressure when the tires are warm, the result-ing value will be higher than if the tires werecold. This is normal. Do not reduce the tirepressure to the value specified for cold tires.The tire pressure would otherwise be too low.Observe the recommended tire pressures forcold tires:Ron the Tire and Loading Information placardon the B-pillar on the driver's sideRin the tire pressure table on the inside of thefuel filler flap

Underinflated or overinflated tires

Underinflated tires

G WARNINGTires with pressure that is too low can over-heat and burst as a consequence. In addition,they also suffer from excessive and/or irreg-ular wear, which can severely impair the brak-ing properties and the driving characteristics.There is a risk of an accident.Avoid tire pressures that are too low in all thetires, including the spare wheel.

Underinflated tires may:Roverheat, leading to tire defectsRadversely affect handling

Rwear excessively and/or unevenlyRhave an adverse effect on fuel consumption

Overinflated tires

G WARNINGTires with excessively high pressure can burstbecause they are damaged more easily byroad debris, potholes etc. In addition, theyalso suffer from irregular wear, which canseverely impair the braking properties and thedriving characteristics. There is a risk of anaccident.Avoid tire pressures that are too high in all thetires, including the spare wheel.

Overinflated tires may:Rincrease the braking distanceRadversely affect handlingRwear excessively and/or unevenlyRhave an adverse effect on ride comfortRbe more susceptible to damage

Maximum tire pressures

: Example: maximum permissible tire pres-sure

Never exceed the maximum permissible tireinflation pressure. Always observe the rec-ommended tire pressure for your vehiclewhen adjusting the tire pressure(Y page 348).

i The actual values for tires are vehicle-specific and may deviate from the values inthe illustration.

350 Tire pressureWheelsandtires

Checking the tire pressures

Important safety notesObserve the notes on tire pressure(Y page 348).Information on air pressure for the tires onyour vehicle can be found:Ron the vehicle's Tire and Loading Informa-tion placard on the B-pillarRon the tire pressure label on the fuel fillerflapRin the "Tire pressure" section

Checking tire pressures manuallyTo determine and set the correct tire pres-sure, proceed as follows:X Remove the valve cap of the tire that is tobe checked.

X Press the tire pressure gauge securely ontothe valve.

X Read the tire pressure and compare it tothe recommended value on the Tire andLoading Information placard or the tirepressure table (Y page 348).

X If the tire pressure is too low, increase thetire pressure to the recommended value.

X If the tire pressure is too high, release air.To do so, press down the metal pin in thevalve, using the tip of a pen for example.Then check the tire pressure again usingthe tire pressure checker.

X Screw the valve cap onto the valve.X Repeat these steps for the other tires.

Tire pressure loss warning system(Canada only)

General notesWhile the vehicle is in motion, the tire pres-sure loss warning system monitors the settire pressure using the rotational speed of thewheels. This enables the system to detectsignificant pressure loss in a tire. If the speed

of rotation of a wheel changes as a result of aloss of pressure, a corresponding warningmessage will appear in the multifunction dis-play.You can recognize the tire pressure losswarn-ing by the Run Flat Indicator ActiveRun Flat Indicator ActivePress 'OK' to RestartPress 'OK' to Restart message whichappears in the Serv.Serv. menu of the multifunc-tion display. Information on the message dis-play can be found in the "Restarting the tirepressure loss warning system" section(Y page 352).

Important safety notesThe tire pressure warning system does notwarn you of an incorrectly set tire pressure.Observe the notes on the recommended tirepressure (Y page 348).The tire pressure loss warning does notreplace the need to regularly check the tirepressure. An even loss of pressure on severaltires at the same time cannot be detected bythe tire pressure loss warning system.The tire pressure monitor is not able to warnyou of a sudden loss of pressure, e.g. if thetire is penetrated by a foreign object. In theevent of a sudden loss of pressure, bring thevehicle to a halt by braking carefully. Avoidabrupt steering maneuvers.The function of the tire pressure loss warningsystem is limited or delayed if:Rsnow chains are mounted on your vehicle'stires.Rroad conditions are wintry.Ryou are driving on sand or gravel.Ryou adopt a very sporty driving style (cor-nering at high speeds or driving with highrates of acceleration).Ryou are driving with a heavy load (in thevehicle or on the roof).

Tire pressure 351

Wheelsandtires

Z

Restarting the tire pressure loss warn-ing systemRestart the tire pressure loss warning systemif you have:Rchanged the tire pressureRchanged the wheels or tiresRmounted new wheels or tiresX Before restarting, make sure that the tirepressures are set properly on all four tiresfor the respective operating conditions.The recommended tire pressure can befound on the Tire and Loading Informationplacard on the B-pillar on the driver's side.Additionally, a tire pressure table isattached to the fuel filler flap. The tire pres-sure loss warning system can only give reli-able warnings if you have set the correcttire pressure. If an incorrect tire pressure isset, these incorrect values will be moni-tored.

X Also observe the notes in the section on tirepressures (Y page 348).

X Make sure that the SmartKey is in position2 in the ignition lock (Y page 149).

X Press the=or;button on the steer-ing wheel to select the Serv.Serv. menu.

X Press the9or:button on the steer-ing wheel to select the Tire PressureTire Pressuremenu.

X Press thea button.The Run Flat Indicator activeRun Flat Indicator activeRestartRestart withwith OKOKmessage appears in themultifunction display.

If you wish to confirm the restart:X Press thea button.The Tire Pressure Now OK?Tire Pressure Now OK? messageappears in the multifunction display.

X Press the9 or: button to selectYesYes.

X Press thea button.The Run Flat Indicator restartedRun Flat Indicator restartedmessage appears in the multifunction dis-play.

After a teach-in period, the tire pressureloss warning system will monitor the settire pressures of all four tires.

If you wish to cancel the restart:X Press the% button.orX When the Tire Pressure Now OK?Tire Pressure Now OK? mes-sage appears, press the9 or: but-ton to select CancelCancel.

X Press thea button.The tire pressure values stored at the lastrestart will continue to be monitored.

Tire pressure monitor

General notesIf a tire pressuremonitor is installed, the vehi-cle's wheels have sensors that monitor thetire pressures in all four tires. The tire pres-sure monitor warns you if the pressure dropsin one or more of the tires. The tire pressuremonitor only functions if the correspondingsensors are installed in all wheels.Information on tire pressures is displayed inthe multifunction display. After a fewminutesof driving, the current tire pressure of eachtire is shown in the ServiceServicemenu of the mul-tifunction display, see illustration (example).

For information on the message display, referto the "Checking the tire pressure electroni-cally" section (Y page 354).

Important safety notes

G WARNINGEach tire, including the spare (if provided),should be checked at least once every two

352 Tire pressureWheelsandtires

weeks when cold and inflated to the pressurerecommended by the vehicle manufactureron the Tire and Loading Information placardon the driver's door B-pillar or the tire pres-sure label on the inside of the fuel filler flap. Ifyour vehicle has tires of a different size thanthe size indicated on the Tire and LoadingInformation placard or, if available, the tirepressure label, you should determine theproper tire pressure for those tires.As an added safety feature, your vehicle hasbeen equippedwith a tire pressuremonitoringsystem (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pres-sure telltale when one or more of your tiresare significantly underinflated. Accordingly,when the low tire pressure telltale lights up,you should stop and check your tires as soonas possible, and inflate them to the properpressure. Driving on a significantly underin-flated tire causes the tire to overheat and canlead to tire failure.Underinflation also reduces fuel efficiencyand tire tread life, andmay affect the vehicle'shandling and stopping ability. Please note thatthe TPMS is not a substitute for proper tiremaintenance, and it is the driver's responsi-bility to maintain correct tire pressure, even ifunderinflation has not reached the level totrigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pres-sure telltale.Your vehicle has also been equipped with aTPMS malfunction indicator to indicate whenthe system is not operating properly. TheTPMS malfunction indicator is combined withthe low tire pressure telltale. When the sys-tem detects a malfunction, the warning lampwill flash for approximately a minute and thenremain continuously illuminated. Thissequencewill be repeated every time the vehi-cle is started as long as the malfunctionexists. When the malfunction indicator is illu-minated, the systemmay not be able to detector signal low tire pressure as intended.TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety ofreasons, including the installation of incom-patible replacement or alternate tires orwheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS

from functioning properly. Always check theTPMS malfunction telltale after replacing oneor more tires or wheels on your vehicle toensure that the replacement or alternate Tiresand wheels allow the TPMS to continue tofunction properly.

It is the driver's responsibility to set the tirepressure to that recommended for cold tireswhich is suitable for the operating situation(Y page 348). Note that the correct tire pres-sure for the current operating situation mustfirst be taught-in to the tire pressure monitor.If there is a substantial loss of pressure, thewarning threshold for the warning message isaligned to the reference values taught-in.Restart the tire pressuremonitor after adjust-ing the pressure of the cold tires(Y page 355). The current pressures aresaved as new reference values. As a result, awarning message will appear if the tire pres-sure drops significantly.The tire pressure monitor does not warn youof an incorrectly set tire pressure. Observethe notes on the recommended tire pressure(Y page 348).The tire pressure monitor is not able to warnyou of a sudden loss of pressure, e.g. if thetire is penetrated by a foreign object. In theevent of a sudden loss of pressure, bring thevehicle to a halt by braking carefully. Avoidabrupt steering maneuvers.The tire pressure monitor has a yellow warn-ing lamp in the instrument cluster for indicat-ing a pressure loss or malfunction. Whetherthe warning lamp flashes or lights up indi-cates whether a tire pressure is too low or thetire pressure monitor is malfunctioning:Rif the warning lamp is lit continuously, thetire pressure on one or more tires is signif-icantly too low. The tire pressure monitor isnot malfunctioning.Rif the warning lamp flashes for around aminute and then remains lit constantly, thetire pressure monitor is malfunctioning.

Tire pressure 353

Wheelsandtires

Z

In addition to the warning lamp, a messageappears in the multifunction display. Observethe information on display messages(Y page 267).It may take up to ten minutes for a malfunc-tion of the tire pressure monitor to be indica-ted. Amalfunction will be indicated by the tirepressure warning lamp flashing for approx-imately one minute and then remaining lit.When the malfunction has been rectified, thetire pressure warning lamp goes out after afew minutes of driving.The tire pressure values indicated by the on-board computer may differ from those meas-ured at a gas station with a pressure gauge.The tire pressures shown by the on-boardcomputer refer to those measured at sealevel. At high altitudes, the tire pressure val-ues indicated by a pressure gauge are higherthan those shown by the on-board computer.In this case, do not reduce the tire pressures.The operation of the tire pressuremonitor canbe affected by interference from radio trans-mitting equipment (e.g. radio headphones,two-way radios) that may be being operatedin or near the vehicle.

Checking the tire pressure electroni-callyX Make sure that the SmartKey is in position2 in the ignition lock (Y page 149).

X Press the=or;button on the steer-ing wheel to select the ServiceService menu.

X Press the9 or: button to selectTire PressureTire Pressure.

X Press thea button.The current tire pressure of each tire isshown in the multifunction display.

If the vehicle has been parked for over20 minutes, the Tire pressure will beTire pressure will bedisplayed after driving a fewdisplayed after driving a fewminutesminutes message appears.After a teach-in process, the tire pressuremonitor automatically detects new wheels ornew sensors. As long as a clear allocation of

the tire pressure value to the individualwheels is not possible, the Tire PressureTire PressureMonitor ActiveMonitor Active display message is showninstead of the tire pressure display. The tirepressures are already being monitored.If an emergency spare wheel is mounted, thesystem may continue to show the tire pres-sure of the wheel that has been removed for afewminutes. If this occurs, note that the valuedisplayed for the position where the sparewheel is mounted is not the same as the cur-rent tire pressure of the emergency sparewheel.

Tire pressure monitor warning mes-sagesIf the tire pressuremonitor detects a pressureloss in one or more tires, a warning messageis shown in the multifunction display and theyellow tire pressure monitor warning lampcomes on.RIf the Correct Tire PressureCorrect Tire Pressure messageappears in the multifunction display, thetire pressure in at least one tire is too lowand must be corrected at the next oppor-tunity.RIf the CheckCheck TiresTiresmessage appears in themultifunction display, the tire pressure inone or more tires has dropped significantlyand the tires must be checked.RIf the Warning Tire MalfunctionWarning Tire Malfunction mes-sage appears in the multifunction display,the tire pressure in one or more tires hasdropped suddenly and the tires must bechecked.

Observe the instructions and safety notes inthe display messages in the "Tires" section(Y page 267).If the wheel positions on the vehicle are rota-ted, the tire pressures may be displayed forthe wrong positions for a short time. This isrectified after a few minutes of driving, andthe tire pressures are displayed for the cor-rect positions.

354 Tire pressureWheelsandtires

Restarting the tire pressure monitorWhen you restart the tire pressuremonitor, allexisting warning messages are deleted andthe warning lamps go out. The monitor usesthe currently set tire pressures as the refer-ence values formonitoring. Inmost cases, thetire pressure monitor will automaticallydetect the new reference values after youhave changed the tire pressure. However, youcan also define reference values manually asdescribed here. The tire pressure monitorthen monitors the new tire pressure values.X Set the tire pressure to the value recom-mended for the corresponding driving sit-uation on the Tire and Loading Informationplacard on the driver's sideB-pillar (Y page 348).Additional tire pressure values for differentloads can also be found on the tire pressuretable on the inside of the fuel filler flap(Y page 348).

X Make sure that the tire pressure is correcton all four wheels.

X Make sure that the SmartKey is in position2 in the ignition lock.

X Press the=or;button on the steer-ing wheel to select the ServiceService menu.

X Press the9 or: button to selectTire PressureTire Pressure.

X Press thea button.The multifunction display shows the cur-rent tire pressure for the individual tires orthe TireTire pressurepressure willwill bebe displayeddisplayedafter driving a few minutesafter driving a few minutes mes-sage.

X Press the: button.The Use Current Pressures as NewUse Current Pressures as NewReference ValuesReference Values message appears inthe multifunction display.

If you wish to confirm the restart:X Press thea button.The Tire Press. Monitor RestartedTire Press. Monitor Restartedmessage appears in the multifunction dis-play.

After driving for a few minutes, the systemchecks whether the current tire pressuresare within the specified range. The new tirepressures are then accepted as referencevalues and monitored.

If you wish to cancel the restart:X Press the% button.The tire pressure values stored at the lastrestart will continue to be monitored.

Radio type approval for the tire pres-sure monitor

Country Radio type approval number

USA FCC ID: MRXMW2433AFCC ID: MRXGG4FCC ID: MRXMC34MA4

Canada IC: 2546A-MW2433AIC: 2546A-GG4IC: 2546A-MC34MA4

Loading the vehicle

Instruction labels for tires and loads

G WARNINGOverloaded tires can overheat, causing ablowout. Overloaded tires can also impair thesteering and driving characteristics and leadto brake failure. There is a risk of accident.Observe the load rating of the tires. The loadrating must be at least half of the GAWR ofyour vehicle. Never overload the tires byexceeding the maximum load.

Two instruction labels on your vehicle showthe maximum possible load.(1) The Tire and Loading Information placard

is on the B-pillar on the driver's side. TheTire and Loading Information placardshows themaximum permissible numberof occupants and the maximum permis-sible vehicle load. It also contains details

Loading the vehicle 355

Wheelsandtires

Z

of the tire sizes and corresponding pres-sures for tires mounted at the factory.

(2) The vehicle identification plate is on theB-pillar on the driver's side. The vehicleidentification plate informs you of thegross vehicle weight rating. It is made upof the vehicle weight, all vehicle occu-pants, the fuel and the cargo. You canalso find information about themaximumgross axle weight rating on the front andrear axle.The maximum gross axle weight rating isthe maximum weight that can be carriedby one axle (front or rear axle). Neverexceed the maximum load or the maxi-mum gross axle weight rating for thefront or rear axle.

: B-pillar, driver's side

Maximum permissible gross vehicleweight rating

X Specification for maximum gross vehicleweight: is listed in the Tire and LoadingInformation placard: "The combined weight

of occupants and cargo should neverexceed XXX kilograms or XXX lbs."

The gross weight of all vehicle occupants,load and luggage must not exceed the speci-fied value.

i The specifications shown on the Tire andLoading Information placard in the illustra-tion are examples. The maximum permis-sible gross vehicle weight rating is vehicle-specific and may differ from that in theillustration. You can find the validmaximumpermissible gross vehicle weight rating foryour vehicle on the Tire and Loading Infor-mation placard.

Number of seats

Maximum number of seats: indicates themaximum number of occupants allowed totravel in the vehicle. This information can befound on the Tire and Loading Informationplacard.

i The specifications shown on the Tire andLoading Information placard in the illustra-tion are examples. The number of seats isvehicle-specific and can differ from thedetails shown. The number of seats in yourvehicle can be found on the Tire and Load-ing Information placard.

356 Loading the vehicleWheelsandtires

Determining the correct load limit

Step-by-step instructionsThe following steps have been developed asrequired of all manufacturers under Title 49,Code of U.S. Federal Regulations, Part 575pursuant to the "National Traffic and MotorVehicle Safety Act of 1966".X Step 1: Locate the statement "The com-bined weight of occupants and cargoshould never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs." onyour vehicle’s Tire and Loading Informationplacard.

X Step 2: Determine the combined weight ofthe driver and passengers that will be ridingin your vehicle.

X Step 3: Subtract the combined weight ofthe driver and passengers from XXX kilo-grams or XXX lbs.

X Step 4: The resulting figure equals theavailable amount of cargo and luggage loadcapacity. For example, if the "XXX" amountequals 1400 lbs and there will be five150-lb passengers in your vehicle, theamount of available cargo and luggage loadcapacity is 650 lbs (1400 - 750 (5 x 150) =650 lbs).

X Step 5:Determine the combined weight ofluggage and cargo being loaded on thevehicle. That weight may not safely exceedthe available cargo and luggage load capa-city calculated in step 4.

Loading the vehicle 357

Wheelsandtires

Z

Example: steps 1 to 3The following table shows examples on how to calculate total and cargo load capacities withvarying seating configurations and number and size of occupants. The following examples usea load limit of 1500 lbs (680 kg). This is for illustration purposes only. Make sure you areusing the actual load limit for your vehicle stated on your vehicle's Tire and Loading Informationplacard (Y page 355).The greater the combined weight of the occupants, the lower the maximum luggage load.Step 1

Example 1 Example 2 Example 3

Combined maximumweight of occupantsand cargo (data fromthe Tire and LoadingInformation placard)

1500 lbs (680 kg) 1500 lbs (680 kg) 1500 lbs (680 kg)

Step 2

Example 1 Example 2 Example 3

Number of people inthe vehicle (driverand occupants)

5 3 1

Distribution of theoccupants

Front: 2Rear: 3

Front: 1Rear: 2

Front: 1

Weight of the occu-pants

Occupant 1: 150 lbs(68 kg)Occupant 2: 180 lbs(82 kg)Occupant 3: 160 lbs(73 kg)Occupant 4: 140 lbs(63 kg)Occupant 5: 120 lbs(54 kg)

Occupant 1: 200 lbs(91 kg)Occupant 2: 190 lbs(86 kg)Occupant 3: 150 lbs(68 kg)

Occupant 1: 150 lbs(68 kg)

Gross weight of alloccupants

750 lbs (340 kg) 540 lbs (245 kg) 150 lbs (68 kg)

358 Loading the vehicleWheelsandtires

Step 3

Example 1 Example 2 Example 3

Permissible load(maximum gross vehi-cleweight rating fromthe Tire and LoadingInformation placardminus the grossweight of all occu-pants)

1500 lbs (680 kg) Ò750 lbs (340 kg) =750 lbs (340 kg)

1500 lbs (680 kg) Ò540 lbs (245 kg)=960 lbs (435 kg)

1500 lbs (680 kg) Ò150 lbs (68 kg) =1350 lbs (612 kg)

Vehicle identification plateEven if you have calculated the total cargocarefully, you should still make sure that thegross vehicle weight rating and the gross axleweight rating are not exceeded. Details canbe found on the vehicle identification plate onthe B-pillar on the driver's side of the vehicle(Y page 355).Permissible Gross Vehicle Weight Rating(GVWR): the gross weight of the vehicle, allpassengers, load and trailer load/noseweight(if applicable) must not exceed the permissi-ble gross vehicle weight.Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR): themaximum permissible weight that can be car-ried by one axle (front or rear axle).To ensure that your vehicle does not exceedthe maximum permissible values (gross vehi-cle weight and maximum gross axle weightrating), have your loaded vehicle (includingdriver, occupants, cargo, and full trailer load ifapplicable) weighed on a suitable vehicleweighbridge.

All about wheels and tires

Uniform Tire Quality Grading Stand-ards

Overview of Tire Quality Grading Stand-ards

Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards areU.S. government specifications. Their pur-pose is to provide drivers with uniform relia-ble information on tire performance data. Tiremanufacturers have to grade tires using threeperformance factors:: treadwear grade,;traction grade and= temperature grade.These regulations do not apply to Canada.Nevertheless, all tires sold in North Americaare provided with the corresponding qualitygrading markings on the sidewall of the tire.Quality grades can be found, where applica-ble, on the tire sidewall between tread shoul-der and maximum section width.

All about wheels and tires 359

Wheelsandtires

Z

Example:RTread wear grade: 200RTraction grade: AARTemperature grade: AAll passenger car tires must conform to thestatutory safety requirements in addition tothese grades.

i The actual values for tires are vehicle-specific and may deviate from the values inthe illustration.

TreadwearThe tread wear grade is a comparative ratingbased on thewear rate of the tire when testedunder controlled conditions on a specifiedU.S. government course. For example, a tiregraded 150 would wear one and one-halftimes as well on the government course as atire graded 100.The relative performance of tires dependsupon the actual conditions of their use, how-ever, and may depart significantly from thenorm due to variations in driving habits, ser-vice practices and differences in road char-acteristics and climate.

Traction

G WARNINGThe traction grade assigned to this tire isbased on straight-ahead braking tractiontests, and does not include acceleration, cor-nering, hydroplaning, or peak traction char-acteristics.

! Avoid wheelspin. This can lead to damageto the drive train.

The traction grades – from highest to lowest –are AA, A, B and C. Those grades representthe tire's ability to stop on wet pavement asmeasured under controlled conditions onspecified government test surfaces of asphaltand concrete. A tire marked C may have poortraction performance.

The safe speed on a wet, snow covered or icyroad is always lower than on dry road surfa-ces.You should pay special attention to road con-ditions when temperatures are around freez-ing point.Mercedes-Benz recommends a minimumtread depth ofã in (4 mm) on all four wintertires. Observe the legally required minimumtire tread depth (Y page 345).Winter tires canreduce the braking distance on snow-coveredsurfaces in comparison with summer tires.The braking distance is still much further thanon surfaces that are not icy or covered withsnow. Take appropriate care when driving.Further information on winter tires (M+Stires) (Y page 346).

Temperature

G WARNINGThe temperature grade for this tire is estab-lished for a tire that is properly inflated andnot overloaded. Excessive speed, underinfla-tion, or excessive loading, either separately orin combination, can cause excessive heatbuild-up and possible tire failure.

The temperature grades are A (the highest), B,and C, representing the tire's resistance tothe generation of heat and its ability to dissi-pate heat when tested under controlled con-ditions on a specified indoor laboratory testwheel. Sustained high temperature can causethe material of the tire to degenerate andreduce tire life, and excessive temperaturecan lead to sudden tire failure. The grade Ccorresponds to a level of performance whichall passenger car tires must meet under theFederal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No.109. Grades B and A represent higher levelsof performance on the laboratory test wheelthan the minimum required by law.

360 All about wheels and tiresWheelsandtires

Tire labeling

Overview

: Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards(Y page 365)

; Department of Transportation, Tire Iden-tification Number (Y page 364)

= Maximum load rating (Y page 363)? Maximum tire pressures (Y page 350)A ManufacturerB Tire material (Y page 364)C Tire size designation, load-bearing capa-

city and speed rating (Y page 361)D Load index (Y page 363)E Tire nameThe markings described above are on the tirein addition to the tire name (sales designa-tion) and the manufacturer's name.

i Tire data is vehicle-specific and may devi-ate from the data in the example.

Tire size designation, load-bearingcapacity and speed rating

G WARNINGExceeding the stated tire load-bearing capa-city and the approved maximum speed couldlead to tire damage or the tire bursting. Thereis a risk of accident.

Therefore, only use tire types and sizesapproved for your vehicle model. Observe thetire load rating and speed rating required foryour vehicle.

: Tire width; Nominal aspect ratio in %= Tire code? Rim diameterA Load bearing indexB Speed ratingGeneral: depending on the manufacturer'sstandards, the size imprinted in the tire wallmay not contain any letters or may containone letter that precedes the size description.If there is no letter preceding the size descrip-tion (as shown above): these are passengervehicle tires according to European manufac-turing standards.If "P" precedes the size description: these arepassenger vehicle tires according to U.S.manufacturing standards.If "LT" precedes the size description: theseare light truck tires according to U.S. manu-facturing standards.If "T" precedes the size description: compactemergency wheels with high tire pressurethat are only designed for temporary use in anemergency.Tire width: tire width: shows the nominaltire width in millimeters.Aspect ratio: aspect ratio; is the size ratiobetween the tire height and tire width and isshown in percent. The aspect ratio is calcu-

All about wheels and tires 361

Wheelsandtires

Z

lated by dividing the tire width by the tireheight.Tire code: tire code= specifies the tire type."R" represents radial tires; "D" representsdiagonal tires; "B" represents diagonal radialtires.Rim diameter: rim diameter? is the diam-eter of the bead seat, not the diameter of therim flange. The rim diameter is specified ininches (in).Load-bearing index: load-bearing indexAis a numerical code that specifies the maxi-mum load-bearing capacity of a tire.Do not overload the tires by exceeding thespecified load limit. The maximum permissi-ble load can be found on the vehicle's Tire andLoading Information placard on the B-pillar onthe driver's side (Y page 355).Example:Load-bearing index 91 indicates a maximumload of 1,356 lb (615 kg) that the tires canbear. For further information on themaximumtire load in kilograms and lbs, see(Y page 363).For further information on the load bearingindex, see "Load index" (Y page 363).Speed rating: speed ratingB specifies theapproved maximum speed of the tire.

i Tire data is vehicle-specific and may devi-ate from the data in the example.

Regardless of the speed rating, alwaysobserve the speed limits. Drive carefully andadapt your driving style to the traffic condi-tions.Summer tires

Index Speed rating

Q up to 100 mph (160 km/h)

R up to 106 mph (170 km/h)

S up to 112 mph (180 km/h)

T up to 118 mph (190 km/h)

Index Speed rating

H up to 130 mph (210 km/h)

V up to 149 mph (240 km/h)

W up to 168 mph (270 km/h)

Y up to 186 mph (300 km/h)

ZR...Y up to 186 mph (300 km/h)

ZR...(..Y) over 186 mph (300 km/h)

ZR over 149 mph (240 km/h)

ROptionally, tires with a maximum speed ofover 149mph (240 km/h)may have "ZR" inthe size description, depending on themanufacturer (e.g. 245/40 ZR 18).RIf a service specification is available, themaximum speed is limited according to thespeed rating in the service specification.Example: 245/40 ZR18 97 Y. In this exam-ple, "97 Y" is the service specification. Theletter "Y" represents the speed rating. Themaximum speed of the tire is limited to186 mph (300 km/h).If the size description of your tire includes"ZR" and there are no service specifica-tions, ask the tire manufacturer in order tofind out the maximum speed.RThe size description for all tires with maxi-mum speeds of over 186 mph (300 km/h)must include "ZR", and the service specifi-cationmust be given in parentheses. Exam-ple: 275/40 ZR 18 (99 Y). Speed rating"(Y)" indicates that the maximum speed ofthe tire is over 186 mph (300 km/h). Askthe tire manufacturer about the maximumspeed.

All-weather tires and winter tires

Index Speed rating

Q M+S1 up to 100 mph (160 km/h)

T M+S1 up to 118 mph (190 km/h)

1 Or M+Si for winter tires.

362 All about wheels and tiresWheelsandtires

Index Speed rating

H M+S1 up to 130 mph (210 km/h)

V M+S1 up to 149 mph (240 km/h)

i Not all tires with theM+Smarking providethe driving characteristics of winter tires. Inaddition to the M+S marking, winter tiresalso have thei snowflake symbol onthe tire wall. Tires with this marking fulfillthe requirements of the Rubber Manufac-turers Association (RMA) and the RubberAssociation of Canada (RAC) regarding thetire traction on snow. They have been espe-cially developed for driving on snow.

An electronic speed limiter prevents yourvehicle from exceeding the following speeds:Rall vehicles (except AMG vehicles):130 mph (210 km/h)RAMG vehicles: 155 mph (250 km/h)RAMG vehicles with Performance Package:186 mph (300 km/h)

The speed rating of tires mounted at the fac-tory may be higher than the maximum speedthat the electronic speed limiter permits.Make sure that your tires have the requiredspeed rating, e.g. when buying new tires. Therequired speed rating for your vehicle can befound in the "Tires" section (Y page 372).Further information about reading tire datacan be obtained from any qualified specialistworkshop.

Load index

In addition to the load bearing index, loadindex: may be imprinted after the lettersthat identify speed indexB on the sidewall ofthe tire (Y page 361).RIf no specification is given: no text (as in theexample above), represents a standardload (SL) tireRXL or Extra Load: represents a reinforcedtireRLight Load: represents a light load tireRC, D, E: represents a load range thatdepends on the maximum load that the tirecan carry at a certain pressure

i Tire data is vehicle-specific and may devi-ate from the data in the example.

Maximum load rating

Maximum tire load: is the maximum per-missible weight for which the tire is approved.Do not overload the tires by exceeding thespecified load limit. The maximum permissi-

1 Or M+Si for winter tires.

All about wheels and tires 363

Wheelsandtires

Z

ble load can be found on the vehicle's Tire andLoading Information placard on the B-pillar onthe driver's side (Y page 355).

i The actual values for tires are vehicle-specific and may deviate from the values inthe illustration.

DOT, Tire Identification Number (TIN)US tire regulations stipulate that every tiremanufacturer or retreader must imprint a TINin or on the sidewall of each tire produced.

The TIN is a unique identification number. TheTIN enables the tiremanufacturers or retread-ers to inform purchasers of recalls and othersafety-relevant matters. It makes it possiblefor the purchaser to easily identify the affec-ted tires.The TIN is made up of manufacturer identifi-cation code;, tire size=, tire type code?and manufacturing dateA.DOT (Department of Transportation): tiresymbol: marks that the tire complies withthe requirements of the U.S. Department ofTransportation.Manufacturer identification code: manu-facturer identification code; providesdetails on the tire manufacturer. New tireshave a code with two symbols. Retreadedtires have a code with four symbols.For further information about retreaded tires,see (Y page 344).Tire size: identifier= describes the tire size.

Tire type code: tire type code? can be usedby the manufacturer as a code to describespecific characteristics of the tire.Date of manufacture: date of manufactureA provides information about the age of atire. The first and second positions representthe week of manufacture, starting with "01"for the first calendar week. Positions threeand four represent the year of manufacture.For example, a tire that is marked "2614" wasmanufactured in week 26 in 2014.

i Tire data is vehicle-specific and may devi-ate from the data in the example.

Tire characteristics

This information describes the type of tirecord and the number of layers in sidewall:and under tire tread;.

i Tire data is vehicle-specific and may devi-ate from the data in the example.

Definition of terms for tires and loading

Tire ply composition and material usedDescribes the number of plies or the numberof layers of rubber-coated fabric in the tiretread and sidewall. These are made of steel,nylon, polyester and other materials.

BarMetric unit for tire pressure. 14.5038 poundsper square inch (psi) and 100 kilopascals(kPa) are the equivalent of 1 bar.

364 All about wheels and tiresWheelsandtires

DOT (Department of Transportation)DOT-marked tires fulfill the requirements ofthe U S Department of Transportation.

Normal occupant weightThe number of occupants for which the vehi-cle is designed multiplied by 68 kilograms(150 lbs).

Uniform Tire Quality Grading StandardsA uniform standard to grade the quality oftireswith regards to tread quality, tire tractionand temperature characteristics. The qualitygrading assessment is made by the manufac-turer following specifications from the U.S.government. The ratings are molded into thesidewall of the tire.

Recommended tire pressuresThe recommended tire pressure applies tothe tires mounted at the factory.The Tire and Loading Information placard con-tains the recommended tire pressures forcold tires on a fully loaded vehicle and for themaximum permissible vehicle speed.The tire pressure table contains the recom-mended pressures for cold tires for variousoperating conditions, i.e. differing load andspeed conditions.

Increased vehicle weight due to optionalequipmentThe combined weight of all standard andoptional equipment available for the vehicle,regardless of whether it is actually installedon the vehicle or not.

RimThis is the part of the wheel on which the tireis mounted.

GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating)The GAWR is the maximum gross axle weightrating. The actual load on an axle must neverexceed the gross axle weight rating. Thegross axle weight rating can be found on thevehicle identification plate on the B-pillar onthe driver's side.

Speed ratingThe speed rating is part of the tire identifica-tion. It specifies the speed range forwhich thetire is approved.

GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight)The gross vehicle weight includes the weightof the vehicle including fuel, tools, the sparewheel, accessories installed, occupants, lug-gage and the drawbar noseweight, if applica-ble. The gross vehicleweightmust not exceedthe gross vehicle weight rating GVWR asspecified on the vehicle identification plate onthe B-pillar on the driver's side.

GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating)The GVWR is the maximum permissible grossweight of a fully loaded vehicle (the weight ofthe vehicle including all accessories, occu-pants, fuel, luggage and the drawbar nose-weight, if applicable). The gross vehicleweight rating is specified on the vehicle iden-tification plate on the B-pillar on the driver'sside.

Maximum loaded vehicle weightThe maximum weight is the sum of:Rthe curb weight of the vehicleRthe weight of the accessoriesRthe load limitRthe weight of the factory installed optionalequipment

Kilopascal (kPa)Metric unit for tire pressure. 6.9 kPa corre-sponds to 1 psi. Another unit for tire pressureis bar. 100 kilopascals (kPa) are the equiva-lent of 1 bar.

Load indexIn addition to the load-bearing index, the loadindexmay also be imprinted on the sidewall ofthe tire. This specifies the load-bearing capa-city more precisely.

All about wheels and tires 365

Wheelsandtires

Z

Curb weightThe weight of a vehicle with standard equip-ment including themaximum capacity of fuel,oil and coolant. It also includes the air-condi-tioning system and optional equipment ifthese are installed in the vehicle, but does notinclude passengers or luggage.

Maximum load ratingThe maximum load rating is the maximumpermissible weight in kilograms or lbs forwhich a tire is approved.

Maximum permissible tire pressureMaximum permissible tire pressure for onetire.

Maximum load on one tireMaximum load on one tire. This is calculatedby dividing themaximum axle load of one axleby two.

PSI (pounds per square inch)A standard unit of measure for tire pressure.

Aspect ratioRelationship between tire height and tirewidth in percent.

Tire pressurePressure inside the tire applying an outwardforce to every square inch of the tire's sur-face. The tire pressure is specified in poundsper square inch (psi), in kilopascal (kPa) or inbar. The tire pressure should only be correc-ted when the tires are cold.

Cold tire pressureThe tires are cold:Rif the vehicle has been parked withoutdirect sunlight on the tires for at least threehours andRif the vehicle has not been driven furtherthan 1 mile (1.6 km)

TreadThe part of the tire that comes into contactwith the road.

BeadThe tire bead ensures that the tire sitssecurely on the wheel. There are several steelwires in the bead to prevent the tire fromcoming loose from the wheel rim.

SidewallThe part of the tire between the tread and thebead.

Weight of optional extrasThe combined weight of those optional extrasthat weigh more than the replaced standardparts and more than 2.3 kg (5 lbs). Theseoptional extras, such as high-performancebrakes, level control, a roof rack or a high-performance battery, are not included in thecurb weight and the weight of the accesso-ries.

TIN (Tire Identification Number)This is a unique identifier which can be usedby a tire manufacturer to identify tires, forexample for a product recall, and thus identifythe purchasers. The TIN is made up of themanufacturer's identity code, tire size, tiretype code and the manufacturing date.

Load bearing indexThe load bearing index (also load index) is acode that contains themaximum load bearingcapacity of a tire.

TractionTraction is the result of friction between thetires and the road surface.

Tread wear indicatorsNarrow bars (tread wear bars) that are dis-tributed over the tire tread. If the tire tread islevel with the bars, the wear limit ofá in(1.6 mm) has been reached.

366 All about wheels and tiresWheelsandtires

Occupant distributionThe distribution of occupants in a vehicle attheir designated seating positions.

Total load limitNominal load and luggage load plus 68 kg(150 lbs) multiplied by the number of seats inthe vehicle.

Changing a wheel

Flat tireThe "Breakdown assistance" section(Y page 327) contains information and noteson how to deal with a flat tire. Information ondriving with MOExtended tires in the event ofa flat tire can be found under "MOExtendedtires (tires with run-flat characteristics"(Y page 327).Vehicle with emergency spare wheel: inthe event of a flat tire, the emergency sparewheel ismounted as described under "Mount-ing a wheel" (Y page 368).

Rotating the wheels

G WARNINGInterchanging the front and rear wheels mayseverely impair the driving characteristics ifthe wheels or tires have different dimensions.The wheel brakes or suspension componentsmay also be damaged. There is a risk of acci-dent.Rotate front and rearwheels only if thewheelsand tires are of the same dimensions.

! On vehicles equipped with a tire pressuremonitor, electronic components are loca-ted in the wheel.Tire-mounting tools should not be usednear the valve. This could damage the elec-tronic components.Only have tires changed at a qualified spe-cialist workshop.

Always observe the instructions and safetynotes in the "Mounting a wheel" section(Y page 368).The wear patterns on the front and rear tiresdiffer, depending on the operating conditions.Rotate the wheels before a clear wear patternhas formed on the tires. Front tires typicallywear more on the shoulders and the rear tiresin the center.If your vehicle's tire configuration allows, youcan rotate the wheels according to the inter-vals in the tire manufacturer's warranty bookin your vehicle documents. If no warrantybook is available, the tires should be rotatedevery 3,000 to 6,000 miles (5,000 to10,000 km), or earlier if tire wear requires. Donot change the direction of wheel rotation.Clean the contact surfaces of the wheel andthe brake disc thoroughly every time a wheelis rotated. Check the tire pressure and, if nec-essary, restart the tire pressure loss warningsystem (Y page 352) or the tire pressuremonitor (Y page 355).

Direction of rotationTires with a specified direction of rotationhave additional benefits, e.g. if there is a riskof hydroplaning. These advantages can onlybe gained if the tires are installed correspond-ing to the direction of rotation.An arrow on the sidewall of the tire indicatesits correct direction of rotation.

Storing wheelsStorewheels that are not being used in a cool,dry and preferably dark place. Protect thetires from oil, grease, gasoline and diesel.

Changing a wheel 367

Wheelsandtires

Z

Mounting a wheel

Preparing the vehicleX Stop the vehicle on solid, non-slippery andlevel ground.

X Apply the parking brake.X Bring the front wheels into the straight-ahead position.

X Shift the transmission to position P.X Vehicles with AIRMATIC: make sure that"normal" level is selected (Y page 193).

X Switch off the engine.X Remove the SmartKey from the ignitionlock.

or, on vehicles with KEYLESS‑GO:X Open the driver's door.The on-board electronics now have status0. This is the same as the SmartKey havingbeen removed.

X Remove the Start/Stop button from theignition lock (Y page 150).

X If included in the vehicle equipment,remove the tire-change tool kit from thevehicle (Y page 326).

X Safeguard the vehicle against rolling away.

Securing the vehicle to prevent it fromrolling away

If your vehicle is equippedwith awheel chock,it can be found in the tire-change tool kit(Y page 326).The folding wheel chock is an additionalsafety measure to prevent the vehicle from

rolling away, for example when changing awheel.X Fold both plates upwards:.X Fold out lower plate;.X Guide the lugs on the lower plate fully intothe openings in base plate=.

Securing the vehicle on level groundX On level ground: place chocks or othersuitable items under the front and rear ofthe wheel that is diagonally opposite thewheel you wish to change.

Securing the vehicle on slight downhill gradientsX On light downhill gradients: placechocks or other suitable items in front ofthe wheels of the front and rear axle.

Raising the vehicle

G WARNINGIf you do not position the jack correctly at theappropriate jacking point of the vehicle, thejack could tip over with the vehicle raised.There is a risk of injury.

368 Changing a wheelWheelsandtires

Only position the jack at the appropriate jack-ing point of the vehicle. The base of the jackmust be positioned vertically, directly underthe jacking point of the vehicle.

! The jack is designed exclusively for jack-ing up the vehicle at the jacking points.Otherwise, your vehicle could be damaged.

Observe the following when raising the vehi-cle:RTo raise the vehicle, only use the vehicle-specific jack that has been tested andapproved by Mercedes-Benz. If used incor-rectly, the jack could tip over with the vehi-cle raised.RThe jack is designed only to raise and holdthe vehicle for a short time while a wheelis being changed. It is not suited for per-forming maintenance work under the vehi-cle.RAvoid changing the wheel on uphill anddownhill slopes.RBefore raising the vehicle, secure it fromrolling away by applying the parking brakeand inserting wheel chocks. Never disen-gage the parking brake while the vehicle israised.RThe jack must be placed on a firm, flat andnon-slip surface. On a loose surface, alarge, flat, load-bearing underlay must beused. On a slippery surface, a non-slipunderlay must be used, e.g. rubber mats.RDo not use wooden blocks or similarobjects as a jack underlay. Otherwise, thejack will not be able to achieve its load-bearing capacity due to the restrictedheight.RMake sure that the distance between theunderside of the tires and the ground doesnot exceed 1.2 in (3 cm).RNever place your hands and feet under theraised vehicle.RDo not lie under the vehicle.RDo not start the engine when the vehicle israised.

RDo not open or close a door or the trunk lidwhen the vehicle is raised.RMake sure that no persons are present inthe vehicle when the vehicle is raised.

Vehicles with alloy wheels and hub caps:the wheel bolts are covered by a hub cap.Before you can unscrew the wheel bolts, youmust remove the hub cap.

X To remove: remove socket; and lugwrench= (Y page 326).

X Position socket; on hub cap:.X Attach lug wrench= to socket; and turnhub cap: counter-clockwise.

X Remove hub cap:.X To install: before installing, check hubcap: and the wheel area for soiling andclean if necessary.

X Put hub cap: in position and turn until it isin the right position.

X Position socket; on hub cap:.X Attach lug wrench= to socket; andtighten hub cap:.The tightening torque must be18 lb-ft (25 Nm).

i Note that the hub cap should be tight-ened to the specified torque of 18 lb-ft(25 Nm). Mercedes-Benz recommendsthat you have the hub cap installed at aqualified specialist workshop.

Changing a wheel 369

Wheelsandtires

Z

X Using a lug wrench=, loosen the bolts onthe wheel you wish to change by about onefull turn. Do not unscrew the bolts com-pletely.

Jacking points

X Position jackA at jacking point?.

X Make sure the foot of the jack is directlybeneath the jacking point.

X Turn crankB clockwise until jackA sitscompletely on jacking point?. The base ofthe jack must lie evenly on the ground.

X Turn crankB until the tire is raised a max-imum of 1.2 in (3 cm) off the ground.

Removing a wheel

! AMGvehiclewith ceramic brake discs:during removal and repositioning of thewheel, the wheel rim can strike theceramic-brake disc and damage it. There-fore, take precautions and have a secondperson assist you. Alternatively, you canuse a second alignment bolt.

! Do not place wheel bolts in sand or on adirty surface. The bolt and wheel hubthreads could otherwise be damaged whenyou screw them in.

370 Changing a wheelWheelsandtires

X Unscrew the uppermost wheel bolt com-pletely.

X Screw alignment bolt: into the threadinstead of the wheel bolt.

X Unscrew the remaining wheel bolts fully.X Remove the wheel.

Mounting a new wheel

G WARNINGOiled or greased wheel bolts or damagedwheel bolts/hub threads can cause the wheelbolts to come loose. As a result, you couldlose a wheel while driving. There is a risk ofaccident.Never oil or greasewheel bolts. In the event ofdamage to the threads, contact a qualifiedspecialist workshop immediately. Have thedamaged wheel bolts or hub threadsreplaced/renewed. Do not continue driving.

G WARNINGIf you tighten the wheel bolts or wheel nutswhen the vehicle is raised, the jack could tipover. There is a risk of injury.Only tighten the wheel bolts or wheel nutswhen the vehicle is on the ground.

Always pay attention to the instructions andsafety notes in the "Changing a wheel" sec-tion (Y page 367).Only use wheel bolts that have been designedfor the wheel and the vehicle. For safety rea-sons, Mercedes-Benz recommends that youonly use wheel bolts which have beenapproved forMercedes-Benz vehicles and therespective wheel.

! AMGvehiclewith ceramic brake discs:during removal and repositioning of thewheel, the wheel rim can strike theceramic-brake disc and damage it. There-fore, take precautions and have a secondperson assist you. Alternatively, you canuse a second alignment bolt.

! To prevent damage to the paintwork, holdthe wheel securely against the wheel hubwhile screwing in the first wheel bolt.

X Clean the wheel and wheel hub contactsurfaces.

X Slide the wheel to be mounted onto thealignment bolt and push it on.

X Tighten the wheel bolts until they are fin-ger-tight.

X Unscrew the alignment bolt.X Tighten the last wheel bolt until it is finger-tight.

X Vehicles with a collapsible sparewheel:inflate the collapsible spare wheel(Y page 381).Only then lower the vehicle.

Lowering the vehicle

G WARNINGThe wheels could work loose if the wheel nutsand bolts are not tightened to the specifiedtightening torque. There is a risk of accident.Have the tightening torque immediatelychecked at a qualified specialist workshopafter a wheel is changed.

! Vehicles with a collapsible sparewheel: before lowering the vehicle, inflatethe collapsible spare wheel with the tireinflation compressor. The wheel rim couldotherwise be damaged.

Changing a wheel 371

Wheelsandtires

Z

X Turn the crank of the jack counter-clock-wise until the vehicle is once again standingfirmly on the ground.

X Place the jack to one side.

X Tighten the wheel bolts evenly in a cross-wise pattern in the sequence indicated (:toA). The specified tightening torque is96 lb-ft (130 Nm).

X Turn the jack back to its initial position.X Stow the jack and the rest of the vehicletools in the trunk again.

X Check the tire pressure of the newly moun-ted wheel and adjust it if necessary.Observe the recommended tire pressure(Y page 348).

i Vehicles with tire pressure monitor: allwheels mounted must be equipped withfunctioning sensors.

Wheel and tire combinations

General notes! For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz rec-ommends that you only use tires andwheels which have been approved byMercedes-Benz specifically for your vehi-cle.

These tires have been specially adapted foruse with the control systems, such as ABSor ESP®, and are marked as follows:RMO = Mercedes-Benz OriginalRMOE=Mercedes-BenzOriginal Extended(tires featuring run-flat characteristics)RMO1=Mercedes-Benz Original (only cer-tain AMG tires)

Mercedes-Benz Original Extended tiresmay only be used on wheels that have beenspecifically approved by Mercedes-Benz.Only use tires, wheels or accessories tes-ted and approved by Mercedes-Benz. Cer-tain characteristics, e.g. handling, vehiclenoise emissions or fuel consumption, mayotherwise be adversely affected. In addi-tion, when driving with a load, tire dimen-sion variations could cause the tires tocome into contact with the bodywork andaxle components. This could result in dam-age to the tires or the vehicle.Mercedes-Benz accepts no liability fordamage resulting from the use of tires,wheels or accessories other than those tes-ted and approved.Information on tires, wheels and approvedcombinations can be obtained from anyqualified specialist workshop.

Overview of abbreviations used in the follow-ing tire tables:RBA: both axlesRFA: front axleRRA: rear axleThe recommended pressures for variousoperating conditions can be found:Ron the Tire and Loading Information placardwith the recommended tire pressures onthe B-pillar on the driver's sideRin the tire pressure table on the inside of thefuel filler flap

Observe the notes on recommended tirepressures under various operating conditions(Y page 348).

372 Wheel and tire combinationsWheelsandtires

Check tire pressures regularly, and only whenthe tires are cold. Comply with the mainte-nance recommendations of the tire manufac-turer in the vehicle document wallet.Notes on the vehicle equipment – alwaysequip the vehicle with:Rtires of the same size on a given axle (left/right)Rthe same type of tires at a given time (sum-mer tires, winter tires, MOExtended tires)Exception: it is permissible to install a dif-ferent type or make in the event of a flattire. Observe the "MOExtended tires (tireswith run-flat characteristics" section(Y page 327).

Vehicles equippedwithMOExtended tires arenot equipped with a TIREFIT kit at the factory.It is therefore recommended that you addi-tionally equip your vehicle with a TIREFIT kit ifyou mount tires that do not feature run-flatproperties, e.g. winter tires. A TIREFIT kit maybe obtained from a qualified specialist work-shop.

i Not all wheel and tire combinations areavailable at the factory for all countries.

i On the following pages, you can find infor-mation on approved wheel rims and tiresizes for equipping your vehicle with wintertires. Winter tires are not available at thefactory as standard equipment or optionalextras.If you would like to equip your vehicle withapproved winter tires, you may also, in cer-tain circumstances, require rims of theappropriate size. The size of the approvedwinter tires may deviate from that of thestandard tires. This is dependent on themodel and the equipment installed at thefactory.The tires and wheel rims, as well as furtherinformation, can be obtained at a qualifiedspecialist workshop.

Wheel and tire combinations 373

Wheelsandtires

Z

Tires

CLS 400

Summer tiresR 18

Tires Alloy wheels

BA: 255/40 R18 99 Y XL2 BA: 8.5 J x 18 H2Wheel offset: 1.36 in (34.5 mm)

FA: 255/40 R18 99 Y XL2

RA: 285/35 R18 97 Y2, 3FA: 8.5 J x 18 H2Wheel offset: 1.36 in (34.5 mm)RA: 9.5 J x 18 H2Wheel offset: 1.89 in (48 mm)

R 19

Tires Alloy wheels

FA: 255/35 R19 96 Y XL4

RA: 285/30 R19 98 Y XL3, 4FA: 8.5 J x 19 H2Wheel offset: 1.36 in (34.5 mm)RA: 9.5 J x 19 H2Wheel offset: 1.89 in (48 mm)

All-weather tiresR 18

Tires Alloy wheels

FA: 255/40 R18 99 H XL M+SRA: 285/35 R18 97 H XL M+S3, 4

FA: 8.5 J x 18 H2Wheel offset: 1.36 in (34.5 mm)RA: 9.5 J x 18 H2Wheel offset: 1.89 in (48 mm)

Winter tiresR 18

Tires Alloy wheels

BA: 255/40 R18 99 V XL M+Si2 BA: 8.5 J x 18 H2Wheel offset: 1.36 in (34.5 mm)

2 Available as MOExtended tires.3 Use of snow chains not permitted. Observe the notes in the "Snow chains" section.4 Observe the notes on "Large wheels" under "General notes" in "Wheel/tire combinations".

374 Wheel and tire combinationsWheelsandtires

CLS 400 4MATIC

Summer tiresR 18

Tires Alloy wheels

BA: 255/40 R18 99 Y XL2 BA: 8.5 J x 18 H2Wheel offset: 1.36 in (34.5 mm)

FA: 255/40 R18 99 Y XL2

RA: 285/35 R18 97 Y2, 3FA: 8.5 J x 18 H2Wheel offset: 1.36 in (34.5 mm)RA: 9.5 J x 18 H2Wheel offset: 1.89 in (48 mm)

R 19

Tires Alloy wheels

FA: 255/35 R19 96 Y XL4

RA: 285/30 R19 98 Y XL3, 4FA: 8.5 J x 19 H2Wheel offset: 1.36 in (34.5 mm)RA: 9.5 J x 19 H2Wheel offset: 1.89 in (48 mm)

All-weather tiresR 18

Tires Alloy wheels

FA: 255/40 R18 99 H XL M+SRA: 285/35 R18 97 H XL M+S3, 4

FA: 8.5 J x 18 H2Wheel offset: 1.36 in (34.5 mm)RA: 9.5 J x 18 H2Wheel offset: 1.89 in (48 mm)

Winter tiresR 18

Tires Alloy wheels

BA: 255/40 R18 99 V XL M+Si2 BA: 8.5 J x 18 H2Wheel offset: 1.36 in (34.5 mm)

2 Available as MOExtended tires.3 Use of snow chains not permitted. Observe the notes in the "Snow chains" section.4 Observe the notes on "Large wheels" under "General notes" in "Wheel/tire combinations".

Wheel and tire combinations 375

Wheelsandtires

Z

CLS 550

Summer tiresR18

Tires Alloy wheels

FA: 255/40 R18 99 Y XL2

RA: 285/35 R18 97 Y2, 3FA: 8.5 J x 18 H2Wheel offset: 1.36 in (34.5 mm)RA: 9.5 J x 18 H2Wheel offset: 1.89 in (48 mm)

R19

Tires Alloy wheels

FA: 255/35 R19 96 Y XLRA: 285/30 R19 98 Y XL3

FA: 8.5 J x 19 H2Wheel offset: 1.36 in (34.5 mm)RA: 9.5 J x 19 H2Wheel offset: 1.89 in (48 mm)

All-weather tiresR18

Tires Alloy wheels

FA: 255/40 R18 99 H XL M+SRA: 285/35 R18 97 H M+S3

FA: 8.5 J x 18 H2Wheel offset: 1.36 in (34.5 mm)RA: 9.5 J x 18 H2Wheel offset: 1.89 in (48 mm)

Winter tiresR18

Tires Alloy wheels

BA: 255/40 R18 99 V XL M+Si3 BA: 8.5 J x 18 H2Wheel offset: 1.36 in (34.5 mm)

2 Available as MOExtended tires.3 Use of snow chains not permitted. Observe the notes in the "Snow chains" section.

376 Wheel and tire combinationsWheelsandtires

CLS 550 4MATIC

Summer tiresR18

Tires Alloy wheels

FA: 255/40 R18 99 Y XL2

RA: 285/35 R18 97 Y2, 3FA: 8.5 J x 18 H2Wheel offset: 1.36 in (34.5 mm)RA: 9.5 J x 18 H2Wheel offset: 1.89 in (48 mm)

R19

Tires Alloy wheels

FA: 255/35 R19 96 Y XLRA: 285/30 R19 98 Y XL3

FA: 8.5 J x 19 H2Wheel offset: 1.36 in (34.5 mm)RA: 9.5 J x 19 H2Wheel offset: 1.89 in (48 mm)

All-weather tiresR18

Tires Alloy wheels

FA: 255/40 R18 99 H XL M+SRA: 285/35 R18 97 H M+S3

FA: 8.5 J x 18 H2Wheel offset: 1.36 in (34.5 mm)RA: 9.5 J x 18 H2Wheel offset: 1.89 in (48 mm)

Winter tiresR18

Tires Alloy wheels

BA: 255/40 R18 99 V XL M+Si2 BA: 8.5 J x 18 H2Wheel offset: 1.36 in (34.5 mm)

2 Available as MOExtended tires.3 Use of snow chains not permitted. Observe the notes in the "Snow chains" section.

Wheel and tire combinations 377

Wheelsandtires

Z

CLS 63 AMG 4MATIC

Summer tiresR19

Tires Alloy wheels

FA: 255/35 ZR19 (96 Y) XLRA: 285/30 ZR19 (98 Y) XL3

FA: 9.0 J x 19 H2Wheel offset: 1.46 in (37 mm)RA: 10.0 J x 19 H2Wheel offset: 1.85 in (47 mm)

Winter tiresR19

Tires Alloy wheels

FA: 255/35 R19 96 V XL M+Si

RA: 255/35 R19 96 V XL M+Si

FA: 9.0 J x 19 H2Wheel offset: 1.46 in (37 mm)RA: 9.5 J x 19 H2Wheel offset: 2.05 in (52 mm)

FA: 255/35 R19 96 V XL M+Si

RA: 285/30 R19 98 V XL M+Si3

FA: 9.0 J x 19 H2Wheel offset: 1.46 in (37 mm)RA: 10.0 J x 19 H2Wheel offset: 1.85 in (47 mm)

CLS 63 AMG S-MODEL 4MATIC

Summer tiresR19

Tires Alloy wheels

FA: 255/35 ZR19 (96 Y) XL4

RA: 285/30 ZR19 (98 Y) XL3, 4FA: 9.0 J x 19 H2Wheel offset: 1.46 in (37 mm)RA: 10.0 J x 19 H2Wheel offset: 1.85 in (47 mm)

3 Use of snow chains not permitted. Observe the notes in the "Snow chains" section.4 Observe the notes on "Large wheels" under "General notes" in "Wheel/tire combinations".

378 Wheel and tire combinationsWheelsandtires

Winter tiresR19

Tires Alloy wheels

FA: 255/35 R19 96 V XL M+Si4

RA: 255/35 R19 96 V XL M+Si4, 5

FA: 9.0 J x 19 H2Wheel offset: 1.46 in (37 mm)RA: 9.5 J x 19 H2Wheel offset: 2.05 in (52 mm)

FA: 255/35 R19 96 V XL M+Si4

RA: 285/30 R19 98 V XL M+Si3, 4

FA: 9.0 J x 19 H2Wheel offset: 1.46 in (37 mm)RA: 10.0 J x 19 H2Wheel offset: 1.85 in (47 mm)

Emergency spare wheel

Important safety notes

G WARNINGThe wheel or tire size as well as the tire type ofthe spare wheel or emergency spare wheeland the wheel to be replaced may differ.Mounting an emergency spare wheel mayseverely impair the driving characteristics.There is a risk of an accident.To avoid hazardous situations:Radapt your driving style accordingly anddrive carefully.Rnever mount more than one spare wheel oremergency spare wheel that differs in size.Ronly use a spare wheel or emergency sparewheel of a different size briefly.Rdo not switch ESP® off.Rhave a spare wheel or emergency sparewheel of a different size replaced at thenearest qualified specialist workshop.Observe that the wheel and tire dimensionsas well as the tire type must be correct.

When using an emergency spare wheel orspare wheel of a different size, you must not

exceed the maximum speed of 50 mph(80 km/h).Snow chains must not be mounted on emer-gency spare wheels.

General notesYou should regularly check the pressure ofthe emergency spare wheel, particularly priorto long trips, and correct the pressure as nec-essary (Y page 348). The value on thewheel isvalid. In addition, the emergency spare wheeltire pressure can be found under "Technicaldata" (Y page 382).An emergency spare wheel may also bemounted against the direction of rotation.Observe the time restriction on use as well asthe speed limitation specified on the emer-gency spare wheel.Replace the tires after six years at the latest,regardless of wear. This also applies to theemergency spare wheel.

i When you are driving with the collapsiblespare wheel mounted, the tire pressureloss warning system or the tire pressuremonitor cannot function reliably. Onlyrestart the tire pressure loss warning sys-

4 Observe the notes on "Large wheels" under "General notes" in "Wheel/tire combinations".5 Only fine-link snow chains are permitted.3 Use of snow chains not permitted. Observe the notes in the "Snow chains" section.

Emergency spare wheel 379

Wheelsandtires

Z

tem/the tire pressure monitor when thedamaged wheel has been replaced with anew wheel.Vehicles with tire pressure monitor: aftermounting an emergency spare wheel, thesystemmay still display the tire pressure ofthe removed wheel for a few minutes. Thevalue displayed for the mounted emer-gency spare wheel is not the same as thecurrent tire pressure of the emergencyspare wheel.

"Minispare" emergency sparewheel/collapsible spare wheel

Removing the "Minispare" emergencyspare wheel

The emergency spare wheel can be found inthe stowage well under the trunk floor.X Lift the trunk floor upwards (Y page 292).X Turn stowage well; counter-clockwiseand remove it together with vehicle tool kittray:.

X Remove "Minispare" emergency sparewheel=.

Removing the collapsible spare wheel(AMG vehicles)

The emergency spare wheel can be found inthe stowage well under the trunk floor.X Lift the trunk floor upwards (Y page 292).X Reach into cutout: in the tool holder andlift it up.

X Remove collapsible spare wheel;.Always observe the instructions and safetynotes in the "Mounting a wheel" section(Y page 368).

Stowing a used collapsible sparewheel! Only place the collapsible spare wheel inthe vehicle when it is dry. Otherwise, mois-ture may get into the vehicle.

Take the following steps to stow a used col-lapsible spare wheel. It will not otherwise fitinto the spare wheel well. Mercedes-Benzrecommends that you have this work per-formed at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g.at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.X Unscrew the valve cap from the valve.X Use the back of the valve cap to unscrewthe valve insert from the valve and releasethe air.i Fully deflating the tires can take a fewminutes.

X Screw the valve insert back into the valve.X Screw the valve cap back on.

380 Emergency spare wheelWheelsandtires

X Remove the protective sheet from the vehi-cle tool kit and pull it over the collapsiblespare wheel.

X Stow the collapsible spare wheel in theemergency spare wheel well under thetrunk.

Inflating the collapsible spare wheel! Inflate the collapsible spare wheel usingthe tire inflation compressor before lower-ing the vehicle. The wheel rim could other-wise be damaged.

! Do not operate the tire inflation compres-sor for longer than eight minutes at a timewithout a break. It may otherwise overheat.The tire inflation compressor can be oper-ated again once it has cooled down.

X Mount the collapsible spare wheel asdescribed (Y page 368).The collapsible spare wheel must be moun-ted before it is inflated.

X Pull connector? and the hose out of thehousing.

X Remove the cap from the valve on the col-lapsible spare wheel.

X Screw union nut: of the hose onto thevalve.

X Make sure on/off switchA of the tireinflation compressor is set to 0.

X Insert connector? into a 12 V socket(Y page 298) in your vehicle.

X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 in the igni-tion lock (Y page 149).

X Press on/off switchA on the tire inflationcompressor to I.The tire inflation compressor is switchedon. The tire is inflated. The tire pressure isshown on pressure gauge=.

X Inflate the tire to the specified tire pres-sure.The specified tire pressure is printed on theyellow label of the emergency spare wheel.

X When the specified tire pressure has beenreached, press on/off switchA on theelectric air pump to 0.The tire inflation compressor is switchedoff.

X Turn the SmartKey to position 0 in the igni-tion lock.

X If the tire pressure is higher than the speci-fied pressure, press pressure release valvebutton; until the correct tire pressure hasbeen reached.

X Unscrew air hose union nut: from thevalve.

X Screw the cap onto the valve of the col-lapsible spare wheel again.

X Stow connector? and the hose in thelower section of the tire inflation compres-sor.

X Stow the tire inflation compressor in thevehicle.

Emergency spare wheel 381

Wheelsandtires

Z

Technical data

All vehicles (except AMG vehicles)

"Minispare" emergency spare wheel

Tires Alloy wheels

T 155/60 R18 107 MTire pressure: 420 kPa (4.2 bar/61 psi)

4.5 B x 18 H2Wheel offset: 1.42 in (36 mm)

AMG vehicles

Collapsible spare wheel

Tires Alloy wheels

175/50 – 19 97 PTire pressure: 350 kPa (3.5 bar/51 psi)

6.5 B x 19 H2Wheel offset: 0.55 in (14 mm)

382 Emergency spare wheelWheelsandtires

Useful information ............................ 384Information regarding technicaldata .................................................... 384Vehicle electronics ........................... 384Identification plates ......................... 386Service products and filling capaci-ties ..................................................... 387Vehicle data ....................................... 392

383

Technicaldata

Useful information

i This Operator's Manual describes allmodels and all standard and optional equip-ment of your vehicle available at the time ofpublication of the Operator's Manual.Country-specific differences are possible.Please note that your vehicle may not beequipped with all features described. Thisalso applies to safety-related systems andfunctions.

i Read the information on qualified special-ist workshops (Y page 26).

Information regarding technical data

i The data stated here specifically refers toa vehicle with standard equipment. Consultan authorized Mercedes-Benz Center forthe data for all vehicle variants and trimlevels.

Vehicle electronics

Retrofitting two-way radios andmobile phones (RF transmitters)

G WARNINGThe electromagnetic radiation from modifiedor incorrectly retrofitted RF-transmitters caninterfere with the vehicle electronics. This cancompromise the operational safety of thevehicle. There is a risk of an accident.You should have all work to electrical andelectronic equipment carried out at a qualifiedspecialist workshop.

G WARNINGThe electromagnetic radiation from incor-rectly operated RF transmitters can interferewith the vehicle electronics, for example:Rif the RF transmitter is not connected withan exterior antennaRthe exterior antenna has been installedincorrectly or is not a low-reflection type

This can compromise the operational safetyof the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident.Have the low-reflection exterior antennamounted at a qualified specialist workshop.When operating RF transmitters in the vehi-cle, always connect them with the low-reflec-tion exterior antenna.

! The operating permitmay be invalidated ifthe instructions for installation and use ofRF transmitters are not observed.In particular, the following conditions mustbe complied with:Ronly approved wavebands may be used.Rcompliance with the maximum permissi-ble output in these wavebands isrequired.Ronly approved antenna positions may beused.

Excessive levels of electromagnetic radiationmay cause damage to your health and thehealth of others. Using an exterior antennatakes into account current scientific discus-sions relating to the possible health hazardsthat may result from electromagnetic fields.The following antenna positions may be usedif RF transmitters have been properly instal-led:

384 Vehicle electronicsTechnicaldata

approved antenna positions: Front roof area; Rear roof area= Rear fender? Trunk lid

i When installing an antenna on the frontroof area of vehicles with a sliding sunroof,observe the sweeping range of the roof.On the rear fenders, it is recommended toposition the antenna on the side of thevehicle closest to the center of the road.

Use the Technical Specification ISO/TS21609 when retrofitting RF transmitters(Road Vehicles - EMC guidelines for installa-tion of aftermarket radio frequency transmit-ting equipment). Observe the legal require-ments for retrofittings.If your vehicle has installations for two-wayradio equipment, use the power supply orantenna connections intended for use withthe basic wiring. Be sure to observe the man-ufacturer's additional instructions wheninstalling.Deviations with respect to wavebands, maxi-mum transmission outputs or antenna posi-tions must be approved by Mercedes-Benz.

The maximum transmission output (PEAK) atthe base of the antenna must not exceed thefollowing values:

Waveband Maximumtransmission

output

Short wave3 - 54 MHz

100 W

4 m waveband74 - 88 MHz

30 W

2 m waveband144 - 174 MHz

50 W

Trunked radio/Tetra380 - 460 MHz

10 W

70 cm waveband400 - 460 MHz

35 W

Mobile communications(2G/3G/4G)

10 W

The following can be used in the vehicle with-out restrictions:RRF transmitters with a maximum transmis-sion output of up to 100 mWRRF transmitters with transmission frequen-cies in the range 380-410 MHz and a max-imum transmission output of 2 W (Tetra)RMobile telephones (2G/3G/4G)There is no restriction for antenna positionson the outside of the vehicle for the followingwavebands:RTrunked radio/TetraR70 cm wavebandRMobile communications (2G/3G/4G)

Vehicle electronics 385

Technicaldata

Z

Identification plates

Vehicle identification plate with vehi-cle identification number (VIN)

X Open the front left-hand door.You will see vehicle identification plate:.

Example: vehicle identification plate (USA only); VIN= Vehicle model

Example: vehicle identification plate (Canada only); VIN= Paint code

i The data shown on the vehicle identifica-tion plate is used only as an example. Thisdata is different for every vehicle and candeviate from the data shown here. You canfind the data applicable to your vehicle onthe vehicle identification plate.

Vehicle identification plate with vehi-cle identification number (VIN)

X Slide the right-hand front seat to its rear-most position.

X Fold floor covering: upwards.You will see VIN;.

Engine number

: Emission control information plate,including the certification of both federaland Californian emissions standards

; Engine number (stamped into the crank-case)

= VIN (on the lower edge of the windshield)

386 Identification platesTechnicaldata

Service products and filling capaci-ties

Important safety notes

G WARNINGService products may be poisonous and haz-ardous to health. There is a risk of injury.Comply with instructions on the use, storageand disposal of service products on the labelsof the respective original containers. Alwaysstore service products sealed in their originalcontainers. Always keep service products outof the reach of children.

H Environmental noteDispose of service products in an environ-mentally responsible manner.

Service products include the following:RFuelsRLubricants (e.g. engine oil, transmission oil)RCoolantRBrake fluidRWindshield washer fluidRClimate control system refrigerantComponents and service products must bematched. Only use products recommendedby Mercedes-Benz. Damage which is causedby the use of products which have not beenrecommended is not covered by theMercedes-Benz warranty or goodwill ges-tures. They are listed in this Mercedes-BenzOperator'sManual in the appropriate section.Information on tested and approved productscan be obtained at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or on the Internet athttp://bevo.mercedes-benz.com.You can recognize service products approvedby Mercedes-Benz by the following inscrip-tion on the containers:RMB-Freigabe (e.g. MB-Freigabe 229.51)RMB Approval (e.g. MB Approval 229.51)Other designations or recommendations indi-cate a level of quality or a specification in

accordance with an MB Sheet Number (e.g.MB 229.5). They have not necessarily beenapproved by Mercedes-Benz.Other identifications, for example:R0 W-30R5 W-30R5 W-40

Fuel

Important safety notes

G WARNINGFuel is highly flammable. If you handle fuelincorrectly, there is a risk of fire and explo-sion.You must avoid fire, open flames, creatingsparks and smoking. Switch off the engineand, if applicable, the auxiliary heating beforerefueling.

G WARNINGFuel is poisonous and hazardous to health.There is a risk of injury.You must make sure that fuel does not comeinto contact with your skin, eyes or clothingand that it is not swallowed. Do not inhale fuelvapors. Keep fuel away from children.If you or others come into contact with fuel,observe the following:RWash away fuel from skin immediatelyusing soap and water.RIf fuel comes into contact with your eyes,immediately rinse them thoroughly withclean water. Seek medical assistance with-out delay.RIf fuel is swallowed, seek medical assis-tance without delay. Do not induce vomit-ing.RImmediately change out of clothing whichhas come into contact with fuel.

Service products and filling capacities 387

Technicaldata

Z

Tank capacityMissing values were not available at time ofgoing to print.

Model Total capa-city

AMG vehicles

All other models 21.1 US gal(80.0 l)

Model Of whichreserve

AMG vehicles

All other models Approx.2.4 US gal(9.0 l)

Gasoline

Fuel grade! Do not use diesel to refuel vehicles with agasoline engine. Do not switch on the igni-tion if you accidentally refuel with thewrong fuel. Otherwise, the fuel will enterthe fuel system. Even small amounts of thewrong fuel could result in damage to thefuel system and the engine. Notify a quali-fied specialist workshop and have the fueltank and fuel lines drained completely.

! Only refuel using unleaded premiumgrade gasoline with at least 91 AKI/95 RON.

! Only use the fuel recommended. Operat-ing the vehicle with other fuels can lead toengine failure.

! Do not use the following:RE85 (gasoline with 85% ethanol)RE100 (100% ethanol)RM15 (gasoline with 15% methanol)RM30 (gasoline with 30% methanol)RM85 (gasoline with 85% methanol)

RM100 (100% methanol)RGasoline with metalliferous additivesRDieselDo not mix such fuels with the fuel recom-mended for your vehicle. Do not use addi-tives. Otherwise, engine damage mayoccur. This does not include cleaning addi-tives for the removal and prevention of res-idue build-up. Gasoline may only be mixedwith cleaning additives recommended byMercedes-Benz; see "Additives". You canobtain further information from any author-ized Mercedes-Benz Center.

! To ensure the longevity and full perform-ance of the engine, only premium-gradeunleaded gasoline must be used.If standard unleaded gasoline is unavaila-ble and you have to refuel with unleadedgasoline of a lower grade, observe the fol-lowing precautions:ROnly fill the fuel tank to half full with reg-ular unleaded gasoline and fill the restwith premium-grade unleaded gasolineas soon as possible.RDo not drive at the maximum speed.RAvoid sudden acceleration and enginespeeds over 3,000 rpm.

Youwill usually find information about the fuelgrade on the pump. If you cannot find thelabel on the pump, ask the staff for assis-tance.

i For further information, consult a quali-fied specialist workshop or visithttp://www.mbusa.com (USA only).

i E10 fuel contains up to 10% bioethanol.Your vehicle is E10-compatible. You canrefuel your vehicle using E10 fuel.

As a temporarymeasure, if the recommendedfuel is not available, you may also use regularunleaded gasoline with an octane rating of87 AKI/91 RON. This may reduce engine per-formance and increase fuel consumption.Avoid driving at full throttle and sudden accel-

388 Service products and filling capacitiesTechnicaldata

eration. Never refuel using fuel with a lowerAKI.Information on refueling (Y page 168).

Additives! Operating the engine with fuel additivesadded later can lead to engine failure. Donot mix fuel additives with fuel. This doesnot include additives for the removal andprevention of residue buildup. gasolinemust only be mixed with additives recom-mended by Mercedes-Benz. Comply withthe instructions for use on the productlabel. More information about recommen-ded additives can be obtained from anyauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

Mercedes-Benz recommends that you usebranded fuels that have additives.The quality of the fuel available in some coun-tries may not be sufficient. Residue couldbuild up in the injection system as a result. Insuch cases, and in consultation with anauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center, the gaso-line may be mixed with the cleaning additiverecommended by Mercedes-Benz. You mustobserve the notes and mixing ratios specifiedon the container.

Engine oil

General notes

! Never use engine oil or an oil filter of aspecification other than is necessary to ful-fill the prescribed service intervals. Do notchange the engine oil or oil filter in order toachieve longer replacement intervals thanthose prescribed. You could otherwisecause engine damage or damage to theexhaust gas aftertreatment.Follow the instructions in the service inter-val display regarding the oil change. Other-wise, you may damage the engine and theexhaust gas aftertreatment.

When handling engine oil, observe the impor-tant safety notes on service products(Y page 387).The engine oils are matched to the perform-ance of Mercedes-Benz engines and serviceintervals. You should therefore only useengine oils and oil filters that are approved forvehicles with maintenance systems.For a list of approved engine oils and oil filters,consult an authorized Mercedes-Benz Cen-ter. Or visit the websitehttp://bevo.mercedes-benz.com.The table shows which engine oils have beenapproved for your vehicle.

Model MB Approval

All models 229.5

Use only SAE 0W-40 or SAE 5W-40 engine oilsfor AMG vehicles.

i MB approval is indicated on the oil con-tainers.

Filling capacitiesThe following values refer to an oil changeincluding the oil filter.

Model Capacity

AMG vehicles 9.0 US qt (8.5 l)

CLS 400CLS 400 4MATIC

6.9 US qt (6.5 l)

CLS 550CLS 550 4MATIC

8.5 US qt (8.0 l)

Additives

! Do not use any additives in the engine oil.This could damage the engine.

Service products and filling capacities 389

Technicaldata

Z

Engine oil viscosity

Viscosity describes the flow characteristicsof a fluid. If an engine oil has a high viscosity,this means that it is thick; a low viscositymeans that it is thin.Select an engine oil with an SAE classification(viscosity) suitable for the prevailing outsidetemperatures. The table shows you whichSAE classifications are to be used. The low-temperature characteristics of engine oilscan deteriorate significantly, e.g. as a resultof aging, soot and fuel deposits. It is thereforestrongly recommended that you carry out reg-ular oil changes using an approved engine oilwith the appropriate SAE classification.

Brake fluid

G WARNINGThe brake fluid constantly absorbs moisturefrom the air. This lowers the boiling point ofthe brake fluid. If the boiling point of the brakefluid is too low, vapor pockets may form in thebrake system when the brakes are appliedhard. This would impair braking efficiency.There is a risk of an accident.You should have the brake fluid renewed atthe specified intervals.

Comply with the important safety notes forservice products when handling brake fluid(Y page 387).The brake fluid change intervals can be foundin the Maintenance Booklet.

Only use brake fluid approved by Mercedes-Benz according to MB Approval 331.0.Information about approved brake fluid canbe obtained at any qualified specialist work-shop or on the Internet athttp://bevo.mercedes-benz.com.

i Have the brake fluid regularly replaced ata qualified specialist workshop and thereplacement confirmed in theMaintenanceBooklet.

Coolant

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf antifreeze comes into contact with hot com-ponents in the engine compartment, it mayignite. There is a risk of fire and injury.Let the engine cool down before you add anti-freeze.Make sure that antifreeze is not spillednext to the filler neck. Thoroughly clean theantifreeze from components before startingthe engine.

! Only add coolant that has been premixedwith the desired antifreeze protection. Youcould otherwise damage the engine.Further information on coolants can befound in the Mercedes-Benz Specificationsfor Service Products, MB BeVo 310.1, e.g.on the Internet athttp://bevo.mercedes-benz.com. Or con-tact a qualified specialist workshop.

! Always use a suitable coolant mixture,even in countries where high temperaturesprevail.Otherwise, the engine cooling system is notsufficiently protected from corrosion andoverheating.

i Have the coolant regularly replaced at aqualified specialist workshop and thereplacement confirmed in theMaintenanceBooklet.

390 Service products and filling capacitiesTechnicaldata

Complywith the important safety precautionsfor service products when handling coolant(Y page 387).The coolant is a mixture of water and anti-freeze/corrosion inhibitor. It performs thefollowing tasks:Rcorrosion protectionRantifreeze protectionRraising the boiling pointIf the coolant has antifreeze protection downto -35‡ (-37†), the boiling point of the cool-ant during operation is approximately 266 ‡(130 †).The antifreeze/corrosion inhibitor concentra-tion in the engine cooling system should:Rbe at least 50%. This will protect the enginecooling system against freezing down toapproximately -35 ‡ (-37 †).Rnot exceed 55% (antifreeze protectiondown to -49 ‡ [-45 †]). Otherwise, heatwill not be dissipated as effectively.

Mercedes-Benz recommends an antifreeze/corrosion inhibitor concentrate in accord-ance with MB Specifications for Service Prod-ucts 310.1.

i When the vehicle is first delivered, it is fil-led with a coolant mixture that ensuresadequate antifreeze and corrosion protec-tion.

i The coolant is checked with every main-tenance interval at a qualified specialistworkshop.

Filling capacities

Model Capacity

CLS 400CLS 400 4MATIC

Approx. 10.9 US qt(10.3 l)

CLS 550CLS 550 4MATIC

Approx. 11.5 US qt(10.9 l)

AMG vehicles Approx. 11.4 US qt(10.8 l)

Windshield washer system and head-lamp cleaning system

Important safety notes

G WARNINGWindshield washer concentrate could ignite ifit comes into contact with hot engine compo-nents or the exhaust system. There is a risk offire and injury.Make sure that no windshield washer con-centrate is spilled next to the filler neck.

! Only use washer fluid that is suitable forplastic lamp lenses, e.g. MB SummerFit orMB WinterFit. Unsuitable washer fluidcould damage the plastic lenses of theheadlamps.

! Do not add distilled or de-ionized water tothe washer fluid container. Otherwise, thelevel sensor may be damaged.

! Only MB SummerFit and MB WinterFitwasher fluid should be mixed together. Thespray nozzles may otherwise becomeblocked.

Comply with the important safety notes forservice products when handling washer fluid(Y page 387).At temperatures above freezing:X Fill the washer fluid reservoir with amixtureof water and windshield washer fluid, e.g.MB SummerFit.

Add 1 part MB SummerFit to 100 parts water.At temperatures below freezing:X Fill the washer fluid reservoir with amixtureof water and washer fluid, e.g. MB Winter-Fit.For the correct mixing ratio refer to theinformation on the antifreeze reservoir.

i Add windshield washer fluid, e.g. MBSummerFit or MB WinterFit, to the washerfluid all year round.

Service products and filling capacities 391

Technicaldata

Z

Climate control system refrigerant

Important safety notesThe climate control system of your vehicle isfilled with refrigerant R‑134a.The instruction label regarding the refrigeranttype used can be found on the radiator crossmember.

! Only the refrigerant R‑134a and the PAGoil approved by Mercedes-Benz may beused. The approved PAG oil may not bemixed with any other PAG oil that is notapproved for R-134a refrigerant. Other-wise, the climate control system may bedamaged.

Service work, such as topping up refrigerantor replacing components, may only be carriedout by a qualified specialist workshop. Allapplicable regulations must be adhered to,SAE standard J639 included.Always have work on the climate control sys-tem carried out at a qualified specialist work-shop.

Refrigerant instruction label

Example: refrigerant instruction label: Warning symbol; Refrigerant filling capacity= Applicable standards? PAG oil part numberA Type of refrigerant

Warning symbol: advises you about:Rpossible dangersRhaving service work carried out at a quali-fied specialist workshop

Filling capacitiesMissing values were not available at time ofgoing to print.

AMG vehicles Capacity

Refrigerant

PAG oil

All other models Capacity

Refrigerant 20.8 ± 0.4 oz(590 ± 10 g)

PAG oil 4.2 oz(120 g)

Vehicle data

General notesPlease note that for the specified vehicledata:Rthe heights specified may vary as a resultof:- tires- load- condition of the suspension- optional equipmentRoptional equipment reduces the maximumpayload.

392 Vehicle dataTechnicaldata

Dimensions and weights (CLS Coupe)

Model :: Opening height

AMG vehicles 71.1 in(1805 mm)

CLS 400CLS 400 4MATIC

70.7 in(1796 mm)

CLS 550CLS 550 4MATIC

70.3 in(1786 mm)

AMG vehicles

Vehicle length 195.6 in (4967mm)

Vehicle widthincluding exteriormirrors

81.7 in (2075 mm)

Vehicle height 56.3 in (1431 mm)

Wheelbase 113.1 in (2874mm)

Turning radius 36.9 ft (11.25 m)

Maximum roof load 220 lb (100 kg)

Maximum trunkload

220 lb (100 kg)

All models (exceptfor AMG vehicles)

Vehicle widthincluding exteriormirrors

81.7 in (2075 mm)

Wheelbase 113.1 in (2874mm)

Maximum roof load 220 lb (100 kg)

Maximum trunkload

220 lb (100 kg)

Model (except AMGvehicles)

Vehicle length

CLS 400CLS 400 4MATIC

194.4 in (4937mm)

CLS 550CLS 550 4MATIC

195.0 in (4952mm)

Model (except AMGvehicles)

Vehicle height

CLS 400CLS 400 4MATIC

56.1 in (1424 mm)

CLS 550CLS 550 4MATIC

55.8 in (1418 mm)

Model (except AMGvehicles)

Turning radius

CLS 400 36.7 ft (11.18 m)

CLS 400 4MATIC 37.8 ft (11.51 m)

CLS 550 36.8 ft (11.21 m)

CLS 550 4MATIC 37.8 ft (11.53 m)

Vehicle data 393

Technicaldata

Z

394

395

396